Merge branch 'identity_abe' into identity_oidc

7 files changed, 15061 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/doc/documentation/chapters/configuration.texi b/doc/documentation/chapters/configuration.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..286c72e7ab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/documentation/chapters/configuration.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+@node Configuration Handbook
+@chapter Configuration Handbook
+
+This chapter has yet to be written. It is intended to be about in-depth
+configuration of GNUnet.
diff --git a/doc/documentation/chapters/contributing.texi b/doc/documentation/chapters/contributing.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5844fb497f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/documentation/chapters/contributing.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,102 @@
+@node GNUnet Contributors Handbook
+@chapter GNUnet Contributors Handbook
+
+@menu
+* Contributing to GNUnet::
+* Licenses of contributions::
+* Copyright Assignment::
+* Contributing to the Reference Manual::
+@end menu
+
+@node Contributing to GNUnet
+@section Contributing to GNUnet
+
+@node Licenses of contributions
+@section Licenses of contributions
+
+GNUnet is a @uref{https://www.gnu.org/, GNU} package.
+All code contributions must thus be put under the
+@uref{https://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html, GNU Public License (GPL)}.
+All documentation should be put under FSF approved licenses
+(see @uref{https://www.gnu.org/copyleft/fdl.html, fdl}).
+
+By submitting documentation, translations, and other content to GNUnet
+you automatically grant the right to publish code under the
+GNU Public License and documentation under either or both the
+GNU Public License or the GNU Free Documentation License.
+When contributing to the GNUnet project, GNU standards and the
+@uref{https://www.gnu.org/philosophy/philosophy.html, GNU philosophy}
+should be adhered to.
+
+@cindex copyright assignment
+@node Copyright Assignment
+@section Copyright Assignment
+We require a formal copyright assignment for GNUnet contributors
+to GNUnet e.V.; nevertheless, we do allow pseudonymous contributions.
+By signing the copyright agreement and submitting your code (or
+documentation) to us, you agree to share the rights to your code
+with GNUnet e.V.; GNUnet e.V. receives non-exclusive ownership
+rights, and in particular is allowed to dual-license the code. You
+retain non-exclusive rights to your contributions, so you can also
+share your contributions freely with other projects.
+
+GNUnet e.V. will publish all accepted contributions under the GPLv3
+or any later version. The association may decide to publish
+contributions under additional licenses (dual-licensing).
+
+We do not intentionally remove your name from your contributions;
+however, due to extensive editing it is not always trivial to
+attribute contributors properly. If you find that you significantly
+contributed to a file (or the project as a whole) and are not listed
+in the respective authors file or section, please do let us know.
+
+@node Contributing to the Reference Manual
+@section Contributing to the Reference Manual
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item When writing documentation, please use
+@uref{https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Singular_they, gender-neutral wording}
+when referring to people, such as singular “they”, “their”, “them”, and so
+forth.
+
+@item Keep line length below 74 characters, except for URLs.
+URLs break in the PDF output when they contain linebreaks.
+
+@item Do not use tab characters (see chapter 2.1 texinfo manual)
+
+@item Use neutral language and third person perspective in the text
+
+@item So, when you refer to a user in general or addressing the user,
+refer to (1).
+@itemize @bullet
+@item Unsolved exceptions for canonical reasons: When refering to Alice,
+use "she". When refering to Bob, use "he". These are long established
+examples and they should either be replaced (avoid Alice and Bob
+examples when you can) or followed.
+@end itemize
+
+@c FIXME: This is questionable, it feels like bike shed painging to do
+@c this for several k lines. It only helps to jump between sentences in
+@c editors afaik.
+@c @item Use 2 spaces between sentences, so instead of:
+
+@c @example
+@c We do this and the other thing. This is done by foo.
+@c @end example
+
+@c Write:
+
+@c @example
+@c We do this and the other thing.  This is done by foo.
+@c @end example
+
+@item Use @@footnote@{@} instead of putting an @@*ref@{@} to the
+footnote on a collected footnote-page.
+In a 200+ pages handbook it's better to have footnotes accessible
+without having to skip over to the end.
+
+@item Avoid unnecessary footnotes, keep the text self-explanatory and
+in a simple language where possible/necessary.
+
+@end itemize
diff --git a/doc/documentation/chapters/developer.texi b/doc/documentation/chapters/developer.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..70fd7c7ebe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/documentation/chapters/developer.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,8341 @@
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node GNUnet Developer Handbook
+@chapter GNUnet Developer Handbook
+
+This book is intended to be an introduction for programmers that want to
+extend the GNUnet framework. GNUnet is more than a simple peer-to-peer
+application.
+
+For developers, GNUnet is:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item developed by a community that believes in the GNU philosophy
+@item Free Software (Free as in Freedom), licensed under the
+GNU General Public License
+@item A set of standards, including coding conventions and
+architectural rules
+@item A set of layered protocols, both specifying the communication
+between peers as well as the communication between components
+of a single peer
+@item A set of libraries with well-defined APIs suitable for
+writing extensions
+@end itemize
+
+In particular, the architecture specifies that a peer consists of many
+processes communicating via protocols. Processes can be written in almost
+any language.
+C and Java @footnote{As well as Guile} APIs exist for accessing existing
+services and for writing extensions.
+It is possible to write extensions in other languages by
+implementing the necessary IPC protocols.
+
+GNUnet can be extended and improved along many possible dimensions, and
+anyone interested in Free Software and Freedom-enhancing Networking is
+welcome to join the effort. This Developer Handbook attempts to provide
+an initial introduction to some of the key design choices and central
+components of the system.
+This part of the GNUNet documentation is far from complete,
+and we welcome informed contributions, be it in the form of
+new chapters, sections or insightful comments.
+
+@menu
+* Developer Introduction::
+* Code overview::
+* System Architecture::
+* Subsystem stability::
+* Naming conventions and coding style guide::
+* Build-system::
+* Developing extensions for GNUnet using the gnunet-ext template::
+* Writing testcases::
+* TESTING library::
+* Performance regression analysis with Gauger::
+* TESTBED Subsystem::
+* libgnunetutil::
+* Automatic Restart Manager (ARM)::
+* TRANSPORT Subsystem::
+* NAT library::
+* Distance-Vector plugin::
+* SMTP plugin::
+* Bluetooth plugin::
+* WLAN plugin::
+* ATS Subsystem::
+* CORE Subsystem::
+* CADET Subsystem::
+* NSE Subsystem::
+* HOSTLIST Subsystem::
+* IDENTITY Subsystem::
+* NAMESTORE Subsystem::
+* PEERINFO Subsystem::
+* PEERSTORE Subsystem::
+* SET Subsystem::
+* STATISTICS Subsystem::
+* Distributed Hash Table (DHT)::
+* GNU Name System (GNS)::
+* GNS Namecache::
+* REVOCATION Subsystem::
+* File-sharing (FS) Subsystem::
+* REGEX Subsystem::
+@end menu
+
+@node Developer Introduction
+@section Developer Introduction
+
+This Developer Handbook is intended as first introduction to GNUnet for
+new developers that want to extend the GNUnet framework. After the
+introduction, each of the GNUnet subsystems (directories in the
+@file{src/} tree) is (supposed to be) covered in its own chapter. In
+addition to this documentation, GNUnet developers should be aware of the
+services available on the GNUnet server to them.
+
+New developers can have a look a the GNUnet tutorials for C and java
+available in the @file{src/} directory of the repository or under the
+following links:
+
+@c ** FIXME: Link to files in source, not online.
+@c ** FIXME: Where is the Java tutorial?
+@itemize @bullet
+@item @uref{https://gnunet.org/git/gnunet.git/plain/doc/gnunet-c-tutorial.pdf, GNUnet C tutorial}
+@item GNUnet Java tutorial
+@end itemize
+
+In addition to the GNUnet Reference Documentation you are reading,
+the GNUnet server at @uref{https://gnunet.org} contains
+various resources for GNUnet developers and those
+who aspire to become regular contributors.
+They are all conveniently reachable via the "Developer"
+entry in the navigation menu. Some additional tools (such as static
+analysis reports) require a special developer access to perform certain
+operations. If you want (or require) access, you should contact
+@uref{http://grothoff.org/christian/, Christian Grothoff},
+GNUnet's maintainer.
+
+The public subsystems on the GNUnet server that help developers are:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item The version control system (git) keeps our code and enables
+distributed development.
+It is pubclicly accessible at @uref{https://gnunet.org/git/}.
+Only developers with write access can commit code, everyone else is
+encouraged to submit patches to the
+@uref{https://lists.gnu.org/mailman/listinfo/gnunet-developers, GNUnet-developers mailinglist}.
+
+@item The bugtracking system (Mantis).
+We use it to track feature requests, open bug reports and their
+resolutions.
+It can be accessed at @uref{https://gnunet.org/bugs/}.
+Anyone can report bugs, but only developers can claim to have fixed them.
+
+@item Our site installation of the
+CI@footnote{Continuous Integration} system @code{Buildbot} is used
+to check GNUnet builds automatically on a range of platforms.
+The web interface of this CI is exposed at
+@uref{https://gnunet.org/buildbot/}.
+Builds are triggered automatically 30 minutes after the last commit to
+our repository was made.
+
+@item The current quality of our automated test suite is assessed using
+Code coverage analysis. This analysis is run daily; however the webpage
+is only updated if all automated tests pass at that time. Testcases that
+improve our code coverage are always welcome.
+
+@item We try to automatically find bugs using a static analysis scan.
+This scan is run daily; however the webpage is only updated if all
+automated tests pass at the time. Note that not everything that is
+flagged by the analysis is a bug, sometimes even good code can be marked
+as possibly problematic. Nevertheless, developers are encouraged to at
+least be aware of all issues in their code that are listed.
+
+@item We use Gauger for automatic performance regression visualization.
+Details on how to use Gauger are here.
+
+@item We use @uref{http://junit.org/, junit} to automatically test
+@command{gnunet-java}.
+Automatically generated, current reports on the test suite are here.
+
+@item We use Cobertura to generate test coverage reports for gnunet-java.
+Current reports on test coverage are here.
+
+@end itemize
+
+
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@menu
+* Project overview::
+@end menu
+
+@node Project overview
+@subsection Project overview
+
+The GNUnet project consists at this point of several sub-projects. This
+section is supposed to give an initial overview about the various
+sub-projects. Note that this description also lists projects that are far
+from complete, including even those that have literally not a single line
+of code in them yet.
+
+GNUnet sub-projects in order of likely relevance are currently:
+
+@table @asis
+
+@item @command{gnunet}
+Core of the P2P framework, including file-sharing, VPN and
+chat applications; this is what the Developer Handbook covers mostly
+@item @command{gnunet-gtk}
+Gtk+-based user interfaces, including:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item @command{gnunet-fs-gtk} (file-sharing),
+@item @command{gnunet-statistics-gtk} (statistics over time),
+@item @command{gnunet-peerinfo-gtk}
+(information about current connections and known peers),
+@item @command{gnunet-chat-gtk} (chat GUI) and
+@item @command{gnunet-setup} (setup tool for "everything")
+@end itemize
+
+@item @command{gnunet-fuse}
+Mounting directories shared via GNUnet's file-sharing
+on GNU/Linux distributions
+@item @command{gnunet-update}
+Installation and update tool
+@item @command{gnunet-ext}
+Template for starting 'external' GNUnet projects
+@item @command{gnunet-java}
+Java APIs for writing GNUnet services and applications
+@c ** FIXME: Point to new website repository once we have it:
+@c ** @item svn/gnunet-www/ Code and media helping drive the GNUnet
+@c website
+@item @command{eclectic}
+Code to run GNUnet nodes on testbeds for research, development,
+testing and evaluation
+@c ** FIXME: Solve the status and location of gnunet-qt
+@item @command{gnunet-qt}
+Qt-based GNUnet GUI (is it depreacated?)
+@item @command{gnunet-cocoa}
+cocoa-based GNUnet GUI (is it depreacated?)
+@item @command{gnunet-guile}
+
+@end table
+
+We are also working on various supporting libraries and tools:
+@c ** FIXME: What about gauger, and what about libmwmodem?
+
+@table @asis
+@item @command{libextractor}
+GNU libextractor (meta data extraction)
+@item @command{libmicrohttpd}
+GNU libmicrohttpd (embedded HTTP(S) server library)
+@item @command{gauger}
+Tool for performance regression analysis
+@item @command{monkey}
+Tool for automated debugging of distributed systems
+@item @command{libmwmodem}
+Library for accessing satellite connection quality
+reports
+@item @command{libgnurl}
+gnURL (feature-restricted variant of cURL/libcurl)
+@end table
+
+Finally, there are various external projects (see links for a list of
+those that have a public website) which build on top of the GNUnet
+framework.
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node Code overview
+@section Code overview
+
+This section gives a brief overview of the GNUnet source code.
+Specifically, we sketch the function of each of the subdirectories in
+the @file{gnunet/src/} directory. The order given is roughly bottom-up
+(in terms of the layers of the system).
+
+@table @asis
+@item @file{util/} --- libgnunetutil
+Library with general utility functions, all
+GNUnet binaries link against this library. Anything from memory
+allocation and data structures to cryptography and inter-process
+communication. The goal is to provide an OS-independent interface and
+more 'secure' or convenient implementations of commonly used primitives.
+The API is spread over more than a dozen headers, developers should study
+those closely to avoid duplicating existing functions.
+@pxref{libgnunetutil}.
+@item @file{hello/} --- libgnunethello
+HELLO messages are used to
+describe under which addresses a peer can be reached (for example,
+protocol, IP, port). This library manages parsing and generating of HELLO
+messages.
+@item @file{block/} --- libgnunetblock
+The DHT and other components of GNUnet
+store information in units called 'blocks'. Each block has a type and the
+type defines a particular format and how that binary format is to be
+linked to a hash code (the key for the DHT and for databases). The block
+library is a wapper around block plugins which provide the necessary
+functions for each block type.
+@item @file{statistics/} --- statistics service
+The statistics service enables associating
+values (of type uint64_t) with a componenet name and a string. The main
+uses is debugging (counting events), performance tracking and user
+entertainment (what did my peer do today?).
+@item @file{arm/} --- Automatic Restart Manager (ARM)
+The automatic-restart-manager (ARM) service
+is the GNUnet master service. Its role is to start gnunet-services, to
+re-start them when they crashed and finally to shut down the system when
+requested.
+@item @file{peerinfo/} --- peerinfo service
+The peerinfo service keeps track of which peers are known
+to the local peer and also tracks the validated addresses for each peer
+(in the form of a HELLO message) for each of those peers. The peer is not
+necessarily connected to all peers known to the peerinfo service.
+Peerinfo provides persistent storage for peer identities --- peers are
+not forgotten just because of a system restart.
+@item @file{datacache/} --- libgnunetdatacache
+The datacache library provides (temporary) block storage for the DHT.
+Existing plugins can store blocks in Sqlite, Postgres or MySQL databases.
+All data stored in the cache is lost when the peer is stopped or
+restarted (datacache uses temporary tables).
+@item @file{datastore/} --- datastore service
+The datastore service stores file-sharing blocks in
+databases for extended periods of time. In contrast to the datacache, data
+is not lost when peers restart. However, quota restrictions may still
+cause old, expired or low-priority data to be eventually discarded.
+Existing plugins can store blocks in Sqlite, Postgres or MySQL databases.
+@item @file{template/} --- service template
+Template for writing a new service. Does nothing.
+@item @file{ats/} --- Automatic Transport Selection
+The automatic transport selection (ATS) service
+is responsible for deciding which address (i.e.
+which transport plugin) should be used for communication with other peers,
+and at what bandwidth.
+@item @file{nat/} --- libgnunetnat
+Library that provides basic functions for NAT traversal.
+The library supports NAT traversal with
+manual hole-punching by the user, UPnP and ICMP-based autonomous NAT
+traversal. The library also includes an API for testing if the current
+configuration works and the @code{gnunet-nat-server} which provides an
+external service to test the local configuration.
+@item @file{fragmentation/} --- libgnunetfragmentation
+Some transports (UDP and WLAN, mostly) have restrictions on the maximum
+transfer unit (MTU) for packets. The fragmentation library can be used to
+break larger packets into chunks of at most 1k and transmit the resulting
+fragments reliabily (with acknowledgement, retransmission, timeouts,
+etc.).
+@item @file{transport/} --- transport service
+The transport service is responsible for managing the
+basic P2P communication. It uses plugins to support P2P communication
+over TCP, UDP, HTTP, HTTPS and other protocols.The transport service
+validates peer addresses, enforces bandwidth restrictions, limits the
+total number of connections and enforces connectivity restrictions (i.e.
+friends-only).
+@item @file{peerinfo-tool/} --- gnunet-peerinfo
+This directory contains the gnunet-peerinfo binary which can be used to
+inspect the peers and HELLOs known to the peerinfo service.
+@item @file{core/}
+The core service is responsible for establishing encrypted, authenticated
+connections with other peers, encrypting and decrypting messages and
+forwarding messages to higher-level services that are interested in them.
+@item @file{testing/} --- libgnunettesting
+The testing library allows starting (and stopping) peers
+for writing testcases.
+It also supports automatic generation of configurations for peers
+ensuring that the ports and paths are disjoint. libgnunettesting is also
+the foundation for the testbed service
+@item @file{testbed/} --- testbed service
+The testbed service is used for creating small or large scale deployments
+of GNUnet peers for evaluation of protocols.
+It facilitates peer depolyments on multiple
+hosts (for example, in a cluster) and establishing varous network
+topologies (both underlay and overlay).
+@item @file{nse/} --- Network Size Estimation
+The network size estimation (NSE) service
+implements a protocol for (securely) estimating the current size of the
+P2P network.
+@item @file{dht/} --- distributed hash table
+The distributed hash table (DHT) service provides a
+distributed implementation of a hash table to store blocks under hash
+keys in the P2P network.
+@item @file{hostlist/} --- hostlist service
+The hostlist service allows learning about
+other peers in the network by downloading HELLO messages from an HTTP
+server, can be configured to run such an HTTP server and also implements
+a P2P protocol to advertise and automatically learn about other peers
+that offer a public hostlist server.
+@item @file{topology/} --- topology service
+The topology service is responsible for
+maintaining the mesh topology. It tries to maintain connections to friends
+(depending on the configuration) and also tries to ensure that the peer
+has a decent number of active connections at all times. If necessary, new
+connections are added. All peers should run the topology service,
+otherwise they may end up not being connected to any other peer (unless
+some other service ensures that core establishes the required
+connections). The topology service also tells the transport service which
+connections are permitted (for friend-to-friend networking)
+@item @file{fs/} --- file-sharing
+The file-sharing (FS) service implements GNUnet's
+file-sharing application. Both anonymous file-sharing (using gap) and
+non-anonymous file-sharing (using dht) are supported.
+@item @file{cadet/} --- cadet service
+The CADET service provides a general-purpose routing abstraction to create
+end-to-end encrypted tunnels in mesh networks. We wrote a paper
+documenting key aspects of the design.
+@item @file{tun/} --- libgnunettun
+Library for building IPv4, IPv6 packets and creating
+checksums for UDP, TCP and ICMP packets. The header
+defines C structs for common Internet packet formats and in particular
+structs for interacting with TUN (virtual network) interfaces.
+@item @file{mysql/} --- libgnunetmysql
+Library for creating and executing prepared MySQL
+statements and to manage the connection to the MySQL database.
+Essentially a lightweight wrapper for the interaction between GNUnet
+components and libmysqlclient.
+@item @file{dns/}
+Service that allows intercepting and modifying DNS requests of
+the local machine. Currently used for IPv4-IPv6 protocol translation
+(DNS-ALG) as implemented by "pt/" and for the GNUnet naming system. The
+service can also be configured to offer an exit service for DNS traffic.
+@item @file{vpn/} --- VPN service
+The virtual public network (VPN) service provides a virtual
+tunnel interface (VTUN) for IP routing over GNUnet.
+Needs some other peers to run an "exit" service to work.
+Can be activated using the "gnunet-vpn" tool or integrated with DNS using
+the "pt" daemon.
+@item @file{exit/}
+Daemon to allow traffic from the VPN to exit this
+peer to the Internet or to specific IP-based services of the local peer.
+Currently, an exit service can only be restricted to IPv4 or IPv6, not to
+specific ports and or IP address ranges. If this is not acceptable,
+additional firewall rules must be added manually. exit currently only
+works for normal UDP, TCP and ICMP traffic; DNS queries need to leave the
+system via a DNS service.
+@item @file{pt/}
+protocol translation daemon. This daemon enables 4-to-6,
+6-to-4, 4-over-6 or 6-over-4 transitions for the local system. It
+essentially uses "DNS" to intercept DNS replies and then maps results to
+those offered by the VPN, which then sends them using mesh to some daemon
+offering an appropriate exit service.
+@item @file{identity/}
+Management of egos (alter egos) of a user; identities are
+essentially named ECC private keys and used for zones in the GNU name
+system and for namespaces in file-sharing, but might find other uses later
+@item @file{revocation/}
+Key revocation service, can be used to revoke the
+private key of an identity if it has been compromised
+@item @file{namecache/}
+Cache for resolution results for the GNU name system;
+data is encrypted and can be shared among users,
+loss of the data should ideally only result in a
+performance degradation (persistence not required)
+@item @file{namestore/}
+Database for the GNU name system with per-user private information,
+persistence required
+@item @file{gns/}
+GNU name system, a GNU approach to DNS and PKI.
+@item @file{dv/}
+A plugin for distance-vector (DV)-based routing.
+DV consists of a service and a transport plugin to provide peers
+with the illusion of a direct P2P connection for connections
+that use multiple (typically up to 3) hops in the actual underlay network.
+@item @file{regex/}
+Service for the (distributed) evaluation of regular expressions.
+@item @file{scalarproduct/}
+The scalar product service offers an API to perform a secure multiparty
+computation which calculates a scalar product between two peers
+without exposing the private input vectors of the peers to each other.
+@item @file{consensus/}
+The consensus service will allow a set of peers to agree
+on a set of values via a distributed set union computation.
+@item @file{rest/}
+The rest API allows access to GNUnet services using RESTful interaction.
+The services provide plugins that can exposed by the rest server.
+@item @file{experimentation/}
+The experimentation daemon coordinates distributed
+experimentation to evaluate transport and ATS properties.
+@end table
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node System Architecture
+@section System Architecture
+
+GNUnet developers like LEGOs. The blocks are indestructible, can be
+stacked together to construct complex buildings and it is generally easy
+to swap one block for a different one that has the same shape. GNUnet's
+architecture is based on LEGOs:
+
+@c images here
+
+This chapter documents the GNUnet LEGO system, also known as GNUnet's
+system architecture.
+
+The most common GNUnet component is a service. Services offer an API (or
+several, depending on what you count as "an API") which is implemented as
+a library. The library communicates with the main process of the service
+using a service-specific network protocol. The main process of the service
+typically doesn't fully provide everything that is needed --- it has holes
+to be filled by APIs to other services.
+
+A special kind of component in GNUnet are user interfaces and daemons.
+Like services, they have holes to be filled by APIs of other services.
+Unlike services, daemons do not implement their own network protocol and
+they have no API:
+
+The GNUnet system provides a range of services, daemons and user
+interfaces, which are then combined into a layered GNUnet instance (also
+known as a peer).
+
+Note that while it is generally possible to swap one service for another
+compatible service, there is often only one implementation. However,
+during development we often have a "new" version of a service in parallel
+with an "old" version. While the "new" version is not working, developers
+working on other parts of the service can continue their development by
+simply using the "old" service. Alternative design ideas can also be
+easily investigated by swapping out individual components. This is
+typically achieved by simply changing the name of the "BINARY" in the
+respective configuration section.
+
+Key properties of GNUnet services are that they must be separate
+processes and that they must protect themselves by applying tight error
+checking against the network protocol they implement (thereby achieving a
+certain degree of robustness).
+
+On the other hand, the APIs are implemented to tolerate failures of the
+service, isolating their host process from errors by the service. If the
+service process crashes, other services and daemons around it should not
+also fail, but instead wait for the service process to be restarted by
+ARM.
+
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node Subsystem stability
+@section Subsystem stability
+
+This section documents the current stability of the various GNUnet
+subsystems. Stability here describes the expected degree of compatibility
+with future versions of GNUnet. For each subsystem we distinguish between
+compatibility on the P2P network level (communication protocol between
+peers), the IPC level (communication between the service and the service
+library) and the API level (stability of the API). P2P compatibility is
+relevant in terms of which applications are likely going to be able to
+communicate with future versions of the network. IPC communication is
+relevant for the implementation of language bindings that re-implement the
+IPC messages. Finally, API compatibility is relevant to developers that
+hope to be able to avoid changes to applications build on top of the APIs
+of the framework.
+
+The following table summarizes our current view of the stability of the
+respective protocols or APIs:
+
+@multitable @columnfractions .20 .20 .20 .20
+@headitem Subsystem @tab P2P @tab IPC @tab C API
+@item util @tab n/a @tab n/a @tab stable
+@item arm @tab n/a @tab stable @tab stable
+@item ats @tab n/a @tab unstable @tab testing
+@item block @tab n/a @tab n/a @tab stable
+@item cadet @tab testing @tab testing @tab testing
+@item consensus @tab experimental @tab experimental @tab experimental
+@item core @tab stable @tab stable @tab stable
+@item datacache @tab n/a @tab n/a @tab stable
+@item datastore @tab n/a @tab stable @tab stable
+@item dht @tab stable @tab stable @tab stable
+@item dns @tab stable @tab stable @tab stable
+@item dv @tab testing @tab testing @tab n/a
+@item exit @tab testing @tab n/a @tab n/a
+@item fragmentation @tab stable @tab n/a @tab stable
+@item fs @tab stable @tab stable @tab stable
+@item gns @tab stable @tab stable @tab stable
+@item hello @tab n/a @tab n/a @tab testing
+@item hostlist @tab stable @tab stable @tab n/a
+@item identity @tab stable @tab stable @tab n/a
+@item multicast @tab experimental @tab experimental @tab experimental
+@item mysql @tab stable @tab n/a @tab stable
+@item namestore @tab n/a @tab stable @tab stable
+@item nat @tab n/a @tab n/a @tab stable
+@item nse @tab stable @tab stable @tab stable
+@item peerinfo @tab n/a @tab stable @tab stable
+@item psyc @tab experimental @tab experimental @tab experimental
+@item pt @tab n/a @tab n/a @tab n/a
+@item regex @tab stable @tab stable @tab stable
+@item revocation @tab stable @tab stable @tab stable
+@item social @tab experimental @tab experimental @tab experimental
+@item statistics @tab n/a @tab stable @tab stable
+@item testbed @tab n/a @tab testing @tab testing
+@item testing @tab n/a @tab n/a @tab testing
+@item topology @tab n/a @tab n/a @tab n/a
+@item transport @tab stable @tab stable @tab stable
+@item tun @tab n/a @tab n/a @tab stable
+@item vpn @tab testing @tab n/a @tab n/a
+@end multitable
+
+Here is a rough explanation of the values:
+
+@table @samp
+@item stable
+No incompatible changes are planned at this time; for IPC/APIs, if
+there are incompatible changes, they will be minor and might only require
+minimal changes to existing code; for P2P, changes will be avoided if at
+all possible for the 0.10.x-series
+
+@item testing
+No incompatible changes are
+planned at this time, but the code is still known to be in flux; so while
+we have no concrete plans, our expectation is that there will still be
+minor modifications; for P2P, changes will likely be extensions that
+should not break existing code
+
+@item unstable
+Changes are planned and will happen; however, they
+will not be totally radical and the result should still resemble what is
+there now; nevertheless, anticipated changes will break protocol/API
+compatibility
+
+@item experimental
+Changes are planned and the result may look nothing like
+what the API/protocol looks like today
+
+@item unknown
+Someone should think about where this subsystem headed
+
+@item n/a
+This subsystem does not have an API/IPC-protocol/P2P-protocol
+@end table
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node Naming conventions and coding style guide
+@section Naming conventions and coding style guide
+
+Here you can find some rules to help you write code for GNUnet.
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@menu
+* Naming conventions::
+* Coding style::
+@end menu
+
+@node Naming conventions
+@subsection Naming conventions
+
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@menu
+* include files::
+* binaries::
+* logging::
+* configuration::
+* exported symbols::
+* private (library-internal) symbols (including structs and macros)::
+* testcases::
+* performance tests::
+* src/ directories::
+@end menu
+
+@node include files
+@subsubsection include files
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item _lib: library without need for a process
+@item _service: library that needs a service process
+@item _plugin: plugin definition
+@item _protocol: structs used in network protocol
+@item exceptions:
+@itemize @bullet
+@item gnunet_config.h --- generated
+@item platform.h --- first included
+@item plibc.h --- external library
+@item gnunet_common.h --- fundamental routines
+@item gnunet_directories.h --- generated
+@item gettext.h --- external library
+@end itemize
+@end itemize
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node binaries
+@subsubsection binaries
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item gnunet-service-xxx: service process (has listen socket)
+@item gnunet-daemon-xxx: daemon process (no listen socket)
+@item gnunet-helper-xxx[-yyy]: SUID helper for module xxx
+@item gnunet-yyy: command-line tool for end-users
+@item libgnunet_plugin_xxx_yyy.so: plugin for API xxx
+@item libgnunetxxx.so: library for API xxx
+@end itemize
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node logging
+@subsubsection logging
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item services and daemons use their directory name in
+@code{GNUNET_log_setup} (i.e. 'core') and log using
+plain 'GNUNET_log'.
+@item command-line tools use their full name in
+@code{GNUNET_log_setup} (i.e. 'gnunet-publish') and log using
+plain 'GNUNET_log'.
+@item service access libraries log using
+'@code{GNUNET_log_from}' and use '@code{DIRNAME-api}' for the
+component (i.e. 'core-api')
+@item pure libraries (without associated service) use
+'@code{GNUNET_log_from}' with the component set to their
+library name (without lib or '@file{.so}'),
+which should also be their directory name (i.e. '@file{nat}')
+@item plugins should use '@code{GNUNET_log_from}'
+with the directory name and the plugin name combined to produce
+the component name (i.e. 'transport-tcp').
+@item logging should be unified per-file by defining a
+@code{LOG} macro with the appropriate arguments,
+along these lines:
+
+@example
+#define LOG(kind,...)
+GNUNET_log_from (kind, "example-api",__VA_ARGS__)
+@end example
+
+@end itemize
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node configuration
+@subsubsection configuration
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item paths (that are substituted in all filenames) are in PATHS
+(have as few as possible)
+@item all options for a particular module (@file{src/MODULE})
+are under @code{[MODULE]}
+@item options for a plugin of a module
+are under @code{[MODULE-PLUGINNAME]}
+@end itemize
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node exported symbols
+@subsubsection exported symbols
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item must start with @code{GNUNET_modulename_} and be defined in
+@file{modulename.c}
+@item exceptions: those defined in @file{gnunet_common.h}
+@end itemize
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node private (library-internal) symbols (including structs and macros)
+@subsubsection private (library-internal) symbols (including structs and macros)
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item must NOT start with any prefix
+@item must not be exported in a way that linkers could use them or@ other
+libraries might see them via headers; they must be either
+declared/defined in C source files or in headers that are in the
+respective directory under @file{src/modulename/} and NEVER be declared
+in @file{src/include/}.
+@end itemize
+
+@node testcases
+@subsubsection testcases
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item must be called @file{test_module-under-test_case-description.c}
+@item "case-description" maybe omitted if there is only one test
+@end itemize
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node performance tests
+@subsubsection performance tests
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item must be called @file{perf_module-under-test_case-description.c}
+@item "case-description" maybe omitted if there is only one performance
+test
+@item Must only be run if @code{HAVE_BENCHMARKS} is satisfied
+@end itemize
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node src/ directories
+@subsubsection src/ directories
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item gnunet-NAME: end-user applications (i.e., gnunet-search, gnunet-arm)
+@item gnunet-service-NAME: service processes with accessor library (i.e.,
+gnunet-service-arm)
+@item libgnunetNAME: accessor library (_service.h-header) or standalone
+library (_lib.h-header)
+@item gnunet-daemon-NAME: daemon process without accessor library (i.e.,
+gnunet-daemon-hostlist) and no GNUnet management port
+@item libgnunet_plugin_DIR_NAME: loadable plugins (i.e.,
+libgnunet_plugin_transport_tcp)
+@end itemize
+
+@cindex Coding style
+@node Coding style
+@subsection Coding style
+
+@c XXX: Adjust examples to GNU Standards!
+@itemize @bullet
+@item We follow the GNU Coding Standards (@pxref{Top, The GNU Coding Standards,, standards, The GNU Coding Standards});
+@item Indentation is done with spaces, two per level, no tabs;
+@item C99 struct initialization is fine;
+@item declare only one variable per line, for example:
+
+@noindent
+instead of
+
+@example
+int i,j;
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+write:
+
+@example
+int i;
+int j;
+@end example
+
+@c TODO: include actual example from a file in source
+
+@noindent
+This helps keep diffs small and forces developers to think precisely about
+the type of every variable.
+Note that @code{char *} is different from @code{const char*} and
+@code{int} is different from @code{unsigned int} or @code{uint32_t}.
+Each variable type should be chosen with care.
+
+@item While @code{goto} should generally be avoided, having a
+@code{goto} to the end of a function to a block of clean up
+statements (free, close, etc.) can be acceptable.
+
+@item Conditions should be written with constants on the left (to avoid
+accidental assignment) and with the 'true' target being either the
+'error' case or the significantly simpler continuation. For example:
+
+@example
+if (0 != stat ("filename," &sbuf)) @{
+  error();
+ @}
+ else @{
+   /* handle normal case here */
+ @}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+instead of
+
+@example
+if (stat ("filename," &sbuf) == 0) @{
+  /* handle normal case here */
+ @} else @{
+  error();
+ @}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+If possible, the error clause should be terminated with a 'return' (or
+'goto' to some cleanup routine) and in this case, the 'else' clause
+should be omitted:
+
+@example
+if (0 != stat ("filename," &sbuf)) @{
+  error();
+  return;
+ @}
+/* handle normal case here */
+@end example
+
+This serves to avoid deep nesting. The 'constants on the left' rule
+applies to all constants (including. @code{GNUNET_SCHEDULER_NO_TASK}),
+NULL, and enums). With the two above rules (constants on left, errors in
+'true' branch), there is only one way to write most branches correctly.
+
+@item Combined assignments and tests are allowed if they do not hinder
+code clarity. For example, one can write:
+
+@example
+if (NULL == (value = lookup_function())) @{
+  error();
+  return;
+ @}
+@end example
+
+@item Use @code{break} and @code{continue} wherever possible to avoid
+deep(er) nesting. Thus, we would write:
+
+@example
+next = head;
+while (NULL != (pos = next)) @{
+  next = pos->next;
+  if (! should_free (pos))
+    continue;
+  GNUNET_CONTAINER_DLL_remove (head, tail, pos);
+  GNUNET_free (pos);
+ @}
+@end example
+
+instead of
+
+@example
+next = head; while (NULL != (pos = next)) @{
+  next = pos->next;
+  if (should_free (pos)) @{
+    /* unnecessary nesting! */
+    GNUNET_CONTAINER_DLL_remove (head, tail, pos);
+    GNUNET_free (pos);
+   @}
+  @}
+@end example
+
+@item We primarily use @code{for} and @code{while} loops.
+A @code{while} loop is used if the method for advancing in the loop is
+not a straightforward increment operation. In particular, we use:
+
+@example
+next = head;
+while (NULL != (pos = next))
+@{
+  next = pos->next;
+  if (! should_free (pos))
+    continue;
+  GNUNET_CONTAINER_DLL_remove (head, tail, pos);
+  GNUNET_free (pos);
+@}
+@end example
+
+to free entries in a list (as the iteration changes the structure of the
+list due to the free; the equivalent @code{for} loop does no longer
+follow the simple @code{for} paradigm of @code{for(INIT;TEST;INC)}).
+However, for loops that do follow the simple @code{for} paradigm we do
+use @code{for}, even if it involves linked lists:
+
+@example
+/* simple iteration over a linked list */
+for (pos = head;
+     NULL != pos;
+     pos = pos->next)
+@{
+   use (pos);
+@}
+@end example
+
+
+@item The first argument to all higher-order functions in GNUnet must be
+declared to be of type @code{void *} and is reserved for a closure. We do
+not use inner functions, as trampolines would conflict with setups that
+use non-executable stacks.
+The first statement in a higher-order function, which unusually should
+be part of the variable declarations, should assign the
+@code{cls} argument to the precise expected type. For example:
+
+@example
+int callback (void *cls, char *args) @{
+  struct Foo *foo = cls;
+  int other_variables;
+
+   /* rest of function */
+@}
+@end example
+
+
+@item It is good practice to write complex @code{if} expressions instead
+of using deeply nested @code{if} statements. However, except for addition
+and multiplication, all operators should use parens. This is fine:
+
+@example
+if ( (1 == foo) || ((0 == bar) && (x != y)) )
+  return x;
+@end example
+
+
+However, this is not:
+
+@example
+if (1 == foo)
+  return x;
+if (0 == bar && x != y)
+  return x;
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Note that splitting the @code{if} statement above is debateable as the
+@code{return x} is a very trivial statement. However, once the logic after
+the branch becomes more complicated (and is still identical), the "or"
+formulation should be used for sure.
+
+@item There should be two empty lines between the end of the function and
+the comments describing the following function. There should be a single
+empty line after the initial variable declarations of a function. If a
+function has no local variables, there should be no initial empty line. If
+a long function consists of several complex steps, those steps might be
+separated by an empty line (possibly followed by a comment describing the
+following step). The code should not contain empty lines in arbitrary
+places; if in doubt, it is likely better to NOT have an empty line (this
+way, more code will fit on the screen).
+@end itemize
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node Build-system
+@section Build-system
+
+If you have code that is likely not to compile or build rules you might
+want to not trigger for most developers, use @code{if HAVE_EXPERIMENTAL}
+in your @file{Makefile.am}.
+Then it is OK to (temporarily) add non-compiling (or known-to-not-port)
+code.
+
+If you want to compile all testcases but NOT run them, run configure with
+the @code{--enable-test-suppression} option.
+
+If you want to run all testcases, including those that take a while, run
+configure with the @code{--enable-expensive-testcases} option.
+
+If you want to compile and run benchmarks, run configure with the
+@code{--enable-benchmarks} option.
+
+If you want to obtain code coverage results, run configure with the
+@code{--enable-coverage} option and run the @file{coverage.sh} script in
+the @file{contrib/} directory.
+
+@cindex gnunet-ext
+@node Developing extensions for GNUnet using the gnunet-ext template
+@section Developing extensions for GNUnet using the gnunet-ext template
+
+For developers who want to write extensions for GNUnet we provide the
+gnunet-ext template to provide an easy to use skeleton.
+
+gnunet-ext contains the build environment and template files for the
+development of GNUnet services, command line tools, APIs and tests.
+
+First of all you have to obtain gnunet-ext from git:
+
+@example
+git clone https://gnunet.org/git/gnunet-ext.git
+@end example
+
+The next step is to bootstrap and configure it. For configure you have to
+provide the path containing GNUnet with
+@code{--with-gnunet=/path/to/gnunet} and the prefix where you want the
+install the extension using @code{--prefix=/path/to/install}:
+
+@example
+./bootstrap
+./configure --prefix=/path/to/install --with-gnunet=/path/to/gnunet
+@end example
+
+When your GNUnet installation is not included in the default linker search
+path, you have to add @code{/path/to/gnunet} to the file
+@file{/etc/ld.so.conf} and run @code{ldconfig} or your add it to the
+environmental variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH} by using
+
+@example
+export LD_LIBRARY_PATH=/path/to/gnunet/lib
+@end example
+
+@cindex writing testcases
+@node Writing testcases
+@section Writing testcases
+
+Ideally, any non-trivial GNUnet code should be covered by automated
+testcases. Testcases should reside in the same place as the code that is
+being tested. The name of source files implementing tests should begin
+with @code{test_} followed by the name of the file that contains
+the code that is being tested.
+
+Testcases in GNUnet should be integrated with the autotools build system.
+This way, developers and anyone building binary packages will be able to
+run all testcases simply by running @code{make check}. The final
+testcases shipped with the distribution should output at most some brief
+progress information and not display debug messages by default. The
+success or failure of a testcase must be indicated by returning zero
+(success) or non-zero (failure) from the main method of the testcase.
+The integration with the autotools is relatively straightforward and only
+requires modifications to the @file{Makefile.am} in the directory
+containing the testcase. For a testcase testing the code in @file{foo.c}
+the @file{Makefile.am} would contain the following lines:
+
+@example
+check_PROGRAMS = test_foo
+TESTS = $(check_PROGRAMS)
+test_foo_SOURCES = test_foo.c
+test_foo_LDADD = $(top_builddir)/src/util/libgnunetutil.la
+@end example
+
+Naturally, other libraries used by the testcase may be specified in the
+@code{LDADD} directive as necessary.
+
+Often testcases depend on additional input files, such as a configuration
+file. These support files have to be listed using the @code{EXTRA_DIST}
+directive in order to ensure that they are included in the distribution.
+
+Example:
+
+@example
+EXTRA_DIST = test_foo_data.conf
+@end example
+
+Executing @code{make check} will run all testcases in the current
+directory and all subdirectories. Testcases can be compiled individually
+by running @code{make test_foo} and then invoked directly using
+@code{./test_foo}. Note that due to the use of plugins in GNUnet, it is
+typically necessary to run @code{make install} before running any
+testcases. Thus the canonical command @code{make check install} has to be
+changed to @code{make install check} for GNUnet.
+
+@cindex TESTING library
+@node TESTING library
+@section TESTING library
+
+The TESTING library is used for writing testcases which involve starting a
+single or multiple peers. While peers can also be started by testcases
+using the ARM subsystem, using TESTING library provides an elegant way to
+do this. The configurations of the peers are auto-generated from a given
+template to have non-conflicting port numbers ensuring that peers'
+services do not run into bind errors. This is achieved by testing ports'
+availability by binding a listening socket to them before allocating them
+to services in the generated configurations.
+
+An another advantage while using TESTING is that it shortens the testcase
+startup time as the hostkeys for peers are copied from a pre-computed set
+of hostkeys instead of generating them at peer startup which may take a
+considerable amount of time when starting multiple peers or on an embedded
+processor.
+
+TESTING also allows for certain services to be shared among peers. This
+feature is invaluable when testing with multiple peers as it helps to
+reduce the number of services run per each peer and hence the total
+number of processes run per testcase.
+
+TESTING library only handles creating, starting and stopping peers.
+Features useful for testcases such as connecting peers in a topology are
+not available in TESTING but are available in the TESTBED subsystem.
+Furthermore, TESTING only creates peers on the localhost, however by
+using TESTBED testcases can benefit from creating peers across multiple
+hosts.
+
+@menu
+* API::
+* Finer control over peer stop::
+* Helper functions::
+* Testing with multiple processes::
+@end menu
+
+@cindex TESTING API
+@node API
+@subsection API
+
+TESTING abstracts a group of peers as a TESTING system. All peers in a
+system have common hostname and no two services of these peers have a
+same port or a UNIX domain socket path.
+
+TESTING system can be created with the function
+@code{GNUNET_TESTING_system_create()} which returns a handle to the
+system. This function takes a directory path which is used for generating
+the configurations of peers, an IP address from which connections to the
+peers' services should be allowed, the hostname to be used in peers'
+configuration, and an array of shared service specifications of type
+@code{struct GNUNET_TESTING_SharedService}.
+
+The shared service specification must specify the name of the service to
+share, the configuration pertaining to that shared service and the
+maximum number of peers that are allowed to share a single instance of
+the shared service.
+
+TESTING system created with @code{GNUNET_TESTING_system_create()} chooses
+ports from the default range @code{12000} - @code{56000} while
+auto-generating configurations for peers.
+This range can be customised with the function
+@code{GNUNET_TESTING_system_create_with_portrange()}. This function is
+similar to @code{GNUNET_TESTING_system_create()} except that it take 2
+additional parameters --- the start and end of the port range to use.
+
+A TESTING system is destroyed with the funciton
+@code{GNUNET_TESTING_system_destory()}. This function takes the handle of
+the system and a flag to remove the files created in the directory used
+to generate configurations.
+
+A peer is created with the function
+@code{GNUNET_TESTING_peer_configure()}. This functions takes the system
+handle, a configuration template from which the configuration for the peer
+is auto-generated and the index from where the hostkey for the peer has to
+be copied from. When successfull, this function returs a handle to the
+peer which can be used to start and stop it and to obtain the identity of
+the peer. If unsuccessful, a NULL pointer is returned with an error
+message. This function handles the generated configuration to have
+non-conflicting ports and paths.
+
+Peers can be started and stopped by calling the functions
+@code{GNUNET_TESTING_peer_start()} and @code{GNUNET_TESTING_peer_stop()}
+respectively. A peer can be destroyed by calling the function
+@code{GNUNET_TESTING_peer_destroy}. When a peer is destroyed, the ports
+and paths in allocated in its configuration are reclaimed for usage in new
+peers.
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node Finer control over peer stop
+@subsection Finer control over peer stop
+
+Using @code{GNUNET_TESTING_peer_stop()} is normally fine for testcases.
+However, calling this function for each peer is inefficient when trying to
+shutdown multiple peers as this function sends the termination signal to
+the given peer process and waits for it to terminate. It would be faster
+in this case to send the termination signals to the peers first and then
+wait on them. This is accomplished by the functions
+@code{GNUNET_TESTING_peer_kill()} which sends a termination signal to the
+peer, and the function @code{GNUNET_TESTING_peer_wait()} which waits on
+the peer.
+
+Further finer control can be achieved by choosing to stop a peer
+asynchronously with the function @code{GNUNET_TESTING_peer_stop_async()}.
+This function takes a callback parameter and a closure for it in addition
+to the handle to the peer to stop. The callback function is called with
+the given closure when the peer is stopped. Using this function
+eliminates blocking while waiting for the peer to terminate.
+
+An asynchronous peer stop can be cancelled by calling the function
+@code{GNUNET_TESTING_peer_stop_async_cancel()}. Note that calling this
+function does not prevent the peer from terminating if the termination
+signal has already been sent to it. It does, however, cancels the
+callback to be called when the peer is stopped.
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node Helper functions
+@subsection Helper functions
+
+Most of the testcases can benefit from an abstraction which configures a
+peer and starts it. This is provided by the function
+@code{GNUNET_TESTING_peer_run()}. This function takes the testing
+directory pathname, a configuration template, a callback and its closure.
+This function creates a peer in the given testing directory by using the
+configuration template, starts the peer and calls the given callback with
+the given closure.
+
+The function @code{GNUNET_TESTING_peer_run()} starts the ARM service of
+the peer which starts the rest of the configured services. A similar
+function @code{GNUNET_TESTING_service_run} can be used to just start a
+single service of a peer. In this case, the peer's ARM service is not
+started; instead, only the given service is run.
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node Testing with multiple processes
+@subsection Testing with multiple processes
+
+When testing GNUnet, the splitting of the code into a services and clients
+often complicates testing. The solution to this is to have the testcase
+fork @code{gnunet-service-arm}, ask it to start the required server and
+daemon processes and then execute appropriate client actions (to test the
+client APIs or the core module or both). If necessary, multiple ARM
+services can be forked using different ports (!) to simulate a network.
+However, most of the time only one ARM process is needed. Note that on
+exit, the testcase should shutdown ARM with a @code{TERM} signal (to give
+it the chance to cleanly stop its child processes).
+
+The following code illustrates spawning and killing an ARM process from a
+testcase:
+
+@example
+static void run (void *cls,
+                 char *const *args,
+                 const char *cfgfile,
+                 const struct GNUNET_CONFIGURATION_Handle *cfg) @{
+  struct GNUNET_OS_Process *arm_pid;
+  arm_pid = GNUNET_OS_start_process (NULL,
+                                     NULL,
+                                     "gnunet-service-arm",
+                                     "gnunet-service-arm",
+                                     "-c",
+                                     cfgname,
+                                     NULL);
+  /* do real test work here */
+  if (0 != GNUNET_OS_process_kill (arm_pid, SIGTERM))
+    GNUNET_log_strerror
+      (GNUNET_ERROR_TYPE_WARNING, "kill");
+  GNUNET_assert (GNUNET_OK == GNUNET_OS_process_wait (arm_pid));
+  GNUNET_OS_process_close (arm_pid); @}
+
+GNUNET_PROGRAM_run (argc, argv,
+                    "NAME-OF-TEST",
+                    "nohelp",
+                    options,
+                    &run,
+                    cls);
+@end example
+
+
+An alternative way that works well to test plugins is to implement a
+mock-version of the environment that the plugin expects and then to
+simply load the plugin directly.
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node Performance regression analysis with Gauger
+@section Performance regression analysis with Gauger
+
+To help avoid performance regressions, GNUnet uses Gauger. Gauger is a
+simple logging tool that allows remote hosts to send performance data to
+a central server, where this data can be analyzed and visualized. Gauger
+shows graphs of the repository revisions and the performace data recorded
+for each revision, so sudden performance peaks or drops can be identified
+and linked to a specific revision number.
+
+In the case of GNUnet, the buildbots log the performance data obtained
+during the tests after each build. The data can be accesed on GNUnet's
+Gauger page.
+
+The menu on the left allows to select either the results of just one
+build bot (under "Hosts") or review the data from all hosts for a given
+test result (under "Metrics"). In case of very different absolute value
+of the results, for instance arm vs. amd64 machines, the option
+"Normalize" on a metric view can help to get an idea about the
+performance evolution across all hosts.
+
+Using Gauger in GNUnet and having the performance of a module tracked over
+time is very easy. First of course, the testcase must generate some
+consistent metric, which makes sense to have logged. Highly volatile or
+random dependant metrics probably are not ideal candidates for meaningful
+regression detection.
+
+To start logging any value, just include @code{gauger.h} in your testcase
+code. Then, use the macro @code{GAUGER()} to make the Buildbots log
+whatever value is of interest for you to @code{gnunet.org}'s Gauger
+server. No setup is necessary as most Buildbots have already everything
+in place and new metrics are created on demand. To delete a metric, you
+need to contact a member of the GNUnet development team (a file will need
+to be removed manually from the respective directory).
+
+The code in the test should look like this:
+
+@example
+[other includes]
+#include <gauger.h>
+
+int main (int argc, char *argv[]) @{
+
+  [run test, generate data]
+    GAUGER("YOUR_MODULE",
+           "METRIC_NAME",
+           (float)value,
+           "UNIT"); @}
+@end example
+
+Where:
+
+@table @asis
+
+@item @strong{YOUR_MODULE} is a category in the gauger page and should be
+the name of the module or subsystem like "Core" or "DHT"
+@item @strong{METRIC} is
+the name of the metric being collected and should be concise and
+descriptive, like "PUT operations in sqlite-datastore".
+@item @strong{value} is the value
+of the metric that is logged for this run.
+@item @strong{UNIT} is the unit in
+which the value is measured, for instance "kb/s" or "kb of RAM/node".
+@end table
+
+If you wish to use Gauger for your own project, you can grab a copy of the
+latest stable release or check out Gauger's Subversion repository.
+
+@cindex TESTBED Subsystem
+@node TESTBED Subsystem
+@section TESTBED Subsystem
+
+The TESTBED subsystem facilitates testing and measuring of multi-peer
+deployments on a single host or over multiple hosts.
+
+The architecture of the testbed module is divided into the following:
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item Testbed API: An API which is used by the testing driver programs. It
+provides with functions for creating, destroying, starting, stopping
+peers, etc.
+
+@item Testbed service (controller): A service which is started through the
+Testbed API. This service handles operations to create, destroy, start,
+stop peers, connect them, modify their configurations.
+
+@item Testbed helper: When a controller has to be started on a host, the
+testbed API starts the testbed helper on that host which in turn starts
+the controller. The testbed helper receives a configuration for the
+controller through its stdin and changes it to ensure the controller
+doesn't run into any port conflict on that host.
+@end itemize
+
+
+The testbed service (controller) is different from the other GNUnet
+services in that it is not started by ARM and is not supposed to be run
+as a daemon. It is started by the testbed API through a testbed helper.
+In a typical scenario involving multiple hosts, a controller is started
+on each host. Controllers take up the actual task of creating peers,
+starting and stopping them on the hosts they run.
+
+While running deployments on a single localhost the testbed API starts the
+testbed helper directly as a child process. When running deployments on
+remote hosts the testbed API starts Testbed Helpers on each remote host
+through remote shell. By default testbed API uses SSH as a remote shell.
+This can be changed by setting the environmental variable
+GNUNET_TESTBED_RSH_CMD to the required remote shell program. This
+variable can also contain parameters which are to be passed to the remote
+shell program. For e.g:
+
+@example
+export GNUNET_TESTBED_RSH_CMD="ssh -o BatchMode=yes \
+-o NoHostAuthenticationForLocalhost=yes %h"
+@end example
+
+Substitutions are allowed in the command string above,
+this allows for substitutions through placemarks which begin with a `%'.
+At present the following substitutions are supported
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item %h: hostname
+@item %u: username
+@item %p: port
+@end itemize
+
+Note that the substitution placemark is replaced only when the
+corresponding field is available and only once. Specifying
+
+@example
+%u@atchar{}%h
+@end example
+
+doesn't work either. If you want to user username substitutions for
+@command{SSH}, use the argument @code{-l} before the
+username substitution.
+
+For example:
+@example
+ssh -l %u -p %p %h
+@end example
+
+The testbed API and the helper communicate through the helpers stdin and
+stdout. As the helper is started through a remote shell on remote hosts
+any output messages from the remote shell interfere with the communication
+and results in a failure while starting the helper. For this reason, it is
+suggested to use flags to make the remote shells produce no output
+messages and to have password-less logins. The default remote shell, SSH,
+the default options are:
+
+@example
+-o BatchMode=yes -o NoHostBasedAuthenticationForLocalhost=yes"
+@end example
+
+Password-less logins should be ensured by using SSH keys.
+
+Since the testbed API executes the remote shell as a non-interactive
+shell, certain scripts like .bashrc, .profiler may not be executed. If
+this is the case testbed API can be forced to execute an interactive
+shell by setting up the environmental variable
+@code{GNUNET_TESTBED_RSH_CMD_SUFFIX} to a shell program.
+
+An example could be:
+
+@example
+export GNUNET_TESTBED_RSH_CMD_SUFFIX="sh -lc"
+@end example
+
+The testbed API will then execute the remote shell program as:
+
+@example
+$GNUNET_TESTBED_RSH_CMD -p $port $dest $GNUNET_TESTBED_RSH_CMD_SUFFIX \
+gnunet-helper-testbed
+@end example
+
+On some systems, problems may arise while starting testbed helpers if
+GNUnet is installed into a custom location since the helper may not be
+found in the standard path. This can be addressed by setting the variable
+`@code{HELPER_BINARY_PATH}' to the path of the testbed helper.
+Testbed API will then use this path to start helper binaries both
+locally and remotely.
+
+Testbed API can accessed by including the
+@file{gnunet_testbed_service.h} file and linking with
+@code{-lgnunettestbed}.
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@menu
+* Supported Topologies::
+* Hosts file format::
+* Topology file format::
+* Testbed Barriers::
+* Automatic large-scale deployment in the PlanetLab testbed::
+* TESTBED Caveats::
+@end menu
+
+@node Supported Topologies
+@subsection Supported Topologies
+
+While testing multi-peer deployments, it is often needed that the peers
+are connected in some topology. This requirement is addressed by the
+function @code{GNUNET_TESTBED_overlay_connect()} which connects any given
+two peers in the testbed.
+
+The API also provides a helper function
+@code{GNUNET_TESTBED_overlay_configure_topology()} to connect a given set
+of peers in any of the following supported topologies:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item @code{GNUNET_TESTBED_TOPOLOGY_CLIQUE}: All peers are connected with
+each other
+
+@item @code{GNUNET_TESTBED_TOPOLOGY_LINE}: Peers are connected to form a
+line
+
+@item @code{GNUNET_TESTBED_TOPOLOGY_RING}: Peers are connected to form a
+ring topology
+
+@item @code{GNUNET_TESTBED_TOPOLOGY_2D_TORUS}: Peers are connected to
+form a 2 dimensional torus topology. The number of peers may not be a
+perfect square, in that case the resulting torus may not have the uniform
+poloidal and toroidal lengths
+
+@item @code{GNUNET_TESTBED_TOPOLOGY_ERDOS_RENYI}: Topology is generated
+to form a random graph. The number of links to be present should be given
+
+@item @code{GNUNET_TESTBED_TOPOLOGY_SMALL_WORLD}: Peers are connected to
+form a 2D Torus with some random links among them. The number of random
+links are to be given
+
+@item @code{GNUNET_TESTBED_TOPOLOGY_SMALL_WORLD_RING}: Peers are
+connected to form a ring with some random links among them. The number of
+random links are to be given
+
+@item @code{GNUNET_TESTBED_TOPOLOGY_SCALE_FREE}: Connects peers in a
+topology where peer connectivity follows power law - new peers are
+connected with high probabililty to well connected peers.
+@footnote{See Emergence of Scaling in Random Networks. Science 286,
+509-512, 1999
+(@uref{https://gnunet.org/git/bibliography.git/plain/docs/emergence_of_scaling_in_random_networks__barabasi_albert_science_286__1999.pdf, pdf})}
+
+@item @code{GNUNET_TESTBED_TOPOLOGY_FROM_FILE}: The topology information
+is loaded from a file. The path to the file has to be given.
+@xref{Topology file format}, for the format of this file.
+
+@item @code{GNUNET_TESTBED_TOPOLOGY_NONE}: No topology
+@end itemize
+
+
+The above supported topologies can be specified respectively by setting
+the variable @code{OVERLAY_TOPOLOGY} to the following values in the
+configuration passed to Testbed API functions
+@code{GNUNET_TESTBED_test_run()} and
+@code{GNUNET_TESTBED_run()}:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item @code{CLIQUE}
+@item @code{RING}
+@item @code{LINE}
+@item @code{2D_TORUS}
+@item @code{RANDOM}
+@item @code{SMALL_WORLD}
+@item @code{SMALL_WORLD_RING}
+@item @code{SCALE_FREE}
+@item @code{FROM_FILE}
+@item @code{NONE}
+@end itemize
+
+
+Topologies @code{RANDOM}, @code{SMALL_WORLD} and @code{SMALL_WORLD_RING}
+require the option @code{OVERLAY_RANDOM_LINKS} to be set to the number of
+random links to be generated in the configuration. The option will be
+ignored for the rest of the topologies.
+
+Topology @code{SCALE_FREE} requires the options
+@code{SCALE_FREE_TOPOLOGY_CAP} to be set to the maximum number of peers
+which can connect to a peer and @code{SCALE_FREE_TOPOLOGY_M} to be set to
+how many peers a peer should be atleast connected to.
+
+Similarly, the topology @code{FROM_FILE} requires the option
+@code{OVERLAY_TOPOLOGY_FILE} to contain the path of the file containing
+the topology information. This option is ignored for the rest of the
+topologies. @xref{Topology file format}, for the format of this file.
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node Hosts file format
+@subsection Hosts file format
+
+The testbed API offers the function
+@code{GNUNET_TESTBED_hosts_load_from_file()} to load from a given file
+details about the hosts which testbed can use for deploying peers.
+This function is useful to keep the data about hosts
+separate instead of hard coding them in code.
+
+Another helper function from testbed API, @code{GNUNET_TESTBED_run()}
+also takes a hosts file name as its parameter. It uses the above
+function to populate the hosts data structures and start controllers to
+deploy peers.
+
+These functions require the hosts file to be of the following format:
+@itemize @bullet
+@item Each line is interpreted to have details about a host
+@item Host details should include the username to use for logging into the
+host, the hostname of the host and the port number to use for the remote
+shell program. All thee values should be given.
+@item These details should be given in the following format:
+@example
+<username>@@<hostname>:<port>
+@end example
+@end itemize
+
+Note that having canonical hostnames may cause problems while resolving
+the IP addresses (See this bug). Hence it is advised to provide the hosts'
+IP numerical addresses as hostnames whenever possible.
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node Topology file format
+@subsection Topology file format
+
+A topology file describes how peers are to be connected. It should adhere
+to the following format for testbed to parse it correctly.
+
+Each line should begin with the target peer id. This should be followed by
+a colon(`:') and origin peer ids seperated by `|'. All spaces except for
+newline characters are ignored. The API will then try to connect each
+origin peer to the target peer.
+
+For example, the following file will result in 5 overlay connections:
+[2->1], [3->1],[4->3], [0->3], [2->0]@
+@code{@ 1:2|3@ 3:4| 0@ 0: 2@ }
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node Testbed Barriers
+@subsection Testbed Barriers
+
+The testbed subsystem's barriers API facilitates coordination among the
+peers run by the testbed and the experiment driver. The concept is
+similar to the barrier synchronisation mechanism found in parallel
+programming or multi-threading paradigms - a peer waits at a barrier upon
+reaching it until the barrier is reached by a predefined number of peers.
+This predefined number of peers required to cross a barrier is also called
+quorum. We say a peer has reached a barrier if the peer is waiting for the
+barrier to be crossed. Similarly a barrier is said to be reached if the
+required quorum of peers reach the barrier. A barrier which is reached is
+deemed as crossed after all the peers waiting on it are notified.
+
+The barriers API provides the following functions:
+@itemize @bullet
+@item @strong{@code{GNUNET_TESTBED_barrier_init()}:} function to
+initialse a barrier in the experiment
+@item @strong{@code{GNUNET_TESTBED_barrier_cancel()}:} function to cancel
+a barrier which has been initialised before
+@item @strong{@code{GNUNET_TESTBED_barrier_wait()}:} function to signal
+barrier service that the caller has reached a barrier and is waiting for
+it to be crossed
+@item @strong{@code{GNUNET_TESTBED_barrier_wait_cancel()}:} function to
+stop waiting for a barrier to be crossed
+@end itemize
+
+
+Among the above functions, the first two, namely
+@code{GNUNET_TESTBED_barrier_init()} and
+@code{GNUNET_TESTBED_barrier_cancel()} are used by experiment drivers. All
+barriers should be initialised by the experiment driver by calling
+@code{GNUNET_TESTBED_barrier_init()}. This function takes a name to
+identify the barrier, the quorum required for the barrier to be crossed
+and a notification callback for notifying the experiment driver when the
+barrier is crossed. @code{GNUNET_TESTBED_barrier_cancel()} cancels an
+initialised barrier and frees the resources allocated for it. This
+function can be called upon a initialised barrier before it is crossed.
+
+The remaining two functions @code{GNUNET_TESTBED_barrier_wait()} and
+@code{GNUNET_TESTBED_barrier_wait_cancel()} are used in the peer's
+processes. @code{GNUNET_TESTBED_barrier_wait()} connects to the local
+barrier service running on the same host the peer is running on and
+registers that the caller has reached the barrier and is waiting for the
+barrier to be crossed. Note that this function can only be used by peers
+which are started by testbed as this function tries to access the local
+barrier service which is part of the testbed controller service. Calling
+@code{GNUNET_TESTBED_barrier_wait()} on an uninitialised barrier results
+in failure. @code{GNUNET_TESTBED_barrier_wait_cancel()} cancels the
+notification registered by @code{GNUNET_TESTBED_barrier_wait()}.
+
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@menu
+* Implementation::
+@end menu
+
+@node Implementation
+@subsubsection Implementation
+
+Since barriers involve coordination between experiment driver and peers,
+the barrier service in the testbed controller is split into two
+components. The first component responds to the message generated by the
+barrier API used by the experiment driver (functions
+@code{GNUNET_TESTBED_barrier_init()} and
+@code{GNUNET_TESTBED_barrier_cancel()}) and the second component to the
+messages generated by barrier API used by peers (functions
+@code{GNUNET_TESTBED_barrier_wait()} and
+@code{GNUNET_TESTBED_barrier_wait_cancel()}).
+
+Calling @code{GNUNET_TESTBED_barrier_init()} sends a
+@code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_TESTBED_BARRIER_INIT} message to the master
+controller. The master controller then registers a barrier and calls
+@code{GNUNET_TESTBED_barrier_init()} for each its subcontrollers. In this
+way barrier initialisation is propagated to the controller hierarchy.
+While propagating initialisation, any errors at a subcontroller such as
+timeout during further propagation are reported up the hierarchy back to
+the experiment driver.
+
+Similar to @code{GNUNET_TESTBED_barrier_init()},
+@code{GNUNET_TESTBED_barrier_cancel()} propagates
+@code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_TESTBED_BARRIER_CANCEL} message which causes
+controllers to remove an initialised barrier.
+
+The second component is implemented as a separate service in the binary
+`gnunet-service-testbed' which already has the testbed controller service.
+Although this deviates from the gnunet process architecture of having one
+service per binary, it is needed in this case as this component needs
+access to barrier data created by the first component. This component
+responds to @code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_TESTBED_BARRIER_WAIT} messages from
+local peers when they call @code{GNUNET_TESTBED_barrier_wait()}. Upon
+receiving @code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_TESTBED_BARRIER_WAIT} message, the
+service checks if the requested barrier has been initialised before and
+if it was not initialised, an error status is sent through
+@code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_TESTBED_BARRIER_STATUS} message to the local
+peer and the connection from the peer is terminated. If the barrier is
+initialised before, the barrier's counter for reached peers is incremented
+and a notification is registered to notify the peer when the barrier is
+reached. The connection from the peer is left open.
+
+When enough peers required to attain the quorum send
+@code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_TESTBED_BARRIER_WAIT} messages, the controller
+sends a @code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_TESTBED_BARRIER_STATUS} message to its
+parent informing that the barrier is crossed. If the controller has
+started further subcontrollers, it delays this message until it receives
+a similar notification from each of those subcontrollers. Finally, the
+barriers API at the experiment driver receives the
+@code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_TESTBED_BARRIER_STATUS} when the barrier is
+reached at all the controllers.
+
+The barriers API at the experiment driver responds to the
+@code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_TESTBED_BARRIER_STATUS} message by echoing it
+back to the master controller and notifying the experiment controller
+through the notification callback that a barrier has been crossed. The
+echoed @code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_TESTBED_BARRIER_STATUS} message is
+propagated by the master controller to the controller hierarchy. This
+propagation triggers the notifications registered by peers at each of the
+controllers in the hierarchy. Note the difference between this downward
+propagation of the @code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_TESTBED_BARRIER_STATUS}
+message from its upward propagation --- the upward propagation is needed
+for ensuring that the barrier is reached by all the controllers and the
+downward propagation is for triggering that the barrier is crossed.
+
+@cindex PlanetLab testbed
+@node Automatic large-scale deployment in the PlanetLab testbed
+@subsection Automatic large-scale deployment in the PlanetLab testbed
+
+PlanetLab is a testbed for computer networking and distributed systems
+research. It was established in 2002 and as of June 2010 was composed of
+1090 nodes at 507 sites worldwide.
+
+To automate the GNUnet we created a set of automation tools to simplify
+the large-scale deployment. We provide you a set of scripts you can use
+to deploy GNUnet on a set of nodes and manage your installation.
+
+Please also check @uref{https://gnunet.org/installation-fedora8-svn} and
+@uref{https://gnunet.org/installation-fedora12-svn} to find detailled
+instructions how to install GNUnet on a PlanetLab node.
+
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@menu
+* PlanetLab Automation for Fedora8 nodes::
+* Install buildslave on PlanetLab nodes running fedora core 8::
+* Setup a new PlanetLab testbed using GPLMT::
+* Why do i get an ssh error when using the regex profiler?::
+@end menu
+
+@node PlanetLab Automation for Fedora8 nodes
+@subsubsection PlanetLab Automation for Fedora8 nodes
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node Install buildslave on PlanetLab nodes running fedora core 8
+@subsubsection Install buildslave on PlanetLab nodes running fedora core 8
+@c ** Actually this is a subsubsubsection, but must be fixed differently
+@c ** as subsubsection is the lowest.
+
+Since most of the PlanetLab nodes are running the very old Fedora core 8
+image, installing the buildslave software is quite some pain. For our
+PlanetLab testbed we figured out how to install the buildslave software
+best.
+
+@c This is a vvery terrible way to suggest installing software.
+@c FIXME: Is there an official, safer way instead of blind-piping a
+@c script?
+@c FIXME: Use newer pypi URLs below.
+Install Distribute for Python:
+
+@example
+curl http://python-distribute.org/distribute_setup.py | sudo python
+@end example
+
+Install Distribute for zope.interface <= 3.8.0 (4.0 and 4.0.1 will not
+work):
+
+@example
+export PYPI=@value{PYPI-URL}
+wget $PYPI/z/zope.interface/zope.interface-3.8.0.tar.gz
+tar zvfz zope.interface-3.8.0.tar.gz
+cd zope.interface-3.8.0
+sudo python setup.py install
+@end example
+
+Install the buildslave software (0.8.6 was the latest version):
+
+@example
+export GCODE="http://buildbot.googlecode.com/files"
+wget $GCODE/buildbot-slave-0.8.6p1.tar.gz
+tar xvfz buildbot-slave-0.8.6p1.tar.gz
+cd buildslave-0.8.6p1
+sudo python setup.py install
+@end example
+
+The setup will download the matching twisted package and install it.
+It will also try to install the latest version of zope.interface which
+will fail to install. Buildslave will work anyway since version 3.8.0
+was installed before!
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node Setup a new PlanetLab testbed using GPLMT
+@subsubsection Setup a new PlanetLab testbed using GPLMT
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item Get a new slice and assign nodes
+Ask your PlanetLab PI to give you a new slice and assign the nodes you
+need
+@item Install a buildmaster
+You can stick to the buildbot documentation:@
+@uref{http://buildbot.net/buildbot/docs/current/manual/installation.html}
+@item Install the buildslave software on all nodes
+To install the buildslave on all nodes assigned to your slice you can use
+the tasklist @code{install_buildslave_fc8.xml} provided with GPLMT:
+
+@example
+./gplmt.py -c contrib/tumple_gnunet.conf -t \
+contrib/tasklists/install_buildslave_fc8.xml -a -p <planetlab password>
+@end example
+
+@item Create the buildmaster configuration and the slave setup commands
+
+The master and the and the slaves have need to have credentials and the
+master has to have all nodes configured. This can be done with the
+@file{create_buildbot_configuration.py} script in the @file{scripts}
+directory.
+
+This scripts takes a list of nodes retrieved directly from PlanetLab or
+read from a file and a configuration template and creates:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item a tasklist which can be executed with gplmt to setup the slaves
+@item a master.cfg file containing a PlanetLab nodes
+@end itemize
+
+A configuration template is included in the <contrib>, most important is
+that the script replaces the following tags in the template:
+
+%GPLMT_BUILDER_DEFINITION :@ GPLMT_BUILDER_SUMMARY@ GPLMT_SLAVES@
+%GPLMT_SCHEDULER_BUILDERS
+
+Create configuration for all nodes assigned to a slice:
+
+@example
+./create_buildbot_configuration.py -u <planetlab username> \
+-p <planetlab password> -s <slice> -m <buildmaster+port> \
+-t <template>
+@end example
+
+Create configuration for some nodes in a file:
+
+@example
+./create_buildbot_configuration.p -f <node_file> \
+-m <buildmaster+port> -t <template>
+@end example
+
+@item Copy the @file{master.cfg} to the buildmaster and start it
+Use @code{buildbot start <basedir>} to start the server
+@item Setup the buildslaves
+@end itemize
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node Why do i get an ssh error when using the regex profiler?
+@subsubsection Why do i get an ssh error when using the regex profiler?
+
+Why do i get an ssh error "Permission denied (publickey,password)." when
+using the regex profiler although passwordless ssh to localhost works
+using publickey and ssh-agent?
+
+You have to generate a public/private-key pair with no password:@
+@code{ssh-keygen -t rsa -b 4096 -f ~/.ssh/id_localhost}@
+and then add the following to your ~/.ssh/config file:
+
+@code{Host 127.0.0.1@ IdentityFile ~/.ssh/id_localhost}
+
+now make sure your hostsfile looks like
+
+@example
+[USERNAME]@@127.0.0.1:22@
+[USERNAME]@@127.0.0.1:22
+@end example
+
+You can test your setup by running @code{ssh 127.0.0.1} in a
+terminal and then in the opened session run it again.
+If you were not asked for a password on either login,
+then you should be good to go.
+
+@cindex TESTBED Caveats
+@node TESTBED Caveats
+@subsection TESTBED Caveats
+
+This section documents a few caveats when using the GNUnet testbed
+subsystem.
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@menu
+* CORE must be started::
+* ATS must want the connections::
+@end menu
+
+@node CORE must be started
+@subsubsection CORE must be started
+
+A simple issue is #3993: Your configuration MUST somehow ensure that for
+each peer the CORE service is started when the peer is setup, otherwise
+TESTBED may fail to connect peers when the topology is initialized, as
+TESTBED will start some CORE services but not necessarily all (but it
+relies on all of them running). The easiest way is to set
+'FORCESTART = YES' in the '[core]' section of the configuration file.
+Alternatively, having any service that directly or indirectly depends on
+CORE being started with FORCESTART will also do. This issue largely arises
+if users try to over-optimize by not starting any services with
+FORCESTART.
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node ATS must want the connections
+@subsubsection ATS must want the connections
+
+When TESTBED sets up connections, it only offers the respective HELLO
+information to the TRANSPORT service. It is then up to the ATS service to
+@strong{decide} to use the connection. The ATS service will typically
+eagerly establish any connection if the number of total connections is
+low (relative to bandwidth). Details may further depend on the
+specific ATS backend that was configured. If ATS decides to NOT establish
+a connection (even though TESTBED provided the required information), then
+that connection will count as failed for TESTBED. Note that you can
+configure TESTBED to tolerate a certain number of connection failures
+(see '-e' option of gnunet-testbed-profiler). This issue largely arises
+for dense overlay topologies, especially if you try to create cliques
+with more than 20 peers.
+
+@cindex libgnunetutil
+@node libgnunetutil
+@section libgnunetutil
+
+libgnunetutil is the fundamental library that all GNUnet code builds upon.
+Ideally, this library should contain most of the platform dependent code
+(except for user interfaces and really special needs that only few
+applications have). It is also supposed to offer basic services that most
+if not all GNUnet binaries require. The code of libgnunetutil is in the
+@file{src/util/} directory. The public interface to the library is in the
+gnunet_util.h header. The functions provided by libgnunetutil fall
+roughly into the following categories (in roughly the order of importance
+for new developers):
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item logging (common_logging.c)
+@item memory allocation (common_allocation.c)
+@item endianess conversion (common_endian.c)
+@item internationalization (common_gettext.c)
+@item String manipulation (string.c)
+@item file access (disk.c)
+@item buffered disk IO (bio.c)
+@item time manipulation (time.c)
+@item configuration parsing (configuration.c)
+@item command-line handling (getopt*.c)
+@item cryptography (crypto_*.c)
+@item data structures (container_*.c)
+@item CPS-style scheduling (scheduler.c)
+@item Program initialization (program.c)
+@item Networking (network.c, client.c, server*.c, service.c)
+@item message queueing (mq.c)
+@item bandwidth calculations (bandwidth.c)
+@item Other OS-related (os*.c, plugin.c, signal.c)
+@item Pseudonym management (pseudonym.c)
+@end itemize
+
+It should be noted that only developers that fully understand this entire
+API will be able to write good GNUnet code.
+
+Ideally, porting GNUnet should only require porting the gnunetutil
+library. More testcases for the gnunetutil APIs are therefore a great
+way to make porting of GNUnet easier.
+
+@menu
+* Logging::
+* Interprocess communication API (IPC)::
+* Cryptography API::
+* Message Queue API::
+* Service API::
+* Optimizing Memory Consumption of GNUnet's (Multi-) Hash Maps::
+* CONTAINER_MDLL API::
+@end menu
+
+@cindex Logging
+@cindex log levels
+@node Logging
+@subsection Logging
+
+GNUnet is able to log its activity, mostly for the purposes of debugging
+the program at various levels.
+
+@file{gnunet_common.h} defines several @strong{log levels}:
+@table @asis
+
+@item ERROR for errors (really problematic situations, often leading to
+crashes)
+@item WARNING for warnings (troubling situations that might have
+negative consequences, although not fatal)
+@item INFO for various information.
+Used somewhat rarely, as GNUnet statistics is used to hold and display
+most of the information that users might find interesting.
+@item DEBUG for debugging.
+Does not produce much output on normal builds, but when extra logging is
+enabled at compile time, a staggering amount of data is outputted under
+this log level.
+@end table
+
+
+Normal builds of GNUnet (configured with @code{--enable-logging[=yes]})
+are supposed to log nothing under DEBUG level. The
+@code{--enable-logging=verbose} configure option can be used to create a
+build with all logging enabled. However, such build will produce large
+amounts of log data, which is inconvenient when one tries to hunt down a
+specific problem.
+
+To mitigate this problem, GNUnet provides facilities to apply a filter to
+reduce the logs:
+@table @asis
+
+@item Logging by default When no log levels are configured in any other
+way (see below), GNUnet will default to the WARNING log level. This
+mostly applies to GNUnet command line utilities, services and daemons;
+tests will always set log level to WARNING or, if
+@code{--enable-logging=verbose} was passed to configure, to DEBUG. The
+default level is suggested for normal operation.
+@item The -L option Most GNUnet executables accept an "-L loglevel" or
+"--log=loglevel" option. If used, it makes the process set a global log
+level to "loglevel". Thus it is possible to run some processes
+with -L DEBUG, for example, and others with -L ERROR to enable specific
+settings to diagnose problems with a particular process.
+@item Configuration files.  Because GNUnet
+service and deamon processes are usually launched by gnunet-arm, it is not
+possible to pass different custom command line options directly to every
+one of them. The options passed to @code{gnunet-arm} only affect
+gnunet-arm and not the rest of GNUnet. However, one can specify a
+configuration key "OPTIONS" in the section that corresponds to a service
+or a daemon, and put a value of "-L loglevel" there. This will make the
+respective service or daemon set its log level to "loglevel" (as the
+value of OPTIONS will be passed as a command-line argument).
+
+To specify the same log level for all services without creating separate
+"OPTIONS" entries in the configuration for each one, the user can specify
+a config key "GLOBAL_POSTFIX" in the [arm] section of the configuration
+file. The value of GLOBAL_POSTFIX will be appended to all command lines
+used by the ARM service to run other services. It can contain any option
+valid for all GNUnet commands, thus in particular the "-L loglevel"
+option. The ARM service itself is, however, unaffected by GLOBAL_POSTFIX;
+to set log level for it, one has to specify "OPTIONS" key in the [arm]
+section.
+@item Environment variables.
+Setting global per-process log levels with "-L loglevel" does not offer
+sufficient log filtering granularity, as one service will call interface
+libraries and supporting libraries of other GNUnet services, potentially
+producing lots of debug log messages from these libraries. Also, changing
+the config file is not always convenient (especially when running the
+GNUnet test suite).@ To fix that, and to allow GNUnet to use different
+log filtering at runtime without re-compiling the whole source tree, the
+log calls were changed to be configurable at run time. To configure them
+one has to define environment variables "GNUNET_FORCE_LOGFILE",
+"GNUNET_LOG" and/or "GNUNET_FORCE_LOG":
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item "GNUNET_LOG" only affects the logging when no global log level is
+configured by any other means (that is, the process does not explicitly
+set its own log level, there are no "-L loglevel" options on command line
+or in configuration files), and can be used to override the default
+WARNING log level.
+
+@item "GNUNET_FORCE_LOG" will completely override any other log
+configuration options given.
+
+@item "GNUNET_FORCE_LOGFILE" will completely override the location of the
+file to log messages to. It should contain a relative or absolute file
+name. Setting GNUNET_FORCE_LOGFILE is equivalent to passing
+"--log-file=logfile" or "-l logfile" option (see below). It supports "[]"
+format in file names, but not "@{@}" (see below).
+@end itemize
+
+
+Because environment variables are inherited by child processes when they
+are launched, starting or re-starting the ARM service with these
+variables will propagate them to all other services.
+
+"GNUNET_LOG" and "GNUNET_FORCE_LOG" variables must contain a specially
+formatted @strong{logging definition} string, which looks like this:@
+
+@c FIXME: Can we close this with [/component] instead?
+@example
+[component];[file];[function];[from_line[-to_line]];loglevel[/component...]
+@end example
+
+That is, a logging definition consists of definition entries, separated by
+slashes ('/'). If only one entry is present, there is no need to add a
+slash to its end (although it is not forbidden either).@ All definition
+fields (component, file, function, lines and loglevel) are mandatory, but
+(except for the loglevel) they can be empty. An empty field means
+"match anything". Note that even if fields are empty, the semicolon (';')
+separators must be present.@ The loglevel field is mandatory, and must
+contain one of the log level names (ERROR, WARNING, INFO or DEBUG).@
+The lines field might contain one non-negative number, in which case it
+matches only one line, or a range "from_line-to_line", in which case it
+matches any line in the interval [from_line;to_line] (that is, including
+both start and end line).@ GNUnet mostly defaults component name to the
+name of the service that is implemented in a process ('transport',
+'core', 'peerinfo', etc), but logging calls can specify custom component
+names using @code{GNUNET_log_from}.@ File name and function name are
+provided by the compiler (__FILE__ and __FUNCTION__ built-ins).
+
+Component, file and function fields are interpreted as non-extended
+regular expressions (GNU libc regex functions are used). Matching is
+case-sensitive, "^" and "$" will match the beginning and the end of the
+text. If a field is empty, its contents are automatically replaced with
+a ".*" regular expression, which matches anything. Matching is done in
+the default way, which means that the expression matches as long as it's
+contained anywhere in the string. Thus "GNUNET_" will match both
+"GNUNET_foo" and "BAR_GNUNET_BAZ". Use '^' and/or '$' to make sure that
+the expression matches at the start and/or at the end of the string.
+The semicolon (';') can't be escaped, and GNUnet will not use it in
+component names (it can't be used in function names and file names
+anyway).
+
+@end table
+
+
+Every logging call in GNUnet code will be (at run time) matched against
+the log definitions passed to the process. If a log definition fields are
+matching the call arguments, then the call log level is compared the the
+log level of that definition. If the call log level is less or equal to
+the definition log level, the call is allowed to proceed. Otherwise the
+logging call is forbidden, and nothing is logged. If no definitions
+matched at all, GNUnet will use the global log level or (if a global log
+level is not specified) will default to WARNING (that is, it will allow
+the call to proceed, if its level is less or equal to the global log
+level or to WARNING).
+
+That is, definitions are evaluated from left to right, and the first
+matching definition is used to allow or deny the logging call. Thus it is
+advised to place narrow definitions at the beginning of the logdef
+string, and generic definitions - at the end.
+
+Whether a call is allowed or not is only decided the first time this
+particular call is made. The evaluation result is then cached, so that
+any attempts to make the same call later will be allowed or disallowed
+right away. Because of that runtime log level evaluation should not
+significantly affect the process performance.
+Log definition parsing is only done once, at the first call to
+GNUNET_log_setup () made by the process (which is usually done soon after
+it starts).
+
+At the moment of writing there is no way to specify logging definitions
+from configuration files, only via environment variables.
+
+At the moment GNUnet will stop processing a log definition when it
+encounters an error in definition formatting or an error in regular
+expression syntax, and will not report the failure in any way.
+
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@menu
+* Examples::
+* Log files::
+* Updated behavior of GNUNET_log::
+@end menu
+
+@node Examples
+@subsubsection Examples
+
+@table @asis
+
+@item @code{GNUNET_FORCE_LOG=";;;;DEBUG" gnunet-arm -s} Start GNUnet
+process tree, running all processes with DEBUG level (one should be
+careful with it, as log files will grow at alarming rate!)
+@item @code{GNUNET_FORCE_LOG="core;;;;DEBUG" gnunet-arm -s} Start GNUnet
+process tree, running the core service under DEBUG level (everything else
+will use configured or default level).
+
+@item Start GNUnet process tree, allowing any logging calls from
+gnunet-service-transport_validation.c (everything else will use
+configured or default level).
+
+@example
+GNUNET_FORCE_LOG=";gnunet-service-transport_validation.c;;; DEBUG" \
+gnunet-arm -s
+@end example
+
+@item Start GNUnet process tree, allowing any logging calls from
+gnunet-gnunet-service-fs_push.c (everything else will use configured or
+default level).
+
+@example
+GNUNET_FORCE_LOG="fs;gnunet-service-fs_push.c;;;DEBUG" gnunet-arm -s
+@end example
+
+@item Start GNUnet process tree, allowing any logging calls from the
+GNUNET_NETWORK_socket_select function (everything else will use
+configured or default level).
+
+@example
+GNUNET_FORCE_LOG=";;GNUNET_NETWORK_socket_select;;DEBUG" gnunet-arm -s
+@end example
+
+@item Start GNUnet process tree, allowing any logging calls from the
+components that have "transport" in their names, and are made from
+function that have "send" in their names. Everything else will be allowed
+to be logged only if it has WARNING level.
+
+@example
+GNUNET_FORCE_LOG="transport.*;;.*send.*;;DEBUG/;;;;WARNING" gnunet-arm -s
+@end example
+
+@end table
+
+
+On Windows, one can use batch files to run GNUnet processes with special
+environment variables, without affecting the whole system. Such batch
+file will look like this:
+
+@example
+set GNUNET_FORCE_LOG=;;do_transmit;;DEBUG@ gnunet-arm -s
+@end example
+
+(note the absence of double quotes in the environment variable definition,
+as opposed to earlier examples, which use the shell).
+Another limitation, on Windows, GNUNET_FORCE_LOGFILE @strong{MUST} be set
+in order to GNUNET_FORCE_LOG to work.
+
+
+@cindex Log files
+@node Log files
+@subsubsection Log files
+
+GNUnet can be told to log everything into a file instead of stderr (which
+is the default) using the "--log-file=logfile" or "-l logfile" option.
+This option can also be passed via command line, or from the "OPTION" and
+"GLOBAL_POSTFIX" configuration keys (see above). The file name passed
+with this option is subject to GNUnet filename expansion. If specified in
+"GLOBAL_POSTFIX", it is also subject to ARM service filename expansion,
+in particular, it may contain "@{@}" (left and right curly brace)
+sequence, which will be replaced by ARM with the name of the service.
+This is used to keep logs from more than one service separate, while only
+specifying one template containing "@{@}" in GLOBAL_POSTFIX.
+
+As part of a secondary file name expansion, the first occurrence of "[]"
+sequence ("left square brace" followed by "right square brace") in the
+file name will be replaced with a process identifier or the process when
+it initializes its logging subsystem. As a result, all processes will log
+into different files. This is convenient for isolating messages of a
+particular process, and prevents I/O races when multiple processes try to
+write into the file at the same time. This expansion is done
+independently of "@{@}" expansion that ARM service does (see above).
+
+The log file name that is specified via "-l" can contain format characters
+from the 'strftime' function family. For example, "%Y" will be replaced
+with the current year. Using "basename-%Y-%m-%d.log" would include the
+current year, month and day in the log file. If a GNUnet process runs for
+long enough to need more than one log file, it will eventually clean up
+old log files. Currently, only the last three log files (plus the current
+log file) are preserved. So once the fifth log file goes into use (so
+after 4 days if you use "%Y-%m-%d" as above), the first log file will be
+automatically deleted. Note that if your log file name only contains "%Y",
+then log files would be kept for 4 years and the logs from the first year
+would be deleted once year 5 begins. If you do not use any date-related
+string format codes, logs would never be automatically deleted by GNUnet.
+
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+
+@node Updated behavior of GNUNET_log
+@subsubsection Updated behavior of GNUNET_log
+
+It's currently quite common to see constructions like this all over the
+code:
+
+@example
+#if MESH_DEBUG
+GNUNET_log (GNUNET_ERROR_TYPE_DEBUG, "MESH: client disconnected\n");
+#endif
+@end example
+
+The reason for the #if is not to avoid displaying the message when
+disabled (GNUNET_ERROR_TYPE takes care of that), but to avoid the
+compiler including it in the binary at all, when compiling GNUnet for
+platforms with restricted storage space / memory (MIPS routers,
+ARM plug computers / dev boards, etc).
+
+This presents several problems: the code gets ugly, hard to write and it
+is very easy to forget to include the #if guards, creating non-consistent
+code. A new change in GNUNET_log aims to solve these problems.
+
+@strong{This change requires to @file{./configure} with at least
+@code{--enable-logging=verbose} to see debug messages.}
+
+Here is an example of code with dense debug statements:
+
+@example
+switch (restrict_topology) @{
+case GNUNET_TESTING_TOPOLOGY_CLIQUE:#if VERBOSE_TESTING
+GNUNET_log (GNUNET_ERROR_TYPE_DEBUG, _("Blacklisting all but clique
+topology\n")); #endif unblacklisted_connections = create_clique (pg,
+&remove_connections, BLACKLIST, GNUNET_NO); break; case
+GNUNET_TESTING_TOPOLOGY_SMALL_WORLD_RING: #if VERBOSE_TESTING GNUNET_log
+(GNUNET_ERROR_TYPE_DEBUG, _("Blacklisting all but small world (ring)
+topology\n")); #endif unblacklisted_connections = create_small_world_ring
+(pg,&remove_connections, BLACKLIST); break;
+@end example
+
+
+Pretty hard to follow, huh?
+
+From now on, it is not necessary to include the #if / #endif statements to
+achieve the same behavior. The GNUNET_log and GNUNET_log_from macros take
+care of it for you, depending on the configure option:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item If @code{--enable-logging} is set to @code{no}, the binary will
+contain no log messages at all.
+@item If @code{--enable-logging} is set to @code{yes}, the binary will
+contain no DEBUG messages, and therefore running with -L DEBUG will have
+no effect. Other messages (ERROR, WARNING, INFO, etc) will be included.
+@item If @code{--enable-logging} is set to @code{verbose}, or
+@code{veryverbose} the binary will contain DEBUG messages (still, it will
+be neccessary to run with -L DEBUG or set the DEBUG config option to show
+them).
+@end itemize
+
+
+If you are a developer:
+@itemize @bullet
+@item please make sure that you @code{./configure
+--enable-logging=@{verbose,veryverbose@}}, so you can see DEBUG messages.
+@item please remove the @code{#if} statements around @code{GNUNET_log
+(GNUNET_ERROR_TYPE_DEBUG, ...)} lines, to improve the readibility of your
+code.
+@end itemize
+
+Since now activating DEBUG automatically makes it VERBOSE and activates
+@strong{all} debug messages by default, you probably want to use the
+https://gnunet.org/logging functionality to filter only relevant messages.
+A suitable configuration could be:
+
+@example
+$ export GNUNET_FORCE_LOG="^YOUR_SUBSYSTEM$;;;;DEBUG/;;;;WARNING"
+@end example
+
+Which will behave almost like enabling DEBUG in that subsytem before the
+change. Of course you can adapt it to your particular needs, this is only
+a quick example.
+
+@cindex Interprocess communication API
+@cindex ICP
+@node Interprocess communication API (IPC)
+@subsection Interprocess communication API (IPC)
+
+In GNUnet a variety of new message types might be defined and used in
+interprocess communication, in this tutorial we use the
+@code{struct AddressLookupMessage} as a example to introduce how to
+construct our own message type in GNUnet and how to implement the message
+communication between service and client.
+(Here, a client uses the @code{struct AddressLookupMessage} as a request
+to ask the server to return the address of any other peer connecting to
+the service.)
+
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@menu
+* Define new message types::
+* Define message struct::
+* Client - Establish connection::
+* Client - Initialize request message::
+* Client - Send request and receive response::
+* Server - Startup service::
+* Server - Add new handles for specified messages::
+* Server - Process request message::
+* Server - Response to client::
+* Server - Notification of clients::
+* Conversion between Network Byte Order (Big Endian) and Host Byte Order::
+@end menu
+
+@node Define new message types
+@subsubsection Define new message types
+
+First of all, you should define the new message type in
+@file{gnunet_protocols.h}:
+
+@example
+ // Request to look addresses of peers in server.
+#define GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_TRANSPORT_ADDRESS_LOOKUP 29
+  // Response to the address lookup request.
+#define GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_TRANSPORT_ADDRESS_REPLY 30
+@end example
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node Define message struct
+@subsubsection Define message struct
+
+After the type definition, the specified message structure should also be
+described in the header file, e.g. transport.h in our case.
+
+@example
+struct AddressLookupMessage @{
+  struct GNUNET_MessageHeader header;
+  int32_t numeric_only GNUNET_PACKED;
+  struct GNUNET_TIME_AbsoluteNBO timeout;
+  uint32_t addrlen GNUNET_PACKED;
+  /* followed by 'addrlen' bytes of the actual address, then
+     followed by the 0-terminated name of the transport */ @};
+GNUNET_NETWORK_STRUCT_END
+@end example
+
+
+Please note @code{GNUNET_NETWORK_STRUCT_BEGIN} and @code{GNUNET_PACKED}
+which both ensure correct alignment when sending structs over the network.
+
+@menu
+@end menu
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node Client - Establish connection
+@subsubsection Client - Establish connection
+@c %**end of header
+
+
+At first, on the client side, the underlying API is employed to create a
+new connection to a service, in our example the transport service would be
+connected.
+
+@example
+struct GNUNET_CLIENT_Connection *client;
+client = GNUNET_CLIENT_connect ("transport", cfg);
+@end example
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node Client - Initialize request message
+@subsubsection Client - Initialize request message
+@c %**end of header
+
+When the connection is ready, we initialize the message. In this step,
+all the fields of the message should be properly initialized, namely the
+size, type, and some extra user-defined data, such as timeout, name of
+transport, address and name of transport.
+
+@example
+struct AddressLookupMessage *msg;
+size_t len = sizeof (struct AddressLookupMessage)
+  + addressLen
+  + strlen (nameTrans)
+  + 1;
+msg->header->size = htons (len);
+msg->header->type = htons
+(GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_TRANSPORT_ADDRESS_LOOKUP);
+msg->timeout = GNUNET_TIME_absolute_hton (abs_timeout);
+msg->addrlen = htonl (addressLen);
+char *addrbuf = (char *) &msg[1];
+memcpy (addrbuf, address, addressLen);
+char *tbuf = &addrbuf[addressLen];
+memcpy (tbuf, nameTrans, strlen (nameTrans) + 1);
+@end example
+
+Note that, here the functions @code{htonl}, @code{htons} and
+@code{GNUNET_TIME_absolute_hton} are applied to convert little endian
+into big endian, about the usage of the big/small edian order and the
+corresponding conversion function please refer to Introduction of
+Big Endian and Little Endian.
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node Client - Send request and receive response
+@subsubsection Client - Send request and receive response
+@c %**end of header
+
+@b{FIXME: This is very outdated, see the tutorial for the current API!}
+
+Next, the client would send the constructed message as a request to the
+service and wait for the response from the service. To accomplish this
+goal, there are a number of API calls that can be used. In this example,
+@code{GNUNET_CLIENT_transmit_and_get_response} is chosen as the most
+appropriate function to use.
+
+@example
+GNUNET_CLIENT_transmit_and_get_response
+(client, msg->header, timeout, GNUNET_YES, &address_response_processor,
+arp_ctx);
+@end example
+
+the argument @code{address_response_processor} is a function with
+@code{GNUNET_CLIENT_MessageHandler} type, which is used to process the
+reply message from the service.
+
+@node Server - Startup service
+@subsubsection Server - Startup service
+
+After receiving the request message, we run a standard GNUnet service
+startup sequence using @code{GNUNET_SERVICE_run}, as follows,
+
+@example
+int main(int argc, char**argv) @{
+  GNUNET_SERVICE_run(argc, argv, "transport"
+  GNUNET_SERVICE_OPTION_NONE, &run, NULL)); @}
+@end example
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node Server - Add new handles for specified messages
+@subsubsection Server - Add new handles for specified messages
+@c %**end of header
+
+in the function above the argument @code{run} is used to initiate
+transport service,and defined like this:
+
+@example
+static void run (void *cls,
+struct GNUNET_SERVER_Handle *serv,
+const struct GNUNET_CONFIGURATION_Handle *cfg) @{
+  GNUNET_SERVER_add_handlers (serv, handlers); @}
+@end example
+
+
+Here, @code{GNUNET_SERVER_add_handlers} must be called in the run
+function to add new handlers in the service. The parameter
+@code{handlers} is a list of @code{struct GNUNET_SERVER_MessageHandler}
+to tell the service which function should be called when a particular
+type of message is received, and should be defined in this way:
+
+@example
+static struct GNUNET_SERVER_MessageHandler handlers[] = @{
+  @{&handle_start,
+   NULL,
+   GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_TRANSPORT_START,
+   0@},
+  @{&handle_send,
+   NULL,
+   GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_TRANSPORT_SEND,
+   0@},
+  @{&handle_try_connect,
+   NULL,
+   GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_TRANSPORT_TRY_CONNECT,
+   sizeof (struct TryConnectMessage)
+  @},
+  @{&handle_address_lookup,
+   NULL,
+   GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_TRANSPORT_ADDRESS_LOOKUP,
+   0@},
+  @{NULL,
+   NULL,
+   0,
+   0@}
+@};
+@end example
+
+
+As shown, the first member of the struct in the first area is a callback
+function, which is called to process the specified message types, given
+as the third member. The second parameter is the closure for the callback
+function, which is set to @code{NULL} in most cases, and the last
+parameter is the expected size of the message of this type, usually we
+set it to 0 to accept variable size, for special cases the exact size of
+the specified message also can be set. In addition, the terminator sign
+depicted as @code{@{NULL, NULL, 0, 0@}} is set in the last aera.
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node Server - Process request message
+@subsubsection Server - Process request message
+@c %**end of header
+
+After the initialization of transport service, the request message would
+be processed. Before handling the main message data, the validity of this
+message should be checked out, e.g., to check whether the size of message
+is correct.
+
+@example
+size = ntohs (message->size);
+if (size < sizeof (struct AddressLookupMessage)) @{
+  GNUNET_break_op (0);
+  GNUNET_SERVER_receive_done (client, GNUNET_SYSERR);
+  return; @}
+@end example
+
+
+Note that, opposite to the construction method of the request message in
+the client, in the server the function @code{nothl} and @code{ntohs}
+should be employed during the extraction of the data from the message, so
+that the data in big endian order can be converted back into little
+endian order. See more in detail please refer to Introduction of
+Big Endian and Little Endian.
+
+Moreover in this example, the name of the transport stored in the message
+is a 0-terminated string, so we should also check whether the name of the
+transport in the received message is 0-terminated:
+
+@example
+nameTransport = (const char *) &address[addressLen];
+if (nameTransport[size - sizeof
+                  (struct AddressLookupMessage)
+                  - addressLen - 1] != '\0') @{
+  GNUNET_break_op (0);
+  GNUNET_SERVER_receive_done (client,
+                              GNUNET_SYSERR);
+  return; @}
+@end example
+
+Here, @code{GNUNET_SERVER_receive_done} should be called to tell the
+service that the request is done and can receive the next message. The
+argument @code{GNUNET_SYSERR} here indicates that the service didn't
+understand the request message, and the processing of this request would
+be terminated.
+
+In comparison to the aforementioned situation, when the argument is equal
+to @code{GNUNET_OK}, the service would continue to process the requst
+message.
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node Server - Response to client
+@subsubsection Server - Response to client
+@c %**end of header
+
+Once the processing of current request is done, the server should give the
+response to the client. A new @code{struct AddressLookupMessage} would be
+produced by the server in a similar way as the client did and sent to the
+client, but here the type should be
+@code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_TRANSPORT_ADDRESS_REPLY} rather than
+@code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_TRANSPORT_ADDRESS_LOOKUP} in client.
+@example
+struct AddressLookupMessage *msg;
+size_t len = sizeof (struct AddressLookupMessage)
+  + addressLen
+  + strlen (nameTrans) + 1;
+msg->header->size = htons (len);
+msg->header->type = htons
+  (GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_TRANSPORT_ADDRESS_REPLY);
+
+// ...
+
+struct GNUNET_SERVER_TransmitContext *tc;
+tc = GNUNET_SERVER_transmit_context_create (client);
+GNUNET_SERVER_transmit_context_append_data
+(tc,
+ NULL,
+ 0,
+ GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_TRANSPORT_ADDRESS_REPLY);
+GNUNET_SERVER_transmit_context_run (tc, rtimeout);
+@end example
+
+
+Note that, there are also a number of other APIs provided to the service
+to send the message.
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node Server - Notification of clients
+@subsubsection Server - Notification of clients
+@c %**end of header
+
+Often a service needs to (repeatedly) transmit notifications to a client
+or a group of clients. In these cases, the client typically has once
+registered for a set of events and then needs to receive a message
+whenever such an event happens (until the client disconnects). The use of
+a notification context can help manage message queues to clients and
+handle disconnects. Notification contexts can be used to send
+individualized messages to a particular client or to broadcast messages
+to a group of clients. An individualized notification might look like
+this:
+
+@example
+GNUNET_SERVER_notification_context_unicast(nc,
+                                           client,
+                                           msg,
+                                           GNUNET_YES);
+@end example
+
+
+Note that after processing the original registration message for
+notifications, the server code still typically needs to call
+@code{GNUNET_SERVER_receive_done} so that the client can transmit further
+messages to the server.
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node Conversion between Network Byte Order (Big Endian) and Host Byte Order
+@subsubsection Conversion between Network Byte Order (Big Endian) and Host Byte Order
+@c %** subsub? it's a referenced page on the ipc document.
+@c %**end of header
+
+Here we can simply comprehend big endian and little endian as Network Byte
+Order and Host Byte Order respectively. What is the difference between
+both two?
+
+Usually in our host computer we store the data byte as Host Byte Order,
+for example, we store a integer in the RAM which might occupies 4 Byte,
+as Host Byte Order the higher Byte would be stored at the lower address
+of RAM, and the lower Byte would be stored at the higher address of RAM.
+However, contrast to this, Network Byte Order just take the totally
+opposite way to store the data, says, it will store the lower Byte at the
+lower address, and the higher Byte will stay at higher address.
+
+For the current communication of network, we normally exchange the
+information by surveying the data package, every two host wants to
+communicate with each other must send and receive data package through
+network. In order to maintain the identity of data through the
+transmission in the network, the order of the Byte storage must changed
+before sending and after receiving the data.
+
+There ten convenient functions to realize the conversion of Byte Order in
+GNUnet, as following:
+
+@table @asis
+
+@item uint16_t htons(uint16_t hostshort) Convert host byte order to net
+byte order with short int
+@item uint32_t htonl(uint32_t hostlong) Convert host byte
+order to net byte order with long int
+@item uint16_t ntohs(uint16_t netshort)
+Convert net byte order to host byte order with short int
+@item uint32_t
+ntohl(uint32_t netlong) Convert net byte order to host byte order with
+long int
+@item unsigned long long GNUNET_ntohll (unsigned long long netlonglong)
+Convert net byte order to host byte order with long long int
+@item unsigned long long GNUNET_htonll (unsigned long long hostlonglong)
+Convert host byte order to net byte order with long long int
+@item struct GNUNET_TIME_RelativeNBO GNUNET_TIME_relative_hton
+(struct GNUNET_TIME_Relative a) Convert relative time to network byte
+order.
+@item struct GNUNET_TIME_Relative GNUNET_TIME_relative_ntoh
+(struct GNUNET_TIME_RelativeNBO a) Convert relative time from network
+byte order.
+@item struct GNUNET_TIME_AbsoluteNBO GNUNET_TIME_absolute_hton
+(struct GNUNET_TIME_Absolute a) Convert relative time to network byte
+order.
+@item struct GNUNET_TIME_Absolute GNUNET_TIME_absolute_ntoh
+(struct GNUNET_TIME_AbsoluteNBO a) Convert relative time from network
+byte order.
+@end table
+
+@cindex Cryptography API
+@node Cryptography API
+@subsection Cryptography API
+@c %**end of header
+
+The gnunetutil APIs provides the cryptographic primitives used in GNUnet.
+GNUnet uses 2048 bit RSA keys for the session key exchange and for signing
+messages by peers and most other public-key operations. Most researchers
+in cryptography consider 2048 bit RSA keys as secure and practically
+unbreakable for a long time. The API provides functions to create a fresh
+key pair, read a private key from a file (or create a new file if the
+file does not exist), encrypt, decrypt, sign, verify and extraction of
+the public key into a format suitable for network transmission.
+
+For the encryption of files and the actual data exchanged between peers
+GNUnet uses 256-bit AES encryption. Fresh, session keys are negotiated
+for every new connection.@ Again, there is no published technique to
+break this cipher in any realistic amount of time. The API provides
+functions for generation of keys, validation of keys (important for
+checking that decryptions using RSA succeeded), encryption and decryption.
+
+GNUnet uses SHA-512 for computing one-way hash codes. The API provides
+functions to compute a hash over a block in memory or over a file on disk.
+
+The crypto API also provides functions for randomizing a block of memory,
+obtaining a single random number and for generating a permuation of the
+numbers 0 to n-1. Random number generation distinguishes between WEAK and
+STRONG random number quality; WEAK random numbers are pseudo-random
+whereas STRONG random numbers use entropy gathered from the operating
+system.
+
+Finally, the crypto API provides a means to deterministically generate a
+1024-bit RSA key from a hash code. These functions should most likely not
+be used by most applications; most importantly,
+GNUNET_CRYPTO_rsa_key_create_from_hash does not create an RSA-key that
+should be considered secure for traditional applications of RSA.
+
+@cindex Message Queue API
+@node Message Queue API
+@subsection Message Queue API
+@c %**end of header
+
+@strong{ Introduction }@
+Often, applications need to queue messages that
+are to be sent to other GNUnet peers, clients or services. As all of
+GNUnet's message-based communication APIs, by design, do not allow
+messages to be queued, it is common to implement custom message queues
+manually when they are needed. However, writing very similar code in
+multiple places is tedious and leads to code duplication.
+
+MQ (for Message Queue) is an API that provides the functionality to
+implement and use message queues. We intend to eventually replace all of
+the custom message queue implementations in GNUnet with MQ.
+
+@strong{ Basic Concepts }@
+The two most important entities in MQ are queues and envelopes.
+
+Every queue is backed by a specific implementation (e.g. for mesh, stream,
+connection, server client, etc.) that will actually deliver the queued
+messages. For convenience,@ some queues also allow to specify a list of
+message handlers. The message queue will then also wait for incoming
+messages and dispatch them appropriately.
+
+An envelope holds the the memory for a message, as well as metadata
+(Where is the envelope queued? What should happen after it has been
+sent?). Any envelope can only be queued in one message queue.
+
+@strong{ Creating Queues }@
+The following is a list of currently available message queues. Note that
+to avoid layering issues, message queues for higher level APIs are not
+part of @code{libgnunetutil}, but@ the respective API itself provides the
+queue implementation.
+
+@table @asis
+
+@item @code{GNUNET_MQ_queue_for_connection_client}
+Transmits queued messages over a @code{GNUNET_CLIENT_Connection} handle.
+Also supports receiving with message handlers.
+
+@item @code{GNUNET_MQ_queue_for_server_client}
+Transmits queued messages over a @code{GNUNET_SERVER_Client} handle. Does
+not support incoming message handlers.
+
+@item @code{GNUNET_MESH_mq_create} Transmits queued messages over a
+@code{GNUNET_MESH_Tunnel} handle. Does not support incoming message
+handlers.
+
+@item @code{GNUNET_MQ_queue_for_callbacks} This is the most general
+implementation. Instead of delivering and receiving messages with one of
+GNUnet's communication APIs, implementation callbacks are called. Refer to
+"Implementing Queues" for a more detailed explanation.
+@end table
+
+
+@strong{ Allocating Envelopes }@
+A GNUnet message (as defined by the GNUNET_MessageHeader) has three
+parts: The size, the type, and the body.
+
+MQ provides macros to allocate an envelope containing a message
+conveniently, automatically setting the size and type fields of the
+message.
+
+Consider the following simple message, with the body consisting of a
+single number value.
+@c why the empy code function?
+@code{}
+
+@example
+struct NumberMessage @{
+  /** Type: GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_EXAMPLE_1 */
+  struct GNUNET_MessageHeader header;
+  uint32_t number GNUNET_PACKED;
+@};
+@end example
+
+An envelope containing an instance of the NumberMessage can be
+constructed like this:
+
+@example
+struct GNUNET_MQ_Envelope *ev;
+struct NumberMessage *msg;
+ev = GNUNET_MQ_msg (msg, GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_EXAMPLE_1);
+msg->number = htonl (42);
+@end example
+
+In the above code, @code{GNUNET_MQ_msg} is a macro. The return value is
+the newly allocated envelope. The first argument must be a pointer to some
+@code{struct} containing a @code{struct GNUNET_MessageHeader header}
+field, while the second argument is the desired message type, in host
+byte order.
+
+The @code{msg} pointer now points to an allocated message, where the
+message type and the message size are already set. The message's size is
+inferred from the type of the @code{msg} pointer: It will be set to
+'sizeof(*msg)', properly converted to network byte order.
+
+If the message body's size is dynamic, the the macro
+@code{GNUNET_MQ_msg_extra} can be used to allocate an envelope whose
+message has additional space allocated after the @code{msg} structure.
+
+If no structure has been defined for the message,
+@code{GNUNET_MQ_msg_header_extra} can be used to allocate additional space
+after the message header. The first argument then must be a pointer to a
+@code{GNUNET_MessageHeader}.
+
+@strong{Envelope Properties}@
+A few functions in MQ allow to set additional properties on envelopes:
+
+@table @asis
+
+@item @code{GNUNET_MQ_notify_sent} Allows to specify a function that will
+be called once the envelope's message has been sent irrevocably.
+An envelope can be canceled precisely up to the@ point where the notify
+sent callback has been called.
+
+@item @code{GNUNET_MQ_disable_corking} No corking will be used when
+sending the message. Not every@ queue supports this flag, per default,
+envelopes are sent with corking.@
+
+@end table
+
+
+@strong{Sending Envelopes}@
+Once an envelope has been constructed, it can be queued for sending with
+@code{GNUNET_MQ_send}.
+
+Note that in order to avoid memory leaks, an envelope must either be sent
+(the queue will free it) or destroyed explicitly with
+@code{GNUNET_MQ_discard}.
+
+@strong{Canceling Envelopes}@
+An envelope queued with @code{GNUNET_MQ_send} can be canceled with
+@code{GNUNET_MQ_cancel}. Note that after the notify sent callback has
+been called, canceling a message results in undefined behavior.
+Thus it is unsafe to cancel an envelope that does not have a notify sent
+callback. When canceling an envelope, it is not necessary@ to call
+@code{GNUNET_MQ_discard}, and the envelope can't be sent again.
+
+@strong{ Implementing Queues }@
+@code{TODO}
+
+@cindex Service API
+@node Service API
+@subsection Service API
+@c %**end of header
+
+Most GNUnet code lives in the form of services. Services are processes
+that offer an API for other components of the system to build on. Those
+other components can be command-line tools for users, graphical user
+interfaces or other services. Services provide their API using an IPC
+protocol. For this, each service must listen on either a TCP port or a
+UNIX domain socket; for this, the service implementation uses the server
+API. This use of server is exposed directly to the users of the service
+API. Thus, when using the service API, one is usually also often using
+large parts of the server API. The service API provides various
+convenience functions, such as parsing command-line arguments and the
+configuration file, which are not found in the server API.
+The dual to the service/server API is the client API, which can be used to
+access services.
+
+The most common way to start a service is to use the
+@code{GNUNET_SERVICE_run} function from the program's main function.
+@code{GNUNET_SERVICE_run} will then parse the command line and
+configuration files and, based on the options found there,
+start the server. It will then give back control to the main
+program, passing the server and the configuration to the
+@code{GNUNET_SERVICE_Main} callback. @code{GNUNET_SERVICE_run}
+will also take care of starting the scheduler loop.
+If this is inappropriate (for example, because the scheduler loop
+is already running), @code{GNUNET_SERVICE_start} and
+related functions provide an alternative to @code{GNUNET_SERVICE_run}.
+
+When starting a service, the service_name option is used to determine
+which sections in the configuration file should be used to configure the
+service. A typical value here is the name of the @file{src/}
+sub-directory, for example @file{statistics}.
+The same string would also be given to
+@code{GNUNET_CLIENT_connect} to access the service.
+
+Once a service has been initialized, the program should use the
+@code{GNUNET_SERVICE_Main} callback to register message handlers
+using @code{GNUNET_SERVER_add_handlers}.
+The service will already have registered a handler for the
+"TEST" message.
+
+@fnindex GNUNET_SERVICE_Options
+The option bitfield (@code{enum GNUNET_SERVICE_Options})
+determines how a service should behave during shutdown.
+There are three key strategies:
+
+@table @asis
+
+@item instant (@code{GNUNET_SERVICE_OPTION_NONE})
+Upon receiving the shutdown
+signal from the scheduler, the service immediately terminates the server,
+closing all existing connections with clients.
+@item manual (@code{GNUNET_SERVICE_OPTION_MANUAL_SHUTDOWN})
+The service does nothing by itself
+during shutdown. The main program will need to take the appropriate
+action by calling GNUNET_SERVER_destroy or GNUNET_SERVICE_stop (depending
+on how the service was initialized) to terminate the service. This method
+is used by gnunet-service-arm and rather uncommon.
+@item soft (@code{GNUNET_SERVICE_OPTION_SOFT_SHUTDOWN})
+Upon receiving the shutdown signal from the scheduler,
+the service immediately tells the server to stop
+listening for incoming clients. Requests from normal existing clients are
+still processed and the server/service terminates once all normal clients
+have disconnected. Clients that are not expected to ever disconnect (such
+as clients that monitor performance values) can be marked as 'monitor'
+clients using GNUNET_SERVER_client_mark_monitor. Those clients will
+continue to be processed until all 'normal' clients have disconnected.
+Then, the server will terminate, closing the monitor connections.
+This mode is for example used by 'statistics', allowing existing 'normal'
+clients to set (possibly persistent) statistic values before terminating.
+
+@end table
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node Optimizing Memory Consumption of GNUnet's (Multi-) Hash Maps
+@subsection Optimizing Memory Consumption of GNUnet's (Multi-) Hash Maps
+@c %**end of header
+
+A commonly used data structure in GNUnet is a (multi-)hash map. It is most
+often used to map a peer identity to some data structure, but also to map
+arbitrary keys to values (for example to track requests in the distributed
+hash table or in file-sharing). As it is commonly used, the DHT is
+actually sometimes responsible for a large share of GNUnet's overall
+memory consumption (for some processes, 30% is not uncommon). The
+following text documents some API quirks (and their implications for
+applications) that were recently introduced to minimize the footprint of
+the hash map.
+
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@menu
+* Analysis::
+* Solution::
+* Migration::
+* Conclusion::
+* Availability::
+@end menu
+
+@node Analysis
+@subsubsection Analysis
+@c %**end of header
+
+The main reason for the "excessive" memory consumption by the hash map is
+that GNUnet uses 512-bit cryptographic hash codes --- and the
+(multi-)hash map also uses the same 512-bit 'struct GNUNET_HashCode'. As
+a result, storing just the keys requires 64 bytes of memory for each key.
+As some applications like to keep a large number of entries in the hash
+map (after all, that's what maps are good for), 64 bytes per hash is
+significant: keeping a pointer to the value and having a linked list for
+collisions consume between 8 and 16 bytes, and 'malloc' may add about the
+same overhead per allocation, putting us in the 16 to 32 byte per entry
+ballpark. Adding a 64-byte key then triples the overall memory
+requirement for the hash map.
+
+To make things "worse", most of the time storing the key in the hash map
+is not required: it is typically already in memory elsewhere! In most
+cases, the values stored in the hash map are some application-specific
+struct that _also_ contains the hash. Here is a simplified example:
+
+@example
+struct MyValue @{
+struct GNUNET_HashCode key;
+unsigned int my_data; @};
+
+// ...
+val = GNUNET_malloc (sizeof (struct MyValue));
+val->key = key;
+val->my_data = 42;
+GNUNET_CONTAINER_multihashmap_put (map, &key, val, ...);
+@end example
+
+This is a common pattern as later the entries might need to be removed,
+and at that time it is convenient to have the key immediately at hand:
+
+@example
+GNUNET_CONTAINER_multihashmap_remove (map, &val->key, val);
+@end example
+
+
+Note that here we end up with two times 64 bytes for the key, plus maybe
+64 bytes total for the rest of the 'struct MyValue' and the map entry in
+the hash map. The resulting redundant storage of the key increases
+overall memory consumption per entry from the "optimal" 128 bytes to 192
+bytes. This is not just an extreme example: overheads in practice are
+actually sometimes close to those highlighted in this example. This is
+especially true for maps with a significant number of entries, as there
+we tend to really try to keep the entries small.
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node Solution
+@subsubsection Solution
+@c %**end of header
+
+The solution that has now been implemented is to @strong{optionally}
+allow the hash map to not make a (deep) copy of the hash but instead have
+a pointer to the hash/key in the entry. This reduces the memory
+consumption for the key from 64 bytes to 4 to 8 bytes. However, it can
+also only work if the key is actually stored in the entry (which is the
+case most of the time) and if the entry does not modify the key (which in
+all of the code I'm aware of has been always the case if there key is
+stored in the entry). Finally, when the client stores an entry in the
+hash map, it @strong{must} provide a pointer to the key within the entry,
+not just a pointer to a transient location of the key. If
+the client code does not meet these requirements, the result is a dangling
+pointer and undefined behavior of the (multi-)hash map API.
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node Migration
+@subsubsection Migration
+@c %**end of header
+
+To use the new feature, first check that the values contain the respective
+key (and never modify it). Then, all calls to
+@code{GNUNET_CONTAINER_multihashmap_put} on the respective map must be
+audited and most likely changed to pass a pointer into the value's struct.
+For the initial example, the new code would look like this:
+
+@example
+struct MyValue @{
+struct GNUNET_HashCode key;
+unsigned int my_data; @};
+
+// ...
+val = GNUNET_malloc (sizeof (struct MyValue));
+val->key = key; val->my_data = 42;
+GNUNET_CONTAINER_multihashmap_put (map, &val->key, val, ...);
+@end example
+
+
+Note that @code{&val} was changed to @code{&val->key} in the argument to
+the @code{put} call. This is critical as often @code{key} is on the stack
+or in some other transient data structure and thus having the hash map
+keep a pointer to @code{key} would not work. Only the key inside of
+@code{val} has the same lifetime as the entry in the map (this must of
+course be checked as well). Naturally, @code{val->key} must be
+intiialized before the @code{put} call. Once all @code{put} calls have
+been converted and double-checked, you can change the call to create the
+hash map from
+
+@example
+map =
+GNUNET_CONTAINER_multihashmap_create (SIZE, GNUNET_NO);
+@end example
+
+to
+
+@example
+map = GNUNET_CONTAINER_multihashmap_create (SIZE, GNUNET_YES);
+@end example
+
+If everything was done correctly, you now use about 60 bytes less memory
+per entry in @code{map}. However, if now (or in the future) any call to
+@code{put} does not ensure that the given key is valid until the entry is
+removed from the map, undefined behavior is likely to be observed.
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node Conclusion
+@subsubsection Conclusion
+@c %**end of header
+
+The new optimization can is often applicable and can result in a
+reduction in memory consumption of up to 30% in practice. However, it
+makes the code less robust as additional invariants are imposed on the
+multi hash map client. Thus applications should refrain from enabling the
+new mode unless the resulting performance increase is deemed significant
+enough. In particular, it should generally not be used in new code (wait
+at least until benchmarks exist).
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node Availability
+@subsubsection Availability
+@c %**end of header
+
+The new multi hash map code was committed in SVN 24319 (will be in GNUnet
+0.9.4). Various subsystems (transport, core, dht, file-sharing) were
+previously audited and modified to take advantage of the new capability.
+In particular, memory consumption of the file-sharing service is expected
+to drop by 20-30% due to this change.
+
+
+@cindex CONTAINER_MDLL API
+@node CONTAINER_MDLL API
+@subsection CONTAINER_MDLL API
+@c %**end of header
+
+This text documents the GNUNET_CONTAINER_MDLL API. The
+GNUNET_CONTAINER_MDLL API is similar to the GNUNET_CONTAINER_DLL API in
+that it provides operations for the construction and manipulation of
+doubly-linked lists. The key difference to the (simpler) DLL-API is that
+the MDLL-version allows a single element (instance of a "struct") to be
+in multiple linked lists at the same time.
+
+Like the DLL API, the MDLL API stores (most of) the data structures for
+the doubly-linked list with the respective elements; only the 'head' and
+'tail' pointers are stored "elsewhere" --- and the application needs to
+provide the locations of head and tail to each of the calls in the
+MDLL API. The key difference for the MDLL API is that the "next" and
+"previous" pointers in the struct can no longer be simply called "next"
+and "prev" --- after all, the element may be in multiple doubly-linked
+lists, so we cannot just have one "next" and one "prev" pointer!
+
+The solution is to have multiple fields that must have a name of the
+format "next_XX" and "prev_XX" where "XX" is the name of one of the
+doubly-linked lists. Here is a simple example:
+
+@example
+struct MyMultiListElement @{
+  struct MyMultiListElement *next_ALIST;
+  struct MyMultiListElement *prev_ALIST;
+  struct MyMultiListElement *next_BLIST;
+  struct MyMultiListElement *prev_BLIST;
+  void
+  *data;
+@};
+@end example
+
+
+Note that by convention, we use all-uppercase letters for the list names.
+In addition, the program needs to have a location for the head and tail
+pointers for both lists, for example:
+
+@example
+static struct MyMultiListElement *head_ALIST;
+static struct MyMultiListElement *tail_ALIST;
+static struct MyMultiListElement *head_BLIST;
+static struct MyMultiListElement *tail_BLIST;
+@end example
+
+
+Using the MDLL-macros, we can now insert an element into the ALIST:
+
+@example
+GNUNET_CONTAINER_MDLL_insert (ALIST, head_ALIST, tail_ALIST, element);
+@end example
+
+
+Passing "ALIST" as the first argument to MDLL specifies which of the
+next/prev fields in the 'struct MyMultiListElement' should be used. The
+extra "ALIST" argument and the "_ALIST" in the names of the
+next/prev-members are the only differences between the MDDL and DLL-API.
+Like the DLL-API, the MDLL-API offers functions for inserting (at head,
+at tail, after a given element) and removing elements from the list.
+Iterating over the list should be done by directly accessing the
+"next_XX" and/or "prev_XX" members.
+
+@cindex Automatic Restart Manager
+@cindex ARM
+@node Automatic Restart Manager (ARM)
+@section Automatic Restart Manager (ARM)
+@c %**end of header
+
+GNUnet's Automated Restart Manager (ARM) is the GNUnet service responsible
+for system initialization and service babysitting. ARM starts and halts
+services, detects configuration changes and restarts services impacted by
+the changes as needed. It's also responsible for restarting services in
+case of crashes and is planned to incorporate automatic debugging for
+diagnosing service crashes providing developers insights about crash
+reasons. The purpose of this document is to give GNUnet developer an idea
+about how ARM works and how to interact with it.
+
+@menu
+* Basic functionality::
+* Key configuration options::
+* ARM - Availability::
+* Reliability::
+@end menu
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node Basic functionality
+@subsection Basic functionality
+@c %**end of header
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item ARM source code can be found under "src/arm".@ Service processes are
+managed by the functions in "gnunet-service-arm.c" which is controlled
+with "gnunet-arm.c" (main function in that file is ARM's entry point).
+
+@item The functions responsible for communicating with ARM , starting and
+stopping services -including ARM service itself- are provided by the
+ARM API "arm_api.c".@ Function: GNUNET_ARM_connect() returns to the caller
+an ARM handle after setting it to the caller's context (configuration and
+scheduler in use). This handle can be used afterwards by the caller to
+communicate with ARM. Functions GNUNET_ARM_start_service() and
+GNUNET_ARM_stop_service() are used for starting and stopping services
+respectively.
+
+@item A typical example of using these basic ARM services can be found in
+file test_arm_api.c. The test case connects to ARM, starts it, then uses
+it to start a service "resolver", stops the "resolver" then stops "ARM".
+@end itemize
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node Key configuration options
+@subsection Key configuration options
+@c %**end of header
+
+Configurations for ARM and services should be available in a .conf file
+(As an example, see test_arm_api_data.conf). When running ARM, the
+configuration file to use should be passed to the command:
+
+@example
+$ gnunet-arm -s -c configuration_to_use.conf
+@end example
+
+If no configuration is passed, the default configuration file will be used
+(see GNUNET_PREFIX/share/gnunet/defaults.conf which is created from
+contrib/defaults.conf).@ Each of the services is having a section starting
+by the service name between square brackets, for example: "[arm]".
+The following options configure how ARM configures or interacts with the
+various services:
+
+@table @asis
+
+@item PORT Port number on which the service is listening for incoming TCP
+connections. ARM will start the services should it notice a request at
+this port.
+
+@item HOSTNAME Specifies on which host the service is deployed. Note
+that ARM can only start services that are running on the local system
+(but will not check that the hostname matches the local machine name).
+This option is used by the @code{gnunet_client_lib.h} implementation to
+determine which system to connect to. The default is "localhost".
+
+@item BINARY The name of the service binary file.
+
+@item OPTIONS To be passed to the service.
+
+@item PREFIX A command to pre-pend to the actual command, for example,
+running a service with "valgrind" or "gdb"
+
+@item DEBUG Run in debug mode (much verbosity).
+
+@item AUTOSTART ARM will listen to UNIX domain socket and/or TCP port of
+the service and start the service on-demand.
+
+@item FORCESTART ARM will always start this service when the peer
+is started.
+
+@item ACCEPT_FROM IPv4 addresses the service accepts connections from.
+
+@item ACCEPT_FROM6 IPv6 addresses the service accepts connections from.
+
+@end table
+
+
+Options that impact the operation of ARM overall are in the "[arm]"
+section. ARM is a normal service and has (except for AUTOSTART) all of the
+options that other services do. In addition, ARM has the
+following options:
+
+@table @asis
+
+@item GLOBAL_PREFIX Command to be pre-pended to all services that are
+going to run.
+
+@item GLOBAL_POSTFIX Global option that will be supplied to all the
+services that are going to run.
+
+@end table
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node ARM - Availability
+@subsection ARM - Availability
+@c %**end of header
+
+As mentioned before, one of the features provided by ARM is starting
+services on demand. Consider the example of one service "client" that
+wants to connect to another service a "server". The "client" will ask ARM
+to run the "server". ARM starts the "server". The "server" starts
+listening to incoming connections. The "client" will establish a
+connection with the "server". And then, they will start to communicate
+together.@ One problem with that scheme is that it's slow!@
+The "client" service wants to communicate with the "server" service at
+once and is not willing wait for it to be started and listening to
+incoming connections before serving its request.@ One solution for that
+problem will be that ARM starts all services as default services. That
+solution will solve the problem, yet, it's not quite practical, for some
+services that are going to be started can never be used or are going to
+be used after a relatively long time.@
+The approach followed by ARM to solve this problem is as follows:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item For each service having a PORT field in the configuration file and
+that is not one of the default services ( a service that accepts incoming
+connections from clients), ARM creates listening sockets for all addresses
+associated with that service.
+
+@item The "client" will immediately establish a connection with
+the "server".
+
+@item ARM --- pretending to be the "server" --- will listen on the
+respective port and notice the incoming connection from the "client"
+(but not accept it), instead
+
+@item Once there is an incoming connection, ARM will start the "server",
+passing on the listen sockets (now, the service is started and can do its
+work).
+
+@item Other client services now can directly connect directly to the
+"server".
+
+@end itemize
+
+@c ***********************************************************************
+@node Reliability
+@subsection Reliability
+
+One of the features provided by ARM, is the automatic restart of crashed
+services.@ ARM needs to know which of the running services died. Function
+"gnunet-service-arm.c/maint_child_death()" is responsible for that. The
+function is scheduled to run upon receiving a SIGCHLD signal. The
+function, then, iterates ARM's list of services running and monitors
+which service has died (crashed). For all crashing services, ARM restarts
+them.@
+Now, considering the case of a service having a serious problem causing it
+to crash each time it's started by ARM. If ARM keeps blindly restarting
+such a service, we are going to have the pattern:
+start-crash-restart-crash-restart-crash and so forth!! Which is of course
+not practical.@
+For that reason, ARM schedules the service to be restarted after waiting
+for some delay that grows exponentially with each crash/restart of that
+service.@ To clarify the idea, considering the following example:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item Service S crashed.
+
+@item ARM receives the SIGCHLD and inspects its list of services to find
+the dead one(s).
+
+@item ARM finds S dead and schedules it for restarting after "backoff"
+time which is initially set to 1ms. ARM will double the backoff time
+correspondent to S (now backoff(S) = 2ms)
+
+@item Because there is a severe problem with S, it crashed again.
+
+@item Again ARM receives the SIGCHLD and detects that it's S again that's
+crashed. ARM schedules it for restarting but after its new backoff time
+(which became 2ms), and doubles its backoff time (now backoff(S) = 4).
+
+@item and so on, until backoff(S) reaches a certain threshold
+(@code{EXPONENTIAL_BACKOFF_THRESHOLD} is set to half an hour),
+after reaching it, backoff(S) will remain half an hour,
+hence ARM won't be busy for a lot of time trying to restart a
+problematic service.
+@end itemize
+
+@cindex TRANSPORT Subsystem
+@node TRANSPORT Subsystem
+@section TRANSPORT Subsystem
+@c %**end of header
+
+This chapter documents how the GNUnet transport subsystem works. The
+GNUnet transport subsystem consists of three main components: the
+transport API (the interface used by the rest of the system to access the
+transport service), the transport service itself (most of the interesting
+functions, such as choosing transports, happens here) and the transport
+plugins. A transport plugin is a concrete implementation for how two
+GNUnet peers communicate; many plugins exist, for example for
+communication via TCP, UDP, HTTP, HTTPS and others. Finally, the
+transport subsystem uses supporting code, especially the NAT/UPnP
+library to help with tasks such as NAT traversal.
+
+Key tasks of the transport service include:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item Create our HELLO message, notify clients and neighbours if our HELLO
+changes (using NAT library as necessary)
+
+@item Validate HELLOs from other peers (send PING), allow other peers to
+validate our HELLO's addresses (send PONG)
+
+@item Upon request, establish connections to other peers (using address
+selection from ATS subsystem) and maintain them (again using PINGs and
+PONGs) as long as desired
+
+@item Accept incoming connections, give ATS service the opportunity to
+switch communication channels
+
+@item Notify clients about peers that have connected to us or that have
+been disconnected from us
+
+@item If a (stateful) connection goes down unexpectedly (without explicit
+DISCONNECT), quickly attempt to recover (without notifying clients) but do
+notify clients quickly if reconnecting fails
+
+@item Send (payload) messages arriving from clients to other peers via
+transport plugins and receive messages from other peers, forwarding
+those to clients
+
+@item Enforce inbound traffic limits (using flow-control if it is
+applicable); outbound traffic limits are enforced by CORE, not by us (!)
+
+@item Enforce restrictions on P2P connection as specified by the blacklist
+configuration and blacklisting clients
+@end itemize
+
+Note that the term "clients" in the list above really refers to the
+GNUnet-CORE service, as CORE is typically the only client of the
+transport service.
+
+@menu
+* Address validation protocol::
+@end menu
+
+@node Address validation protocol
+@subsection Address validation protocol
+@c %**end of header
+
+This section documents how the GNUnet transport service validates
+connections with other peers. It is a high-level description of the
+protocol necessary to understand the details of the implementation. It
+should be noted that when we talk about PING and PONG messages in this
+section, we refer to transport-level PING and PONG messages, which are
+different from core-level PING and PONG messages (both in implementation
+and function).
+
+The goal of transport-level address validation is to minimize the chances
+of a successful man-in-the-middle attack against GNUnet peers on the
+transport level. Such an attack would not allow the adversary to decrypt
+the P2P transmissions, but a successful attacker could at least measure
+traffic volumes and latencies (raising the adversaries capablities by
+those of a global passive adversary in the worst case). The scenarios we
+are concerned about is an attacker, Mallory, giving a @code{HELLO} to
+Alice that claims to be for Bob, but contains Mallory's IP address
+instead of Bobs (for some transport).
+Mallory would then forward the traffic to Bob (by initiating a
+connection to Bob and claiming to be Alice). As a further
+complication, the scheme has to work even if say Alice is behind a NAT
+without traversal support and hence has no address of her own (and thus
+Alice must always initiate the connection to Bob).
+
+An additional constraint is that @code{HELLO} messages do not contain a
+cryptographic signature since other peers must be able to edit
+(i.e. remove) addresses from the @code{HELLO} at any time (this was
+not true in GNUnet 0.8.x). A basic @strong{assumption} is that each peer
+knows the set of possible network addresses that it @strong{might}
+be reachable under (so for example, the external IP address of the
+NAT plus the LAN address(es) with the respective ports).
+
+The solution is the following. If Alice wants to validate that a given
+address for Bob is valid (i.e. is actually established @strong{directly}
+with the intended target), she sends a PING message over that connection
+to Bob. Note that in this case, Alice initiated the connection so only
+Alice knows which address was used for sure (Alice may be behind NAT, so
+whatever address Bob sees may not be an address Alice knows she has).
+Bob checks that the address given in the @code{PING} is actually one
+of Bob's addresses (ie: does not belong to Mallory), and if it is,
+sends back a @code{PONG} (with a signature that says that Bob
+owns/uses the address from the @code{PING}).
+Alice checks the signature and is happy if it is valid and the address
+in the @code{PONG} is the address Alice used.
+This is similar to the 0.8.x protocol where the @code{HELLO} contained a
+signature from Bob for each address used by Bob.
+Here, the purpose code for the signature is
+@code{GNUNET_SIGNATURE_PURPOSE_TRANSPORT_PONG_OWN}. After this, Alice will
+remember Bob's address and consider the address valid for a while (12h in
+the current implementation). Note that after this exchange, Alice only
+considers Bob's address to be valid, the connection itself is not
+considered 'established'. In particular, Alice may have many addresses
+for Bob that Alice considers valid.
+
+@c TODO: reference Footnotes so that I don't have to duplicate the
+@c footnotes or add them to an index at the end. Is this possible at
+@c all in Texinfo?
+The @code{PONG} message is protected with a nonce/challenge against replay
+attacks@footnote{@uref{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Replay_attack, replay}}
+and uses an expiration time for the signature (but those are almost
+implementation details).
+
+@cindex NAT library
+@node NAT library
+@section NAT library
+@c %**end of header
+
+The goal of the GNUnet NAT library is to provide a general-purpose API for
+NAT traversal @strong{without} third-party support. So protocols that
+involve contacting a third peer to help establish a connection between
+two peers are outside of the scope of this API. That does not mean that
+GNUnet doesn't support involving a third peer (we can do this with the
+distance-vector transport or using application-level protocols), it just
+means that the NAT API is not concerned with this possibility. The API is
+written so that it will work for IPv6-NAT in the future as well as
+current IPv4-NAT. Furthermore, the NAT API is always used, even for peers
+that are not behind NAT --- in that case, the mapping provided is simply
+the identity.
+
+NAT traversal is initiated by calling @code{GNUNET_NAT_register}. Given a
+set of addresses that the peer has locally bound to (TCP or UDP), the NAT
+library will return (via callback) a (possibly longer) list of addresses
+the peer @strong{might} be reachable under. Internally, depending on the
+configuration, the NAT library will try to punch a hole (using UPnP) or
+just "know" that the NAT was manually punched and generate the respective
+external IP address (the one that should be globally visible) based on
+the given information.
+
+The NAT library also supports ICMP-based NAT traversal. Here, the other
+peer can request connection-reversal by this peer (in this special case,
+the peer is even allowed to configure a port number of zero). If the NAT
+library detects a connection-reversal request, it returns the respective
+target address to the client as well. It should be noted that
+connection-reversal is currently only intended for TCP, so other plugins
+@strong{must} pass @code{NULL} for the reversal callback. Naturally, the
+NAT library also supports requesting connection reversal from a remote
+peer (@code{GNUNET_NAT_run_client}).
+
+Once initialized, the NAT handle can be used to test if a given address is
+possibly a valid address for this peer (@code{GNUNET_NAT_test_address}).
+This is used for validating our addresses when generating PONGs.
+
+Finally, the NAT library contains an API to test if our NAT configuration
+is correct. Using @code{GNUNET_NAT_test_start} @strong{before} binding to
+the respective port, the NAT library can be used to test if the
+configuration works. The test function act as a local client, initialize
+the NAT traversal and then contact a @code{gnunet-nat-server} (running by
+default on @code{gnunet.org}) and ask for a connection to be established.
+This way, it is easy to test if the current NAT configuration is valid.
+
+@node Distance-Vector plugin
+@section Distance-Vector plugin
+@c %**end of header
+
+The Distance Vector (DV) transport is a transport mechanism that allows
+peers to act as relays for each other, thereby connecting peers that would
+otherwise be unable to connect. This gives a larger connection set to
+applications that may work better with more peers to choose from (for
+example, File Sharing and/or DHT).
+
+The Distance Vector transport essentially has two functions. The first is
+"gossiping" connection information about more distant peers to directly
+connected peers. The second is taking messages intended for non-directly
+connected peers and encapsulating them in a DV wrapper that contains the
+required information for routing the message through forwarding peers. Via
+gossiping, optimal routes through the known DV neighborhood are discovered
+and utilized and the message encapsulation provides some benefits in
+addition to simply getting the message from the correct source to the
+proper destination.
+
+The gossiping function of DV provides an up to date routing table of
+peers that are available up to some number of hops. We call this a
+fisheye view of the network (like a fish, nearby objects are known while
+more distant ones unknown). Gossip messages are sent only to directly
+connected peers, but they are sent about other knowns peers within the
+"fisheye distance". Whenever two peers connect, they immediately gossip
+to each other about their appropriate other neighbors. They also gossip
+about the newly connected peer to previously
+connected neighbors. In order to keep the routing tables up to date,
+disconnect notifications are propogated as gossip as well (because
+disconnects may not be sent/received, timeouts are also used remove
+stagnant routing table entries).
+
+Routing of messages via DV is straightforward. When the DV transport is
+notified of a message destined for a non-direct neighbor, the appropriate
+forwarding peer is selected, and the base message is encapsulated in a DV
+message which contains information about the initial peer and the intended
+recipient. At each forwarding hop, the initial peer is validated (the
+forwarding peer ensures that it has the initial peer in its neighborhood,
+otherwise the message is dropped). Next the base message is
+re-encapsulated in a new DV message for the next hop in the forwarding
+chain (or delivered to the current peer, if it has arrived at the
+destination).
+
+Assume a three peer network with peers Alice, Bob and Carol. Assume that
+
+@example
+Alice <-> Bob and Bob <-> Carol
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+are direct (e.g. over TCP or UDP transports) connections, but that
+Alice cannot directly connect to Carol.
+This may be the case due to NAT or firewall restrictions, or perhaps
+based on one of the peers respective configurations. If the Distance
+Vector transport is enabled on all three peers, it will automatically
+discover (from the gossip protocol) that Alice and Carol can connect via
+Bob and provide a "virtual" Alice <-> Carol connection. Routing between
+Alice and Carol happens as follows; Alice creates a message destined for
+Carol and notifies the DV transport about it. The DV transport at Alice
+looks up Carol in the routing table and finds that the message must be
+sent through Bob for Carol. The message is encapsulated setting Alice as
+the initiator and Carol as the destination and sent to Bob. Bob receives
+the messages, verifies that both Alice and Carol are known to Bob, and
+re-wraps the message in a new DV message for Carol.
+The DV transport at Carol receives this message, unwraps the original
+message, and delivers it to Carol as though it came directly from Alice.
+
+@cindex SMTP plugin
+@node SMTP plugin
+@section SMTP plugin
+@c %**end of header
+
+This section describes the new SMTP transport plugin for GNUnet as it
+exists in the 0.7.x and 0.8.x branch. SMTP support is currently not
+available in GNUnet 0.9.x. This page also describes the transport layer
+abstraction (as it existed in 0.7.x and 0.8.x) in more detail and gives
+some benchmarking results. The performance results presented are quite
+old and maybe outdated at this point.
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item Why use SMTP for a peer-to-peer transport?
+@item SMTPHow does it work?
+@item How do I configure my peer?
+@item How do I test if it works?
+@item How fast is it?
+@item Is there any additional documentation?
+@end itemize
+
+
+@menu
+* Why use SMTP for a peer-to-peer transport?::
+* How does it work?::
+* How do I configure my peer?::
+* How do I test if it works?::
+* How fast is it?::
+@end menu
+
+@node Why use SMTP for a peer-to-peer transport?
+@subsection Why use SMTP for a peer-to-peer transport?
+@c %**end of header
+
+There are many reasons why one would not want to use SMTP:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item SMTP is using more bandwidth than TCP, UDP or HTTP
+@item SMTP has a much higher latency.
+@item SMTP requires significantly more computation (encoding and decoding
+time) for the peers.
+@item SMTP is significantly more complicated to configure.
+@item SMTP may be abused by tricking GNUnet into sending mail to@
+non-participating third parties.
+@end itemize
+
+So why would anybody want to use SMTP?
+@itemize @bullet
+@item SMTP can be used to contact peers behind NAT boxes (in virtual
+private networks).
+@item SMTP can be used to circumvent policies that limit or prohibit
+peer-to-peer traffic by masking as "legitimate" traffic.
+@item SMTP uses E-mail addresses which are independent of a specific IP,
+which can be useful to address peers that use dynamic IP addresses.
+@item SMTP can be used to initiate a connection (e.g. initial address
+exchange) and peers can then negotiate the use of a more efficient
+protocol (e.g. TCP) for the actual communication.
+@end itemize
+
+In summary, SMTP can for example be used to send a message to a peer
+behind a NAT box that has a dynamic IP to tell the peer to establish a
+TCP connection to a peer outside of the private network. Even an
+extraordinary overhead for this first message would be irrelevant in this
+type of situation.
+
+@node How does it work?
+@subsection How does it work?
+@c %**end of header
+
+When a GNUnet peer needs to send a message to another GNUnet peer that has
+advertised (only) an SMTP transport address, GNUnet base64-encodes the
+message and sends it in an E-mail to the advertised address. The
+advertisement contains a filter which is placed in the E-mail header,
+such that the receiving host can filter the tagged E-mails and forward it
+to the GNUnet peer process. The filter can be specified individually by
+each peer and be changed over time. This makes it impossible to censor
+GNUnet E-mail messages by searching for a generic filter.
+
+@node How do I configure my peer?
+@subsection How do I configure my peer?
+@c %**end of header
+
+First, you need to configure @code{procmail} to filter your inbound E-mail
+for GNUnet traffic. The GNUnet messages must be delivered into a pipe, for
+example @code{/tmp/gnunet.smtp}. You also need to define a filter that is
+used by @command{procmail} to detect GNUnet messages. You are free to
+choose whichever filter you like, but you should make sure that it does
+not occur in your other E-mail. In our example, we will use
+@code{X-mailer: GNUnet}. The @code{~/.procmailrc} configuration file then
+looks like this:
+
+@example
+:0:
+* ^X-mailer: GNUnet
+/tmp/gnunet.smtp
+# where do you want your other e-mail delivered to
+# (default: /var/spool/mail/)
+:0: /var/spool/mail/
+@end example
+
+After adding this file, first make sure that your regular E-mail still
+works (e.g. by sending an E-mail to yourself). Then edit the GNUnet
+configuration. In the section @code{SMTP} you need to specify your E-mail
+address under @code{EMAIL}, your mail server (for outgoing mail) under
+@code{SERVER}, the filter (X-mailer: GNUnet in the example) under
+@code{FILTER} and the name of the pipe under @code{PIPE}.@ The completed
+section could then look like this:
+
+@example
+EMAIL = me@@mail.gnu.org MTU = 65000 SERVER = mail.gnu.org:25 FILTER =
+"X-mailer: GNUnet" PIPE = /tmp/gnunet.smtp
+@end example
+
+Finally, you need to add @code{smtp} to the list of @code{TRANSPORTS} in
+the @code{GNUNETD} section. GNUnet peers will use the E-mail address that
+you specified to contact your peer until the advertisement times out.
+Thus, if you are not sure if everything works properly or if you are not
+planning to be online for a long time, you may want to configure this
+timeout to be short, e.g. just one hour. For this, set
+@code{HELLOEXPIRES} to @code{1} in the @code{GNUNETD} section.
+
+This should be it, but you may probably want to test it first.
+
+@node How do I test if it works?
+@subsection How do I test if it works?
+@c %**end of header
+
+Any transport can be subjected to some rudimentary tests using the
+@code{gnunet-transport-check} tool. The tool sends a message to the local
+node via the transport and checks that a valid message is received. While
+this test does not involve other peers and can not check if firewalls or
+other network obstacles prohibit proper operation, this is a great
+testcase for the SMTP transport since it tests pretty much nearly all of
+the functionality.
+
+@code{gnunet-transport-check} should only be used without running
+@code{gnunetd} at the same time. By default, @code{gnunet-transport-check}
+tests all transports that are specified in the configuration file. But
+you can specifically test SMTP by giving the option
+@code{--transport=smtp}.
+
+Note that this test always checks if a transport can receive and send.
+While you can configure most transports to only receive or only send
+messages, this test will only work if you have configured the transport
+to send and receive messages.
+
+@node How fast is it?
+@subsection How fast is it?
+@c %**end of header
+
+We have measured the performance of the UDP, TCP and SMTP transport layer
+directly and when used from an application using the GNUnet core.
+Measureing just the transport layer gives the better view of the actual
+overhead of the protocol, whereas evaluating the transport from the
+application puts the overhead into perspective from a practical point of
+view.
+
+The loopback measurements of the SMTP transport were performed on three
+different machines spanning a range of modern SMTP configurations. We
+used a PIII-800 running RedHat 7.3 with the Purdue Computer Science
+configuration which includes filters for spam. We also used a Xenon 2 GHZ
+with a vanilla RedHat 8.0 sendmail configuration. Furthermore, we used
+qmail on a PIII-1000 running Sorcerer GNU Linux (SGL). The numbers for
+UDP and TCP are provided using the SGL configuration. The qmail benchmark
+uses qmail's internal filtering whereas the sendmail benchmarks relies on
+procmail to filter and deliver the mail. We used the transport layer to
+send a message of b bytes (excluding transport protocol headers) directly
+to the local machine. This way, network latency and packet loss on the
+wire have no impact on the timings. n messages were sent sequentially over
+the transport layer, sending message i+1 after the i-th message was
+received. All messages were sent over the same connection and the time to
+establish the connection was not taken into account since this overhead is
+miniscule in practice --- as long as a connection is used for a
+significant number of messages.
+
+@multitable @columnfractions .20 .15 .15 .15 .15 .15
+@headitem Transport @tab UDP @tab TCP @tab SMTP (Purdue sendmail)
+@tab SMTP (RH 8.0) @tab SMTP (SGL qmail)
+@item  11 bytes @tab 31 ms @tab 55 ms @tab  781 s @tab 77 s @tab 24 s
+@item  407 bytes @tab 37 ms @tab 62 ms @tab  789 s @tab 78 s @tab 25 s
+@item 1,221 bytes @tab 46 ms @tab 73 ms @tab  804 s @tab 78 s @tab 25 s
+@end multitable
+
+The benchmarks show that UDP and TCP are, as expected, both significantly
+faster compared with any of the SMTP services. Among the SMTP
+implementations, there can be significant differences depending on the
+SMTP configuration. Filtering with an external tool like procmail that
+needs to re-parse its configuration for each mail can be very expensive.
+Applying spam filters can also significantly impact the performance of
+the underlying SMTP implementation. The microbenchmark shows that SMTP
+can be a viable solution for initiating peer-to-peer sessions: a couple of
+seconds to connect to a peer are probably not even going to be noticed by
+users. The next benchmark measures the possible throughput for a
+transport. Throughput can be measured by sending multiple messages in
+parallel and measuring packet loss. Note that not only UDP but also the
+TCP transport can actually loose messages since the TCP implementation
+drops messages if the @code{write} to the socket would block. While the
+SMTP protocol never drops messages itself, it is often so
+slow that only a fraction of the messages can be sent and received in the
+given time-bounds. For this benchmark we report the message loss after
+allowing t time for sending m messages. If messages were not sent (or
+received) after an overall timeout of t, they were considered lost. The
+benchmark was performed using two Xeon 2 GHZ machines running RedHat 8.0
+with sendmail. The machines were connected with a direct 100 MBit ethernet
+connection.@ Figures udp1200, tcp1200 and smtp-MTUs show that the
+throughput for messages of size 1,200 octects is 2,343 kbps, 3,310 kbps
+and 6 kbps for UDP, TCP and SMTP respectively. The high per-message
+overhead of SMTP can be improved by increasing the MTU, for example, an
+MTU of 12,000 octets improves the throughput to 13 kbps as figure
+smtp-MTUs shows. Our research paper) has some more details on the
+benchmarking results.
+
+@cindex Bluetooth plugin
+@node Bluetooth plugin
+@section Bluetooth plugin
+@c %**end of header
+
+This page describes the new Bluetooth transport plugin for GNUnet. The
+plugin is still in the testing stage so don't expect it to work
+perfectly. If you have any questions or problems just post them here or
+ask on the IRC channel.
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item What do I need to use the Bluetooth plugin transport?
+@item BluetoothHow does it work?
+@item What possible errors should I be aware of?
+@item How do I configure my peer?
+@item How can I test it?
+@end itemize
+
+@menu
+* What do I need to use the Bluetooth plugin transport?::
+* How does it work2?::
+* What possible errors should I be aware of?::
+* How do I configure my peer2?::
+* How can I test it?::
+* The implementation of the Bluetooth transport plugin::
+@end menu
+
+@node What do I need to use the Bluetooth plugin transport?
+@subsection What do I need to use the Bluetooth plugin transport?
+@c %**end of header
+
+If you are a GNU/Linux user and you want to use the Bluetooth
+transport plugin you should install the
+@command{BlueZ development libraries} (if they aren't already
+installed).
+For instructions about how to install the libraries you should
+check out the BlueZ site
+(@uref{http://www.bluez.org/, http://www.bluez.org}). If you don't know if
+you have the necesarry libraries, don't worry, just run the GNUnet
+configure script and you will be able to see a notification at the end
+which will warn you if you don't have the necessary libraries.
+
+If you are a Windows user you should have installed the
+@emph{MinGW}/@emph{MSys2} with the latest updates (especially the
+@emph{ws2bth} header). If this is your first build of GNUnet on Windows
+you should check out the SBuild repository. It will semi-automatically
+assembles a @emph{MinGW}/@emph{MSys2} installation with a lot of extra
+packages which are needed for the GNUnet build. So this will ease your
+work!@ Finally you just have to be sure that you have the correct drivers
+for your Bluetooth device installed and that your device is on and in a
+discoverable mode. The Windows Bluetooth Stack supports only the RFCOMM
+protocol so we cannot turn on your device programatically!
+
+@c FIXME: Change to unique title
+@node How does it work2?
+@subsection How does it work2?
+@c %**end of header
+
+The Bluetooth transport plugin uses virtually the same code as the WLAN
+plugin and only the helper binary is different. The helper takes a single
+argument, which represents the interface name and is specified in the
+configuration file. Here are the basic steps that are followed by the
+helper binary used on GNU/Linux:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item it verifies if the name corresponds to a Bluetooth interface name
+@item it verifies if the iterface is up (if it is not, it tries to bring
+it up)
+@item it tries to enable the page and inquiry scan in order to make the
+device discoverable and to accept incoming connection requests
+@emph{The above operations require root access so you should start the
+transport plugin with root privileges.}
+@item it finds an available port number and registers a SDP service which
+will be used to find out on which port number is the server listening on
+and switch the socket in listening mode
+@item it sends a HELLO message with its address
+@item finally it forwards traffic from the reading sockets to the STDOUT
+and from the STDIN to the writing socket
+@end itemize
+
+Once in a while the device will make an inquiry scan to discover the
+nearby devices and it will send them randomly HELLO messages for peer
+discovery.
+
+@node What possible errors should I be aware of?
+@subsection What possible errors should I be aware of?
+@c %**end of header
+
+@emph{This section is dedicated for GNU/Linux users}
+
+Well there are many ways in which things could go wrong but I will try to
+present some tools that you could use to debug and some scenarios.
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item @code{bluetoothd -n -d} : use this command to enable logging in the
+foreground and to print the logging messages
+
+@item @code{hciconfig}: can be used to configure the Bluetooth devices.
+If you run it without any arguments it will print information about the
+state of the interfaces. So if you receive an error that the device
+couldn't be brought up you should try to bring it manually and to see if
+it works (use @code{hciconfig -a hciX up}). If you can't and the
+Bluetooth address has the form 00:00:00:00:00:00 it means that there is
+something wrong with the D-Bus daemon or with the Bluetooth daemon. Use
+@code{bluetoothd} tool to see the logs
+
+@item @code{sdptool} can be used to control and interogate SDP servers.
+If you encounter problems regarding the SDP server (like the SDP server is
+down) you should check out if the D-Bus daemon is running correctly and to
+see if the Bluetooth daemon started correctly(use @code{bluetoothd} tool).
+Also, sometimes the SDP service could work but somehow the device couldn't
+register his service. Use @code{sdptool browse [dev-address]} to see if
+the service is registered. There should be a service with the name of the
+interface and GNUnet as provider.
+
+@item @code{hcitool} : another useful tool which can be used to configure
+the device and to send some particular commands to it.
+
+@item @code{hcidump} : could be used for low level debugging
+@end itemize
+
+@c FIXME: A more unique name
+@node How do I configure my peer2?
+@subsection How do I configure my peer2?
+@c %**end of header
+
+On GNU/Linux, you just have to be sure that the interface name
+corresponds to the one that you want to use.
+Use the @code{hciconfig} tool to check that.
+By default it is set to hci0 but you can change it.
+
+A basic configuration looks like this:
+
+@example
+[transport-bluetooth]
+# Name of the interface (typically hciX)
+INTERFACE = hci0
+# Real hardware, no testing
+TESTMODE = 0 TESTING_IGNORE_KEYS = ACCEPT_FROM;
+@end example
+
+In order to use the Bluetooth transport plugin when the transport service
+is started, you must add the plugin name to the default transport service
+plugins list. For example:
+
+@example
+[transport] ...  PLUGINS = dns bluetooth ...
+@end example
+
+If you want to use only the Bluetooth plugin set
+@emph{PLUGINS = bluetooth}
+
+On Windows, you cannot specify which device to use. The only thing that
+you should do is to add @emph{bluetooth} on the plugins list of the
+transport service.
+
+@node How can I test it?
+@subsection How can I test it?
+@c %**end of header
+
+If you have two Bluetooth devices on the same machine and you are using
+GNU/Linux you must:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item create two different file configuration (one which will use the
+first interface (@emph{hci0}) and the other which will use the second
+interface (@emph{hci1})). Let's name them @emph{peer1.conf} and
+@emph{peer2.conf}.
+
+@item run @emph{gnunet-peerinfo -c peerX.conf -s} in order to generate the
+peers private keys. The @strong{X} must be replace with 1 or 2.
+
+@item run @emph{gnunet-arm -c peerX.conf -s -i=transport} in order to
+start the transport service. (Make sure that you have "bluetooth" on the
+transport plugins list if the Bluetooth transport service doesn't start.)
+
+@item run @emph{gnunet-peerinfo -c peer1.conf -s} to get the first peer's
+ID. If you already know your peer ID (you saved it from the first
+command), this can be skipped.
+
+@item run @emph{gnunet-transport -c peer2.conf -p=PEER1_ID -s} to start
+sending data for benchmarking to the other peer.
+
+@end itemize
+
+
+This scenario will try to connect the second peer to the first one and
+then start sending data for benchmarking.
+
+On Windows you cannot test the plugin functionality using two Bluetooth
+devices from the same machine because after you install the drivers there
+will occur some conflicts between the Bluetooth stacks. (At least that is
+what happend on my machine : I wasn't able to use the Bluesoleil stack and
+the WINDCOMM one in the same time).
+
+If you have two different machines and your configuration files are good
+you can use the same scenario presented on the begining of this section.
+
+Another way to test the plugin functionality is to create your own
+application which will use the GNUnet framework with the Bluetooth
+transport service.
+
+@node The implementation of the Bluetooth transport plugin
+@subsection The implementation of the Bluetooth transport plugin
+@c %**end of header
+
+This page describes the implementation of the Bluetooth transport plugin.
+
+First I want to remind you that the Bluetooth transport plugin uses
+virtually the same code as the WLAN plugin and only the helper binary is
+different. Also the scope of the helper binary from the Bluetooth
+transport plugin is the same as the one used for the wlan transport
+plugin: it acceses the interface and then it forwards traffic in both
+directions between the Bluetooth interface and stdin/stdout of the
+process involved.
+
+The Bluetooth plugin transport could be used both on GNU/Linux and Windows
+platforms.
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item Linux functionality
+@item Windows functionality
+@item Pending Features
+@end itemize
+
+
+
+@menu
+* Linux functionality::
+* THE INITIALIZATION::
+* THE LOOP::
+* Details about the broadcast implementation::
+* Windows functionality::
+* Pending features::
+@end menu
+
+@node Linux functionality
+@subsubsection Linux functionality
+@c %**end of header
+
+In order to implement the plugin functionality on GNU/Linux I
+used the BlueZ stack.
+For the communication with the other devices I used the RFCOMM
+protocol. Also I used the HCI protocol to gain some control over the
+device. The helper binary takes a single argument (the name of the
+Bluetooth interface) and is separated in two stages:
+
+@c %** 'THE INITIALIZATION' should be in bigger letters or stand out, not
+@c %** starting a new section?
+@node THE INITIALIZATION
+@subsubsection THE INITIALIZATION
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item first, it checks if we have root privilegies
+(@emph{Remember that we need to have root privilegies in order to be able
+to bring the interface up if it is down or to change its state.}).
+
+@item second, it verifies if the interface with the given name exists.
+
+@strong{If the interface with that name exists and it is a Bluetooth
+interface:}
+
+@item it creates a RFCOMM socket which will be used for listening and call
+the @emph{open_device} method
+
+On the @emph{open_device} method:
+@itemize @bullet
+@item creates a HCI socket used to send control events to the the device
+@item searches for the device ID using the interface name
+@item saves the device MAC address
+@item checks if the interface is down and tries to bring it UP
+@item checks if the interface is in discoverable mode and tries to make it
+discoverable
+@item closes the HCI socket and binds the RFCOMM one
+@item switches the RFCOMM socket in listening mode
+@item registers the SDP service (the service will be used by the other
+devices to get the port on which this device is listening on)
+@end itemize
+
+@item drops the root privilegies
+
+@strong{If the interface is not a Bluetooth interface the helper exits
+with a suitable error}
+@end itemize
+
+@c %** Same as for @node entry above
+@node THE LOOP
+@subsubsection THE LOOP
+
+The helper binary uses a list where it saves all the connected neighbour
+devices (@emph{neighbours.devices}) and two buffers (@emph{write_pout} and
+@emph{write_std}). The first message which is send is a control message
+with the device's MAC address in order to announce the peer presence to
+the neighbours. Here are a short description of what happens in the main
+loop:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item Every time when it receives something from the STDIN it processes
+the data and saves the message in the first buffer (@emph{write_pout}).
+When it has something in the buffer, it gets the destination address from
+the buffer, searches the destination address in the list (if there is no
+connection with that device, it creates a new one and saves it to the
+list) and sends the message.
+@item Every time when it receives something on the listening socket it
+accepts the connection and saves the socket on a list with the reading
+sockets. @item Every time when it receives something from a reading
+socket it parses the message, verifies the CRC and saves it in the
+@emph{write_std} buffer in order to be sent later to the STDOUT.
+@end itemize
+
+So in the main loop we use the select function to wait until one of the
+file descriptor saved in one of the two file descriptors sets used is
+ready to use. The first set (@emph{rfds}) represents the reading set and
+it could contain the list with the reading sockets, the STDIN file
+descriptor or the listening socket. The second set (@emph{wfds}) is the
+writing set and it could contain the sending socket or the STDOUT file
+descriptor. After the select function returns, we check which file
+descriptor is ready to use and we do what is supposed to do on that kind
+of event. @emph{For example:} if it is the listening socket then we
+accept a new connection and save the socket in the reading list; if it is
+the STDOUT file descriptor, then we write to STDOUT the message from the
+@emph{write_std} buffer.
+
+To find out on which port a device is listening on we connect to the local
+SDP server and searche the registered service for that device.
+
+@emph{You should be aware of the fact that if the device fails to connect
+to another one when trying to send a message it will attempt one more
+time. If it fails again, then it skips the message.}
+@emph{Also you should know that the transport Bluetooth plugin has
+support for @strong{broadcast messages}.}
+
+@node Details about the broadcast implementation
+@subsubsection Details about the broadcast implementation
+@c %**end of header
+
+First I want to point out that the broadcast functionality for the CONTROL
+messages is not implemented in a conventional way. Since the inquiry scan
+time is too big and it will take some time to send a message to all the
+discoverable devices I decided to tackle the problem in a different way.
+Here is how I did it:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item If it is the first time when I have to broadcast a message I make an
+inquiry scan and save all the devices' addresses to a vector.
+@item After the inquiry scan ends I take the first address from the list
+and I try to connect to it. If it fails, I try to connect to the next one.
+If it succeeds, I save the socket to a list and send the message to the
+device.
+@item When I have to broadcast another message, first I search on the list
+for a new device which I'm not connected to. If there is no new device on
+the list I go to the beginning of the list and send the message to the
+old devices. After 5 cycles I make a new inquiry scan to check out if
+there are new discoverable devices and save them to the list. If there
+are no new discoverable devices I reset the cycling counter and go again
+through the old list and send messages to the devices saved in it.
+@end itemize
+
+@strong{Therefore}:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item every time when I have a broadcast message I look up on the list
+for a new device and send the message to it
+@item if I reached the end of the list for 5 times and I'm connected to
+all the devices from the list I make a new inquiry scan.
+@emph{The number of the list's cycles after an inquiry scan could be
+increased by redefining the MAX_LOOPS variable}
+@item when there are no new devices I send messages to the old ones.
+@end itemize
+
+Doing so, the broadcast control messages will reach the devices but with
+delay.
+
+@emph{NOTICE:} When I have to send a message to a certain device first I
+check on the broadcast list to see if we are connected to that device. If
+not we try to connect to it and in case of success we save the address and
+the socket on the list. If we are already connected to that device we
+simply use the socket.
+
+@node Windows functionality
+@subsubsection Windows functionality
+@c %**end of header
+
+For Windows I decided to use the Microsoft Bluetooth stack which has the
+advantage of coming standard from Windows XP SP2. The main disadvantage is
+that it only supports the RFCOMM protocol so we will not be able to have
+a low level control over the Bluetooth device. Therefore it is the user
+responsability to check if the device is up and in the discoverable mode.
+Also there are no tools which could be used for debugging in order to read
+the data coming from and going to a Bluetooth device, which obviously
+hindered my work. Another thing that slowed down the implementation of the
+plugin (besides that I wasn't too accomodated with the win32 API) was that
+there were some bugs on MinGW regarding the Bluetooth. Now they are solved
+but you should keep in mind that you should have the latest updates
+(especially the @emph{ws2bth} header).
+
+Besides the fact that it uses the Windows Sockets, the Windows
+implemenation follows the same principles as the GNU/Linux one:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item It has a initalization part where it initializes the
+Windows Sockets, creates a RFCOMM socket which will be binded and switched
+to the listening mode and registers a SDP service. In the Microsoft
+Bluetooth API there are two ways to work with the SDP:
+@itemize @bullet
+@item an easy way which works with very simple service records
+@item a hard way which is useful when you need to update or to delete the
+record
+@end itemize
+@end itemize
+
+Since I only needed the SDP service to find out on which port the device
+is listening on and that did not change, I decided to use the easy way.
+In order to register the service I used the @emph{WSASetService} function
+and I generated the @emph{Universally Unique Identifier} with the
+@emph{guidgen.exe} Windows's tool.
+
+In the loop section the only difference from the GNU/Linux implementation
+is that I used the @code{GNUNET_NETWORK} library for
+functions like @emph{accept}, @emph{bind}, @emph{connect} or
+@emph{select}. I decided to use the
+@code{GNUNET_NETWORK} library because I also needed to interact
+with the STDIN and STDOUT handles and on Windows
+the select function is only defined for sockets,
+and it will not work for arbitrary file handles.
+
+Another difference between GNU/Linux and Windows implementation is that in
+GNU/Linux, the Bluetooth address is represented in 48 bits
+while in Windows is represented in 64 bits.
+Therefore I had to do some changes on @emph{plugin_transport_wlan} header.
+
+Also, currently on Windows the Bluetooth plugin doesn't have support for
+broadcast messages. When it receives a broadcast message it will skip it.
+
+@node Pending features
+@subsubsection Pending features
+@c %**end of header
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item Implement the broadcast functionality on Windows @emph{(currently
+working on)}
+@item Implement a testcase for the helper :@ @emph{The testcase
+consists of a program which emaluates the plugin and uses the helper. It
+will simulate connections, disconnections and data transfers.}
+@end itemize
+
+If you have a new idea about a feature of the plugin or suggestions about
+how I could improve the implementation you are welcome to comment or to
+contact me.
+
+@node WLAN plugin
+@section WLAN plugin
+@c %**end of header
+
+This section documents how the wlan transport plugin works. Parts which
+are not implemented yet or could be better implemented are described at
+the end.
+
+@cindex ATS Subsystem
+@node ATS Subsystem
+@section ATS Subsystem
+@c %**end of header
+
+ATS stands for "automatic transport selection", and the function of ATS in
+GNUnet is to decide on which address (and thus transport plugin) should
+be used for two peers to communicate, and what bandwidth limits should be
+imposed on such an individual connection. To help ATS make an informed
+decision, higher-level services inform the ATS service about their
+requirements and the quality of the service rendered. The ATS service
+also interacts with the transport service to be appraised of working
+addresses and to communicate its resource allocation decisions. Finally,
+the ATS service's operation can be observed using a monitoring API.
+
+The main logic of the ATS service only collects the available addresses,
+their performance characteristics and the applications requirements, but
+does not make the actual allocation decision. This last critical step is
+left to an ATS plugin, as we have implemented (currently three) different
+allocation strategies which differ significantly in their performance and
+maturity, and it is still unclear if any particular plugin is generally
+superior.
+
+@cindex CORE Subsystem
+@node CORE Subsystem
+@section CORE Subsystem
+@c %**end of header
+
+The CORE subsystem in GNUnet is responsible for securing link-layer
+communications between nodes in the GNUnet overlay network. CORE builds
+on the TRANSPORT subsystem which provides for the actual, insecure,
+unreliable link-layer communication (for example, via UDP or WLAN), and
+then adds fundamental security to the connections:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item confidentiality with so-called perfect forward secrecy; we use
+ECDHE@footnote{@uref{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Elliptic_curve_Diffie%E2%80%93Hellman, Elliptic-curve Diffie---Hellman}}
+powered by Curve25519
+@footnote{@uref{http://cr.yp.to/ecdh.html, Curve25519}} for the key
+exchange and then use symmetric encryption, encrypting with both AES-256
+@footnote{@uref{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Rijndael, AES-256}} and
+Twofish @footnote{@uref{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Twofish, Twofish}}
+@item @uref{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Authentication, authentication}
+is achieved by signing the ephemeral keys using Ed25519
+@footnote{@uref{http://ed25519.cr.yp.to/, Ed25519}}, a deterministic
+variant of ECDSA
+@footnote{@uref{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ECDSA, ECDSA}}
+@item integrity protection (using SHA-512
+@footnote{@uref{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/SHA-2, SHA-512}} to do
+encrypt-then-MAC
+@footnote{@uref{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Authenticated_encryption, encrypt-then-MAC}})
+@item Replay
+@footnote{@uref{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Replay_attack, replay}}
+protection (using nonces, timestamps, challenge-response,
+message counters and ephemeral keys)
+@item liveness (keep-alive messages, timeout)
+@end itemize
+
+@menu
+* Limitations::
+* When is a peer "connected"?::
+* libgnunetcore::
+* The CORE Client-Service Protocol::
+* The CORE Peer-to-Peer Protocol::
+@end menu
+
+@cindex core subsystem limitations
+@node Limitations
+@subsection Limitations
+@c %**end of header
+
+CORE does not perform
+@uref{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Routing, routing}; using CORE it is
+only possible to communicate with peers that happen to already be
+"directly" connected with each other. CORE also does not have an
+API to allow applications to establish such "direct" connections --- for
+this, applications can ask TRANSPORT, but TRANSPORT might not be able to
+establish a "direct" connection. The TOPOLOGY subsystem is responsible for
+trying to keep a few "direct" connections open at all times. Applications
+that need to talk to particular peers should use the CADET subsystem, as
+it can establish arbitrary "indirect" connections.
+
+Because CORE does not perform routing, CORE must only be used directly by
+applications that either perform their own routing logic (such as
+anonymous file-sharing) or that do not require routing, for example
+because they are based on flooding the network. CORE communication is
+unreliable and delivery is possibly out-of-order. Applications that
+require reliable communication should use the CADET service. Each
+application can only queue one message per target peer with the CORE
+service at any time; messages cannot be larger than approximately
+63 kilobytes. If messages are small, CORE may group multiple messages
+(possibly from different applications) prior to encryption. If permitted
+by the application (using the @uref{http://baus.net/on-tcp_cork/, cork}
+option), CORE may delay transmissions to facilitate grouping of multiple
+small messages. If cork is not enabled, CORE will transmit the message as
+soon as TRANSPORT allows it (TRANSPORT is responsible for limiting
+bandwidth and congestion control). CORE does not allow flow control;
+applications are expected to process messages at line-speed. If flow
+control is needed, applications should use the CADET service.
+
+@cindex when is a peer connected
+@node When is a peer "connected"?
+@subsection When is a peer "connected"?
+@c %**end of header
+
+In addition to the security features mentioned above, CORE also provides
+one additional key feature to applications using it, and that is a
+limited form of protocol-compatibility checking. CORE distinguishes
+between TRANSPORT-level connections (which enable communication with other
+peers) and application-level connections. Applications using the CORE API
+will (typically) learn about application-level connections from CORE, and
+not about TRANSPORT-level connections. When a typical application uses
+CORE, it will specify a set of message types
+(from @code{gnunet_protocols.h}) that it understands. CORE will then
+notify the application about connections it has with other peers if and
+only if those applications registered an intersecting set of message
+types with their CORE service. Thus, it is quite possible that CORE only
+exposes a subset of the established direct connections to a particular
+application --- and different applications running above CORE might see
+different sets of connections at the same time.
+
+A special case are applications that do not register a handler for any
+message type.
+CORE assumes that these applications merely want to monitor connections
+(or "all" messages via other callbacks) and will notify those applications
+about all connections. This is used, for example, by the
+@code{gnunet-core} command-line tool to display the active connections.
+Note that it is also possible that the TRANSPORT service has more active
+connections than the CORE service, as the CORE service first has to
+perform a key exchange with connecting peers before exchanging information
+about supported message types and notifying applications about the new
+connection.
+
+@cindex libgnunetcore
+@node libgnunetcore
+@subsection libgnunetcore
+@c %**end of header
+
+The CORE API (defined in @file{gnunet_core_service.h}) is the basic
+messaging API used by P2P applications built using GNUnet. It provides
+applications the ability to send and receive encrypted messages to the
+peer's "directly" connected neighbours.
+
+As CORE connections are generally "direct" connections,@ applications must
+not assume that they can connect to arbitrary peers this way, as "direct"
+connections may not always be possible. Applications using CORE are
+notified about which peers are connected. Creating new "direct"
+connections must be done using the TRANSPORT API.
+
+The CORE API provides unreliable, out-of-order delivery. While the
+implementation tries to ensure timely, in-order delivery, both message
+losses and reordering are not detected and must be tolerated by the
+application. Most important, the core will NOT perform retransmission if
+messages could not be delivered.
+
+Note that CORE allows applications to queue one message per connected
+peer. The rate at which each connection operates is influenced by the
+preferences expressed by local application as well as restrictions
+imposed by the other peer. Local applications can express their
+preferences for particular connections using the "performance" API of the
+ATS service.
+
+Applications that require more sophisticated transmission capabilities
+such as TCP-like behavior, or if you intend to send messages to arbitrary
+remote peers, should use the CADET API.
+
+The typical use of the CORE API is to connect to the CORE service using
+@code{GNUNET_CORE_connect}, process events from the CORE service (such as
+peers connecting, peers disconnecting and incoming messages) and send
+messages to connected peers using
+@code{GNUNET_CORE_notify_transmit_ready}. Note that applications must
+cancel pending transmission requests if they receive a disconnect event
+for a peer that had a transmission pending; furthermore, queueing more
+than one transmission request per peer per application using the
+service is not permitted.
+
+The CORE API also allows applications to monitor all communications of the
+peer prior to encryption (for outgoing messages) or after decryption (for
+incoming messages). This can be useful for debugging, diagnostics or to
+establish the presence of cover traffic (for anonymity). As monitoring
+applications are often not interested in the payload, the monitoring
+callbacks can be configured to only provide the message headers (including
+the message type and size) instead of copying the full data stream to the
+monitoring client.
+
+The init callback of the @code{GNUNET_CORE_connect} function is called
+with the hash of the public key of the peer. This public key is used to
+identify the peer globally in the GNUnet network. Applications are
+encouraged to check that the provided hash matches the hash that they are
+using (as theoretically the application may be using a different
+configuration file with a different private key, which would result in
+hard to find bugs).
+
+As with most service APIs, the CORE API isolates applications from crashes
+of the CORE service. If the CORE service crashes, the application will see
+disconnect events for all existing connections. Once the connections are
+re-established, the applications will be receive matching connect events.
+
+@cindex core clinet-service protocol
+@node The CORE Client-Service Protocol
+@subsection The CORE Client-Service Protocol
+@c %**end of header
+
+This section describes the protocol between an application using the CORE
+service (the client) and the CORE service process itself.
+
+
+@menu
+* Setup2::
+* Notifications::
+* Sending::
+@end menu
+
+@node Setup2
+@subsubsection Setup2
+@c %**end of header
+
+When a client connects to the CORE service, it first sends a
+@code{InitMessage} which specifies options for the connection and a set of
+message type values which are supported by the application. The options
+bitmask specifies which events the client would like to be notified about.
+The options include:
+
+@table @asis
+@item GNUNET_CORE_OPTION_NOTHING No notifications
+@item GNUNET_CORE_OPTION_STATUS_CHANGE Peers connecting and disconnecting
+@item GNUNET_CORE_OPTION_FULL_INBOUND All inbound messages (after
+decryption) with full payload
+@item GNUNET_CORE_OPTION_HDR_INBOUND Just the @code{MessageHeader}
+of all inbound messages
+@item GNUNET_CORE_OPTION_FULL_OUTBOUND All outbound
+messages (prior to encryption) with full payload
+@item GNUNET_CORE_OPTION_HDR_OUTBOUND Just the @code{MessageHeader} of all
+outbound messages
+@end table
+
+Typical applications will only monitor for connection status changes.
+
+The CORE service responds to the @code{InitMessage} with an
+@code{InitReplyMessage} which contains the peer's identity. Afterwards,
+both CORE and the client can send messages.
+
+@node Notifications
+@subsubsection Notifications
+@c %**end of header
+
+The CORE will send @code{ConnectNotifyMessage}s and
+@code{DisconnectNotifyMessage}s whenever peers connect or disconnect from
+the CORE (assuming their type maps overlap with the message types
+registered by the client). When the CORE receives a message that matches
+the set of message types specified during the @code{InitMessage} (or if
+monitoring is enabled in for inbound messages in the options), it sends a
+@code{NotifyTrafficMessage} with the peer identity of the sender and the
+decrypted payload. The same message format (except with
+@code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_CORE_NOTIFY_OUTBOUND} for the message type) is
+used to notify clients monitoring outbound messages; here, the peer
+identity given is that of the receiver.
+
+@node Sending
+@subsubsection Sending
+@c %**end of header
+
+When a client wants to transmit a message, it first requests a
+transmission slot by sending a @code{SendMessageRequest} which specifies
+the priority, deadline and size of the message. Note that these values
+may be ignored by CORE. When CORE is ready for the message, it answers
+with a @code{SendMessageReady} response. The client can then transmit the
+payload with a @code{SendMessage} message. Note that the actual message
+size in the @code{SendMessage} is allowed to be smaller than the size in
+the original request. A client may at any time send a fresh
+@code{SendMessageRequest}, which then superceeds the previous
+@code{SendMessageRequest}, which is then no longer valid. The client can
+tell which @code{SendMessageRequest} the CORE service's
+@code{SendMessageReady} message is for as all of these messages contain a
+"unique" request ID (based on a counter incremented by the client
+for each request).
+
+@cindex CORE Peer-to-Peer Protocol
+@node The CORE Peer-to-Peer Protocol
+@subsection The CORE Peer-to-Peer Protocol
+@c %**end of header
+
+
+@menu
+* Creating the EphemeralKeyMessage::
+* Establishing a connection::
+* Encryption and Decryption::
+* Type maps::
+@end menu
+
+@cindex EphemeralKeyMessage creation
+@node Creating the EphemeralKeyMessage
+@subsubsection Creating the EphemeralKeyMessage
+@c %**end of header
+
+When the CORE service starts, each peer creates a fresh ephemeral (ECC)
+public-private key pair and signs the corresponding
+@code{EphemeralKeyMessage} with its long-term key (which we usually call
+the peer's identity; the hash of the public long term key is what results
+in a @code{struct GNUNET_PeerIdentity} in all GNUnet APIs. The ephemeral
+key is ONLY used for an ECDHE@footnote{@uref{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Elliptic_curve_Diffie%E2%80%93Hellman, Elliptic-curve Diffie---Hellman}}
+exchange by the CORE service to establish symmetric session keys. A peer
+will use the same @code{EphemeralKeyMessage} for all peers for
+@code{REKEY_FREQUENCY}, which is usually 12 hours. After that time, it
+will create a fresh ephemeral key (forgetting the old one) and broadcast
+the new @code{EphemeralKeyMessage} to all connected peers, resulting in
+fresh symmetric session keys. Note that peers independently decide on
+when to discard ephemeral keys; it is not a protocol violation to discard
+keys more often. Ephemeral keys are also never stored to disk; restarting
+a peer will thus always create a fresh ephemeral key. The use of ephemeral
+keys is what provides @uref{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Forward_secrecy, forward secrecy}.
+
+Just before transmission, the @code{EphemeralKeyMessage} is patched to
+reflect the current sender_status, which specifies the current state of
+the connection from the point of view of the sender. The possible values
+are:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item @code{KX_STATE_DOWN} Initial value, never used on the network
+@item @code{KX_STATE_KEY_SENT} We sent our ephemeral key, do not know the
+key of the other peer
+@item @code{KX_STATE_KEY_RECEIVED} This peer has received a valid
+ephemeral key of the other peer, but we are waiting for the other peer to
+confirm it's authenticity (ability to decode) via challenge-response.
+@item @code{KX_STATE_UP} The connection is fully up from the point of
+view of the sender (now performing keep-alives)
+@item @code{KX_STATE_REKEY_SENT} The sender has initiated a rekeying
+operation; the other peer has so far failed to confirm a working
+connection using the new ephemeral key
+@end itemize
+
+@node Establishing a connection
+@subsubsection Establishing a connection
+@c %**end of header
+
+Peers begin their interaction by sending a @code{EphemeralKeyMessage} to
+the other peer once the TRANSPORT service notifies the CORE service about
+the connection.
+A peer receiving an @code{EphemeralKeyMessage} with a status
+indicating that the sender does not have the receiver's ephemeral key, the
+receiver's @code{EphemeralKeyMessage} is sent in response.
+Additionally, if the receiver has not yet confirmed the authenticity of
+the sender, it also sends an (encrypted)@code{PingMessage} with a
+challenge (and the identity of the target) to the other peer. Peers
+receiving a @code{PingMessage} respond with an (encrypted)
+@code{PongMessage} which includes the challenge. Peers receiving a
+@code{PongMessage} check the challenge, and if it matches set the
+connection to @code{KX_STATE_UP}.
+
+@node Encryption and Decryption
+@subsubsection Encryption and Decryption
+@c %**end of header
+
+All functions related to the key exchange and encryption/decryption of
+messages can be found in @file{gnunet-service-core_kx.c} (except for the
+cryptographic primitives, which are in @file{util/crypto*.c}).
+Given the key material from ECDHE, a Key derivation function
+@footnote{@uref{https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Key_derivation_function, Key derivation function}}
+is used to derive two pairs of encryption and decryption keys for AES-256
+and TwoFish, as well as initialization vectors and authentication keys
+(for HMAC@footnote{@uref{https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/HMAC, HMAC}}).
+The HMAC is computed over the encrypted payload.
+Encrypted messages include an iv_seed and the HMAC in the header.
+
+Each encrypted message in the CORE service includes a sequence number and
+a timestamp in the encrypted payload. The CORE service remembers the
+largest observed sequence number and a bit-mask which represents which of
+the previous 32 sequence numbers were already used.
+Messages with sequence numbers lower than the largest observed sequence
+number minus 32 are discarded. Messages with a timestamp that is less
+than @code{REKEY_TOLERANCE} off (5 minutes) are also discarded. This of
+course means that system clocks need to be reasonably synchronized for
+peers to be able to communicate. Additionally, as the ephemeral key
+changes every 12 hours, a peer would not even be able to decrypt messages
+older than 12 hours.
+
+@node Type maps
+@subsubsection Type maps
+@c %**end of header
+
+Once an encrypted connection has been established, peers begin to exchange
+type maps. Type maps are used to allow the CORE service to determine which
+(encrypted) connections should be shown to which applications. A type map
+is an array of 65536 bits representing the different types of messages
+understood by applications using the CORE service. Each CORE service
+maintains this map, simply by setting the respective bit for each message
+type supported by any of the applications using the CORE service. Note
+that bits for message types embedded in higher-level protocols (such as
+MESH) will not be included in these type maps.
+
+Typically, the type map of a peer will be sparse. Thus, the CORE service
+attempts to compress its type map using @code{gzip}-style compression
+("deflate") prior to transmission. However, if the compression fails to
+compact the map, the map may also be transmitted without compression
+(resulting in @code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_CORE_COMPRESSED_TYPE_MAP} or
+@code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_CORE_BINARY_TYPE_MAP} messages respectively).
+Upon receiving a type map, the respective CORE service notifies
+applications about the connection to the other peer if they support any
+message type indicated in the type map (or no message type at all).
+If the CORE service experience a connect or disconnect event from an
+application, it updates its type map (setting or unsetting the respective
+bits) and notifies its neighbours about the change.
+The CORE services of the neighbours then in turn generate connect and
+disconnect events for the peer that sent the type map for their respective
+applications. As CORE messages may be lost, the CORE service confirms
+receiving a type map by sending back a
+@code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_CORE_CONFIRM_TYPE_MAP}. If such a confirmation
+(with the correct hash of the type map) is not received, the sender will
+retransmit the type map (with exponential back-off).
+
+@cindex CADET Subsystem
+@node CADET Subsystem
+@section CADET Subsystem
+
+The CADET subsystem in GNUnet is responsible for secure end-to-end
+communications between nodes in the GNUnet overlay network. CADET builds
+on the CORE subsystem which provides for the link-layer communication and
+then adds routing, forwarding and additional security to the connections.
+CADET offers the same cryptographic services as CORE, but on an
+end-to-end level. This is done so peers retransmitting traffic on behalf
+of other peers cannot access the payload data.
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item CADET provides confidentiality with so-called perfect forward
+secrecy; we use ECDHE powered by Curve25519 for the key exchange and then
+use symmetric encryption, encrypting with both AES-256 and Twofish
+@item authentication is achieved by signing the ephemeral keys using
+Ed25519, a deterministic variant of ECDSA
+@item integrity protection (using SHA-512 to do encrypt-then-MAC, although
+only 256 bits are sent to reduce overhead)
+@item replay protection (using nonces, timestamps, challenge-response,
+message counters and ephemeral keys)
+@item liveness (keep-alive messages, timeout)
+@end itemize
+
+Additional to the CORE-like security benefits, CADET offers other
+properties that make it a more universal service than CORE.
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item CADET can establish channels to arbitrary peers in GNUnet. If a
+peer is not immediately reachable, CADET will find a path through the
+network and ask other peers to retransmit the traffic on its behalf.
+@item CADET offers (optional) reliability mechanisms. In a reliable
+channel traffic is guaranteed to arrive complete, unchanged and in-order.
+@item CADET takes care of flow and congestion control mechanisms, not
+allowing the sender to send more traffic than the receiver or the network
+are able to process.
+@end itemize
+
+@menu
+* libgnunetcadet::
+@end menu
+
+@cindex libgnunetcadet
+@node libgnunetcadet
+@subsection libgnunetcadet
+
+
+The CADET API (defined in @file{gnunet_cadet_service.h}) is the
+messaging API used by P2P applications built using GNUnet.
+It provides applications the ability to send and receive encrypted
+messages to any peer participating in GNUnet.
+The API is heavily base on the CORE API.
+
+CADET delivers messages to other peers in "channels".
+A channel is a permanent connection defined by a destination peer
+(identified by its public key) and a port number.
+Internally, CADET tunnels all channels towards a destiantion peer
+using one session key and relays the data on multiple "connections",
+independent from the channels.
+
+Each channel has optional paramenters, the most important being the
+reliability flag.
+Should a message get lost on TRANSPORT/CORE level, if a channel is
+created with as reliable, CADET will retransmit the lost message and
+deliver it in order to the destination application.
+
+To communicate with other peers using CADET, it is necessary to first
+connect to the service using @code{GNUNET_CADET_connect}.
+This function takes several parameters in form of callbacks, to allow the
+client to react to various events, like incoming channels or channels that
+terminate, as well as specify a list of ports the client wishes to listen
+to (at the moment it is not possible to start listening on further ports
+once connected, but nothing prevents a client to connect several times to
+CADET, even do one connection per listening port).
+The function returns a handle which has to be used for any further
+interaction with the service.
+
+To connect to a remote peer a client has to call the
+@code{GNUNET_CADET_channel_create} function. The most important parameters
+given are the remote peer's identity (it public key) and a port, which
+specifies which application on the remote peer to connect to, similar to
+TCP/UDP ports. CADET will then find the peer in the GNUnet network and
+establish the proper low-level connections and do the necessary key
+exchanges to assure and authenticated, secure and verified communication.
+Similar to @code{GNUNET_CADET_connect},@code{GNUNET_CADET_create_channel}
+returns a handle to interact with the created channel.
+
+For every message the client wants to send to the remote application,
+@code{GNUNET_CADET_notify_transmit_ready} must be called, indicating the
+channel on which the message should be sent and the size of the message
+(but not the message itself!). Once CADET is ready to send the message,
+the provided callback will fire, and the message contents are provided to
+this callback.
+
+Please note the CADET does not provide an explicit notification of when a
+channel is connected. In loosely connected networks, like big wireless
+mesh networks, this can take several seconds, even minutes in the worst
+case. To be alerted when a channel is online, a client can call
+@code{GNUNET_CADET_notify_transmit_ready} immediately after
+@code{GNUNET_CADET_create_channel}. When the callback is activated, it
+means that the channel is online. The callback can give 0 bytes to CADET
+if no message is to be sent, this is ok.
+
+If a transmission was requested but before the callback fires it is no
+longer needed, it can be cancelled with
+@code{GNUNET_CADET_notify_transmit_ready_cancel}, which uses the handle
+given back by @code{GNUNET_CADET_notify_transmit_ready}.
+As in the case of CORE, only one message can be requested at a time: a
+client must not call @code{GNUNET_CADET_notify_transmit_ready} again until
+the callback is called or the request is cancelled.
+
+When a channel is no longer needed, a client can call
+@code{GNUNET_CADET_channel_destroy} to get rid of it.
+Note that CADET will try to transmit all pending traffic before notifying
+the remote peer of the destruction of the channel, including
+retransmitting lost messages if the channel was reliable.
+
+Incoming channels, channels being closed by the remote peer, and traffic
+on any incoming or outgoing channels are given to the client when CADET
+executes the callbacks given to it at the time of
+@code{GNUNET_CADET_connect}.
+
+Finally, when an application no longer wants to use CADET, it should call
+@code{GNUNET_CADET_disconnect}, but first all channels and pending
+transmissions must be closed (otherwise CADET will complain).
+
+@cindex NSE Subsystem
+@node NSE Subsystem
+@section NSE Subsystem
+
+
+NSE stands for @dfn{Network Size Estimation}. The NSE subsystem provides
+other subsystems and users with a rough estimate of the number of peers
+currently participating in the GNUnet overlay.
+The computed value is not a precise number as producing a precise number
+in a decentralized, efficient and secure way is impossible.
+While NSE's estimate is inherently imprecise, NSE also gives the expected
+range. For a peer that has been running in a stable network for a
+while, the real network size will typically (99.7% of the time) be in the
+range of [2/3 estimate, 3/2 estimate]. We will now give an overview of the
+algorithm used to calculate the estimate;
+all of the details can be found in this technical report.
+
+@c FIXME: link to the report.
+
+@menu
+* Motivation::
+* Principle::
+* libgnunetnse::
+* The NSE Client-Service Protocol::
+* The NSE Peer-to-Peer Protocol::
+@end menu
+
+@node Motivation
+@subsection Motivation
+
+
+Some subsytems, like DHT, need to know the size of the GNUnet network to
+optimize some parameters of their own protocol. The decentralized nature
+of GNUnet makes efficient and securely counting the exact number of peers
+infeasable. Although there are several decentralized algorithms to count
+the number of peers in a system, so far there is none to do so securely.
+Other protocols may allow any malicious peer to manipulate the final
+result or to take advantage of the system to perform
+@dfn{Denial of Service} (DoS) attacks against the network.
+GNUnet's NSE protocol avoids these drawbacks.
+
+
+
+@menu
+* Security::
+@end menu
+
+@cindex NSE security
+@cindex nse security
+@node Security
+@subsubsection Security
+
+
+The NSE subsystem is designed to be resilient against these attacks.
+It uses @uref{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Proof-of-work_system, proofs of work}
+to prevent one peer from impersonating a large number of participants,
+which would otherwise allow an adversary to artifically inflate the
+estimate.
+The DoS protection comes from the time-based nature of the protocol:
+the estimates are calculated periodically and out-of-time traffic is
+either ignored or stored for later retransmission by benign peers.
+In particular, peers cannot trigger global network communication at will.
+
+@cindex NSE principle
+@cindex nse principle
+@node Principle
+@subsection Principle
+
+
+The algorithm calculates the estimate by finding the globally closest
+peer ID to a random, time-based value.
+
+The idea is that the closer the ID is to the random value, the more
+"densely packed" the ID space is, and therefore, more peers are in the
+network.
+
+
+
+@menu
+* Example::
+* Algorithm::
+* Target value::
+* Timing::
+* Controlled Flooding::
+* Calculating the estimate::
+@end menu
+
+@node Example
+@subsubsection Example
+
+
+Suppose all peers have IDs between 0 and 100 (our ID space), and the
+random value is 42.
+If the closest peer has the ID 70 we can imagine that the average
+"distance" between peers is around 30 and therefore the are around 3
+peers in the whole ID space. On the other hand, if the closest peer has
+the ID 44, we can imagine that the space is rather packed with peers,
+maybe as much as 50 of them.
+Naturally, we could have been rather unlucky, and there is only one peer
+and happens to have the ID 44. Thus, the current estimate is calculated
+as the average over multiple rounds, and not just a single sample.
+
+@node Algorithm
+@subsubsection Algorithm
+
+
+Given that example, one can imagine that the job of the subsystem is to
+efficiently communicate the ID of the closest peer to the target value
+to all the other peers, who will calculate the estimate from it.
+
+@node Target value
+@subsubsection Target value
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The target value itself is generated by hashing the current time, rounded
+down to an agreed value. If the rounding amount is 1h (default) and the
+time is 12:34:56, the time to hash would be 12:00:00. The process is
+repeated each rouning amount (in this example would be every hour).
+Every repetition is called a round.
+
+@node Timing
+@subsubsection Timing
+@c %**end of header
+
+The NSE subsystem has some timing control to avoid everybody broadcasting
+its ID all at one. Once each peer has the target random value, it
+compares its own ID to the target and calculates the hypothetical size of
+the network if that peer were to be the closest.
+Then it compares the hypothetical size with the estimate from the previous
+rounds. For each value there is an assiciated point in the period,
+let's call it "broadcast time". If its own hypothetical estimate
+is the same as the previous global estimate, its "broadcast time" will be
+in the middle of the round. If its bigger it will be earlier and if its
+smaller (the most likely case) it will be later. This ensures that the
+peers closests to the target value start broadcasting their ID the first.
+
+@node Controlled Flooding
+@subsubsection Controlled Flooding
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+When a peer receives a value, first it verifies that it is closer than the
+closest value it had so far, otherwise it answers the incoming message
+with a message containing the better value. Then it checks a proof of
+work that must be included in the incoming message, to ensure that the
+other peer's ID is not made up (otherwise a malicious peer could claim to
+have an ID of exactly the target value every round). Once validated, it
+compares the brodcast time of the received value with the current time
+and if it's not too early, sends the received value to its neighbors.
+Otherwise it stores the value until the correct broadcast time comes.
+This prevents unnecessary traffic of sub-optimal values, since a better
+value can come before the broadcast time, rendering the previous one
+obsolete and saving the traffic that would have been used to broadcast it
+to the neighbors.
+
+@node Calculating the estimate
+@subsubsection Calculating the estimate
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+Once the closest ID has been spread across the network each peer gets the
+exact distance betweed this ID and the target value of the round and
+calculates the estimate with a mathematical formula described in the tech
+report. The estimate generated with this method for a single round is not
+very precise. Remember the case of the example, where the only peer is the
+ID 44 and we happen to generate the target value 42, thinking there are
+50 peers in the network. Therefore, the NSE subsystem remembers the last
+64 estimates and calculates an average over them, giving a result of which
+usually has one bit of uncertainty (the real size could be half of the
+estimate or twice as much). Note that the actual network size is
+calculated in powers of two of the raw input, thus one bit of uncertainty
+means a factor of two in the size estimate.
+
+@cindex libgnunetnse
+@node libgnunetnse
+@subsection libgnunetnse
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The NSE subsystem has the simplest API of all services, with only two
+calls: @code{GNUNET_NSE_connect} and @code{GNUNET_NSE_disconnect}.
+
+The connect call gets a callback function as a parameter and this function
+is called each time the network agrees on an estimate. This usually is
+once per round, with some exceptions: if the closest peer has a late
+local clock and starts spreading his ID after everyone else agreed on a
+value, the callback might be activated twice in a round, the second value
+being always bigger than the first. The default round time is set to
+1 hour.
+
+The disconnect call disconnects from the NSE subsystem and the callback
+is no longer called with new estimates.
+
+
+
+@menu
+* Results::
+* libgnunetnse - Examples::
+@end menu
+
+@node Results
+@subsubsection Results
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The callback provides two values: the average and the
+@uref{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Standard_deviation, standard deviation}
+of the last 64 rounds. The values provided by the callback function are
+logarithmic, this means that the real estimate numbers can be obtained by
+calculating 2 to the power of the given value (2average). From a
+statistics point of view this means that:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item 68% of the time the real size is included in the interval
+[(2average-stddev), 2]
+@item 95% of the time the real size is included in the interval
+[(2average-2*stddev, 2^average+2*stddev]
+@item 99.7% of the time the real size is included in the interval
+[(2average-3*stddev, 2average+3*stddev]
+@end itemize
+
+The expected standard variation for 64 rounds in a network of stable size
+is 0.2. Thus, we can say that normally:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item 68% of the time the real size is in the range [-13%, +15%]
+@item 95% of the time the real size is in the range [-24%, +32%]
+@item 99.7% of the time the real size is in the range [-34%, +52%]
+@end itemize
+
+As said in the introduction, we can be quite sure that usually the real
+size is between one third and three times the estimate. This can of
+course vary with network conditions.
+Thus, applications may want to also consider the provided standard
+deviation value, not only the average (in particular, if the standard
+veriation is very high, the average maybe meaningless: the network size is
+changing rapidly).
+
+@node libgnunetnse - Examples
+@subsubsection libgnunetnse -Examples
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+Let's close with a couple examples.
+
+@table @asis
+
+@item Average: 10, std dev: 1 Here the estimate would be
+2^10 = 1024 peers. @footnote{The range in which we can be 95% sure is:
+[2^8, 2^12] = [256, 4096]. We can be very (>99.7%) sure that the network
+is not a hundred peers and absolutely sure that it is not a million peers,
+but somewhere around a thousand.}
+
+@item Average 22, std dev: 0.2 Here the estimate would be
+2^22 = 4 Million peers. @footnote{The range in which we can be 99.7% sure
+is: [2^21.4, 2^22.6] = [2.8M, 6.3M]. We can be sure that the network size
+is around four million, with absolutely way of it being 1 million.}
+
+@end table
+
+To put this in perspective, if someone remembers the LHC Higgs boson
+results, were announced with "5 sigma" and "6 sigma" certainties. In this
+case a 5 sigma minimum would be 2 million and a 6 sigma minimum,
+1.8 million.
+
+@node The NSE Client-Service Protocol
+@subsection The NSE Client-Service Protocol
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+As with the API, the client-service protocol is very simple, only has 2
+different messages, defined in @code{src/nse/nse.h}:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item @code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_NSE_START}@ This message has no parameters
+and is sent from the client to the service upon connection.
+@item @code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_NSE_ESTIMATE}@ This message is sent from
+the service to the client for every new estimate and upon connection.
+Contains a timestamp for the estimate, the average and the standard
+deviation for the respective round.
+@end itemize
+
+When the @code{GNUNET_NSE_disconnect} API call is executed, the client
+simply disconnects from the service, with no message involved.
+
+@cindex NSE Peer-to-Peer Protocol
+@node The NSE Peer-to-Peer Protocol
+@subsection The NSE Peer-to-Peer Protocol
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The NSE subsystem only has one message in the P2P protocol, the
+@code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_NSE_P2P_FLOOD} message.
+
+This message key contents are the timestamp to identify the round
+(differences in system clocks may cause some peers to send messages way
+too early or way too late, so the timestamp allows other peers to
+identify such messages easily), the
+@uref{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Proof-of-work_system, proof of work}
+used to make it difficult to mount a
+@uref{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sybil_attack, Sybil attack}, and the
+public key, which is used to verify the signature on the message.
+
+Every peer stores a message for the previous, current and next round. The
+messages for the previous and current round are given to peers that
+connect to us. The message for the next round is simply stored until our
+system clock advances to the next round. The message for the current round
+is what we are flooding the network with right now.
+At the beginning of each round the peer does the following:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item calculates his own distance to the target value
+@item creates, signs and stores the message for the current round (unless
+it has a better message in the "next round" slot which came early in the
+previous round)
+@item calculates, based on the stored round message (own or received) when
+to stard flooding it to its neighbors
+@end itemize
+
+Upon receiving a message the peer checks the validity of the message
+(round, proof of work, signature). The next action depends on the
+contents of the incoming message:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item if the message is worse than the current stored message, the peer
+sends the current message back immediately, to stop the other peer from
+spreading suboptimal results
+@item if the message is better than the current stored message, the peer
+stores the new message and calculates the new target time to start
+spreading it to its neighbors (excluding the one the message came from)
+@item if the message is for the previous round, it is compared to the
+message stored in the "previous round slot", which may then be updated
+@item if the message is for the next round, it is compared to the message
+stored in the "next round slot", which again may then be updated
+@end itemize
+
+Finally, when it comes to send the stored message for the current round to
+the neighbors there is a random delay added for each neighbor, to avoid
+traffic spikes and minimize cross-messages.
+
+@cindex HOSTLIST Subsystem
+@node HOSTLIST Subsystem
+@section HOSTLIST Subsystem
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+Peers in the GNUnet overlay network need address information so that they
+can connect with other peers. GNUnet uses so called HELLO messages to
+store and exchange peer addresses.
+GNUnet provides several methods for peers to obtain this information:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item out-of-band exchange of HELLO messages (manually, using for example
+gnunet-peerinfo)
+@item HELLO messages shipped with GNUnet (automatic with distribution)
+@item UDP neighbor discovery in LAN (IPv4 broadcast, IPv6 multicast)
+@item topology gossiping (learning from other peers we already connected
+to), and
+@item the HOSTLIST daemon covered in this section, which is particularly
+relevant for bootstrapping new peers.
+@end itemize
+
+New peers have no existing connections (and thus cannot learn from gossip
+among peers), may not have other peers in their LAN and might be started
+with an outdated set of HELLO messages from the distribution.
+In this case, getting new peers to connect to the network requires either
+manual effort or the use of a HOSTLIST to obtain HELLOs.
+
+@menu
+* HELLOs::
+* Overview for the HOSTLIST subsystem::
+* Interacting with the HOSTLIST daemon::
+* Hostlist security address validation::
+* The HOSTLIST daemon::
+* The HOSTLIST server::
+* The HOSTLIST client::
+* Usage::
+@end menu
+
+@node HELLOs
+@subsection HELLOs
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The basic information peers require to connect to other peers are
+contained in so called HELLO messages you can think of as a business card.
+Besides the identity of the peer (based on the cryptographic public key) a
+HELLO message may contain address information that specifies ways to
+contact a peer. By obtaining HELLO messages, a peer can learn how to
+contact other peers.
+
+@node Overview for the HOSTLIST subsystem
+@subsection Overview for the HOSTLIST subsystem
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The HOSTLIST subsystem provides a way to distribute and obtain contact
+information to connect to other peers using a simple HTTP GET request.
+It's implementation is split in three parts, the main file for the daemon
+itself (@file{gnunet-daemon-hostlist.c}), the HTTP client used to download
+peer information (@file{hostlist-client.c}) and the server component used
+to provide this information to other peers (@file{hostlist-server.c}).
+The server is basically a small HTTP web server (based on GNU
+libmicrohttpd) which provides a list of HELLOs known to the local peer for
+download. The client component is basically a HTTP client
+(based on libcurl) which can download hostlists from one or more websites.
+The hostlist format is a binary blob containing a sequence of HELLO
+messages. Note that any HTTP server can theoretically serve a hostlist,
+the build-in hostlist server makes it simply convenient to offer this
+service.
+
+
+@menu
+* Features::
+* HOSTLIST - Limitations::
+@end menu
+
+@node Features
+@subsubsection Features
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The HOSTLIST daemon can:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item provide HELLO messages with validated addresses obtained from
+PEERINFO to download for other peers
+@item download HELLO messages and forward these message to the TRANSPORT
+subsystem for validation
+@item advertises the URL of this peer's hostlist address to other peers
+via gossip
+@item automatically learn about hostlist servers from the gossip of other
+peers
+@end itemize
+
+@node HOSTLIST - Limitations
+@subsubsection HOSTLIST - Limitations
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The HOSTLIST daemon does not:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item verify the cryptographic information in the HELLO messages
+@item verify the address information in the HELLO messages
+@end itemize
+
+@node Interacting with the HOSTLIST daemon
+@subsection Interacting with the HOSTLIST daemon
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The HOSTLIST subsystem is currently implemented as a daemon, so there is
+no need for the user to interact with it and therefore there is no
+command line tool and no API to communicate with the daemon. In the
+future, we can envision changing this to allow users to manually trigger
+the download of a hostlist.
+
+Since there is no command line interface to interact with HOSTLIST, the
+only way to interact with the hostlist is to use STATISTICS to obtain or
+modify information about the status of HOSTLIST:
+
+@example
+$ gnunet-statistics -s hostlist
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+In particular, HOSTLIST includes a @strong{persistent} value in statistics
+that specifies when the hostlist server might be queried next. As this
+value is exponentially increasing during runtime, developers may want to
+reset or manually adjust it. Note that HOSTLIST (but not STATISTICS) needs
+to be shutdown if changes to this value are to have any effect on the
+daemon (as HOSTLIST does not monitor STATISTICS for changes to the
+download frequency).
+
+@node Hostlist security address validation
+@subsection Hostlist security address validation
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+Since information obtained from other parties cannot be trusted without
+validation, we have to distinguish between @emph{validated} and
+@emph{not validated} addresses. Before using (and so trusting)
+information from other parties, this information has to be double-checked
+(validated). Address validation is not done by HOSTLIST but by the
+TRANSPORT service.
+
+The HOSTLIST component is functionally located between the PEERINFO and
+the TRANSPORT subsystem. When acting as a server, the daemon obtains valid
+(@emph{validated}) peer information (HELLO messages) from the PEERINFO
+service and provides it to other peers. When acting as a client, it
+contacts the HOSTLIST servers specified in the configuration, downloads
+the (unvalidated) list of HELLO messages and forwards these information
+to the TRANSPORT server to validate the addresses.
+
+@cindex HOSTLIST daemon
+@node The HOSTLIST daemon
+@subsection The HOSTLIST daemon
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The hostlist daemon is the main component of the HOSTLIST subsystem. It is
+started by the ARM service and (if configured) starts the HOSTLIST client
+and server components.
+
+If the daemon provides a hostlist itself it can advertise it's own
+hostlist to other peers. To do so it sends a
+@code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_HOSTLIST_ADVERTISEMENT} message to other peers
+when they connect to this peer on the CORE level. This hostlist
+advertisement message contains the URL to access the HOSTLIST HTTP
+server of the sender. The daemon may also subscribe to this type of
+message from CORE service, and then forward these kind of message to the
+HOSTLIST client. The client then uses all available URLs to download peer
+information when necessary.
+
+When starting, the HOSTLIST daemon first connects to the CORE subsystem
+and if hostlist learning is enabled, registers a CORE handler to receive
+this kind of messages. Next it starts (if configured) the client and
+server. It passes pointers to CORE connect and disconnect and receive
+handlers where the client and server store their functions, so the daemon
+can notify them about CORE events.
+
+To clean up on shutdown, the daemon has a cleaning task, shutting down all
+subsystems and disconnecting from CORE.
+
+@cindex HOSTLIST server
+@node The HOSTLIST server
+@subsection The HOSTLIST server
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The server provides a way for other peers to obtain HELLOs. Basically it
+is a small web server other peers can connect to and download a list of
+HELLOs using standard HTTP; it may also advertise the URL of the hostlist
+to other peers connecting on CORE level.
+
+
+@menu
+* The HTTP Server::
+* Advertising the URL::
+@end menu
+
+@node The HTTP Server
+@subsubsection The HTTP Server
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+During startup, the server starts a web server listening on the port
+specified with the HTTPPORT value (default 8080). In addition it connects
+to the PEERINFO service to obtain peer information. The HOSTLIST server
+uses the GNUNET_PEERINFO_iterate function to request HELLO information for
+all peers and adds their information to a new hostlist if they are
+suitable (expired addresses and HELLOs without addresses are both not
+suitable) and the maximum size for a hostlist is not exceeded
+(MAX_BYTES_PER_HOSTLISTS = 500000).
+When PEERINFO finishes (with a last NULL callback), the server destroys
+the previous hostlist response available for download on the web server
+and replaces it with the updated hostlist. The hostlist format is
+basically a sequence of HELLO messages (as obtained from PEERINFO) without
+any special tokenization. Since each HELLO message contains a size field,
+the response can easily be split into separate HELLO messages by the
+client.
+
+A HOSTLIST client connecting to the HOSTLIST server will receive the
+hostlist as a HTTP response and the the server will terminate the
+connection with the result code @code{HTTP 200 OK}.
+The connection will be closed immediately if no hostlist is available.
+
+@node Advertising the URL
+@subsubsection Advertising the URL
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The server also advertises the URL to download the hostlist to other peers
+if hostlist advertisement is enabled.
+When a new peer connects and has hostlist learning enabled, the server
+sends a @code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_HOSTLIST_ADVERTISEMENT} message to this
+peer using the CORE service.
+
+@cindex HOSTLIST client
+@node The HOSTLIST client
+@subsection The HOSTLIST client
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The client provides the functionality to download the list of HELLOs from
+a set of URLs.
+It performs a standard HTTP request to the URLs configured and learned
+from advertisement messages received from other peers. When a HELLO is
+downloaded, the HOSTLIST client forwards the HELLO to the TRANSPORT
+service for validation.
+
+The client supports two modes of operation:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item download of HELLOs (bootstrapping)
+@item learning of URLs
+@end itemize
+
+@menu
+* Bootstrapping::
+* Learning::
+@end menu
+
+@node Bootstrapping
+@subsubsection Bootstrapping
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+For bootstrapping, it schedules a task to download the hostlist from the
+set of known URLs.
+The downloads are only performed if the number of current
+connections is smaller than a minimum number of connections
+(at the moment 4).
+The interval between downloads increases exponentially; however, the
+exponential growth is limited if it becomes longer than an hour.
+At that point, the frequency growth is capped at
+(#number of connections * 1h).
+
+Once the decision has been taken to download HELLOs, the daemon chooses a
+random URL from the list of known URLs. URLs can be configured in the
+configuration or be learned from advertisement messages.
+The client uses a HTTP client library (libcurl) to initiate the download
+using the libcurl multi interface.
+Libcurl passes the data to the callback_download function which
+stores the data in a buffer if space is available and the maximum size for
+a hostlist download is not exceeded (MAX_BYTES_PER_HOSTLISTS = 500000).
+When a full HELLO was downloaded, the HOSTLIST client offers this
+HELLO message to the TRANSPORT service for validation.
+When the download is finished or failed, statistical information about the
+quality of this URL is updated.
+
+@cindex HOSTLIST learning
+@node Learning
+@subsubsection Learning
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The client also manages hostlist advertisements from other peers. The
+HOSTLIST daemon forwards @code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_HOSTLIST_ADVERTISEMENT}
+messages to the client subsystem, which extracts the URL from the message.
+Next, a test of the newly obtained URL is performed by triggering a
+download from the new URL. If the URL works correctly, it is added to the
+list of working URLs.
+
+The size of the list of URLs is restricted, so if an additional server is
+added and the list is full, the URL with the worst quality ranking
+(determined through successful downloads and number of HELLOs e.g.) is
+discarded. During shutdown the list of URLs is saved to a file for
+persistance and loaded on startup. URLs from the configuration file are
+never discarded.
+
+@node Usage
+@subsection Usage
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+To start HOSTLIST by default, it has to be added to the DEFAULTSERVICES
+section for the ARM services. This is done in the default configuration.
+
+For more information on how to configure the HOSTLIST subsystem see the
+installation handbook:@
+Configuring the hostlist to bootstrap@
+Configuring your peer to provide a hostlist
+
+@cindex IDENTITY Subsystem
+@node IDENTITY Subsystem
+@section IDENTITY Subsystem
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+Identities of "users" in GNUnet are called egos.
+Egos can be used as pseudonyms ("fake names") or be tied to an
+organization (for example, "GNU") or even the actual identity of a human.
+GNUnet users are expected to have many egos. They might have one tied to
+their real identity, some for organizations they manage, and more for
+different domains where they want to operate under a pseudonym.
+
+The IDENTITY service allows users to manage their egos. The identity
+service manages the private keys egos of the local user; it does not
+manage identities of other users (public keys). Public keys for other
+users need names to become manageable. GNUnet uses the
+@dfn{GNU Name System} (GNS) to give names to other users and manage their
+public keys securely. This chapter is about the IDENTITY service,
+which is about the management of private keys.
+
+On the network, an ego corresponds to an ECDSA key (over Curve25519,
+using RFC 6979, as required by GNS). Thus, users can perform actions
+under a particular ego by using (signing with) a particular private key.
+Other users can then confirm that the action was really performed by that
+ego by checking the signature against the respective public key.
+
+The IDENTITY service allows users to associate a human-readable name with
+each ego. This way, users can use names that will remind them of the
+purpose of a particular ego.
+The IDENTITY service will store the respective private keys and
+allows applications to access key information by name.
+Users can change the name that is locally (!) associated with an ego.
+Egos can also be deleted, which means that the private key will be removed
+and it thus will not be possible to perform actions with that ego in the
+future.
+
+Additionally, the IDENTITY subsystem can associate service functions with
+egos.
+For example, GNS requires the ego that should be used for the shorten
+zone. GNS will ask IDENTITY for an ego for the "gns-short" service.
+The IDENTITY service has a mapping of such service strings to the name of
+the ego that the user wants to use for this service, for example
+"my-short-zone-ego".
+
+Finally, the IDENTITY API provides access to a special ego, the
+anonymous ego. The anonymous ego is special in that its private key is not
+really private, but fixed and known to everyone.
+Thus, anyone can perform actions as anonymous. This can be useful as with
+this trick, code does not have to contain a special case to distinguish
+between anonymous and pseudonymous egos.
+
+@menu
+* libgnunetidentity::
+* The IDENTITY Client-Service Protocol::
+@end menu
+
+@cindex libgnunetidentity
+@node libgnunetidentity
+@subsection libgnunetidentity
+@c %**end of header
+
+
+@menu
+* Connecting to the service::
+* Operations on Egos::
+* The anonymous Ego::
+* Convenience API to lookup a single ego::
+* Associating egos with service functions::
+@end menu
+
+@node Connecting to the service
+@subsubsection Connecting to the service
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+First, typical clients connect to the identity service using
+@code{GNUNET_IDENTITY_connect}. This function takes a callback as a
+parameter.
+If the given callback parameter is non-null, it will be invoked to notify
+the application about the current state of the identities in the system.
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item First, it will be invoked on all known egos at the time of the
+connection. For each ego, a handle to the ego and the user's name for the
+ego will be passed to the callback. Furthermore, a @code{void **} context
+argument will be provided which gives the client the opportunity to
+associate some state with the ego.
+@item Second, the callback will be invoked with NULL for the ego, the name
+and the context. This signals that the (initial) iteration over all egos
+has completed.
+@item Then, the callback will be invoked whenever something changes about
+an ego.
+If an ego is renamed, the callback is invoked with the ego handle of the
+ego that was renamed, and the new name. If an ego is deleted, the callback
+is invoked with the ego handle and a name of NULL. In the deletion case,
+the application should also release resources stored in the context.
+@item When the application destroys the connection to the identity service
+using @code{GNUNET_IDENTITY_disconnect}, the callback is again invoked
+with the ego and a name of NULL (equivalent to deletion of the egos).
+This should again be used to clean up the per-ego context.
+@end itemize
+
+The ego handle passed to the callback remains valid until the callback is
+invoked with a name of NULL, so it is safe to store a reference to the
+ego's handle.
+
+@node Operations on Egos
+@subsubsection Operations on Egos
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+Given an ego handle, the main operations are to get its associated private
+key using @code{GNUNET_IDENTITY_ego_get_private_key} or its associated
+public key using @code{GNUNET_IDENTITY_ego_get_public_key}.
+
+The other operations on egos are pretty straightforward.
+Using @code{GNUNET_IDENTITY_create}, an application can request the
+creation of an ego by specifying the desired name.
+The operation will fail if that name is
+already in use. Using @code{GNUNET_IDENTITY_rename} the name of an
+existing ego can be changed. Finally, egos can be deleted using
+@code{GNUNET_IDENTITY_delete}. All of these operations will trigger
+updates to the callback given to the @code{GNUNET_IDENTITY_connect}
+function of all applications that are connected with the identity service
+at the time. @code{GNUNET_IDENTITY_cancel} can be used to cancel the
+operations before the respective continuations would be called.
+It is not guaranteed that the operation will not be completed anyway,
+only the continuation will no longer be called.
+
+@node The anonymous Ego
+@subsubsection The anonymous Ego
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+A special way to obtain an ego handle is to call
+@code{GNUNET_IDENTITY_ego_get_anonymous}, which returns an ego for the
+"anonymous" user --- anyone knows and can get the private key for this
+user, so it is suitable for operations that are supposed to be anonymous
+but require signatures (for example, to avoid a special path in the code).
+The anonymous ego is always valid and accessing it does not require a
+connection to the identity service.
+
+@node Convenience API to lookup a single ego
+@subsubsection Convenience API to lookup a single ego
+
+
+As applications commonly simply have to lookup a single ego, there is a
+convenience API to do just that. Use @code{GNUNET_IDENTITY_ego_lookup} to
+lookup a single ego by name. Note that this is the user's name for the
+ego, not the service function. The resulting ego will be returned via a
+callback and will only be valid during that callback. The operation can
+be cancelled via @code{GNUNET_IDENTITY_ego_lookup_cancel}
+(cancellation is only legal before the callback is invoked).
+
+@node Associating egos with service functions
+@subsubsection Associating egos with service functions
+
+
+The @code{GNUNET_IDENTITY_set} function is used to associate a particular
+ego with a service function. The name used by the service and the ego are
+given as arguments.
+Afterwards, the service can use its name to lookup the associated ego
+using @code{GNUNET_IDENTITY_get}.
+
+@node The IDENTITY Client-Service Protocol
+@subsection The IDENTITY Client-Service Protocol
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+A client connecting to the identity service first sends a message with
+type
+@code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_IDENTITY_START} to the service. After that, the
+client will receive information about changes to the egos by receiving
+messages of type @code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_IDENTITY_UPDATE}.
+Those messages contain the private key of the ego and the user's name of
+the ego (or zero bytes for the name to indicate that the ego was deleted).
+A special bit @code{end_of_list} is used to indicate the end of the
+initial iteration over the identity service's egos.
+
+The client can trigger changes to the egos by sending @code{CREATE},
+@code{RENAME} or @code{DELETE} messages.
+The CREATE message contains the private key and the desired name.@
+The RENAME message contains the old name and the new name.@
+The DELETE message only needs to include the name of the ego to delete.@
+The service responds to each of these messages with a @code{RESULT_CODE}
+message which indicates success or error of the operation, and possibly
+a human-readable error message.
+
+Finally, the client can bind the name of a service function to an ego by
+sending a @code{SET_DEFAULT} message with the name of the service function
+and the private key of the ego.
+Such bindings can then be resolved using a @code{GET_DEFAULT} message,
+which includes the name of the service function. The identity service
+will respond to a GET_DEFAULT request with a SET_DEFAULT message
+containing the respective information, or with a RESULT_CODE to
+indicate an error.
+
+@cindex NAMESTORE Subsystem
+@node NAMESTORE Subsystem
+@section NAMESTORE Subsystem
+
+The NAMESTORE subsystem provides persistent storage for local GNS zone
+information. All local GNS zone information are managed by NAMESTORE. It
+provides both the functionality to administer local GNS information (e.g.
+delete and add records) as well as to retrieve GNS information (e.g to
+list name information in a client).
+NAMESTORE does only manage the persistent storage of zone information
+belonging to the user running the service: GNS information from other
+users obtained from the DHT are stored by the NAMECACHE subsystem.
+
+NAMESTORE uses a plugin-based database backend to store GNS information
+with good performance. Here sqlite, MySQL and PostgreSQL are supported
+database backends.
+NAMESTORE clients interact with the IDENTITY subsystem to obtain
+cryptographic information about zones based on egos as described with the
+IDENTITY subsystem, but internally NAMESTORE refers to zones using the
+ECDSA private key.
+In addition, it collaborates with the NAMECACHE subsystem and
+stores zone information when local information are modified in the
+GNS cache to increase look-up performance for local information.
+
+NAMESTORE provides functionality to look-up and store records, to iterate
+over a specific or all zones and to monitor zones for changes. NAMESTORE
+functionality can be accessed using the NAMESTORE api or the NAMESTORE
+command line tool.
+
+@menu
+* libgnunetnamestore::
+@end menu
+
+@cindex libgnunetnamestore
+@node libgnunetnamestore
+@subsection libgnunetnamestore
+
+To interact with NAMESTORE clients first connect to the NAMESTORE service
+using the @code{GNUNET_NAMESTORE_connect} passing a configuration handle.
+As a result they obtain a NAMESTORE handle, they can use for operations,
+or NULL is returned if the connection failed.
+
+To disconnect from NAMESTORE, clients use
+@code{GNUNET_NAMESTORE_disconnect} and specify the handle to disconnect.
+
+NAMESTORE internally uses the ECDSA private key to refer to zones. These
+private keys can be obtained from the IDENTITY subsytem.
+Here @emph{egos} @emph{can be used to refer to zones or the default ego
+assigned to the GNS subsystem can be used to obtained the master zone's
+private key.}
+
+
+@menu
+* Editing Zone Information::
+* Iterating Zone Information::
+* Monitoring Zone Information::
+@end menu
+
+@node Editing Zone Information
+@subsubsection Editing Zone Information
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+NAMESTORE provides functions to lookup records stored under a label in a
+zone and to store records under a label in a zone.
+
+To store (and delete) records, the client uses the
+@code{GNUNET_NAMESTORE_records_store} function and has to provide
+namestore handle to use, the private key of the zone, the label to store
+the records under, the records and number of records plus an callback
+function.
+After the operation is performed NAMESTORE will call the provided
+callback function with the result GNUNET_SYSERR on failure
+(including timeout/queue drop/failure to validate), GNUNET_NO if content
+was already there or not found GNUNET_YES (or other positive value) on
+success plus an additional error message.
+
+Records are deleted by using the store command with 0 records to store.
+It is important to note, that records are not merged when records exist
+with the label.
+So a client has first to retrieve records, merge with existing records
+and then store the result.
+
+To perform a lookup operation, the client uses the
+@code{GNUNET_NAMESTORE_records_store} function. Here he has to pass the
+namestore handle, the private key of the zone and the label. He also has
+to provide a callback function which will be called with the result of
+the lookup operation:
+the zone for the records, the label, and the records including the
+number of records included.
+
+A special operation is used to set the preferred nickname for a zone.
+This nickname is stored with the zone and is automatically merged with
+all labels and records stored in a zone. Here the client uses the
+@code{GNUNET_NAMESTORE_set_nick} function and passes the private key of
+the zone, the nickname as string plus a the callback with the result of
+the operation.
+
+@node Iterating Zone Information
+@subsubsection Iterating Zone Information
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+A client can iterate over all information in a zone or all zones managed
+by NAMESTORE.
+Here a client uses the @code{GNUNET_NAMESTORE_zone_iteration_start}
+function and passes the namestore handle, the zone to iterate over and a
+callback function to call with the result.
+If the client wants to iterate over all the, he passes NULL for the zone.
+A @code{GNUNET_NAMESTORE_ZoneIterator} handle is returned to be used to
+continue iteration.
+
+NAMESTORE calls the callback for every result and expects the client to
+call @code{GNUNET_NAMESTORE_zone_iterator_next} to continue to iterate or
+@code{GNUNET_NAMESTORE_zone_iterator_stop} to interrupt the iteration.
+When NAMESTORE reached the last item it will call the callback with a
+NULL value to indicate.
+
+@node Monitoring Zone Information
+@subsubsection Monitoring Zone Information
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+Clients can also monitor zones to be notified about changes. Here the
+clients uses the @code{GNUNET_NAMESTORE_zone_monitor_start} function and
+passes the private key of the zone and and a callback function to call
+with updates for a zone.
+The client can specify to obtain zone information first by iterating over
+the zone and specify a synchronization callback to be called when the
+client and the namestore are synced.
+
+On an update, NAMESTORE will call the callback with the private key of the
+zone, the label and the records and their number.
+
+To stop monitoring, the client calls
+@code{GNUNET_NAMESTORE_zone_monitor_stop} and passes the handle obtained
+from the function to start the monitoring.
+
+@cindex PEERINFO Subsystem
+@node PEERINFO Subsystem
+@section PEERINFO Subsystem
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The PEERINFO subsystem is used to store verified (validated) information
+about known peers in a persistent way. It obtains these addresses for
+example from TRANSPORT service which is in charge of address validation.
+Validation means that the information in the HELLO message are checked by
+connecting to the addresses and performing a cryptographic handshake to
+authenticate the peer instance stating to be reachable with these
+addresses.
+Peerinfo does not validate the HELLO messages itself but only stores them
+and gives them to interested clients.
+
+As future work, we think about moving from storing just HELLO messages to
+providing a generic persistent per-peer information store.
+More and more subsystems tend to need to store per-peer information in
+persistent way.
+To not duplicate this functionality we plan to provide a PEERSTORE
+service providing this functionality.
+
+@menu
+* PEERINFO - Features::
+* PEERINFO - Limitations::
+* DeveloperPeer Information::
+* Startup::
+* Managing Information::
+* Obtaining Information::
+* The PEERINFO Client-Service Protocol::
+* libgnunetpeerinfo::
+@end menu
+
+@node PEERINFO - Features
+@subsection PEERINFO - Features
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item Persistent storage
+@item Client notification mechanism on update
+@item Periodic clean up for expired information
+@item Differentiation between public and friend-only HELLO
+@end itemize
+
+@node PEERINFO - Limitations
+@subsection PEERINFO - Limitations
+
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item Does not perform HELLO validation
+@end itemize
+
+@node DeveloperPeer Information
+@subsection DeveloperPeer Information
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The PEERINFO subsystem stores these information in the form of HELLO
+messages you can think of as business cards.
+These HELLO messages contain the public key of a peer and the addresses
+a peer can be reached under.
+The addresses include an expiration date describing how long they are
+valid. This information is updated regularly by the TRANSPORT service by
+revalidating the address.
+If an address is expired and not renewed, it can be removed from the
+HELLO message.
+
+Some peer do not want to have their HELLO messages distributed to other
+peers, especially when GNUnet's friend-to-friend modus is enabled.
+To prevent this undesired distribution. PEERINFO distinguishes between
+@emph{public} and @emph{friend-only} HELLO messages.
+Public HELLO messages can be freely distributed to other (possibly
+unknown) peers (for example using the hostlist, gossiping, broadcasting),
+whereas friend-only HELLO messages may not be distributed to other peers.
+Friend-only HELLO messages have an additional flag @code{friend_only} set
+internally. For public HELLO message this flag is not set.
+PEERINFO does and cannot not check if a client is allowed to obtain a
+specific HELLO type.
+
+The HELLO messages can be managed using the GNUnet HELLO library.
+Other GNUnet systems can obtain these information from PEERINFO and use
+it for their purposes.
+Clients are for example the HOSTLIST component providing these
+information to other peers in form of a hostlist or the TRANSPORT
+subsystem using these information to maintain connections to other peers.
+
+@node Startup
+@subsection Startup
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+During startup the PEERINFO services loads persistent HELLOs from disk.
+First PEERINFO parses the directory configured in the HOSTS value of the
+@code{PEERINFO} configuration section to store PEERINFO information.
+For all files found in this directory valid HELLO messages are extracted.
+In addition it loads HELLO messages shipped with the GNUnet distribution.
+These HELLOs are used to simplify network bootstrapping by providing
+valid peer information with the distribution.
+The use of these HELLOs can be prevented by setting the
+@code{USE_INCLUDED_HELLOS} in the @code{PEERINFO} configuration section to
+@code{NO}. Files containing invalid information are removed.
+
+@node Managing Information
+@subsection Managing Information
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The PEERINFO services stores information about known PEERS and a single
+HELLO message for every peer.
+A peer does not need to have a HELLO if no information are available.
+HELLO information from different sources, for example a HELLO obtained
+from a remote HOSTLIST and a second HELLO stored on disk, are combined
+and merged into one single HELLO message per peer which will be given to
+clients. During this merge process the HELLO is immediately written to
+disk to ensure persistence.
+
+PEERINFO in addition periodically scans the directory where information
+are stored for empty HELLO messages with expired TRANSPORT addresses.
+This periodic task scans all files in the directory and recreates the
+HELLO messages it finds.
+Expired TRANSPORT addresses are removed from the HELLO and if the
+HELLO does not contain any valid addresses, it is discarded and removed
+from the disk.
+
+@node Obtaining Information
+@subsection Obtaining Information
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+When a client requests information from PEERINFO, PEERINFO performs a
+lookup for the respective peer or all peers if desired and transmits this
+information to the client.
+The client can specify if friend-only HELLOs have to be included or not
+and PEERINFO filters the respective HELLO messages before transmitting
+information.
+
+To notify clients about changes to PEERINFO information, PEERINFO
+maintains a list of clients interested in this notifications.
+Such a notification occurs if a HELLO for a peer was updated (due to a
+merge for example) or a new peer was added.
+
+@node The PEERINFO Client-Service Protocol
+@subsection The PEERINFO Client-Service Protocol
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+To connect and disconnect to and from the PEERINFO Service PEERINFO
+utilizes the util client/server infrastructure, so no special messages
+types are used here.
+
+To add information for a peer, the plain HELLO message is transmitted to
+the service without any wrapping. All pieces of information required are
+stored within the HELLO message.
+The PEERINFO service provides a message handler accepting and processing
+these HELLO messages.
+
+When obtaining PEERINFO information using the iterate functionality
+specific messages are used. To obtain information for all peers, a
+@code{struct ListAllPeersMessage} with message type
+@code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_PEERINFO_GET_ALL} and a flag
+include_friend_only to indicate if friend-only HELLO messages should be
+included are transmitted. If information for a specific peer is required
+a @code{struct ListAllPeersMessage} with
+@code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_PEERINFO_GET} containing the peer identity is
+used.
+
+For both variants the PEERINFO service replies for each HELLO message it
+wants to transmit with a @code{struct ListAllPeersMessage} with type
+@code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_PEERINFO_INFO} containing the plain HELLO.
+The final message is @code{struct GNUNET_MessageHeader} with type
+@code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_PEERINFO_INFO}. If the client receives this
+message, it can proceed with the next request if any is pending.
+
+@node libgnunetpeerinfo
+@subsection libgnunetpeerinfo
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The PEERINFO API consists mainly of three different functionalities:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item maintaining a connection to the service
+@item adding new information to the PEERINFO service
+@item retrieving information from the PEERINFO service
+@end itemize
+
+@menu
+* Connecting to the PEERINFO Service::
+* Adding Information to the PEERINFO Service::
+* Obtaining Information from the PEERINFO Service::
+@end menu
+
+@node Connecting to the PEERINFO Service
+@subsubsection Connecting to the PEERINFO Service
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+To connect to the PEERINFO service the function
+@code{GNUNET_PEERINFO_connect} is used, taking a configuration handle as
+an argument, and to disconnect from PEERINFO the function
+@code{GNUNET_PEERINFO_disconnect}, taking the PEERINFO
+handle returned from the connect function has to be called.
+
+@node Adding Information to the PEERINFO Service
+@subsubsection Adding Information to the PEERINFO Service
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+@code{GNUNET_PEERINFO_add_peer} adds a new peer to the PEERINFO subsystem
+storage. This function takes the PEERINFO handle as an argument, the HELLO
+message to store and a continuation with a closure to be called with the
+result of the operation.
+The @code{GNUNET_PEERINFO_add_peer} returns a handle to this operation
+allowing to cancel the operation with the respective cancel function
+@code{GNUNET_PEERINFO_add_peer_cancel}. To retrieve information from
+PEERINFO you can iterate over all information stored with PEERINFO or you
+can tell PEERINFO to notify if new peer information are available.
+
+@node Obtaining Information from the PEERINFO Service
+@subsubsection Obtaining Information from the PEERINFO Service
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+To iterate over information in PEERINFO you use
+@code{GNUNET_PEERINFO_iterate}.
+This function expects the PEERINFO handle, a flag if HELLO messages
+intended for friend only mode should be included, a timeout how long the
+operation should take and a callback with a callback closure to be called
+for the results.
+If you want to obtain information for a specific peer, you can specify
+the peer identity, if this identity is NULL, information for all peers are
+returned. The function returns a handle to allow to cancel the operation
+using @code{GNUNET_PEERINFO_iterate_cancel}.
+
+To get notified when peer information changes, you can use
+@code{GNUNET_PEERINFO_notify}.
+This function expects a configuration handle and a flag if friend-only
+HELLO messages should be included. The PEERINFO service will notify you
+about every change and the callback function will be called to notify you
+about changes. The function returns a handle to cancel notifications
+with @code{GNUNET_PEERINFO_notify_cancel}.
+
+@cindex PEERSTORE Subsystem
+@node PEERSTORE Subsystem
+@section PEERSTORE Subsystem
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+GNUnet's PEERSTORE subsystem offers persistent per-peer storage for other
+GNUnet subsystems. GNUnet subsystems can use PEERSTORE to persistently
+store and retrieve arbitrary data.
+Each data record stored with PEERSTORE contains the following fields:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item subsystem: Name of the subsystem responsible for the record.
+@item peerid: Identity of the peer this record is related to.
+@item key: a key string identifying the record.
+@item value: binary record value.
+@item expiry: record expiry date.
+@end itemize
+
+@menu
+* Functionality::
+* Architecture::
+* libgnunetpeerstore::
+@end menu
+
+@node Functionality
+@subsection Functionality
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+Subsystems can store any type of value under a (subsystem, peerid, key)
+combination. A "replace" flag set during store operations forces the
+PEERSTORE to replace any old values stored under the same
+(subsystem, peerid, key) combination with the new value.
+Additionally, an expiry date is set after which the record is *possibly*
+deleted by PEERSTORE.
+
+Subsystems can iterate over all values stored under any of the following
+combination of fields:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item (subsystem)
+@item (subsystem, peerid)
+@item (subsystem, key)
+@item (subsystem, peerid, key)
+@end itemize
+
+Subsystems can also request to be notified about any new values stored
+under a (subsystem, peerid, key) combination by sending a "watch"
+request to PEERSTORE.
+
+@node Architecture
+@subsection Architecture
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+PEERSTORE implements the following components:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item PEERSTORE service: Handles store, iterate and watch operations.
+@item PEERSTORE API: API to be used by other subsystems to communicate and
+issue commands to the PEERSTORE service.
+@item PEERSTORE plugins: Handles the persistent storage. At the moment,
+only an "sqlite" plugin is implemented.
+@end itemize
+
+@cindex libgnunetpeerstore
+@node libgnunetpeerstore
+@subsection libgnunetpeerstore
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+libgnunetpeerstore is the library containing the PEERSTORE API. Subsystems
+wishing to communicate with the PEERSTORE service use this API to open a
+connection to PEERSTORE. This is done by calling
+@code{GNUNET_PEERSTORE_connect} which returns a handle to the newly
+created connection.
+This handle has to be used with any further calls to the API.
+
+To store a new record, the function @code{GNUNET_PEERSTORE_store} is to
+be used which requires the record fields and a continuation function that
+will be called by the API after the STORE request is sent to the
+PEERSTORE service.
+Note that calling the continuation function does not mean that the record
+is successfully stored, only that the STORE request has been successfully
+sent to the PEERSTORE service.
+@code{GNUNET_PEERSTORE_store_cancel} can be called to cancel the STORE
+request only before the continuation function has been called.
+
+To iterate over stored records, the function
+@code{GNUNET_PEERSTORE_iterate} is
+to be used. @emph{peerid} and @emph{key} can be set to NULL. An iterator
+callback function will be called with each matching record found and a
+NULL record at the end to signal the end of result set.
+@code{GNUNET_PEERSTORE_iterate_cancel} can be used to cancel the ITERATE
+request before the iterator callback is called with a NULL record.
+
+To be notified with new values stored under a (subsystem, peerid, key)
+combination, the function @code{GNUNET_PEERSTORE_watch} is to be used.
+This will register the watcher with the PEERSTORE service, any new
+records matching the given combination will trigger the callback
+function passed to @code{GNUNET_PEERSTORE_watch}. This continues until
+@code{GNUNET_PEERSTORE_watch_cancel} is called or the connection to the
+service is destroyed.
+
+After the connection is no longer needed, the function
+@code{GNUNET_PEERSTORE_disconnect} can be called to disconnect from the
+PEERSTORE service.
+Any pending ITERATE or WATCH requests will be destroyed.
+If the @code{sync_first} flag is set to @code{GNUNET_YES}, the API will
+delay the disconnection until all pending STORE requests are sent to
+the PEERSTORE service, otherwise, the pending STORE requests will be
+destroyed as well.
+
+@cindex SET Subsystem
+@node SET Subsystem
+@section SET Subsystem
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The SET service implements efficient set operations between two peers
+over a mesh tunnel.
+Currently, set union and set intersection are the only supported
+operations. Elements of a set consist of an @emph{element type} and
+arbitrary binary @emph{data}.
+The size of an element's data is limited to around 62 KB.
+
+@menu
+* Local Sets::
+* Set Modifications::
+* Set Operations::
+* Result Elements::
+* libgnunetset::
+* The SET Client-Service Protocol::
+* The SET Intersection Peer-to-Peer Protocol::
+* The SET Union Peer-to-Peer Protocol::
+@end menu
+
+@node Local Sets
+@subsection Local Sets
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+Sets created by a local client can be modified and reused for multiple
+operations. As each set operation requires potentially expensive special
+auxilliary data to be computed for each element of a set, a set can only
+participate in one type of set operation (i.e. union or intersection).
+The type of a set is determined upon its creation.
+If a the elements of a set are needed for an operation of a different
+type, all of the set's element must be copied to a new set of appropriate
+type.
+
+@node Set Modifications
+@subsection Set Modifications
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+Even when set operations are active, one can add to and remove elements
+from a set.
+However, these changes will only be visible to operations that have been
+created after the changes have taken place. That is, every set operation
+only sees a snapshot of the set from the time the operation was started.
+This mechanism is @emph{not} implemented by copying the whole set, but by
+attaching @emph{generation information} to each element and operation.
+
+@node Set Operations
+@subsection Set Operations
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+Set operations can be started in two ways: Either by accepting an
+operation request from a remote peer, or by requesting a set operation
+from a remote peer.
+Set operations are uniquely identified by the involved @emph{peers}, an
+@emph{application id} and the @emph{operation type}.
+
+The client is notified of incoming set operations by @emph{set listeners}.
+A set listener listens for incoming operations of a specific operation
+type and application id.
+Once notified of an incoming set request, the client can accept the set
+request (providing a local set for the operation) or reject it.
+
+@node Result Elements
+@subsection Result Elements
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The SET service has three @emph{result modes} that determine how an
+operation's result set is delivered to the client:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item @strong{Full Result Set.} All elements of set resulting from the set
+operation are returned to the client.
+@item @strong{Added Elements.} Only elements that result from the
+operation and are not already in the local peer's set are returned.
+Note that for some operations (like set intersection) this result mode
+will never return any elements.
+This can be useful if only the remove peer is actually interested in
+the result of the set operation.
+@item @strong{Removed Elements.} Only elements that are in the local
+peer's initial set but not in the operation's result set are returned.
+Note that for some operations (like set union) this result mode will
+never return any elements. This can be useful if only the remove peer is
+actually interested in the result of the set operation.
+@end itemize
+
+@cindex libgnunetset
+@node libgnunetset
+@subsection libgnunetset
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+@menu
+* Sets::
+* Listeners::
+* Operations::
+* Supplying a Set::
+* The Result Callback::
+@end menu
+
+@node Sets
+@subsubsection Sets
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+New sets are created with @code{GNUNET_SET_create}. Both the local peer's
+configuration (as each set has its own client connection) and the
+operation type must be specified.
+The set exists until either the client calls @code{GNUNET_SET_destroy} or
+the client's connection to the service is disrupted.
+In the latter case, the client is notified by the return value of
+functions dealing with sets. This return value must always be checked.
+
+Elements are added and removed with @code{GNUNET_SET_add_element} and
+@code{GNUNET_SET_remove_element}.
+
+@node Listeners
+@subsubsection Listeners
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+Listeners are created with @code{GNUNET_SET_listen}. Each time time a
+remote peer suggests a set operation with an application id and operation
+type matching a listener, the listener's callback is invoked.
+The client then must synchronously call either @code{GNUNET_SET_accept}
+or @code{GNUNET_SET_reject}. Note that the operation will not be started
+until the client calls @code{GNUNET_SET_commit}
+(see Section "Supplying a Set").
+
+@node Operations
+@subsubsection Operations
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+Operations to be initiated by the local peer are created with
+@code{GNUNET_SET_prepare}. Note that the operation will not be started
+until the client calls @code{GNUNET_SET_commit}
+(see Section "Supplying a Set").
+
+@node Supplying a Set
+@subsubsection Supplying a Set
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+To create symmetry between the two ways of starting a set operation
+(accepting and nitiating it), the operation handles returned by
+@code{GNUNET_SET_accept} and @code{GNUNET_SET_prepare} do not yet have a
+set to operate on, thus they can not do any work yet.
+
+The client must call @code{GNUNET_SET_commit} to specify a set to use for
+an operation. @code{GNUNET_SET_commit} may only be called once per set
+operation.
+
+@node The Result Callback
+@subsubsection The Result Callback
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+Clients must specify both a result mode and a result callback with
+@code{GNUNET_SET_accept} and @code{GNUNET_SET_prepare}. The result
+callback with a status indicating either that an element was received, or
+the operation failed or succeeded.
+The interpretation of the received element depends on the result mode.
+The callback needs to know which result mode it is used in, as the
+arguments do not indicate if an element is part of the full result set,
+or if it is in the difference between the original set and the final set.
+
+@node The SET Client-Service Protocol
+@subsection The SET Client-Service Protocol
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+@menu
+* Creating Sets::
+* Listeners2::
+* Initiating Operations::
+* Modifying Sets::
+* Results and Operation Status::
+* Iterating Sets::
+@end menu
+
+@node Creating Sets
+@subsubsection Creating Sets
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+For each set of a client, there exists a client connection to the service.
+Sets are created by sending the @code{GNUNET_SERVICE_SET_CREATE} message
+over a new client connection. Multiple operations for one set are
+multiplexed over one client connection, using a request id supplied by
+the client.
+
+@node Listeners2
+@subsubsection Listeners2
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+Each listener also requires a seperate client connection. By sending the
+@code{GNUNET_SERVICE_SET_LISTEN} message, the client notifies the service
+of the application id and operation type it is interested in. A client
+rejects an incoming request by sending @code{GNUNET_SERVICE_SET_REJECT}
+on the listener's client connection.
+In contrast, when accepting an incoming request, a
+@code{GNUNET_SERVICE_SET_ACCEPT} message must be sent over the@ set that
+is supplied for the set operation.
+
+@node Initiating Operations
+@subsubsection Initiating Operations
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+Operations with remote peers are initiated by sending a
+@code{GNUNET_SERVICE_SET_EVALUATE} message to the service. The@ client
+connection that this message is sent by determines the set to use.
+
+@node Modifying Sets
+@subsubsection Modifying Sets
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+Sets are modified with the @code{GNUNET_SERVICE_SET_ADD} and
+@code{GNUNET_SERVICE_SET_REMOVE} messages.
+
+
+@c %@menu
+@c %* Results and Operation Status::
+@c %* Iterating Sets::
+@c %@end menu   
+
+@node Results and Operation Status
+@subsubsection Results and Operation Status
+@c %**end of header
+
+The service notifies the client of result elements and success/failure of
+a set operation with the @code{GNUNET_SERVICE_SET_RESULT} message.
+
+@node Iterating Sets
+@subsubsection Iterating Sets
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+All elements of a set can be requested by sending
+@code{GNUNET_SERVICE_SET_ITER_REQUEST}. The server responds with
+@code{GNUNET_SERVICE_SET_ITER_ELEMENT} and eventually terminates the
+iteration with @code{GNUNET_SERVICE_SET_ITER_DONE}.
+After each received element, the client
+must send @code{GNUNET_SERVICE_SET_ITER_ACK}. Note that only one set
+iteration may be active for a set at any given time.
+
+@node The SET Intersection Peer-to-Peer Protocol
+@subsection The SET Intersection Peer-to-Peer Protocol
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The intersection protocol operates over CADET and starts with a
+GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_SET_P2P_OPERATION_REQUEST being sent by the peer
+initiating the operation to the peer listening for inbound requests.
+It includes the number of elements of the initiating peer, which is used
+to decide which side will send a Bloom filter first.
+
+The listening peer checks if the operation type and application
+identifier are acceptable for its current state.
+If not, it responds with a GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_SET_RESULT and a status of
+GNUNET_SET_STATUS_FAILURE (and terminates the CADET channel).
+
+If the application accepts the request, the listener sends back a
+@code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_SET_INTERSECTION_P2P_ELEMENT_INFO} if it has
+more elements in the set than the client.
+Otherwise, it immediately starts with the Bloom filter exchange.
+If the initiator receives a
+@code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_SET_INTERSECTION_P2P_ELEMENT_INFO} response,
+it beings the Bloom filter exchange, unless the set size is indicated to
+be zero, in which case the intersection is considered finished after
+just the initial handshake.
+
+
+@menu
+* The Bloom filter exchange::
+* Salt::
+@end menu
+
+@node The Bloom filter exchange
+@subsubsection The Bloom filter exchange
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+In this phase, each peer transmits a Bloom filter over the remaining
+keys of the local set to the other peer using a
+@code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_SET_INTERSECTION_P2P_BF} message. This
+message additionally includes the number of elements left in the sender's
+set, as well as the XOR over all of the keys in that set.
+
+The number of bits 'k' set per element in the Bloom filter is calculated
+based on the relative size of the two sets.
+Furthermore, the size of the Bloom filter is calculated based on 'k' and
+the number of elements in the set to maximize the amount of data filtered
+per byte transmitted on the wire (while avoiding an excessively high
+number of iterations).
+
+The receiver of the message removes all elements from its local set that
+do not pass the Bloom filter test.
+It then checks if the set size of the sender and the XOR over the keys
+match what is left of his own set. If they do, he sends a
+@code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_SET_INTERSECTION_P2P_DONE} back to indicate
+that the latest set is the final result.
+Otherwise, the receiver starts another Bloom fitler exchange, except
+this time as the sender.
+
+@node Salt
+@subsubsection Salt
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+Bloomfilter operations are probablistic: With some non-zero probability
+the test may incorrectly say an element is in the set, even though it is
+not.
+
+To mitigate this problem, the intersection protocol iterates exchanging
+Bloom filters using a different random 32-bit salt in each iteration (the
+salt is also included in the message).
+With different salts, set operations may fail for different elements.
+Merging the results from the executions, the probability of failure drops
+to zero.
+
+The iterations terminate once both peers have established that they have
+sets of the same size, and where the XOR over all keys computes the same
+512-bit value (leaving a failure probability of 2-511).
+
+@node The SET Union Peer-to-Peer Protocol
+@subsection The SET Union Peer-to-Peer Protocol
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The SET union protocol is based on Eppstein's efficient set reconciliation
+without prior context. You should read this paper first if you want to
+understand the protocol.
+
+The union protocol operates over CADET and starts with a
+GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_SET_P2P_OPERATION_REQUEST being sent by the peer
+initiating the operation to the peer listening for inbound requests.
+It includes the number of elements of the initiating peer, which is
+currently not used.
+
+The listening peer checks if the operation type and application
+identifier are acceptable for its current state. If not, it responds with
+a @code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_SET_RESULT} and a status of
+@code{GNUNET_SET_STATUS_FAILURE} (and terminates the CADET channel).
+
+If the application accepts the request, it sends back a strata estimator
+using a message of type GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_SET_UNION_P2P_SE. The
+initiator evaluates the strata estimator and initiates the exchange of
+invertible Bloom filters, sending a GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_SET_UNION_P2P_IBF.
+
+During the IBF exchange, if the receiver cannot invert the Bloom filter or
+detects a cycle, it sends a larger IBF in response (up to a defined
+maximum limit; if that limit is reached, the operation fails).
+Elements decoded while processing the IBF are transmitted to the other
+peer using GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_SET_P2P_ELEMENTS, or requested from the
+other peer using GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_SET_P2P_ELEMENT_REQUESTS messages,
+depending on the sign observed during decoding of the IBF.
+Peers respond to a GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_SET_P2P_ELEMENT_REQUESTS message
+with the respective element in a GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_SET_P2P_ELEMENTS
+message. If the IBF fully decodes, the peer responds with a
+GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_SET_UNION_P2P_DONE message instead of another
+GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_SET_UNION_P2P_IBF.
+
+All Bloom filter operations use a salt to mingle keys before hasing them
+into buckets, such that future iterations have a fresh chance of
+succeeding if they failed due to collisions before.
+
+@cindex STATISTICS Subsystem
+@node STATISTICS Subsystem
+@section STATISTICS Subsystem
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+In GNUnet, the STATISTICS subsystem offers a central place for all
+subsystems to publish unsigned 64-bit integer run-time statistics.
+Keeping this information centrally means that there is a unified way for
+the user to obtain data on all subsystems, and individual subsystems do
+not have to always include a custom data export method for performance
+metrics and other statistics. For example, the TRANSPORT system uses
+STATISTICS to update information about the number of directly connected
+peers and the bandwidth that has been consumed by the various plugins.
+This information is valuable for diagnosing connectivity and performance
+issues.
+
+Following the GNUnet service architecture, the STATISTICS subsystem is
+divided into an API which is exposed through the header
+@strong{gnunet_statistics_service.h} and the STATISTICS service
+@strong{gnunet-service-statistics}. The @strong{gnunet-statistics}
+command-line tool can be used to obtain (and change) information about
+the values stored by the STATISTICS service. The STATISTICS service does
+not communicate with other peers.
+
+Data is stored in the STATISTICS service in the form of tuples
+@strong{(subsystem, name, value, persistence)}. The subsystem determines
+to which other GNUnet's subsystem the data belongs. name is the name
+through which value is associated. It uniquely identifies the record
+from among other records belonging to the same subsystem.
+In some parts of the code, the pair @strong{(subsystem, name)} is called
+a @strong{statistic} as it identifies the values stored in the STATISTCS
+service.The persistence flag determines if the record has to be preserved
+across service restarts. A record is said to be persistent if this flag
+is set for it; if not, the record is treated as a non-persistent record
+and it is lost after service restart. Persistent records are written to
+and read from the file @strong{statistics.data} before shutdown
+and upon startup. The file is located in the HOME directory of the peer.
+
+An anomaly of the STATISTICS service is that it does not terminate
+immediately upon receiving a shutdown signal if it has any clients
+connected to it. It waits for all the clients that are not monitors to
+close their connections before terminating itself.
+This is to prevent the loss of data during peer shutdown --- delaying the
+STATISTICS service shutdown helps other services to store important data
+to STATISTICS during shutdown.
+
+@menu
+* libgnunetstatistics::
+* The STATISTICS Client-Service Protocol::
+@end menu
+
+@cindex libgnunetstatistics
+@node libgnunetstatistics
+@subsection libgnunetstatistics
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+@strong{libgnunetstatistics} is the library containing the API for the
+STATISTICS subsystem. Any process requiring to use STATISTICS should use
+this API by to open a connection to the STATISTICS service.
+This is done by calling the function @code{GNUNET_STATISTICS_create()}.
+This function takes the subsystem's name which is trying to use STATISTICS
+and a configuration.
+All values written to STATISTICS with this connection will be placed in
+the section corresponding to the given subsystem's name.
+The connection to STATISTICS can be destroyed with the function
+@code{GNUNET_STATISTICS_destroy()}. This function allows for the
+connection to be destroyed immediately or upon transferring all
+pending write requests to the service.
+
+Note: STATISTICS subsystem can be disabled by setting @code{DISABLE = YES}
+under the @code{[STATISTICS]} section in the configuration. With such a
+configuration all calls to @code{GNUNET_STATISTICS_create()} return
+@code{NULL} as the STATISTICS subsystem is unavailable and no other
+functions from the API can be used.
+
+
+@menu
+* Statistics retrieval::
+* Setting statistics and updating them::
+* Watches::
+@end menu
+
+@node Statistics retrieval
+@subsubsection Statistics retrieval
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+Once a connection to the statistics service is obtained, information
+about any other system which uses statistics can be retrieved with the
+function GNUNET_STATISTICS_get().
+This function takes the connection handle, the name of the subsystem
+whose information we are interested in (a @code{NULL} value will
+retrieve information of all available subsystems using STATISTICS), the
+name of the statistic we are interested in (a @code{NULL} value will
+retrieve all available statistics), a continuation callback which is
+called when all of requested information is retrieved, an iterator
+callback which is called for each parameter in the retrieved information
+and a closure for the aforementioned callbacks. The library then invokes
+the iterator callback for each value matching the request.
+
+Call to @code{GNUNET_STATISTICS_get()} is asynchronous and can be
+canceled with the function @code{GNUNET_STATISTICS_get_cancel()}.
+This is helpful when retrieving statistics takes too long and especially
+when we want to shutdown and cleanup everything.
+
+@node Setting statistics and updating them
+@subsubsection Setting statistics and updating them
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+So far we have seen how to retrieve statistics, here we will learn how we
+can set statistics and update them so that other subsystems can retrieve
+them.
+
+A new statistic can be set using the function
+@code{GNUNET_STATISTICS_set()}.
+This function takes the name of the statistic and its value and a flag to
+make the statistic persistent.
+The value of the statistic should be of the type @code{uint64_t}.
+The function does not take the name of the subsystem; it is determined
+from the previous @code{GNUNET_STATISTICS_create()} invocation. If
+the given statistic is already present, its value is overwritten.
+
+An existing statistics can be updated, i.e its value can be increased or
+decreased by an amount with the function
+@code{GNUNET_STATISTICS_update()}.
+The parameters to this function are similar to
+@code{GNUNET_STATISTICS_set()}, except that it takes the amount to be
+changed as a type @code{int64_t} instead of the value.
+
+The library will combine multiple set or update operations into one
+message if the client performs requests at a rate that is faster than the
+available IPC with the STATISTICS service. Thus, the client does not have
+to worry about sending requests too quickly.
+
+@node Watches
+@subsubsection Watches
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+As interesting feature of STATISTICS lies in serving notifications
+whenever a statistic of our interest is modified.
+This is achieved by registering a watch through the function
+@code{GNUNET_STATISTICS_watch()}.
+The parameters of this function are similar to those of
+@code{GNUNET_STATISTICS_get()}.
+Changes to the respective statistic's value will then cause the given
+iterator callback to be called.
+Note: A watch can only be registered for a specific statistic. Hence
+the subsystem name and the parameter name cannot be @code{NULL} in a
+call to @code{GNUNET_STATISTICS_watch()}.
+
+A registered watch will keep notifying any value changes until
+@code{GNUNET_STATISTICS_watch_cancel()} is called with the same
+parameters that are used for registering the watch.
+
+@node The STATISTICS Client-Service Protocol
+@subsection The STATISTICS Client-Service Protocol
+@c %**end of header
+
+
+@menu
+* Statistics retrieval2::
+* Setting and updating statistics::
+* Watching for updates::
+@end menu
+
+@node Statistics retrieval2
+@subsubsection Statistics retrieval2
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+To retrieve statistics, the client transmits a message of type
+@code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_STATISTICS_GET} containing the given subsystem
+name and statistic parameter to the STATISTICS service.
+The service responds with a message of type
+@code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_STATISTICS_VALUE} for each of the statistics
+parameters that match the client request for the client. The end of
+information retrieved is signaled by the service by sending a message of
+type @code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_STATISTICS_END}.
+
+@node Setting and updating statistics
+@subsubsection Setting and updating statistics
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The subsystem name, parameter name, its value and the persistence flag are
+communicated to the service through the message
+@code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_STATISTICS_SET}.
+
+When the service receives a message of type
+@code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_STATISTICS_SET}, it retrieves the subsystem
+name and checks for a statistic parameter with matching the name given in
+the message.
+If a statistic parameter is found, the value is overwritten by the new
+value from the message; if not found then a new statistic parameter is
+created with the given name and value.
+
+In addition to just setting an absolute value, it is possible to perform a
+relative update by sending a message of type
+@code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_STATISTICS_SET} with an update flag
+(@code{GNUNET_STATISTICS_SETFLAG_RELATIVE}) signifying that the value in
+the message should be treated as an update value.
+
+@node Watching for updates
+@subsubsection Watching for updates
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The function registers the watch at the service by sending a message of
+type @code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_STATISTICS_WATCH}. The service then sends
+notifications through messages of type
+@code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_STATISTICS_WATCH_VALUE} whenever the statistic
+parameter's value is changed.
+
+@cindex DHT
+@cindex Distributed Hash Table
+@node Distributed Hash Table (DHT)
+@section Distributed Hash Table (DHT)
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+GNUnet includes a generic distributed hash table that can be used by
+developers building P2P applications in the framework.
+This section documents high-level features and how developers are
+expected to use the DHT.
+We have a research paper detailing how the DHT works.
+Also, Nate's thesis includes a detailed description and performance
+analysis (in chapter 6).
+
+Key features of GNUnet's DHT include:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item stores key-value pairs with values up to (approximately) 63k in size
+@item works with many underlay network topologies (small-world, random
+graph), underlay does not need to be a full mesh / clique
+@item support for extended queries (more than just a simple 'key'),
+filtering duplicate replies within the network (bloomfilter) and content
+validation (for details, please read the subsection on the block library)
+@item can (optionally) return paths taken by the PUT and GET operations
+to the application
+@item provides content replication to handle churn
+@end itemize
+
+GNUnet's DHT is randomized and unreliable. Unreliable means that there is
+no strict guarantee that a value stored in the DHT is always
+found --- values are only found with high probability.
+While this is somewhat true in all P2P DHTs, GNUnet developers should be
+particularly wary of this fact (this will help you write secure,
+fault-tolerant code). Thus, when writing any application using the DHT,
+you should always consider the possibility that a value stored in the
+DHT by you or some other peer might simply not be returned, or returned
+with a significant delay.
+Your application logic must be written to tolerate this (naturally, some
+loss of performance or quality of service is expected in this case).
+
+@menu
+* Block library and plugins::
+* libgnunetdht::
+* The DHT Client-Service Protocol::
+* The DHT Peer-to-Peer Protocol::
+@end menu
+
+@node Block library and plugins
+@subsection Block library and plugins
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+@menu
+* What is a Block?::
+* The API of libgnunetblock::
+* Queries::
+* Sample Code::
+* Conclusion2::
+@end menu
+
+@node What is a Block?
+@subsubsection What is a Block?
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+Blocks are small (< 63k) pieces of data stored under a key (struct
+GNUNET_HashCode). Blocks have a type (enum GNUNET_BlockType) which defines
+their data format. Blocks are used in GNUnet as units of static data
+exchanged between peers and stored (or cached) locally.
+Uses of blocks include file-sharing (the files are broken up into blocks),
+the VPN (DNS information is stored in blocks) and the DHT (all
+information in the DHT and meta-information for the maintenance of the
+DHT are both stored using blocks).
+The block subsystem provides a few common functions that must be
+available for any type of block.
+
+@cindex libgnunetblock API
+@node The API of libgnunetblock
+@subsubsection The API of libgnunetblock
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The block library requires for each (family of) block type(s) a block
+plugin (implementing @file{gnunet_block_plugin.h}) that provides basic
+functions that are needed by the DHT (and possibly other subsystems) to
+manage the block.
+These block plugins are typically implemented within their respective
+subsystems.
+The main block library is then used to locate, load and query the
+appropriate block plugin.
+Which plugin is appropriate is determined by the block type (which is
+just a 32-bit integer). Block plugins contain code that specifies which
+block types are supported by a given plugin. The block library loads all
+block plugins that are installed at the local peer and forwards the
+application request to the respective plugin.
+
+The central functions of the block APIs (plugin and main library) are to
+allow the mapping of blocks to their respective key (if possible) and the
+ability to check that a block is well-formed and matches a given
+request (again, if possible).
+This way, GNUnet can avoid storing invalid blocks, storing blocks under
+the wrong key and forwarding blocks in response to a query that they do
+not answer.
+
+One key function of block plugins is that it allows GNUnet to detect
+duplicate replies (via the Bloom filter). All plugins MUST support
+detecting duplicate replies (by adding the current response to the
+Bloom filter and rejecting it if it is encountered again).
+If a plugin fails to do this, responses may loop in the network.
+
+@node Queries
+@subsubsection Queries
+@c %**end of header
+
+The query format for any block in GNUnet consists of four main components.
+First, the type of the desired block must be specified. Second, the query
+must contain a hash code. The hash code is used for lookups in hash
+tables and databases and must not be unique for the block (however, if
+possible a unique hash should be used as this would be best for
+performance).
+Third, an optional Bloom filter can be specified to exclude known results;
+replies that hash to the bits set in the Bloom filter are considered
+invalid. False-positives can be eliminated by sending the same query
+again with a different Bloom filter mutator value, which parameterizes
+the hash function that is used.
+Finally, an optional application-specific "eXtended query" (xquery) can
+be specified to further constrain the results. It is entirely up to
+the type-specific plugin to determine whether or not a given block
+matches a query (type, hash, Bloom filter, and xquery).
+Naturally, not all xquery's are valid and some types of blocks may not
+support Bloom filters either, so the plugin also needs to check if the
+query is valid in the first place.
+
+Depending on the results from the plugin, the DHT will then discard the
+(invalid) query, forward the query, discard the (invalid) reply, cache the
+(valid) reply, and/or forward the (valid and non-duplicate) reply.
+
+@node Sample Code
+@subsubsection Sample Code
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The source code in @strong{plugin_block_test.c} is a good starting point
+for new block plugins --- it does the minimal work by implementing a
+plugin that performs no validation at all.
+The respective @strong{Makefile.am} shows how to build and install a
+block plugin.
+
+@node Conclusion2
+@subsubsection Conclusion2
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+In conclusion, GNUnet subsystems that want to use the DHT need to define a
+block format and write a plugin to match queries and replies. For testing,
+the @code{GNUNET_BLOCK_TYPE_TEST} block type can be used; it accepts
+any query as valid and any reply as matching any query.
+This type is also used for the DHT command line tools.
+However, it should NOT be used for normal applications due to the lack
+of error checking that results from this primitive implementation.
+
+@cindex libgnunetdht
+@node libgnunetdht
+@subsection libgnunetdht
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The DHT API itself is pretty simple and offers the usual GET and PUT
+functions that work as expected. The specified block type refers to the
+block library which allows the DHT to run application-specific logic for
+data stored in the network.
+
+
+@menu
+* GET::
+* PUT::
+* MONITOR::
+* DHT Routing Options::
+@end menu
+
+@node GET
+@subsubsection GET
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+When using GET, the main consideration for developers (other than the
+block library) should be that after issuing a GET, the DHT will
+continuously cause (small amounts of) network traffic until the operation
+is explicitly canceled.
+So GET does not simply send out a single network request once; instead,
+the DHT will continue to search for data. This is needed to achieve good
+success rates and also handles the case where the respective PUT
+operation happens after the GET operation was started.
+Developers should not cancel an existing GET operation and then
+explicitly re-start it to trigger a new round of network requests;
+this is simply inefficient, especially as the internal automated version
+can be more efficient, for example by filtering results in the network
+that have already been returned.
+
+If an application that performs a GET request has a set of replies that it
+already knows and would like to filter, it can call@
+@code{GNUNET_DHT_get_filter_known_results} with an array of hashes over
+the respective blocks to tell the DHT that these results are not
+desired (any more).
+This way, the DHT will filter the respective blocks using the block
+library in the network, which may result in a significant reduction in
+bandwidth consumption.
+
+@node PUT
+@subsubsection PUT
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+In contrast to GET operations, developers @strong{must} manually re-run
+PUT operations periodically (if they intend the content to continue to be
+available). Content stored in the DHT expires or might be lost due to
+churn.
+Furthermore, GNUnet's DHT typically requires multiple rounds of PUT
+operations before a key-value pair is consistently available to all
+peers (the DHT randomizes paths and thus storage locations, and only
+after multiple rounds of PUTs there will be a sufficient number of
+replicas in large DHTs). An explicit PUT operation using the DHT API will
+only cause network traffic once, so in order to ensure basic availability
+and resistance to churn (and adversaries), PUTs must be repeated.
+While the exact frequency depends on the application, a rule of thumb is
+that there should be at least a dozen PUT operations within the content
+lifetime. Content in the DHT typically expires after one day, so
+DHT PUT operations should be repeated at least every 1-2 hours.
+
+@node MONITOR
+@subsubsection MONITOR
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The DHT API also allows applications to monitor messages crossing the
+local DHT service.
+The types of messages used by the DHT are GET, PUT and RESULT messages.
+Using the monitoring API, applications can choose to monitor these
+requests, possibly limiting themselves to requests for a particular block
+type.
+
+The monitoring API is not only usefu only for diagnostics, it can also be
+used to trigger application operations based on PUT operations.
+For example, an application may use PUTs to distribute work requests to
+other peers.
+The workers would then monitor for PUTs that give them work, instead of
+looking for work using GET operations.
+This can be beneficial, especially if the workers have no good way to
+guess the keys under which work would be stored.
+Naturally, additional protocols might be needed to ensure that the desired
+number of workers will process the distributed workload.
+
+@node DHT Routing Options
+@subsubsection DHT Routing Options
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+There are two important options for GET and PUT requests:
+
+@table @asis
+@item GNUNET_DHT_RO_DEMULITPLEX_EVERYWHERE This option means that all
+peers should process the request, even if their peer ID is not closest to
+the key. For a PUT request, this means that all peers that a request
+traverses may make a copy of the data.
+Similarly for a GET request, all peers will check their local database
+for a result. Setting this option can thus significantly improve caching
+and reduce bandwidth consumption --- at the expense of a larger DHT
+database. If in doubt, we recommend that this option should be used.
+@item GNUNET_DHT_RO_RECORD_ROUTE This option instructs the DHT to record
+the path that a GET or a PUT request is taking through the overlay
+network. The resulting paths are then returned to the application with
+the respective result. This allows the receiver of a result to construct
+a path to the originator of the data, which might then be used for
+routing. Naturally, setting this option requires additional bandwidth
+and disk space, so applications should only set this if the paths are
+needed by the application logic.
+@item GNUNET_DHT_RO_FIND_PEER This option is an internal option used by
+the DHT's peer discovery mechanism and should not be used by applications.
+@item GNUNET_DHT_RO_BART This option is currently not implemented. It may
+in the future offer performance improvements for clique topologies.
+@end table
+
+@node The DHT Client-Service Protocol
+@subsection The DHT Client-Service Protocol
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+@menu
+* PUTting data into the DHT::
+* GETting data from the DHT::
+* Monitoring the DHT::
+@end menu
+
+@node PUTting data into the DHT
+@subsubsection PUTting data into the DHT
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+To store (PUT) data into the DHT, the client sends a
+@code{struct GNUNET_DHT_ClientPutMessage} to the service.
+This message specifies the block type, routing options, the desired
+replication level, the expiration time, key,
+value and a 64-bit unique ID for the operation. The service responds with
+a @code{struct GNUNET_DHT_ClientPutConfirmationMessage} with the same
+64-bit unique ID. Note that the service sends the confirmation as soon as
+it has locally processed the PUT request. The PUT may still be
+propagating through the network at this time.
+
+In the future, we may want to change this to provide (limited) feedback
+to the client, for example if we detect that the PUT operation had no
+effect because the same key-value pair was already stored in the DHT.
+However, changing this would also require additional state and messages
+in the P2P interaction.
+
+@node GETting data from the DHT
+@subsubsection GETting data from the DHT
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+To retrieve (GET) data from the DHT, the client sends a
+@code{struct GNUNET_DHT_ClientGetMessage} to the service. The message
+specifies routing options, a replication level (for replicating the GET,
+not the content), the desired block type, the key, the (optional)
+extended query and unique 64-bit request ID.
+
+Additionally, the client may send any number of
+@code{struct GNUNET_DHT_ClientGetResultSeenMessage}s to notify the
+service about results that the client is already aware of.
+These messages consist of the key, the unique 64-bit ID of the request,
+and an arbitrary number of hash codes over the blocks that the client is
+already aware of. As messages are restricted to 64k, a client that
+already knows more than about a thousand blocks may need to send
+several of these messages. Naturally, the client should transmit these
+messages as quickly as possible after the original GET request such that
+the DHT can filter those results in the network early on. Naturally, as
+these messages are send after the original request, it is conceivalbe
+that the DHT service may return blocks that match those already known
+to the client anyway.
+
+In response to a GET request, the service will send @code{struct
+GNUNET_DHT_ClientResultMessage}s to the client. These messages contain the
+block type, expiration, key, unique ID of the request and of course the
+value (a block). Depending on the options set for the respective
+operations, the replies may also contain the path the GET and/or the PUT
+took through the network.
+
+A client can stop receiving replies either by disconnecting or by sending
+a @code{struct GNUNET_DHT_ClientGetStopMessage} which must contain the
+key and the 64-bit unique ID of the original request. Using an
+explicit "stop" message is more common as this allows a client to run
+many concurrent GET operations over the same connection with the DHT
+service --- and to stop them individually.
+
+@node Monitoring the DHT
+@subsubsection Monitoring the DHT
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+To begin monitoring, the client sends a
+@code{struct GNUNET_DHT_MonitorStartStop} message to the DHT service.
+In this message, flags can be set to enable (or disable) monitoring of
+GET, PUT and RESULT messages that pass through a peer. The message can
+also restrict monitoring to a particular block type or a particular key.
+Once monitoring is enabled, the DHT service will notify the client about
+any matching event using @code{struct GNUNET_DHT_MonitorGetMessage}s for
+GET events, @code{struct GNUNET_DHT_MonitorPutMessage} for PUT events
+and @code{struct GNUNET_DHT_MonitorGetRespMessage} for RESULTs. Each of
+these messages contains all of the information about the event.
+
+@node The DHT Peer-to-Peer Protocol
+@subsection The DHT Peer-to-Peer Protocol
+@c %**end of header
+
+
+@menu
+* Routing GETs or PUTs::
+* PUTting data into the DHT2::
+* GETting data from the DHT2::
+@end menu
+
+@node Routing GETs or PUTs
+@subsubsection Routing GETs or PUTs
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+When routing GETs or PUTs, the DHT service selects a suitable subset of
+neighbours for forwarding. The exact number of neighbours can be zero or
+more and depends on the hop counter of the query (initially zero) in
+relation to the (log of) the network size estimate, the desired
+replication level and the peer's connectivity.
+Depending on the hop counter and our network size estimate, the selection
+of the peers maybe randomized or by proximity to the key.
+Furthermore, requests include a set of peers that a request has already
+traversed; those peers are also excluded from the selection.
+
+@node PUTting data into the DHT2
+@subsubsection PUTting data into the DHT2
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+To PUT data into the DHT, the service sends a @code{struct PeerPutMessage}
+of type @code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_DHT_P2P_PUT} to the respective
+neighbour.
+In addition to the usual information about the content (type, routing
+options, desired replication level for the content, expiration time, key
+and value), the message contains a fixed-size Bloom filter with
+information about which peers (may) have already seen this request.
+This Bloom filter is used to ensure that DHT messages never loop back to
+a peer that has already processed the request.
+Additionally, the message includes the current hop counter and, depending
+on the routing options, the message may include the full path that the
+message has taken so far.
+The Bloom filter should already contain the identity of the previous hop;
+however, the path should not include the identity of the previous hop and
+the receiver should append the identity of the sender to the path, not
+its own identity (this is done to reduce bandwidth).
+
+@node GETting data from the DHT2
+@subsubsection GETting data from the DHT2
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+A peer can search the DHT by sending @code{struct PeerGetMessage}s of type
+@code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_DHT_P2P_GET} to other peers. In addition to the
+usual information about the request (type, routing options, desired
+replication level for the request, the key and the extended query), a GET
+request also again contains a hop counter, a Bloom filter over the peers
+that have processed the request already and depending on the routing
+options the full path traversed by the GET.
+Finally, a GET request includes a variable-size second Bloom filter and a
+so-called Bloom filter mutator value which together indicate which
+replies the sender has already seen. During the lookup, each block that
+matches they block type, key and extended query is additionally subjected
+to a test against this Bloom filter.
+The block plugin is expected to take the hash of the block and combine it
+with the mutator value and check if the result is not yet in the Bloom
+filter. The originator of the query will from time to time modify the
+mutator to (eventually) allow false-positives filtered by the Bloom filter
+to be returned.
+
+Peers that receive a GET request perform a local lookup (depending on
+their proximity to the key and the query options) and forward the request
+to other peers.
+They then remember the request (including the Bloom filter for blocking
+duplicate results) and when they obtain a matching, non-filtered response
+a @code{struct PeerResultMessage} of type
+@code{GNUNET_MESSAGE_TYPE_DHT_P2P_RESULT} is forwarded to the previous
+hop.
+Whenver a result is forwarded, the block plugin is used to update the
+Bloom filter accordingly, to ensure that the same result is never
+forwarded more than once.
+The DHT service may also cache forwarded results locally if the
+"CACHE_RESULTS" option is set to "YES" in the configuration.
+
+@cindex GNS
+@cindex GNU Name System
+@node GNU Name System (GNS)
+@section GNU Name System (GNS)
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The GNU Name System (GNS) is a decentralized database that enables users
+to securely resolve names to values.
+Names can be used to identify other users (for example, in social
+networking), or network services (for example, VPN services running at a
+peer in GNUnet, or purely IP-based services on the Internet).
+Users interact with GNS by typing in a hostname that ends in ".gnu"
+or ".zkey".
+
+Videos giving an overview of most of the GNS and the motivations behind
+it is available here and here.
+The remainder of this chapter targets developers that are familiar with
+high level concepts of GNS as presented in these talks.
+@c TODO: Add links to here and here and to these.
+
+GNS-aware applications should use the GNS resolver to obtain the
+respective records that are stored under that name in GNS.
+Each record consists of a type, value, expiration time and flags.
+
+The type specifies the format of the value. Types below 65536 correspond
+to DNS record types, larger values are used for GNS-specific records.
+Applications can define new GNS record types by reserving a number and
+implementing a plugin (which mostly needs to convert the binary value
+representation to a human-readable text format and vice-versa).
+The expiration time specifies how long the record is to be valid.
+The GNS API ensures that applications are only given non-expired values.
+The flags are typically irrelevant for applications, as GNS uses them
+internally to control visibility and validity of records.
+
+Records are stored along with a signature.
+The signature is generated using the private key of the authoritative
+zone. This allows any GNS resolver to verify the correctness of a
+name-value mapping.
+
+Internally, GNS uses the NAMECACHE to cache information obtained from
+other users, the NAMESTORE to store information specific to the local
+users, and the DHT to exchange data between users.
+A plugin API is used to enable applications to define new GNS
+record types.
+
+@menu
+* libgnunetgns::
+* libgnunetgnsrecord::
+* GNS plugins::
+* The GNS Client-Service Protocol::
+* Hijacking the DNS-Traffic using gnunet-service-dns::
+* Serving DNS lookups via GNS on W32::
+@end menu
+
+@node libgnunetgns
+@subsection libgnunetgns
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The GNS API itself is extremely simple. Clients first connec to the
+GNS service using @code{GNUNET_GNS_connect}.
+They can then perform lookups using @code{GNUNET_GNS_lookup} or cancel
+pending lookups using @code{GNUNET_GNS_lookup_cancel}.
+Once finished, clients disconnect using @code{GNUNET_GNS_disconnect}.
+
+@menu
+* Looking up records::
+* Accessing the records::
+* Creating records::
+* Future work::
+@end menu
+
+@node Looking up records
+@subsubsection Looking up records
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+@code{GNUNET_GNS_lookup} takes a number of arguments:
+
+@table @asis
+@item handle This is simply the GNS connection handle from
+@code{GNUNET_GNS_connect}.
+@item name The client needs to specify the name to
+be resolved. This can be any valid DNS or GNS hostname.
+@item zone The client
+needs to specify the public key of the GNS zone against which the
+resolution should be done (the ".gnu" zone).
+Note that a key must be provided, even if the name ends in ".zkey".
+This should typically be the public key of the master-zone of the user.
+@item type This is the desired GNS or DNS record type
+to look for. While all records for the given name will be returned, this
+can be important if the client wants to resolve record types that
+themselves delegate resolution, such as CNAME, PKEY or GNS2DNS.
+Resolving a record of any of these types will only work if the respective
+record type is specified in the request, as the GNS resolver will
+otherwise follow the delegation and return the records from the
+respective destination, instead of the delegating record.
+@item only_cached This argument should typically be set to
+@code{GNUNET_NO}. Setting it to @code{GNUNET_YES} disables resolution via
+the overlay network.
+@item shorten_zone_key If GNS encounters new names during resolution,
+their respective zones can automatically be learned and added to the
+"shorten zone". If this is desired, clients must pass the private key of
+the shorten zone. If NULL is passed, shortening is disabled.
+@item proc This argument identifies
+the function to call with the result. It is given proc_cls, the number of
+records found (possilby zero) and the array of the records as arguments.
+proc will only be called once. After proc,> has been called, the lookup
+must no longer be cancelled.
+@item proc_cls The closure for proc.
+@end table
+
+@node Accessing the records
+@subsubsection Accessing the records
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The @code{libgnunetgnsrecord} library provides an API to manipulate the
+GNS record array that is given to proc. In particular, it offers
+functions such as converting record values to human-readable
+strings (and back). However, most @code{libgnunetgnsrecord} functions are
+not interesting to GNS client applications.
+
+For DNS records, the @code{libgnunetdnsparser} library provides
+functions for parsing (and serializing) common types of DNS records.
+
+@node Creating records
+@subsubsection Creating records
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+Creating GNS records is typically done by building the respective record
+information (possibly with the help of @code{libgnunetgnsrecord} and
+@code{libgnunetdnsparser}) and then using the @code{libgnunetnamestore} to
+publish the information. The GNS API is not involved in this
+operation.
+
+@node Future work
+@subsubsection Future work
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+In the future, we want to expand @code{libgnunetgns} to allow
+applications to observe shortening operations performed during GNS
+resolution, for example so that users can receive visual feedback when
+this happens.
+
+@node libgnunetgnsrecord
+@subsection libgnunetgnsrecord
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The @code{libgnunetgnsrecord} library is used to manipulate GNS
+records (in plaintext or in their encrypted format).
+Applications mostly interact with @code{libgnunetgnsrecord} by using the
+functions to convert GNS record values to strings or vice-versa, or to
+lookup a GNS record type number by name (or vice-versa).
+The library also provides various other functions that are mostly
+used internally within GNS, such as converting keys to names, checking for
+expiration, encrypting GNS records to GNS blocks, verifying GNS block
+signatures and decrypting GNS records from GNS blocks.
+
+We will now discuss the four commonly used functions of the API.@
+@code{libgnunetgnsrecord} does not perform these operations itself,
+but instead uses plugins to perform the operation.
+GNUnet includes plugins to support common DNS record types as well as
+standard GNS record types.
+
+@menu
+* Value handling::
+* Type handling::
+@end menu
+
+@node Value handling
+@subsubsection Value handling
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+@code{GNUNET_GNSRECORD_value_to_string} can be used to convert
+the (binary) representation of a GNS record value to a human readable,
+0-terminated UTF-8 string.
+NULL is returned if the specified record type is not supported by any
+available plugin.
+
+@code{GNUNET_GNSRECORD_string_to_value} can be used to try to convert a
+human readable string to the respective (binary) representation of
+a GNS record value.
+
+@node Type handling
+@subsubsection Type handling
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+@code{GNUNET_GNSRECORD_typename_to_number} can be used to obtain the
+numeric value associated with a given typename. For example, given the
+typename "A" (for DNS A reocrds), the function will return the number 1.
+A list of common DNS record types is
+@uref{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_DNS_record_types, here}.
+Note that not all DNS record types are supported by GNUnet GNSRECORD
+plugins at this time.
+
+@code{GNUNET_GNSRECORD_number_to_typename} can be used to obtain the
+typename associated with a given numeric value.
+For example, given the type number 1, the function will return the
+typename "A".
+
+@node GNS plugins
+@subsection GNS plugins
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+Adding a new GNS record type typically involves writing (or extending) a
+GNSRECORD plugin. The plugin needs to implement the
+@code{gnunet_gnsrecord_plugin.h} API which provides basic functions that
+are needed by GNSRECORD to convert typenames and values of the respective
+record type to strings (and back).
+These gnsrecord plugins are typically implemented within their respective
+subsystems.
+Examples for such plugins can be found in the GNSRECORD, GNS and
+CONVERSATION subsystems.
+
+The @code{libgnunetgnsrecord} library is then used to locate, load and
+query the appropriate gnsrecord plugin.
+Which plugin is appropriate is determined by the record type (which is
+just a 32-bit integer). The @code{libgnunetgnsrecord} library loads all
+block plugins that are installed at the local peer and forwards the
+application request to the plugins. If the record type is not
+supported by the plugin, it should simply return an error code.
+
+The central functions of the block APIs (plugin and main library) are the
+same four functions for converting between values and strings, and
+typenames and numbers documented in the previous subsection.
+
+@node The GNS Client-Service Protocol
+@subsection The GNS Client-Service Protocol
+@c %**end of header
+
+The GNS client-service protocol consists of two simple messages, the
+@code{LOOKUP} message and the @code{LOOKUP_RESULT}. Each @code{LOOKUP}
+message contains a unique 32-bit identifier, which will be included in the
+corresponding response. Thus, clients can send many lookup requests in
+parallel and receive responses out-of-order.
+A @code{LOOKUP} request also includes the public key of the GNS zone,
+the desired record type and fields specifying whether shortening is
+enabled or networking is disabled. Finally, the @code{LOOKUP} message
+includes the name to be resolved.
+
+The response includes the number of records and the records themselves
+in the format created by @code{GNUNET_GNSRECORD_records_serialize}.
+They can thus be deserialized using
+@code{GNUNET_GNSRECORD_records_deserialize}.
+
+@node Hijacking the DNS-Traffic using gnunet-service-dns
+@subsection Hijacking the DNS-Traffic using gnunet-service-dns
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+This section documents how the gnunet-service-dns (and the
+gnunet-helper-dns) intercepts DNS queries from the local system.
+This is merely one method for how we can obtain GNS queries.
+It is also possible to change @code{resolv.conf} to point to a machine
+running @code{gnunet-dns2gns} or to modify libc's name system switch
+(NSS) configuration to include a GNS resolution plugin.
+The method described in this chaper is more of a last-ditch catch-all
+approach.
+
+@code{gnunet-service-dns} enables intercepting DNS traffic using policy
+based routing.
+We MARK every outgoing DNS-packet if it was not sent by our application.
+Using a second routing table in the Linux kernel these marked packets are
+then routed through our virtual network interface and can thus be
+captured unchanged.
+
+Our application then reads the query and decides how to handle it: A
+query to an address ending in ".gnu" or ".zkey" is hijacked by
+@code{gnunet-service-gns} and resolved internally using GNS.
+In the future, a reverse query for an address of the configured virtual
+network could be answered with records kept about previous forward
+queries.
+Queries that are not hijacked by some application using the DNS service
+will be sent to the original recipient.
+The answer to the query will always be sent back through the virtual
+interface with the original nameserver as source address.
+
+
+@menu
+* Network Setup Details::
+@end menu
+
+@node Network Setup Details
+@subsubsection Network Setup Details
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The DNS interceptor adds the following rules to the Linux kernel:
+@example
+iptables -t mangle -I OUTPUT 1 -p udp --sport $LOCALPORT --dport 53 \
+-j ACCEPT iptables -t mangle -I OUTPUT 2 -p udp --dport 53 -j MARK \
+--set-mark 3 ip rule add fwmark 3 table2 ip route add default via \
+$VIRTUALDNS table2
+@end example
+
+@c FIXME: Rewrite to reflect display which is no longer content by line
+@c FIXME: due to the < 74 characters limit.
+Line 1 makes sure that all packets coming from a port our application
+opened beforehand (@code{$LOCALPORT}) will be routed normally.
+Line 2 marks every other packet to a DNS-Server with mark 3 (chosen
+arbitrarily). The third line adds a routing policy based on this mark
+3 via the routing table.
+
+@node Serving DNS lookups via GNS on W32
+@subsection Serving DNS lookups via GNS on W32
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+This section documents how the libw32nsp (and
+gnunet-gns-helper-service-w32) do DNS resolutions of DNS queries on the
+local system. This only applies to GNUnet running on W32.
+
+W32 has a concept of "Namespaces" and "Namespace providers".
+These are used to present various name systems to applications in a
+generic way.
+Namespaces include DNS, mDNS, NLA and others. For each namespace any
+number of providers could be registered, and they are queried in an order
+of priority (which is adjustable).
+
+Applications can resolve names by using WSALookupService*() family of
+functions.
+
+However, these are WSA-only facilities. Common BSD socket functions for
+namespace resolutions are gethostbyname and getaddrinfo (among others).
+These functions are implemented internally (by default - by mswsock,
+which also implements the default DNS provider) as wrappers around
+WSALookupService*() functions (see "Sample Code for a Service Provider"
+on MSDN).
+
+On W32 GNUnet builds a libw32nsp - a namespace provider, which can then be
+installed into the system by using w32nsp-install (and uninstalled by
+w32nsp-uninstall), as described in "Installation Handbook".
+
+libw32nsp is very simple and has almost no dependencies. As a response to
+NSPLookupServiceBegin(), it only checks that the provider GUID passed to
+it by the caller matches GNUnet DNS Provider GUID, checks that name being
+resolved ends in ".gnu" or ".zkey", then connects to
+gnunet-gns-helper-service-w32 at 127.0.0.1:5353 (hardcoded) and sends the
+name resolution request there, returning the connected socket to the
+caller.
+
+When the caller invokes NSPLookupServiceNext(), libw32nsp reads a
+completely formed reply from that socket, unmarshalls it, then gives
+it back to the caller.
+
+At the moment gnunet-gns-helper-service-w32 is implemented to ever give
+only one reply, and subsequent calls to NSPLookupServiceNext() will fail
+with WSA_NODATA (first call to NSPLookupServiceNext() might also fail if
+GNS failed to find the name, or there was an error connecting to it).
+
+gnunet-gns-helper-service-w32 does most of the processing:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item Maintains a connection to GNS.
+@item Reads GNS config and loads appropriate keys.
+@item Checks service GUID and decides on the type of record to look up,
+refusing to make a lookup outright when unsupported service GUID is
+passed.
+@item Launches the lookup
+@end itemize
+
+When lookup result arrives, gnunet-gns-helper-service-w32 forms a complete
+reply (including filling a WSAQUERYSETW structure and, possibly, a binary
+blob with a hostent structure for gethostbyname() client), marshalls it,
+and sends it back to libw32nsp. If no records were found, it sends an
+empty header.
+
+This works for most normal applications that use gethostbyname() or
+getaddrinfo() to resolve names, but fails to do anything with
+applications that use alternative means of resolving names (such as
+sending queries to a DNS server directly by themselves).
+This includes some of well known utilities, like "ping" and "nslookup".
+
+@cindex GNS Namecache
+@node GNS Namecache
+@section GNS Namecache
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The NAMECACHE subsystem is responsible for caching (encrypted) resolution
+results of the GNU Name System (GNS). GNS makes zone information available
+to other users via the DHT. However, as accessing the DHT for every
+lookup is expensive (and as the DHT's local cache is lost whenever the
+peer is restarted), GNS uses the NAMECACHE as a more persistent cache for
+DHT lookups.
+Thus, instead of always looking up every name in the DHT, GNS first
+checks if the result is already available locally in the NAMECACHE.
+Only if there is no result in the NAMECACHE, GNS queries the DHT.
+The NAMECACHE stores data in the same (encrypted) format as the DHT.
+It thus makes no sense to iterate over all items in the
+NAMECACHE --- the NAMECACHE does not have a way to provide the keys
+required to decrypt the entries.
+
+Blocks in the NAMECACHE share the same expiration mechanism as blocks in
+the DHT --- the block expires wheneever any of the records in
+the (encrypted) block expires.
+The expiration time of the block is the only information stored in
+plaintext. The NAMECACHE service internally performs all of the required
+work to expire blocks, clients do not have to worry about this.
+Also, given that NAMECACHE stores only GNS blocks that local users
+requested, there is no configuration option to limit the size of the
+NAMECACHE. It is assumed to be always small enough (a few MB) to fit on
+the drive.
+
+The NAMECACHE supports the use of different database backends via a
+plugin API.
+
+@menu
+* libgnunetnamecache::
+* The NAMECACHE Client-Service Protocol::
+* The NAMECACHE Plugin API::
+@end menu
+
+@node libgnunetnamecache
+@subsection libgnunetnamecache
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The NAMECACHE API consists of five simple functions. First, there is
+@code{GNUNET_NAMECACHE_connect} to connect to the NAMECACHE service.
+This returns the handle required for all other operations on the
+NAMECACHE. Using @code{GNUNET_NAMECACHE_block_cache} clients can insert a
+block into the cache.
+@code{GNUNET_NAMECACHE_lookup_block} can be used to lookup blocks that
+were stored in the NAMECACHE. Both operations can be cancelled using
+@code{GNUNET_NAMECACHE_cancel}. Note that cancelling a
+@code{GNUNET_NAMECACHE_block_cache} operation can result in the block
+being stored in the NAMECACHE --- or not. Cancellation primarily ensures
+that the continuation function with the result of the operation will no
+longer be invoked.
+Finally, @code{GNUNET_NAMECACHE_disconnect} closes the connection to the
+NAMECACHE.
+
+The maximum size of a block that can be stored in the NAMECACHE is
+@code{GNUNET_NAMECACHE_MAX_VALUE_SIZE}, which is defined to be 63 kB.
+
+@node The NAMECACHE Client-Service Protocol
+@subsection The NAMECACHE Client-Service Protocol
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+All messages in the NAMECACHE IPC protocol start with the
+@code{struct GNUNET_NAMECACHE_Header} which adds a request
+ID (32-bit integer) to the standard message header.
+The request ID is used to match requests with the
+respective responses from the NAMECACHE, as they are allowed to happen
+out-of-order.
+
+
+@menu
+* Lookup::
+* Store::
+@end menu
+
+@node Lookup
+@subsubsection Lookup
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The @code{struct LookupBlockMessage} is used to lookup a block stored in
+the cache.
+It contains the query hash. The NAMECACHE always responds with a
+@code{struct LookupBlockResponseMessage}. If the NAMECACHE has no
+response, it sets the expiration time in the response to zero.
+Otherwise, the response is expected to contain the expiration time, the
+ECDSA signature, the derived key and the (variable-size) encrypted data
+of the block.
+
+@node Store
+@subsubsection Store
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The @code{struct BlockCacheMessage} is used to cache a block in the
+NAMECACHE.
+It has the same structure as the @code{struct LookupBlockResponseMessage}.
+The service responds with a @code{struct BlockCacheResponseMessage} which
+contains the result of the operation (success or failure).
+In the future, we might want to make it possible to provide an error
+message as well.
+
+@node The NAMECACHE Plugin API
+@subsection The NAMECACHE Plugin API
+@c %**end of header
+
+The NAMECACHE plugin API consists of two functions, @code{cache_block} to
+store a block in the database, and @code{lookup_block} to lookup a block
+in the database.
+
+
+@menu
+* Lookup2::
+* Store2::
+@end menu
+
+@node Lookup2
+@subsubsection Lookup2
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The @code{lookup_block} function is expected to return at most one block
+to the iterator, and return @code{GNUNET_NO} if there were no non-expired
+results.
+If there are multiple non-expired results in the cache, the lookup is
+supposed to return the result with the largest expiration time.
+
+@node Store2
+@subsubsection Store2
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The @code{cache_block} function is expected to try to store the block in
+the database, and return @code{GNUNET_SYSERR} if this was not possible
+for any reason.
+Furthermore, @code{cache_block} is expected to implicitly perform cache
+maintenance and purge blocks from the cache that have expired. Note that
+@code{cache_block} might encounter the case where the database already has
+another block stored under the same key. In this case, the plugin must
+ensure that the block with the larger expiration time is preserved.
+Obviously, this can done either by simply adding new blocks and selecting
+for the most recent expiration time during lookup, or by checking which
+block is more recent during the store operation.
+
+@cindex REVOCATION Subsystem
+@node REVOCATION Subsystem
+@section REVOCATION Subsystem
+@c %**end of header
+
+The REVOCATION subsystem is responsible for key revocation of Egos.
+If a user learns that theis private key has been compromised or has lost
+it, they can use the REVOCATION system to inform all of the other users
+that their private key is no longer valid.
+The subsystem thus includes ways to query for the validity of keys and to
+propagate revocation messages.
+
+@menu
+* Dissemination::
+* Revocation Message Design Requirements::
+* libgnunetrevocation::
+* The REVOCATION Client-Service Protocol::
+* The REVOCATION Peer-to-Peer Protocol::
+@end menu
+
+@node Dissemination
+@subsection Dissemination
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+When a revocation is performed, the revocation is first of all
+disseminated by flooding the overlay network.
+The goal is to reach every peer, so that when a peer needs to check if a
+key has been revoked, this will be purely a local operation where the
+peer looks at his local revocation list. Flooding the network is also the
+most robust form of key revocation --- an adversary would have to control
+a separator of the overlay graph to restrict the propagation of the
+revocation message. Flooding is also very easy to implement --- peers that
+receive a revocation message for a key that they have never seen before
+simply pass the message to all of their neighbours.
+
+Flooding can only distribute the revocation message to peers that are
+online.
+In order to notify peers that join the network later, the revocation
+service performs efficient set reconciliation over the sets of known
+revocation messages whenever two peers (that both support REVOCATION
+dissemination) connect.
+The SET service is used to perform this operation efficiently.
+
+@node Revocation Message Design Requirements
+@subsection Revocation Message Design Requirements
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+However, flooding is also quite costly, creating O(|E|) messages on a
+network with |E| edges.
+Thus, revocation messages are required to contain a proof-of-work, the
+result of an expensive computation (which, however, is cheap to verify).
+Only peers that have expended the CPU time necessary to provide
+this proof will be able to flood the network with the revocation message.
+This ensures that an attacker cannot simply flood the network with
+millions of revocation messages. The proof-of-work required by GNUnet is
+set to take days on a typical PC to compute; if the ability to quickly
+revoke a key is needed, users have the option to pre-compute revocation
+messages to store off-line and use instantly after their key has expired.
+
+Revocation messages must also be signed by the private key that is being
+revoked. Thus, they can only be created while the private key is in the
+possession of the respective user. This is another reason to create a
+revocation message ahead of time and store it in a secure location.
+
+@node libgnunetrevocation
+@subsection libgnunetrevocation
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The REVOCATION API consists of two parts, to query and to issue
+revocations.
+
+
+@menu
+* Querying for revoked keys::
+* Preparing revocations::
+* Issuing revocations::
+@end menu
+
+@node Querying for revoked keys
+@subsubsection Querying for revoked keys
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+@code{GNUNET_REVOCATION_query} is used to check if a given ECDSA public
+key has been revoked.
+The given callback will be invoked with the result of the check.
+The query can be cancelled using @code{GNUNET_REVOCATION_query_cancel} on
+the return value.
+
+@node Preparing revocations
+@subsubsection Preparing revocations
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+It is often desirable to create a revocation record ahead-of-time and
+store it in an off-line location to be used later in an emergency.
+This is particularly true for GNUnet revocations, where performing the
+revocation operation itself is computationally expensive and thus is
+likely to take some time.
+Thus, if users want the ability to perform revocations quickly in an
+emergency, they must pre-compute the revocation message.
+The revocation API enables this with two functions that are used to
+compute the revocation message, but not trigger the actual revocation
+operation.
+
+@code{GNUNET_REVOCATION_check_pow} should be used to calculate the
+proof-of-work required in the revocation message. This function takes the
+public key, the required number of bits for the proof of work (which in
+GNUnet is a network-wide constant) and finally a proof-of-work number as
+arguments.
+The function then checks if the given proof-of-work number is a valid
+proof of work for the given public key. Clients preparing a revocation
+are expected to call this function repeatedly (typically with a
+monotonically increasing sequence of numbers of the proof-of-work number)
+until a given number satisfies the check.
+That number should then be saved for later use in the revocation
+operation.
+
+@code{GNUNET_REVOCATION_sign_revocation} is used to generate the
+signature that is required in a revocation message.
+It takes the private key that (possibly in the future) is to be revoked
+and returns the signature.
+The signature can again be saved to disk for later use, which will then
+allow performing a revocation even without access to the private key.
+
+@node Issuing revocations
+@subsubsection Issuing revocations
+
+
+Given a ECDSA public key, the signature from @code{GNUNET_REVOCATION_sign}
+and the proof-of-work,
+@code{GNUNET_REVOCATION_revoke} can be used to perform the
+actual revocation. The given callback is called upon completion of the
+operation. @code{GNUNET_REVOCATION_revoke_cancel} can be used to stop the
+library from calling the continuation; however, in that case it is
+undefined whether or not the revocation operation will be executed.
+
+@node The REVOCATION Client-Service Protocol
+@subsection The REVOCATION Client-Service Protocol
+
+
+The REVOCATION protocol consists of four simple messages.
+
+A @code{QueryMessage} containing a public ECDSA key is used to check if a
+particular key has been revoked. The service responds with a
+@code{QueryResponseMessage} which simply contains a bit that says if the
+given public key is still valid, or if it has been revoked.
+
+The second possible interaction is for a client to revoke a key by
+passing a @code{RevokeMessage} to the service. The @code{RevokeMessage}
+contains the ECDSA public key to be revoked, a signature by the
+corresponding private key and the proof-of-work, The service responds
+with a @code{RevocationResponseMessage} which can be used to indicate
+that the @code{RevokeMessage} was invalid (i.e. proof of work incorrect),
+or otherwise indicates that the revocation has been processed
+successfully.
+
+@node The REVOCATION Peer-to-Peer Protocol
+@subsection The REVOCATION Peer-to-Peer Protocol
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+Revocation uses two disjoint ways to spread revocation information among
+peers.
+First of all, P2P gossip exchanged via CORE-level neighbours is used to
+quickly spread revocations to all connected peers.
+Second, whenever two peers (that both support revocations) connect,
+the SET service is used to compute the union of the respective revocation
+sets.
+
+In both cases, the exchanged messages are @code{RevokeMessage}s which
+contain the public key that is being revoked, a matching ECDSA signature,
+and a proof-of-work.
+Whenever a peer learns about a new revocation this way, it first
+validates the signature and the proof-of-work, then stores it to disk
+(typically to a file $GNUNET_DATA_HOME/revocation.dat) and finally
+spreads the information to all directly connected neighbours.
+
+For computing the union using the SET service, the peer with the smaller
+hashed peer identity will connect (as a "client" in the two-party set
+protocol) to the other peer after one second (to reduce traffic spikes
+on connect) and initiate the computation of the set union.
+All revocation services use a common hash to identify the SET operation
+over revocation sets.
+
+The current implementation accepts revocation set union operations from
+all peers at any time; however, well-behaved peers should only initiate
+this operation once after establishing a connection to a peer with a
+larger hashed peer identity.
+
+@cindex FS
+@cindex FS Subsystem
+@node File-sharing (FS) Subsystem
+@section File-sharing (FS) Subsystem
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+This chapter describes the details of how the file-sharing service works.
+As with all services, it is split into an API (libgnunetfs), the service
+process (gnunet-service-fs) and user interface(s).
+The file-sharing service uses the datastore service to store blocks and
+the DHT (and indirectly datacache) for lookups for non-anonymous
+file-sharing.
+Furthermore, the file-sharing service uses the block library (and the
+block fs plugin) for validation of DHT operations.
+
+In contrast to many other services, libgnunetfs is rather complex since
+the client library includes a large number of high-level abstractions;
+this is necessary since the Fs service itself largely only operates on
+the block level.
+The FS library is responsible for providing a file-based abstraction to
+applications, including directories, meta data, keyword search,
+verification, and so on.
+
+The method used by GNUnet to break large files into blocks and to use
+keyword search is called the
+"Encoding for Censorship Resistant Sharing" (ECRS).
+ECRS is largely implemented in the fs library; block validation is also
+reflected in the block FS plugin and the FS service.
+ECRS on-demand encoding is implemented in the FS service.
+
+NOTE: The documentation in this chapter is quite incomplete.
+
+@menu
+* Encoding for Censorship-Resistant Sharing (ECRS)::
+* File-sharing persistence directory structure::
+@end menu
+
+@cindex ECRS
+@cindex Encoding for Censorship-Resistant Sharing
+@node Encoding for Censorship-Resistant Sharing (ECRS)
+@subsection Encoding for Censorship-Resistant Sharing (ECRS)
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+When GNUnet shares files, it uses a content encoding that is called ECRS,
+the Encoding for Censorship-Resistant Sharing.
+Most of ECRS is described in the (so far unpublished) research paper
+attached to this page. ECRS obsoletes the previous ESED and ESED II
+encodings which were used in GNUnet before version 0.7.0.
+The rest of this page assumes that the reader is familiar with the
+attached paper. What follows is a description of some minor extensions
+that GNUnet makes over what is described in the paper.
+The reason why these extensions are not in the paper is that we felt
+that they were obvious or trivial extensions to the original scheme and
+thus did not warrant space in the research report.
+
+@menu
+* Namespace Advertisements::
+* KSBlocks::
+@end menu
+
+@node Namespace Advertisements
+@subsubsection Namespace Advertisements
+
+@c %**end of header
+@c %**FIXME: all zeroses -> ?
+
+An @code{SBlock} with identifier all zeros is a signed
+advertisement for a namespace. This special @code{SBlock} contains
+metadata describing the content of the namespace.
+Instead of the name of the identifier for a potential update, it contains
+the identifier for the root of the namespace.
+The URI should always be empty. The @code{SBlock} is signed with the
+content provder's RSA private key (just like any other SBlock). Peers
+can search for @code{SBlock}s in order to find out more about a namespace.
+
+@node KSBlocks
+@subsubsection KSBlocks
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+GNUnet implements @code{KSBlocks} which are @code{KBlocks} that, instead
+of encrypting a CHK and metadata, encrypt an @code{SBlock} instead.
+In other words, @code{KSBlocks} enable GNUnet to find @code{SBlocks}
+using the global keyword search.
+Usually the encrypted @code{SBlock} is a namespace advertisement.
+The rationale behind @code{KSBlock}s and @code{SBlock}s is to enable
+peers to discover namespaces via keyword searches, and, to associate
+useful information with namespaces. When GNUnet finds @code{KSBlocks}
+during a normal keyword search, it adds the information to an internal
+list of discovered namespaces. Users looking for interesting namespaces
+can then inspect this list, reducing the need for out-of-band discovery
+of namespaces.
+Naturally, namespaces (or more specifically, namespace advertisements) can
+also be referenced from directories, but @code{KSBlock}s should make it
+easier to advertise namespaces for the owner of the pseudonym since they
+eliminate the need to first create a directory.
+
+Collections are also advertised using @code{KSBlock}s.
+
+@table @asis
+@item Attachment Size
+@item  ecrs.pdf 270.68 KB
+@item https://gnunet.org/sites/default/files/ecrs.pdf
+@end table
+
+@node File-sharing persistence directory structure
+@subsection File-sharing persistence directory structure
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+This section documents how the file-sharing library implements
+persistence of file-sharing operations and specifically the resulting
+directory structure.
+This code is only active if the @code{GNUNET_FS_FLAGS_PERSISTENCE} flag
+was set when calling @code{GNUNET_FS_start}.
+In this case, the file-sharing library will try hard to ensure that all
+major operations (searching, downloading, publishing, unindexing) are
+persistent, that is, can live longer than the process itself.
+More specifically, an operation is supposed to live until it is
+explicitly stopped.
+
+If @code{GNUNET_FS_stop} is called before an operation has been stopped, a
+@code{SUSPEND} event is generated and then when the process calls
+@code{GNUNET_FS_start} next time, a @code{RESUME} event is generated.
+Additionally, even if an application crashes (segfault, SIGKILL, system
+crash) and hence @code{GNUNET_FS_stop} is never called and no
+@code{SUSPEND} events are generated, operations are still resumed (with
+@code{RESUME} events).
+This is implemented by constantly writing the current state of the
+file-sharing operations to disk.
+Specifically, the current state is always written to disk whenever
+anything significant changes (the exception are block-wise progress in
+publishing and unindexing, since those operations would be slowed down
+significantly and can be resumed cheaply even without detailed
+accounting).
+Note that if the process crashes (or is killed) during a serialization
+operation, FS does not guarantee that this specific operation is
+recoverable (no strict transactional semantics, again for performance
+reasons). However, all other unrelated operations should resume nicely.
+
+Since we need to serialize the state continuously and want to recover as
+much as possible even after crashing during a serialization operation,
+we do not use one large file for serialization.
+Instead, several directories are used for the various operations.
+When @code{GNUNET_FS_start} executes, the master directories are scanned
+for files describing operations to resume.
+Sometimes, these operations can refer to related operations in child
+directories which may also be resumed at this point.
+Note that corrupted files are cleaned up automatically.
+However, dangling files in child directories (those that are not
+referenced by files from the master directories) are not automatically
+removed.
+
+Persistence data is kept in a directory that begins with the "STATE_DIR"
+prefix from the configuration file
+(by default, "$SERVICEHOME/persistence/") followed by the name of the
+client as given to @code{GNUNET_FS_start} (for example, "gnunet-gtk")
+followed by the actual name of the master or child directory.
+
+The names for the master directories follow the names of the operations:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item "search"
+@item "download"
+@item "publish"
+@item "unindex"
+@end itemize
+
+Each of the master directories contains names (chosen at random) for each
+active top-level (master) operation.
+Note that a download that is associated with a search result is not a
+top-level operation.
+
+In contrast to the master directories, the child directories are only
+consulted when another operation refers to them.
+For each search, a subdirectory (named after the master search
+synchronization file) contains the search results.
+Search results can have an associated download, which is then stored in
+the general "download-child" directory.
+Downloads can be recursive, in which case children are stored in
+subdirectories mirroring the structure of the recursive download
+(either starting in the master "download" directory or in the
+"download-child" directory depending on how the download was initiated).
+For publishing operations, the "publish-file" directory contains
+information about the individual files and directories that are part of
+the publication.
+However, this directory structure is flat and does not mirror the
+structure of the publishing operation.
+Note that unindex operations cannot have associated child operations.
+
+@cindex REGEX subsystem
+@node REGEX Subsystem
+@section REGEX Subsystem
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+Using the REGEX subsystem, you can discover peers that offer a particular
+service using regular expressions.
+The peers that offer a service specify it using a regular expressions.
+Peers that want to patronize a service search using a string.
+The REGEX subsystem will then use the DHT to return a set of matching
+offerers to the patrons.
+
+For the technical details, we have Max's defense talk and Max's Master's
+thesis.
+
+@c An additional publication is under preparation and available to
+@c team members (in Git).
+@c FIXME: Where is the file? Point to it. Assuming that it's szengel2012ms
+
+@menu
+* How to run the regex profiler::
+@end menu
+
+@node How to run the regex profiler
+@subsection How to run the regex profiler
+
+@c %**end of header
+
+The gnunet-regex-profiler can be used to profile the usage of mesh/regex
+for a given set of regular expressions and strings.
+Mesh/regex allows you to announce your peer ID under a certain regex and
+search for peers matching a particular regex using a string.
+See @uref{https://gnunet.org/szengel2012ms, szengel2012ms} for a full
+introduction.
+
+First of all, the regex profiler uses GNUnet testbed, thus all the
+implications for testbed also apply to the regex profiler
+(for example you need password-less ssh login to the machines listed in
+your hosts file).
+
+@strong{Configuration}
+
+Moreover, an appropriate configuration file is needed.
+Generally you can refer to the
+@file{contrib/regex_profiler_infiniband.conf} file in the sourcecode
+of GNUnet for an example configuration.
+In the following paragraph the important details are highlighted.
+
+Announcing of the regular expressions is done by the
+gnunet-daemon-regexprofiler, therefore you have to make sure it is
+started, by adding it to the AUTOSTART set of ARM:
+
+@example
+[regexprofiler]
+AUTOSTART = YES
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Furthermore you have to specify the location of the binary:
+
+@example
+[regexprofiler]
+# Location of the gnunet-daemon-regexprofiler binary.
+BINARY = /home/szengel/gnunet/src/mesh/.libs/gnunet-daemon-regexprofiler
+# Regex prefix that will be applied to all regular expressions and
+# search string.
+REGEX_PREFIX = "GNVPN-0001-PAD"
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+When running the profiler with a large scale deployment, you probably
+want to reduce the workload of each peer.
+Use the following options to do this.
+
+@example
+[dht]
+# Force network size estimation
+FORCE_NSE = 1
+
+[dhtcache]
+DATABASE = heap
+# Disable RC-file for Bloom filter? (for benchmarking with limited IO
+# availability)
+DISABLE_BF_RC = YES
+# Disable Bloom filter entirely
+DISABLE_BF = YES
+
+[nse]
+# Minimize proof-of-work CPU consumption by NSE
+WORKBITS = 1
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+@strong{Options}
+
+To finally run the profiler some options and the input data need to be
+specified on the command line.
+
+@example
+gnunet-regex-profiler -c config-file -d log-file -n num-links \
+-p path-compression-length -s search-delay -t matching-timeout \
+-a num-search-strings hosts-file policy-dir search-strings-file
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Where...
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item ... @code{config-file} means the configuration file created earlier.
+@item ... @code{log-file} is the file where to write statistics output.
+@item ... @code{num-links} indicates the number of random links between
+started peers.
+@item ... @code{path-compression-length} is the maximum path compression
+length in the DFA.
+@item ... @code{search-delay} time to wait between peers finished linking
+and starting to match strings.
+@item ... @code{matching-timeout} timeout after which to cancel the
+searching.
+@item ... @code{num-search-strings} number of strings in the
+search-strings-file.
+@item ... the @code{hosts-file} should contain a list of hosts for the
+testbed, one per line in the following format:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item @code{user@@host_ip:port}
+@end itemize
+@item ... the @code{policy-dir} is a folder containing text files
+containing one or more regular expressions. A peer is started for each
+file in that folder and the regular expressions in the corresponding file
+are announced by this peer.
+@item ... the @code{search-strings-file} is a text file containing search
+strings, one in each line.
+@end itemize
+
+@noindent
+You can create regular expressions and search strings for every AS in the
+Internet using the attached scripts. You need one of the
+@uref{http://data.caida.org/datasets/routing/routeviews-prefix2as/, CAIDA routeviews prefix2as}
+data files for this. Run
+
+@example
+create_regex.py <filename> <output path>
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+to create the regular expressions and
+
+@example
+create_strings.py <input path> <outfile>
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+to create a search strings file from the previously created
+regular expressions.
diff --git a/doc/documentation/chapters/installation.texi b/doc/documentation/chapters/installation.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7be1e9833c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/documentation/chapters/installation.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,4086 @@
+@node GNUnet Installation Handbook
+@chapter GNUnet Installation Handbook
+
+This handbook describes how to install (build, setup, compile) and
+setup (configure, start) GNUnet @value{VERSION}. After following these
+instructions you should be able to install and then start user-interfaces
+to interact with the network.
+
+Note: This manual is far from complete, and we welcome informed
+contributions, be it in the form of new chapters or insightful comments.
+
+@menu
+* Dependencies::
+* Pre-installation notes::
+* Generic installation instructions::
+* Build instructions for Ubuntu 12.04 using Git::
+* Build instructions for software builds from source::
+* Build Instructions for Microsoft Windows Platforms::
+* Build instructions for Debian 7.5::
+* Installing GNUnet from Git on Ubuntu 14.4::
+* Build instructions for Debian 8::
+* Outdated build instructions for previous revisions::
+@c * Portable GNUnet::
+* The graphical configuration interface::
+* How to start and stop a GNUnet peer::
+@end menu
+
+@node Dependencies
+@section Dependencies
+@c %**end of header
+
+This section lists the various known dependencies for
+GNUnet @value{EDITION}.
+Suggestions for missing dependencies or wrong version numbers are welcome.
+
+@menu
+* External dependencies::
+* Optional dependencies::
+* Internal dependencies::
+@end menu
+
+@node External dependencies
+@subsection External dependencies
+@c %**end of header
+
+These packages must be installed before a typical GNUnet installation
+can be performed:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item autoconf
+@item automake
+@item pkg-config
+@item libltdl
+@item gstreamer
+@item gst-plugins-base
+@item perl
+@item python (only 2.7 supported)@footnote{tests and gnunet-qr}
+@item jansson
+@item nss
+@item glib
+@item gmp
+@item bluez
+@item miniupnpc
+@item gettext
+@item which
+@item texinfo @geq{} 5.2
+@item GNU libmicrohttpd @geq{} 0.9.30 @footnote{We recommend to build it
+with a GnuTLS version that was configured with libunbound}
+@item GNU libextractor @geq{} 1.0
+@item GNU libtool @geq{} 2.2
+@item GNU libunistring @geq{} 0.9.1.1
+@item GNU libidn @geq{} 1.0.0
+@item @uref{https://gnupg.org/software/libgcrypt/, GNU libgcrypt} @geq{}
+@uref{https://gnupg.org/ftp/gcrypt/libgcrypt/, 1.6.0}
+@item @uref{https://gnutls.org/, GnuTLS} @geq{} 3.2.7
+@footnote{We recommend to compile with libunbound for DANE support;
+GnuTLS also requires GNU nettle 2.7 (update: GnuTLS 3.2.7 appears NOT
+to work against GNU nettle > 2.7, due to some API updatings done by
+nettle. Thus it should be compiled against nettle 2.7
+and, in case you get some error on the reference to `rpl_strerror' being
+undefined, follow the instructions on
+@uref{http://lists.gnupg.org/pipermail/gnutls-devel/2013-November/006588.html, this}
+post (and the link inside it)).}
+@item @uref{https://gnunet.org/gnurl, gnURL} libgnurl @geq{} 7.34.0
+@footnote{must be compiled after @code{GnuTLS}}
+@item libglpk @geq{} 4.45
+@item @uref{http://www.openssl.org/, OpenSSL} @geq{} 1.0
+@item TeX Live @geq{} 2012, optional (for gnunet-bcd)
+@item Texinfo @geq{} 5.2 (for documentation)
+@item libsqlite @geq{} 3.8.0 @footnote{(note that the code will
+compile and often work with lower version numbers, but you may get subtle
+bugs with respect to quota management in certain rare cases);
+alternatively, MySQL or Postgres can also be installed, but those
+databases will require more complex configurations (not
+recommended for first-time users)}
+@item zlib
+@end itemize
+
+@node Optional dependencies
+@subsection Optional dependencies
+
+These applications must be installed for various experimental or otherwise
+optional features such as @command{gnunet-conversation},
+and @command{gnunet-gtk} (most of these features are only build if you
+configure GNUnet with @command{--enable-experimental}):
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item libpulse @geq{} 2.0,
+optional (for @command{gnunet-conversation})
+@item libopus @geq{} 1.0.1,
+optional (for @command{gnunet-conversation})
+@item libogg @geq{} 1.3.0,
+optional (for @command{gnunet-conversation})
+@item libnss contained @command{certool} binary,
+optional for convenient installation of
+the GNS proxy.
+@item python-zbar @geq{} 0.10,
+optional (for @command{gnunet-qr})
+@item Gtk+ @geq{} 3.0,
+optional (for @command{gnunet-gtk})
+@item libgladeui (must match Gtk+ version),
+optional (for @command{gnunet-gtk})
+@item libqrencode @geq{} 3.0,
+optional (for @command{gnunet-namestore-gtk})
+@end itemize
+
+@node Internal dependencies
+@subsection Internal dependencies
+
+This section tries to give an overview of what processes a typical GNUnet
+peer running a particular application would consist of. All of the
+processes listed here should be automatically started by
+@command{gnunet-arm -s}.
+The list is given as a rough first guide to users for failure diagnostics.
+Ideally, end-users should never have to worry about these internal
+dependencies.
+
+In terms of internal dependencies, a minimum file-sharing system consists
+of the following GNUnet processes (in order of dependency):
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item gnunet-service-arm
+@item gnunet-service-resolver (required by all)
+@item gnunet-service-statistics (required by all)
+@item gnunet-service-peerinfo
+@item gnunet-service-transport (requires peerinfo)
+@item gnunet-service-core (requires transport)
+@item gnunet-daemon-hostlist (requires core)
+@item gnunet-daemon-topology (requires hostlist, peerinfo)
+@item gnunet-service-datastore
+@item gnunet-service-dht (requires core)
+@item gnunet-service-identity
+@item gnunet-service-fs (requires identity, mesh, dht, datastore, core)
+@end itemize
+
+@noindent
+A minimum VPN system consists of the following GNUnet processes (in
+order of dependency):
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item gnunet-service-arm
+@item gnunet-service-resolver (required by all)
+@item gnunet-service-statistics (required by all)
+@item gnunet-service-peerinfo
+@item gnunet-service-transport (requires peerinfo)
+@item gnunet-service-core (requires transport)
+@item gnunet-daemon-hostlist (requires core)
+@item gnunet-service-dht (requires core)
+@item gnunet-service-mesh (requires dht, core)
+@item gnunet-service-dns (requires dht)
+@item gnunet-service-regex (requires dht)
+@item gnunet-service-vpn (requires regex, dns, mesh, dht)
+@end itemize
+
+@noindent
+A minimum GNS system consists of the following GNUnet processes (in
+order of dependency):
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item gnunet-service-arm
+@item gnunet-service-resolver (required by all)
+@item gnunet-service-statistics (required by all)
+@item gnunet-service-peerinfo
+@item gnunet-service-transport (requires peerinfo)
+@item gnunet-service-core (requires transport)
+@item gnunet-daemon-hostlist (requires core)
+@item gnunet-service-dht (requires core)
+@item gnunet-service-mesh (requires dht, core)
+@item gnunet-service-dns (requires dht)
+@item gnunet-service-regex (requires dht)
+@item gnunet-service-vpn (requires regex, dns, mesh, dht)
+@item gnunet-service-identity
+@item gnunet-service-namestore (requires identity)
+@item gnunet-service-gns (requires vpn, dns, dht, namestore, identity)
+@end itemize
+
+@node Pre-installation notes
+@section Pre-installation notes
+
+Please note that in the code instructions for the installation,
+@emph{#} indicates commands run as privileged root user and
+@emph{$} shows commands run as unprivileged ("normal") system user.
+
+
+@node Generic installation instructions
+@section Generic installation instructions
+
+First, in addition to the GNUnet sources you might require downloading the
+latest version of various dependencies, depending on how recent the
+software versions in your distribution of GNU/Linux are.
+Most distributions do not include sufficiently recent versions of these
+dependencies.
+Thus, a typically installation on a "modern" GNU/Linux distribution
+requires you to install the following dependencies (ideally in this
+order):
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item libgpgerror and libgcrypt
+@item libnettle and libunbound (possibly from distribution), GnuTLS
+@item libgnurl (read the README)
+@item GNU libmicrohttpd
+@item GNU libextractor
+@end itemize
+
+Make sure to first install the various mandatory and optional
+dependencies including development headers from your distribution.
+
+Other dependencies that you should strongly consider to install is a
+database (MySQL, sqlite or Postgres).
+The following instructions will assume that you installed at least sqlite.
+For most distributions you should be able to find pre-build packages for
+the database. Again, make sure to install the client libraries @b{and} the
+respective development headers (if they are packaged separately) as well.
+
+You can find specific, detailed instructions for installing of the
+dependencies (and possibly the rest of the GNUnet installation) in the
+platform-specific descriptions, which can be found in the Index.
+Please consult them now.
+If your distribution is not listed, please study
+@ref{Build instructions for Debian 8}, the build instructions for
+Debian stable, carefully as you try to install the dependencies for your
+own distribution.
+Contributing additional instructions for further platforms is always
+appreciated.
+Please take in mind that operating system development tends to move at
+a rather fast speed. Due to this you should be aware that some of
+the instructions could be outdated by the time you are reading this.
+If you find a mistake, please tell us about it (or even better: send
+a patch to the documentation to fix it!).
+
+Before proceeding further, please double-check the dependency list.
+Note that in addition to satisfying the dependencies, you might have to
+make sure that development headers for the various libraries are also
+installed.
+There maybe files for other distributions, or you might be able to find
+equivalent packages for your distribution.
+
+While it is possible to build and install GNUnet without having root
+access, we will assume that you have full control over your system in
+these instructions.
+First, you should create a system user @emph{gnunet} and an additional
+group @emph{gnunetdns}. On the GNU/Linux distributions Debian and Ubuntu,
+type:
+
+@example
+# adduser --system --home /var/lib/gnunet --group \
+--disabled-password gnunet
+# addgroup --system gnunetdns
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+On other Unixes and GNU systems, this should have the same effect:
+
+@example
+# useradd --system --groups gnunet --home-dir /var/lib/gnunet
+# addgroup --system gnunetdns
+@end example
+
+Now compile and install GNUnet using:
+
+@example
+$ tar xvf gnunet-@value{VERSION}.tar.gz
+$ cd gnunet-@value{VERSION}
+$ ./configure --with-sudo=sudo --with-nssdir=/lib
+$ make
+$ sudo make install
+@end example
+
+If you want to be able to enable DEBUG-level log messages, add
+@code{--enable-logging=verbose} to the end of the
+@command{./configure} command.
+@code{DEBUG}-level log messages are in English only and
+should only be useful for developers (or for filing
+really detailed bug reports). 
+
+Finally, you probably want to compile @command{gnunet-gtk}, which
+includes @command{gnunet-setup} (a graphical tool for
+GNUnet configuration) and @command{gnunet-fs-gtk} (a graphical tool for
+GNUnet file-sharing):
+
+@example
+$ tar xvf gnunet-gtk-@value{VERSION}.tar.gz
+$ cd gnunet-gtk-@value{VERSION}
+$ ./configure --with-gnunet=/usr/local/
+$ make
+$ sudo make install
+$ cd ..
+# just to be safe run this:
+$ sudo ldconfig
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Next, edit the file @file{/etc/gnunet.conf} to contain the following:
+
+@example
+[arm]
+SYSTEM_ONLY = YES
+USER_ONLY = NO
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+You may need to update your @code{ld.so} cache to include
+files installed in @file{/usr/local/lib}:
+
+@example
+# ldconfig
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Then, switch from user @code{root} to user @code{gnunet} to start
+the peer:
+
+@example
+# su -s /bin/sh - gnunet
+$ gnunet-arm -c /etc/gnunet.conf -s
+@end example
+
+You may also want to add the last line in the gnunet user's @file{crontab}
+prefixed with @code{@@reboot} so that it is executed whenever the system
+is booted:
+
+@example
+@@reboot /usr/local/bin/gnunet-arm -c /etc/gnunet.conf -s
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+This will only start the system-wide GNUnet services.
+Type exit to get back your root shell.
+Now, you need to configure the per-user part. For each
+$USER that should get access to GNUnet on the system, run:
+
+@example
+# adduser $USER gnunet
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+to allow them to access the system-wide GNUnet services. Then, each
+user should create a configuration file @file{~/.config/gnunet.conf}
+with the lines:
+
+@example
+[arm]
+SYSTEM_ONLY = NO
+USER_ONLY = YES
+DEFAULTSERVICES = gns
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+and start the per-user services using
+
+@example
+$ gnunet-arm -c ~/.config/gnunet.conf -s
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Again, adding a @code{crontab} entry to autostart the peer is advised:
+
+@example
+@@reboot /usr/local/bin/gnunet-arm -c $HOME/.config/gnunet.conf -s
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Note that some GNUnet services (such as SOCKS5 proxies) may need a
+system-wide TCP port for each user.
+For those services, systems with more than one user may require each user
+to specify a different port number in their personal configuration file.
+
+Finally, the user should perform the basic initial setup for the GNU Name
+System (GNS). This is done by running two commands:
+
+@example
+$ gnunet-gns-import.sh
+$ gnunet-gns-proxy-setup-ca
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The first generates the default zones, wheras the second setups the GNS
+Certificate Authority with the user's browser. Now, to activate GNS in the
+normal DNS resolution process, you need to edit your
+@file{/etc/nsswitch.conf} where you should find a line like this:
+
+@example
+hosts: files mdns4_minimal [NOTFOUND=return] dns mdns4
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The exact details may differ a bit, which is fine. Add the text
+@emph{"gns [NOTFOUND=return]"} after @emph{"files"}.
+Keep in mind that we included a backslash ("\") here just for
+markup reasons. You should write the text below on @b{one line}
+and @b{without} the "\":
+
+@example
+hosts: files gns [NOTFOUND=return] mdns4_minimal \
+[NOTFOUND=return] dns mdns4
+@end example
+
+@c FIXME: Document new behavior.
+You might want to make sure that @file{/lib/libnss_gns.so.2} exists on
+your system, it should have been created during the installation. 
+
+@node Build instructions for Ubuntu 12.04 using Git
+@section Build instructions for Ubuntu 12.04 using Git
+
+@menu
+* Install the required build tools::
+* Install libgcrypt 1.6 and libgpg-error::
+* Install gnutls with DANE support::
+* Install libgnurl::
+* Install libmicrohttpd from Git::
+* Install libextractor from Git::
+* Install GNUnet dependencies::
+* Build GNUnet::
+* Install the GNUnet-gtk user interface from Git::
+@end menu
+
+@node  Install the required build tools
+@subsection  Install the required build tools
+
+First, make sure Git is installed on your system:
+
+@example
+$ sudo apt-get install git
+@end example
+
+Install the essential buildtools:
+
+@example
+$ sudo apt-get install automake autopoint autoconf libtool
+@end example
+
+@node Install libgcrypt 1.6 and libgpg-error
+@subsection Install libgcrypt 1.6 and libgpg-error
+
+@ref{generic source installation - libgpg-error}
+
+@node Install gnutls with DANE support
+@subsection Install gnutls with DANE support
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item @ref{generic source installation - nettle}
+@item @ref{generic source installation - ldns}
+@item @ref{generic source installation - libunbound/unbound}
+@item @ref{generic source installation - gnutls}
+@item @ref{generic source installation - libgcrypt}
+@end itemize
+
+@node Install libgnurl
+@subsection Install libgnurl
+
+Follow the @ref{generic source installation - libgnurl}.
+
+@node Install libmicrohttpd from Git
+@subsection Install libmicrohttpd from Git
+
+@example
+$ git clone https://gnunet.org/git/libmicrohttpd
+$ cd libmicrohttpd/
+$ ./bootstrap
+$ ./configure
+$ sudo make install ; cd ..
+@end example
+
+@node  Install libextractor from Git
+@subsection  Install libextractor from Git
+
+Install libextractor dependencies:
+
+@example
+$ sudo apt-get install zlib1g-dev libgsf-1-dev libmpeg2-4-dev \
+ libpoppler-dev libvorbis-dev libexiv2-dev libjpeg-dev \
+ libtiff-dev libgif-dev libvorbis-dev libflac-dev libsmf-dev \
+ g++
+@end example
+
+Build libextractor:
+
+@example
+$ git clone https://gnunet.org/git/libextractor
+$ cd libextractor
+$ ./bootstrap
+$ ./configure
+$ sudo make install ; cd ..
+@end example
+
+@node Install GNUnet dependencies
+@subsection Install GNUnet dependencies
+
+@example
+$ sudo apt-get install libidn11-dev libunistring-dev libglpk-dev \
+ libpulse-dev libbluetooth-dev libsqlite-dev
+@end example
+
+Install libopus:
+
+@example
+$ wget http://downloads.xiph.org/releases/opus/opus-1.1.tar.gz
+$ tar xf opus-1.1.tar.gz
+$ cd opus-1.1/
+$ ./configure
+$ sudo make install ; cd ..
+@end example
+
+Choose one or more database backends:
+
+SQLite3:
+@example
+$ sudo apt-get install libsqlite3-dev
+@end example
+MySQL:
+@example
+$ sudo apt-get install libmysqlclient-dev
+@end example
+PostgreSQL:
+@example
+$ sudo apt-get install libpq-dev postgresql
+@end example
+
+
+
+@node Build GNUnet
+@subsection Build GNUnet
+
+
+
+@menu
+* Configuring the installation path::
+* Configuring the system::
+* Installing components requiring sudo permission::
+* Build::
+@end menu
+
+@node Configuring the installation path
+@subsubsection Configuring the installation path
+
+You can specify the location of the GNUnet installation by setting the
+prefix when calling the configure script with @code{--prefix=DIRECTORY}
+
+@example
+$ export PATH=$PATH:DIRECTORY/bin
+@end example
+
+@node Configuring the system
+@subsubsection Configuring the system
+
+Please make sure NOW that you have created a user and group 'gnunet'
+and additionally a group 'gnunetdns':
+
+@example
+$ sudo addgroup gnunet
+$ sudo addgroup gnunetdns
+$ sudo adduser gnunet
+@end example
+
+Each GNUnet user should be added to the 'gnunet' group (may
+require fresh login to come into effect):
+
+@example
+$ sudo useradd -G  gnunet
+@end example
+
+@node Installing components requiring sudo permission
+@subsubsection Installing components requiring sudo permission
+
+Some components, like the nss plugin required for GNS, may require root
+permissions. To allow these few components to be installed use:
+
+@example
+$ ./configure --with-sudo
+@end example
+
+@node Build
+@subsubsection Build
+
+@example
+$ git clone https://gnunet.org/git/gnunet/
+$ cd gnunet/
+$ ./bootstrap
+@end example
+
+Use the required configure call including the optional installation prefix
+@code{PREFIX} or the sudo permissions:
+
+@example
+$ ./configure [ --with-sudo | --with-prefix=PREFIX ]
+@end example
+
+@example
+$ make; sudo make install
+@end example
+
+After installing it, you need to create an empty configuration file:
+
+@example
+mkdir ~/.gnunet; touch ~/.gnunet/gnunet.conf
+@end example
+
+And finally you can start GNUnet with:
+
+@example
+$ gnunet-arm -s
+@end example
+
+@node Install the GNUnet-gtk user interface from Git
+@subsection Install the GNUnet-gtk user interface from Git
+
+
+Install depencies:
+
+@example
+$ sudo apt-get install libgtk-3-dev libunique-3.0-dev libgladeui-dev \
+ libqrencode-dev
+@end example
+
+Build GNUnet (with an optional prefix) and execute:
+
+@example
+$ git clone https://gnunet.org/git/gnunet-gtk/
+$ cd gnunet-gtk/
+$ ./bootstrap
+$ ./configure [--prefix=PREFIX] --with-gnunet=DIRECTORY
+$ make; sudo make install
+@end example
+
+@node Build instructions for software builds from source
+@section Build instructions for software builds from source
+
+This section describes software builds in case your operating
+system lacks binary substitutes / binary builds for some dependencies
+of GNUnet.
+It is assumed that you have installed common build dependencies
+and that these instructions are treated as generic without any
+debugging help.
+It is furthermore assumed that you use the release tarballs of
+the software, installation from the respective version control
+sources might differ in ways that are only minimal different
+(for example a dependency on autotools etc).
+
+@menu
+* generic source installation - nettle::
+* generic source installation - ldns::
+* generic source installation - libunbound/unbound::
+* generic source installation - libav::
+* generic source installation - libextractor::
+* generic source installation - libgpg-error::
+* generic source installation - libgcrypt::
+* generic source installation - gnutls::
+* generic source installation - libmicrohttpd::
+* generic source installation - libgnurl::
+@end menu
+
+@node generic source installation - nettle
+@subsection generic source installation - nettle
+@example
+$ wget http://www.lysator.liu.se/~nisse/archive/nettle-2.7.1.tar.gz
+$ tar xf nettle-2.7.1.tar.gz
+$ cd nettle-2.7.1
+$ ./configure
+$ sudo make install ; cd ..
+@end example
+
+@node generic source installation - ldns
+@subsection generic source installation - ldns
+@example
+$ wget https://www.nlnetlabs.nl/downloads/ldns/ldns-1.6.16.tar.gz
+$ tar xf ldns-1.6.16.tar.gz
+$ cd ldns-1.6.16
+$ ./configure
+$ sudo make install ; cd ..
+@end example
+
+@node generic source installation - libunbound/unbound
+@subsection generic source installation - libunbound/unbound
+@example
+$ wget https://unbound.net/downloads/unbound-1.4.21.tar.gz
+$ tar xf unbound-1.4.21.tar.gz
+$ cd unbound-1.4.21
+$ ./configure
+$ sudo make install ; cd ..
+@end example
+
+@node generic source installation - libav
+@subsection generic source installation - libav
+@example
+$ wget https://libav.org/releases/libav-9.10.tar.xz
+$ cd libav-0.9 ; ./configure --enable-shared;
+$ make; sudo make install; cd ..
+@end example
+
+@node generic source installation - libextractor
+@subsection generic source installation - libextractor
+@example
+$ wget https://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/libextractor/libextractor-1.3.tar.gz
+$ tar xvf libextractor-1.3.tar.gz
+$ cd libextractor-1.3 ; ./configure;
+$ make ; sudo make install; cd ..
+@end example
+
+@node generic source installation - libgpg-error
+@subsection generic source installation - libgpg-error
+@example
+$ wget https://ftp.gnupg.org/gcrypt/libgpg-error/libgpg-error-1.12.tar.bz2
+$ tar xvf libgpg-error-1.12.tar.bz2
+$ cd libgpg-error-1.12; ./configure;
+$ make ; sudo make install; cd ..
+@end example
+
+@node generic source installation - libgcrypt
+@subsection generic source installation - libgcrypt
+@example
+$ wget https://ftp.gnupg.org/gcrypt/libgcrypt/libgcrypt-1.6.0.tar.bz2
+$ tar xvf libgcrypt-1.6.0.tar.bz2
+$ cd libgcrypt-1.6.0; ./configure --with-gpg-error-prefix=/usr/local;
+$ make ; sudo make install ; cd ..
+@end example
+
+@node generic source installation - gnutls
+@subsection generic source installation - gnutls
+@example
+$ wget ftp://ftp.gnutls.org/gcrypt/gnutls/v3.2/gnutls-3.2.7.tar.xz
+$ tar xvf gnutls-3.2.7.tar.xz
+$ cd gnutls-3.2.7 ; ./configure;
+$ make ; sudo make install ; cd ..
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+If you want a GnuTLS with DANE functionality, you have to compile
+it against libunbound.
+
+@node generic source installation - libmicrohttpd
+@subsection generic source installation - libmicrohttpd
+@example
+$ wget https://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/libmicrohttpd/libmicrohttpd-0.9.33.tar.gz
+$ tar xvf libmicrohttpd-0.9.33.tar.gz
+$ cd libmicrohttpd-0.9.33; ./configure;
+$ make ; sudo make install ; cd ..
+@end example
+
+@node generic source installation - libgnurl
+@subsection generic source installation - libgnurl
+
+@example
+$ wget https://gnunet.org/sites/default/files/gnurl-7.34.0.tar.bz2
+$ tar xvf gnurl-7.34.0.tar.bz2
+$ cd gnurl-7.34.0
+$ ./configure --enable-ipv6 --with-gnutls=/usr/local --without-libssh2 \
+ --without-libmetalink --without-winidn --without-librtmp \
+ --without-nghttp2 --without-nss --without-cyassl --without-polarssl \
+ --without-ssl --without-winssl --without-darwinssl --disable-sspi \
+ --disable-ntlm-wb --disable-ldap --disable-rtsp --disable-dict \
+ --disable-telnet --disable-tftp --disable-pop3 --disable-imap \
+ --disable-smtp --disable-gopher --disable-file --disable-ftp
+$ make ; sudo make install; cd ..
+@end example
+
+@menu
+* Fixing libgnurl build issues::
+@end menu
+
+@node Fixing libgnurl build issues
+@subsubsection Fixing libgnurl build issues
+
+@c FIXME: Obviously this subsection should be evaluated and
+@c if still necessary moved into gnURL itself (README) or
+@c into a separate section which deals with gnURL.
+If you have to compile libgnurl from source (for example if the version
+included in your distribution is too old or it's not included at all)
+you perhaps might get an error message while running the
+@command{configure} script:
+
+@example
+$ configure
+...
+checking for 64-bit curl_off_t data type... unknown
+checking for 32-bit curl_off_t data type... unknown
+checking for 16-bit curl_off_t data type... unknown
+configure: error: cannot find data type for curl_off_t.
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Solution:
+
+Before running the @command{configure} script, set:
+
+@example
+CFLAGS="-I. -I$BUILD_ROOT/include"
+@end example
+
+@node Build Instructions for Microsoft Windows Platforms
+@section Build Instructions for Microsoft Windows Platforms
+
+@menu
+* Introduction to building on MS Windows::
+* Requirements::
+* Dependencies & Initial Setup::
+* GNUnet Installation::
+* Adjusting Windows for running and testing GNUnet::
+* Building the GNUnet Installer::
+* Using GNUnet with Netbeans on Windows::
+@end menu
+
+@node Introduction to building on MS Windows
+@subsection Introduction to building on MS Windows
+
+
+This document is a guide to building GNUnet and its dependencies on
+Windows platforms. GNUnet development is mostly done under GNU/Linux and
+especially git checkouts may not build out of the box.
+We regret any inconvenience, and if you have problems, please report
+them.
+
+@node Requirements
+@subsection Requirements
+
+The Howto is based upon a @strong{Windows Server 2008 32bit}
+@strong{Installation}, @strong{sbuild} and thus a
+@uref{http://www.mingw.org/wiki/MSYS, MSYS+MinGW}
+(W32-GCC-Compiler-Suite + Unix-like Userland) installation. sbuild
+is a convenient set of scripts which creates a working msys/mingw
+installation and installs most dependencies required for GNUnet.
+
+As of the point of the creation of these instructions,
+GNUnet @strong{requires} a Windows @strong{Server} 2003 or
+newer for full feature support.
+Windows Vista and later will also work, but
+@strong{non-server version can not run a VPN-Exit-Node} as the NAT
+features have been removed as of Windows Vista.
+
+@c TODO: We should document Windows 10!
+@c It seems like the situation hasn't changed with W10
+
+@node Dependencies & Initial Setup
+@subsection Dependencies & Initial Setup
+
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item
+Install a fresh version of @strong{Python 2.x}, even if you are using a
+x64-OS, install a 32-bit version for use with sbuild.
+Python 3.0 is currently incompatible.
+
+@item
+Install your favorite @uref{http://code.google.com/p/tortoisegit/, git} &
+@uref{http://tortoisesvn.net/, subversion}-clients.
+
+@item
+You will also need some archive-manager like
+@uref{http://www.7-zip.org/, 7zip}.
+
+@item
+Pull a copy of sbuild to a directory of your choice, which will be used
+in the remainder of this guide. For now, we will use
+@file{c:\gnunet\sbuild\}
+
+@item
+in @file{sbuild\src\mingw\mingw32-buildall.sh}, comment out the packages
+@strong{gnunet-svn} and @strong{gnunet-gtk-svn}, as we don't want sbuild
+to compile/install those for us.
+
+@item
+Follow LRN's sbuild installation instructions.-
+@end itemize
+
+Please note that sbuild may (or will most likely) fail during
+installation, thus you really HAVE to @strong{check the logfiles} created
+during the installation process.
+Certain packages may fail to build initially due to missing dependencies,
+thus you may have to
+@strong{substitute those with binary-versions initially}. Later on once
+dependencies are satisfied you can re-build the newer package versions.
+
+@strong{It is normal that you may have to repeat this step multiple times
+and there is no uniform way to fix all compile-time issues, as the
+build-process of many of the dependencies installed are rather unstable
+on win32 and certain releases may not even compile at all.}
+
+Most dependencies for GNUnet have been set up by sbuild, thus we now
+should add the @file{bin/} directories in your new msys and mingw
+installations to PATH. You will want to create a backup of your finished
+msys-environment by now.
+
+@node GNUnet Installation
+@subsection GNUnet Installation
+
+First, we need to launch our msys-shell, you can do this via
+
+@file{C:\gnunet\sbuild\msys\msys.bat}
+
+You might wish to take a look at this file and adjust some
+login-parameters to your msys environment.
+
+Also, sbuild added two pointpoints to your msys-environment, though those
+might remain invisible:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item
+/mingw, which will mount your mingw-directory from sbuild/mingw and the
+other one is
+
+@item
+/src which contains all the installation sources sbuild just compiled.
+@end itemize
+
+Check out the current GNUnet sources (git HEAD) from the
+GNUnet repository "gnunet.git", we will do this in your home directory:
+
+@code{git clone https://gnunet.org/git/gnunet/ ~/gnunet}
+
+Now, we will first need to bootstrap the checked out installation and then
+configure it accordingly.
+
+@example
+cd ~/gnunet
+./bootstrap
+STRIP=true CPPFLAGS="-DUSE_IPV6=1 -DW32_VEH" CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -g -O2" \
+./configure --prefix=/ --docdir=/share/doc/gnunet \
+--with-libiconv-prefix=/mingw --with-libintl-prefix=/mingw \
+--with-libcurl=/mingw --with-extractor=/mingw --with-sqlite=/mingw \
+--with-microhttpd=/mingw --with-plibc=/mingw --enable-benchmarks \
+--enable-expensivetests --enable-experimental --with-qrencode=/mingw \
+--enable-silent-rules --enable-experimental 2>&1 | tee -a ./configure.log
+@end example
+
+The parameters above will configure for a reasonable GNUnet installation
+to the your msys-root directory.
+Depending on which features your would like to build or you may need to
+specify additional dependencies. Sbuild installed most libs into
+the /mingw subdirectory, so remember to prefix library locations with
+this path.
+
+Like on a unixoid system, you might want to use your home directory as
+prefix for your own GNUnet installation for development, without tainting
+the buildenvironment. Just change the "prefix" parameter to point towards
+~/ in this case.
+
+Now it's time to compile GNUnet as usual. Though this will take some time,
+so you may fetch yourself a coffee or some Mate now...
+
+@example
+make ; make install
+@end example
+
+@node Adjusting Windows for running and testing GNUnet
+@subsection Adjusting Windows for running and testing GNUnet
+
+Assuming the build succeeded and you
+@strong{added the bin directory of your GNUnet to PATH}, you can now use
+your gnunet-installation as usual.
+Remember that UAC or the windows firewall may popup initially, blocking
+further execution of gnunet until you acknowledge them.
+
+You will also have to take the usual steps to get peer-to-peer (p2p)
+software running properly (port forwarding, ...),
+and GNUnet will require administrative permissions as it may even
+install a device-driver (in case you are using gnunet-vpn and/or
+gnunet-exit).
+
+@node Building the GNUnet Installer
+@subsection Building the GNUnet Installer
+
+The GNUnet installer is made with
+@uref{http://nsis.sourceforge.net/, NSIS}.
+The installer script is located in @file{contrib\win} in the
+GNUnet source tree.
+
+@node Using GNUnet with Netbeans on Windows
+@subsection Using GNUnet with Netbeans on Windows
+
+TODO
+
+@node Build instructions for Debian 7.5
+@section Build instructions for Debian 7.5
+
+
+These are the installation instructions for Debian 7.5. They were tested
+using a minimal, fresh Debian 7.5 AMD64 installation without non-free
+software (no contrib or non-free).
+By "minimal", we mean that during installation, we did not select any
+desktop environment, servers or system utilities during the "tasksel"
+step. Note that the packages and the dependencies that we will install
+during this chapter take about 1.5 GB of disk space.
+Combined with GNUnet and space for objects during compilation, you should
+not even attempt this unless you have about 2.5 GB free after the minimal
+Debian installation.
+Using these instructions to build a VM image is likely to require a
+minimum of 4-5 GB for the VM (as you will likely also want a desktop
+manager).
+
+GNUnet's security model assumes that your @file{/home} directory is
+encrypted. Thus, if possible, you should encrypt your home partition
+(or per-user home directory).
+
+Naturally, the exact details of the starting state for your installation
+should not matter much. For example, if you selected any of those
+installation groups you might simply already have some of the necessary
+packages installed.
+We did this for testing, as this way we are less likely to forget to
+mention a required package.
+Note that we will not install a desktop environment, but of course you
+will need to install one to use GNUnet's graphical user interfaces.
+Thus, it is suggested that you simply install the desktop environment of
+your choice before beginning with the instructions.
+
+
+
+@menu
+* Update::
+* Stable? Hah!::
+* Update again::
+* Installing packages::
+* Installing dependencies from source::
+* Installing GNUnet from source::
+* But wait there is more!::
+@end menu
+
+@node Update
+@subsection Update
+
+After any installation, you should begin by running
+
+@example
+# apt-get update ; apt-get upgrade
+@end example
+
+to ensure that all of your packages are up-to-date. Note that the "#" is
+used to indicate that you need to type in this command as "root"
+(or prefix with "sudo"), whereas "$" is used to indicate typing in a
+command as a normal user.
+
+@node Stable? Hah!
+@subsection Stable? Hah!
+
+Yes, we said we start with a Debian 7.5 "stable" system. However, to
+reduce the amount of compilation by hand, we will begin by allowing the
+installation of packages from the testing and unstable distributions as
+well.
+We will stick to "stable" packages where possible, but some packages will
+be taken from the other distributions.
+Start by modifying @file{/etc/apt/sources.list} to contain the
+following (possibly adjusted to point to your mirror of choice):
+
+@example
+# These were there before:
+deb http://ftp.de.debian.org/debian/ wheezy main
+deb-src http://ftp.de.debian.org/debian/ wheezy main
+deb http://security.debian.org/ wheezy/updates main
+deb-src http://security.debian.org/ wheezy/updates main
+deb http://ftp.de.debian.org/debian/ wheezy-updates main
+deb-src http://ftp.de.debian.org/debian/ wheezy-updates main
+
+# Add these lines (feel free to adjust the mirror):
+deb http://ftp.de.debian.org/debian/ testing main
+deb http://ftp.de.debian.org/debian/ unstable main
+@end example
+
+The next step is to create/edit your @file{/etc/apt/preferences}
+file to look like this:
+
+@example
+Package: *
+Pin: release a=stable,n=wheezy
+Pin-Priority: 700
+
+Package: *
+Pin: release o=Debian,a=testing
+Pin-Priority: 650
+
+Package: *
+Pin: release o=Debian,a=unstable
+Pin-Priority: 600
+@end example
+
+You can read more about Apt Preferences here and here.
+Note that other pinnings are likely to also work for GNUnet, the key
+thing is that you need some packages from unstable (as shown below).
+However, as unstable is unlikely to be comprehensive (missing packages)
+or might be problematic (crashing packages), you probably want others
+from stable and/or testing.
+
+@node Update again
+@subsection Update again
+
+Now, run again@
+
+@example
+# apt-get update@
+# apt-get upgrade@
+@end example
+
+to ensure that all your new distribution indices are downloaded, and
+that your pinning is correct: the upgrade step should cause no changes
+at all.
+
+@node Installing packages
+@subsection Installing packages
+
+We begin by installing a few Debian packages from stable:@
+
+@example
+# apt-get install gcc make python-zbar libltdl-dev libsqlite3-dev \
+  libunistring-dev libopus-dev libpulse-dev openssl libglpk-dev \
+  texlive libidn11-dev libmysqlclient-dev libpq-dev libarchive-dev \
+  libbz2-dev libexiv2-dev libflac-dev libgif-dev libglib2.0-dev \
+  libgtk-3-dev libmagic-dev libjpeg8-dev libmpeg2-4-dev libmp4v2-dev \
+  librpm-dev libsmf-dev libtidy-dev libtiff5-dev libvorbis-dev \
+  libogg-dev zlib1g-dev g++ gettext libgsf-1-dev libunbound-dev \
+  libqrencode-dev libgladeui-dev nasm texlive-latex-extra \
+  libunique-3.0-dev gawk miniupnpc libfuse-dev libbluetooth-dev
+@end example
+
+After that, we install a few more packages from unstable:@
+
+@example
+# apt-get install -t unstable nettle-dev libgstreamer1.0-dev \
+  gstreamer1.0-plugins-base gstreamer1.0-plugins-good \
+  libgstreamer-plugins-base1.0-dev
+@end example
+
+@node Installing dependencies from source
+@subsection Installing dependencies from source
+
+Next, we need to install a few dependencies from source.
+You might want to do this as a "normal" user and only run the
+@code{make install} steps as root (hence the @code{sudo} in the
+commands below). Also, you do this from any
+directory. We begin by downloading all dependencies, then extracting the
+sources, and finally compiling and installing the libraries.
+
+For these steps, follow the instructions given in the
+installation from source instruction in this order:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item @ref{generic source installation - libav}
+@item @ref{generic source installation - libextractor}
+@item @ref{generic source installation - libgpg-error}
+@item @ref{generic source installation - libgcrypt}
+@item @ref{generic source installation - gnutls}
+@item @ref{generic source installation - libmicrohttpd}
+@item @ref{generic source installation - libgnurl}
+@end itemize
+
+@node Installing GNUnet from source
+@subsection Installing GNUnet from source
+
+
+For this, simply follow the generic installation instructions from
+here.
+
+@node But wait there is more!
+@subsection But wait there is more!
+
+So far, we installed all of the packages and dependencies required to
+ensure that all of GNUnet would be built.
+However, while for example the plugins to interact with the MySQL or
+Postgres databases have been created, we did not actually install or
+configure those databases. Thus, you will need to install
+and configure those databases or stick with the default Sqlite database.
+Sqlite is usually fine for most applications, but MySQL can offer better
+performance and Postgres better resillience.
+
+
+@node Installing GNUnet from Git on Ubuntu 14.4
+@section Installing GNUnet from Git on Ubuntu 14.4
+
+@strong{Install the required build tools:}
+
+@example
+$ sudo apt-get install git automake autopoint autoconf
+@end example
+
+@strong{Install the required dependencies}
+
+@example
+$ sudo apt-get install libltdl-dev libgpg-error-dev libidn11-dev \
+ libunistring-dev libglpk-dev libbluetooth-dev libextractor-dev \
+ libmicrohttpd-dev libgnutls28-dev
+@end example
+
+@strong{Choose one or more database backends}
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item SQLite3:
+
+@example
+$ sudo apt-get install libsqlite3-dev
+@end example
+
+@item MySQL:
+
+@example
+$ sudo apt-get install libmysqlclient-dev
+@end example
+
+@item PostgreSQL:
+
+@example
+$ sudo apt-get install libpq-dev postgresql
+@end example
+
+@end itemize
+
+@strong{Install the optional dependencies for gnunet-conversation:}
+
+@example
+$ sudo apt-get install gstreamer1.0 libpulse-dev libopus-dev
+@end example
+
+@strong{Install the libgrypt 1.6.1:}
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item For Ubuntu 14.04:
+
+@example
+$ sudo apt-get install libgcrypt20-dev
+@end example
+
+@item For Ubuntu older 14.04:
+
+@example
+$ wget ftp://ftp.gnupg.org/gcrypt/libgcrypt/libgcrypt-1.6.1.tar.bz2
+$ tar xf libgcrypt-1.6.1.tar.bz2
+$ cd libgcrypt-1.6.1
+$ ./configure
+$ sudo make install
+$ cd ..
+@end example
+
+@end itemize
+
+@strong{Install libgnurl}
+
+@example
+$ wget https://gnunet.org/sites/default/files/gnurl-7.35.0.tar.bz2
+$ tar xf gnurl-7.35.0.tar.bz2
+$ cd gnurl-7.35.0
+$ ./configure --enable-ipv6 --with-gnutls --without-libssh2 \
+ --without-libmetalink --without-winidn --without-librtmp \
+ --without-nghttp2 --without-nss --without-cyassl --without-polarssl \
+ --without-ssl --without-winssl --without-darwinssl --disable-sspi \
+ --disable-ntlm-wb --disable-ldap --disable-rtsp --disable-dict \
+ --disable-telnet --disable-tftp --disable-pop3 --disable-imap \
+ --disable-smtp --disable-gopher --disable-file --disable-ftp
+$ sudo make install
+$ cd ..
+@end example
+
+@strong{Install GNUnet}
+
+@example
+$ git clone https://gnunet.org/git/gnunet/
+$ cd gnunet/
+$ ./bootstrap
+@end example
+
+If you want to:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item Install to a different directory:
+
+@example
+--prefix=PREFIX
+@end example
+
+@item
+Have sudo permission, but do not want to compile as root:
+
+@example
+--with-sudo
+@end example
+
+@item
+Want debug message enabled:
+
+@example
+--enable-logging=verbose
+@end example
+
+@end itemize
+
+
+@example
+$ ./configure [ --with-sudo | --prefix=PREFIX | --enable-logging=verbose]
+$ make; sudo make install
+@end example
+
+After installing it, you need to create an empty configuration file:
+
+@example
+touch ~/.config/gnunet.conf
+@end example
+
+And finally you can start GNUnet with
+
+@example
+$ gnunet-arm -s
+@end example
+
+@node Build instructions for Debian 8
+@section Build instructions for Debian 8
+@c FIXME: I -> we
+
+These are the installation instructions for Debian 8. They were tested
+sing a fresh Debian 8 AMD64 installation without non-free software (no
+contrib or non-free). During installation, I only selected "lxde" for the
+desktop environment.
+Note that the packages and the dependencies that we will install during
+this chapter take about 1.5 GB of disk space. Combined with GNUnet and
+space for objects during compilation, you should not even attempt this
+unless you have about 2.5 GB free after the Debian installation.
+Using these instructions to build a VM image is likely to require a
+minimum of 4-5 GB for the VM (as you will likely also want a desktop
+manager).
+
+GNUnet's security model assumes that your @code{/home} directory is
+encrypted.
+Thus, if possible, you should encrypt your entire disk, or at least just
+your home partition (or per-user home directory).
+
+Naturally, the exact details of the starting state for your installation
+should not matter much.
+For example, if you selected any of those installation groups you might
+simply already have some of the necessary packages installed. Thus, it is
+suggested that you simply install the desktop environment of your choice
+before beginning with the instructions.
+
+
+@menu
+* Update Debian::
+* Installing Debian Packages::
+* Installing Dependencies from Source2::
+* Installing GNUnet from Source2::
+* But wait (again) there is more!::
+@end menu
+
+@node Update Debian
+@subsection Update Debian
+
+After any installation, you should begin by running
+
+@example
+# apt-get update
+# apt-get upgrade
+@end example
+
+to ensure that all of your packages are up-to-date. Note that the "#" is
+used to indicate that you need to type in this command as "root" (or
+prefix with "sudo"), whereas "$" is used to indicate typing in a command
+as a normal user.
+
+@node Installing Debian Packages
+@subsection Installing Debian Packages
+
+We begin by installing a few Debian packages from stable:
+
+@example
+# apt-get install gcc make python-zbar libltdl-dev libsqlite3-dev \ 
+libunistring-dev libopus-dev libpulse-dev openssl libglpk-dev texlive \
+libidn11-dev libmysqlclient-dev libpq-dev libarchive-dev libbz2-dev \
+libflac-dev libgif-dev libglib2.0-dev libgtk-3-dev libmpeg2-4-dev \
+libtidy-dev libvorbis-dev libogg-dev zlib1g-dev g++ gettext \
+libgsf-1-dev libunbound-dev libqrencode-dev libgladeui-dev nasm \
+texlive-latex-extra libunique-3.0-dev gawk miniupnpc libfuse-dev \
+libbluetooth-dev gstreamer1.0-plugins-base gstreamer1.0-plugins-good \
+libgstreamer-plugins-base1.0-dev nettle-dev libextractor-dev \
+libgcrypt20-dev libmicrohttpd-dev
+@end example
+
+@node Installing Dependencies from Source2
+@subsection Installing Dependencies from Source2
+
+Yes, we said we start with a Debian 8 "stable" system, but because Debian
+linked GnuTLS without support for DANE, we need to compile a few things,
+in addition to GNUnet, still by hand. Yes, you can run GNUnet using the
+respective Debian packages, but then you will not get DANE support.
+
+Next, we need to install a few dependencies from source. You might want
+to do this as a "normal" user and only run the @code{make install} steps
+as root (hence the @code{sudo} in the commands below). Also, you do this
+from any directory. We begin by downloading all dependencies, then
+extracting the sources, and finally compiling and installing the
+libraries:
+
+@example
+$ wget ftp://ftp.gnutls.org/gcrypt/gnutls/v3.3/gnutls-3.3.12.tar.xz
+$ tar xvf gnutls-3.3.12.tar.xz
+$ cd gnutls-3.3.12 ; ./configure ; make ; sudo make install ; cd ..
+@end example
+
+For the installation and compilation of libgnurl/gnURL refer to
+the generic installation section,
+@xref{generic source installation - libgnurl}.
+
+@node Installing GNUnet from Source2
+@subsection Installing GNUnet from Source2
+
+For this, simply follow the generic installation instructions from@
+here.
+
+@node But wait (again) there is more!
+@subsection But wait (again) there is more!
+
+So far, we installed all of the packages and dependencies required to
+ensure that all of GNUnet would be built. However, while for example the
+plugins to interact with the MySQL or Postgres databases have been
+created, we did not actually install or configure those databases.
+Thus, you will need to install and configure those databases or stick
+with the default Sqlite database. Sqlite is usually fine for most
+applications, but MySQL can offer better performance and Postgres better
+resillience.
+
+@node Outdated build instructions for previous revisions
+@section Outdated build instructions for previous revisions
+
+This chapter contains a collection of outdated, older installation guides.
+They are mostly intended to serve as a starting point for writing
+up-to-date instructions and should not be expected to work for
+GNUnet 0.10.x.
+A set of older installation instructions can also be found in the
+file @file{doc/outdated-and-old-installation-instructions.txt} in the
+source tree of GNUnet.
+
+This file covers old instructions which no longer receive security
+updates or any kind of support.
+
+@menu
+* Installing GNUnet 0.10.1 on Ubuntu 14.04::
+* Building GLPK for MinGW::
+* GUI build instructions for Ubuntu 12.04 using Subversion::
+@c * Installation with gnunet-update::
+* Instructions for Microsoft Windows Platforms (Old)::
+@end menu
+
+
+@node Installing GNUnet 0.10.1 on Ubuntu 14.04
+@subsection Installing GNUnet 0.10.1 on Ubuntu 14.04
+
+Install the required dependencies:
+
+@example
+$ sudo apt-get install libltdl-dev libgpg-error-dev libidn11-dev \
+ libunistring-dev libglpk-dev libbluetooth-dev libextractor-dev \
+ libmicrohttpd-dev libgnutls28-dev
+@end example
+
+Choose one or more database backends:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item SQLite3
+
+@example
+ $ sudo apt-get install libsqlite3-dev@
+@end example
+
+@item MySQL
+
+@example
+$ sudo apt-get install libmysqlclient-dev@
+@end example
+
+@item PostgreSQL
+
+@example
+ $ sudo apt-get install libpq-dev postgresql@
+@end example
+
+@end itemize
+
+Install the optional dependencies for gnunet-conversation:
+
+@example
+ $ sudo apt-get install gstreamer1.0 libpulse-dev libopus-dev
+@end example
+
+Install libgcrypt 1.6:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item For Ubuntu 14.04:
+
+@example
+$ sudo apt-get install libgcrypt20-dev
+@end example
+
+@item For Ubuntu older than 14.04:
+
+@example
+wget ftp://ftp.gnupg.org/gcrypt/libgcrypt/libgcrypt-1.6.1.tar.bz2
+$ tar xf libgcrypt-1.6.1.tar.bz2
+$ cd libgcrypt-1.6.1
+$ ./configure
+$ sudo make install
+$ cd ..
+@end example
+@end itemize
+
+Install libgnurl:
+
+@pxref{generic source installation - libgnurl}.
+
+Install GNUnet:
+
+@example
+$ wget http://ftpmirror.gnu.org/gnunet/gnunet-0.10.1.tar.gz
+$ tar xf gnunet-0.10.1.tar.gz
+$ cd gnunet-0.10.1
+@end example
+
+If you want to:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item
+Install to a different directory:
+
+@example
+--prefix=PREFIX
+@end example
+
+@item
+Have sudo permission, but do not want to compile as root:
+
+@example
+--with-sudo
+@end example
+
+@item
+Want debug message enabled:
+
+@example
+--enable-logging=verbose
+@end example
+
+@end itemize
+
+@example
+$ ./configure [ --with-sudo | --prefix=PREFIX | --enable-logging=verbose]
+$ make; sudo make install
+@end example
+
+After installing it, you need to create an empty configuration file:
+
+@example
+touch ~/.config/gnunet.conf
+@end example
+
+And finally you can start GNUnet with
+
+@example
+$ gnunet-arm -s
+@end example
+
+@node Building GLPK for MinGW
+@subsection Building GLPK for MinGW
+
+GNUnet now requires the GNU Linear Programming Kit (GLPK).
+Since there's is no package you can install with @code{mingw-get} you
+have to compile it from source:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item Download the latest version from
+@uref{http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/glpk/}
+
+@item Unzip the downloaded source tarball using your favourite
+unzipper application In the MSYS shell
+
+@item change to the respective directory 
+
+@item Configure glpk for "i686-pc-mingw32":
+
+@example
+./configure '--build=i686-pc-mingw32'
+@end example
+
+@item run
+
+@example
+make install check
+@end example
+
+@end itemize
+
+MinGW does not automatically detect the correct buildtype so you have to
+specify it manually.
+
+
+@node GUI build instructions for Ubuntu 12.04 using Subversion
+@subsection GUI build instructions for Ubuntu 12.04 using Subversion
+
+After installing GNUnet you can continue installing the GNUnet GUI tools:
+
+First, install the required dependencies:
+
+@example
+$ sudo apt-get install libgladeui-dev libqrencode-dev
+@end example
+
+Please ensure that the GNUnet shared libraries can be found by the linker.
+If you installed GNUnet libraries in a non standard path
+(say GNUNET_PREFIX=/usr/local/lib/), you can
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item set the environmental variable permanently to:
+
+@example
+LD_LIBRARY_PATH=$GNUNET_PREFIX
+@end example
+
+@item or add @code{$GNUNET_PREFIX} to @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
+
+@end itemize
+
+Now you can checkout and compile the GNUnet GUI tools:
+
+@example
+$ git clone https://gnunet.org/git/gnunet-gtk
+$ cd gnunet-gtk
+$ ./bootstrap
+$ ./configure --prefix=$GNUNET_PREFIX/.. --with-gnunet=$GNUNET_PREFIX/..
+$ make install
+@end example
+
+@c @node Installation with gnunet-update
+@c @subsection Installation with gnunet-update
+
+@c gnunet-update project is an effort to introduce updates to GNUnet
+@c installations. An interesting to-be-implemented-feature of gnunet-update
+@c is that these updates are propagated through GNUnet's peer-to-peer
+@c network. More information about gnunet-update can be found at
+@c @c FIXME: Use correct cgit URL
+@c @uref{https://gnunet.org/git/gnunet-update.git/tree/plain/README}.
+
+@c While the project is still under development, we have implemented the
+@c following features which we believe may be helpful for users and we
+@c would like them to be tested:
+
+@c @itemize @bullet
+
+@c @item
+@c Packaging GNUnet installation along with its run-time dependencies into
+@c update packages
+
+@c @item
+@c Installing update packages into compatible hosts
+
+@c @item
+@c Updating an existing installation (which had been installed by
+@c gnunet-update) to a newer one
+
+@c @end itemize
+
+@c The above said features of gnunet-update are currently available for
+@c testing on GNU/Linux systems.
+
+@c The following is a guide to help you get started with gnunet-update.
+@c It shows you how to install the testing binary packages of GNUnet
+@c 0.9.1 we have at @uref{https://gnunet.org/install/}.
+
+@c gnunet-update needs the following dependencies:
+
+@c @itemize @bullet
+@c @item
+@c python @geq{} 2.6
+
+@c @item
+@c gnupg
+
+@c @item
+@c python-gpgme
+@c @end itemize
+
+
+@c Checkout gnunet-update:
+
+@c @c FIXME: git!
+@c @example
+@c $ svn checkout -r24905 https://gnunet.org/svn/gnunet-update@
+@c @end example
+
+@c For security reasons, all packages released for gnunet-update from us are
+@c signed with the key at @uref{https://gnunet.org/install/key.txt}.
+@c You would need to import this key into your gpg key ring.
+@c gnunet-update uses this key to verify the integrity of the packages it
+@c installs:
+
+@c @example
+@c $ gpg --recv-keys 7C613D78@
+@c @end example
+
+@c Download the packages relevant to your architecture (currently I have
+@c access to GNU/Linux machines on x86_64 and i686, so only two for now,
+@c hopefully more later) from https://gnunet.org/install/.
+
+@c To install the downloaded package into the directory /foo:
+
+@c @example
+@c gnunet-update/bin/gnunet-update install downloaded/package /foo
+@c @end example
+
+@c The installer reports the directories into which shared libraries and
+@c dependencies have been installed. You may need to add the reported shared
+@c library installation paths to LD_LIBRARY_PATH before you start running any
+@c installed binaries.
+
+@c Please report bugs at https://gnunet.org/bugs/ under the project
+@c 'gnunet-update'.
+
+@node Instructions for Microsoft Windows Platforms (Old)
+@subsection Instructions for Microsoft Windows Platforms (Old)
+
+This document is a @b{DEPRECATED} installation guide for GNUnet on
+Windows.
+It will not work for recent GNUnet versions, but maybe it will be of
+some use if problems arise. 
+
+The Windows build uses a UNIX emulator for Windows,
+@uref{http://www.mingw.org/, MinGW}, to build the executable modules.
+These modules run natively on Windows and do not require additional
+emulation software besides the usual dependencies.
+
+GNUnet development is mostly done under GNU/Linux and especially git
+checkouts may not build out of the box.
+We regret any inconvenience, and if you have problems, please report them.
+
+@menu
+* Hardware and OS requirements::
+* Software installation::
+* Building libextractor and GNUnet::
+* Installer::
+* Source::
+@end menu
+     
+@node Hardware and OS requirements
+@subsubsection Hardware and OS requirements
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item Pentium II or equivalent processor, @geq{} 350 MHz
+
+@item 128 MB RAM
+
+@item 600 MB free disk space
+
+@item Windows 2000 or Windows XP are recommended
+
+@end itemize
+
+@node Software installation
+@subsubsection Software installation
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item
+@strong{Compression software}@
+
+The software packages GNUnet depends on are usually compressed using UNIX
+tools like @command{tar}, @command{gzip}, @command{xzip} and
+@command{bzip2}.
+If you do not already have an utility that is able to extract such
+archives, get @uref{http://www.7-zip.org/, 7-Zip}.
+
+@item
+@strong{UNIX environment}@
+
+The MinGW project provides the compiler toolchain that is used to build
+GNUnet.
+Get the following packages from the
+@uref{http://sourceforge.net/projects/mingw/files/, MinGW} project:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item GCC core
+@item GCC g++
+@item MSYS
+@item MSYS Developer Tool Kit (msysDTK)
+@item MSYS Developer Tool Kit - msys-autoconf (bin)
+@item MSYS Developer Tool Kit - msys-automake (bin)
+@item MinGW Runtime
+@item MinGW Utilities
+@item Windows API
+@item Binutils
+@item make
+@item pdcurses
+@item GDB (snapshot)
+@end itemize
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+
+@item Install MSYS (to c:\mingw, for example.)@
+Do @strong{not} use spaces in the pathname.
+For example, avoid a location such as @file{c:\program files\mingw}.
+
+@item Install MinGW runtime, utilities and GCC to a subdirectory
+(to @file{c:\mingw\mingw}, for example)
+
+@item Install the Development Kit to the MSYS directory
+(@file{c:\mingw})
+
+@item Create a batch file bash.bat in your MSYS directory with
+the files:
+
+@example
+bin\sh.exe --login
+@end example
+
+This batch file opens a shell which is used to invoke the build
+processes.
+MinGW's standard shell (@command{msys.bat}) is not suitable
+because it opens a separate console window.
+On Vista, @command{bash.bat} needs to be run as Administrator. 
+
+@item
+Start @command{bash.sh} and rename
+@file{c:\mingw\mingw\lib\libstdc++.la} to avoid problems:
+
+@example
+mv /usr/mingw/lib/libstdc++.la /usr/mingw/lib/libstdc++.la.broken
+@end example
+
+@item
+Unpack the Windows API to the MinGW directory (@file{c:\mingw\mingw\}) and
+remove the declaration of DATADIR from
+(@file{c:\mingw\mingw\include\objidl.h} (lines 55-58)
+
+@item
+Unpack autoconf, automake to the MSYS directory (@file{c:\mingw})
+
+@item
+Install all other packages to the MinGW directory (@file{c:\mingw\mingw\})
+@end itemize
+
+
+@item @strong{GNU Libtool}@
+GNU Libtool is required to use shared libraries.
+Get the prebuilt package from here and unpack it to the
+MinGW directory (@file{c:\mingw})
+
+@item @strong{Pthreads}@
+GNUnet uses the portable POSIX thread library for multi-threading:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item Save
+@uref{ftp://sources.redhat.com/pub/pthreads-win32/dll-latest/lib/x86/libpthreadGC2.a, libpthreadGC2.a}
+(x86) or
+@uref{ftp://sources.redhat.com/pub/pthreads-win32/dll-latest/lib/x64/libpthreadGC2.a, libpthreadGC2.a}
+(x64) as libpthread.a into the @file{lib}
+directory (@file{c:\mingw\mingw\lib\libpthread.a}).
+
+@item Save
+@uref{ftp://sources.redhat.com/pub/pthreads-win32/dll-latest/lib/x86/pthreadGC2.dll, pthreadGC2.dll}
+(x86) or
+@uref{ftp://sources.redhat.com/pub/pthreads-win32/dll-latest/lib/x64/pthreadGC2.dll, libpthreadGC2.a}
+(x64) into the MinGW @file{bin} directory (@file{c:\mingw\mingw\bin}).
+
+@item Download all header files from
+@uref{ftp://sources.redhat.com/pub/pthreads-win32/dll-latest/include/, include/}
+to the @file{include} directory (@file{c:\mingw\mingw\include}).
+@end itemize
+
+
+@item @strong{GNU MP}@
+GNUnet uses the GNU Multiple Precision library for special cryptographic
+operations. Get the GMP binary package from the
+@uref{http://sourceforge.net/projects/mingwrep/, MinGW repository} and
+unpack it to the MinGW directory (@file{c:\mingw\mingw})
+
+@item @strong{GNU Gettext}@
+GNU gettext is used to provide national language support.
+Get the prebuilt package from hereand unpack it to the MinGW
+directory (@file{c:\mingw\mingw})
+
+@item @strong{GNU iconv}@
+GNU Libiconv is used for character encoding conversion.
+Get the prebuilt package from here and unpack it to the MinGW
+directory (@file{c:\mingw\mingw}).
+
+@item @strong{SQLite}@
+GNUnet uses the SQLite database to store data.
+Get the prebuilt binary from here and unpack it to your MinGW directory. 
+
+@item @strong{MySQL}@
+As an alternative to SQLite, GNUnet also supports MySQL.
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item Get the binary installer from the
+@uref{http://dev.mysql.com/downloads/mysql/4.1.html#Windows, MySQL project}
+(version 4.1), install it and follow the instructions in
+@file{README.mysql}.
+
+@item  Create a temporary build directory (@file{c:\mysql})
+
+@item Copy the directories @file{include\} and @file{lib\} from the
+MySQL directory to the new directory
+
+@item Get the patches from
+@uref{http://bugs.mysql.com/bug.php?id=8906&files=1, Bug #8906} and
+@uref{http://bugs.mysql.com/bug.php?id=8872&files=1, Bug #8872} (the
+latter is only required for MySQL
+
+@example
+patch -p 0
+@end example
+
+@item Move @file{lib\opt\libmysql.dll} to @file{lib\libmysql.dll}
+
+@item  Change to @file{lib\} and create an import library:
+
+@example
+dlltool --input-def ../include/libmySQL.def \
+--dllname libmysql.dll \
+--output-lib libmysqlclient.a -k
+@end example
+
+@item  Copy include\* to include\mysql\ 
+
+@item  Pass @code{--with-mysql=/c/mysql} to
+@command{./configure} and copy @file{libmysql.dll}
+to your PATH or GNUnet's @file{bin} directory
+@end itemize
+
+
+@item @strong{GTK+}@
+@command{gnunet-gtk} and @command{libextractor} depend on GTK.
+Get the the binary and developer packages of @command{atk},
+@command{glib}, @command{gtk}, @command{iconv},
+@command{gettext-runtime}, @command{pango} from
+@uref{ftp://ftp.gtk.org/pub/gtk/v2.6/win32, gtk.org} and unpack them
+to the MinGW directory (@file{c:\mingw\mingw}).
+@c FIXME: The URL below for pkg-config seems wrong.
+Get @uref{http://www.gtk.org/download/win32.php, pkg-config} and
+@command{libpng} and unpack them to the MinGW directory
+(@file{c:\mingw\mingw}).
+Here is an all-in-one package for the
+@uref{http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/binaries/win32/gtk+/2.24/gtk+-bundle_2.24.10-20120208_win32.zip, gtk+dependencies}
+. Do not overwrite any existing files!
+
+@item @strong{Glade}@
+@command{gnunet-gtk} and @command{gnunet-setup} were created using
+this interface builder
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item Get the Glade and libglade (-bin and -devel) packages
+(without GTK!) from
+@uref{http://gladewin32.sourceforge.net/, GladeWin32} and unpack them to
+the MinGW directory (@file{c:\mingw\mingw}).
+
+@item Get @command{libxml} from here and unpack it to the MinGW
+directory (@file{c:\mingw\mingw}).
+@end itemize
+
+@c FIXME: URLs
+@item @strong{zLib}@
+@command{libextractor} requires @command{zLib} to decompress some file
+formats. GNUnet uses it to (de)compress meta-data.
+Get zLib from here (Signature) and unpack it to the MinGW directory
+(@file{c:\mingw\mingw}).
+
+@item @strong{Bzip2}@
+@command{libextractor} also requires @command{Bzip2} to
+decompress some file formats.
+Get the Bzip2 (binary and developer package) from
+@uref{http://gnuwin32.sourceforge.net/packages/bzip2.htm, GnuWin32} and
+unpack it to the MinGW directory (@file{c:\mingw\mingw}).
+
+@item @strong{Libgcrypt}@
+@command{Libgcrypt} provides the cryptographic functions used by GNUnet.
+Get Libgcrypt from @uref{ftp://ftp.gnupg.org/gcrypt/libgcrypt/, here},
+compile and place it in the MinGW directory
+(@file{c:\mingw\mingw}). Currently libgcrypt @geq{} 1.4.2 is required to
+compile GNUnet.
+
+@item @strong{PlibC}@
+PlibC emulates Unix functions under Windows. Get PlibC from here and
+unpack it to the MinGW directory (c:\mingw\mingw)
+
+@item @strong{OGG Vorbis}@
+@command{OGG Vorbis} is used to extract meta-data from @file{.ogg} files.
+Get the packages
+@uref{http://www.gnunet.org/libextractor/download/win/libogg-1.1.4.zip, libogg}
+and
+@uref{http://www.gnunet.org/libextractor/download/win/libvorbis-1.2.3.zip, libvorbis}
+from the
+@uref{http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/libextractor/libextractor-w32-1.0.0.zip, libextractor win32 build}
+and unpack them to the MinGW directory (c:\mingw\mingw).
+
+@item @strong{Exiv2}@
+(lib)Exiv2 is used to extract meta-data from files with Exiv2 meta-data.
+Download
+@uref{http://www.gnunet.org/libextractor/download/win/exiv2-0.18.2.zip, Exiv2}
+and unpack it to the MSYS directory (c:\mingw).
+@end itemize
+
+@node Building libextractor and GNUnet
+@subsubsection Building libextractor and GNUnet
+
+Before you compile @command{libextractor} or @command{GNUnet},
+be sure to set @code{PKG_CONFIG_PATH}:
+
+@example
+export PKG_CONFIG_PATH=/mingw/lib/pkgconfig
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+@xref{GNUnet Installation Handbook}, for basic instructions on building
+@command{libextractor} and @command{GNUnet}.
+By default, all modules that are created in this way contain
+debug information and are quite large. To compile release versions
+(small and fast) set the variable @code{CFLAGS}:
+
+@example
+export CFLAGS='-O2 -march=pentium -fomit-frame-pointer' 
+./configure --prefix=$HOME --with-extractor=$HOME
+@end example
+
+@node Installer
+@subsubsection Installer
+
+The GNUnet installer is made with
+@uref{http://nsis.sourceforge.net/, NSIS}. The installer script is
+located in @file{contrib\win} in the GNUnet source tree.
+
+@node Source
+@subsubsection Source
+
+@c FIXME: URL
+The sources of all dependencies are available here. 
+
+@c @node Portable GNUnet
+@c @section Portable GNUnet
+
+@c Quick instructions on how to use the most recent GNUnet on most GNU/Linux
+@c distributions
+
+@c Currently this has only been tested on Ubuntu 12.04, 12.10, 13.04, Debian
+@c and CentOS 6, but it should work on almost any GNU/Linux distribution.
+@c More in-detail information can be found in the handbook.
+
+@c Note 2017-10: Currently this section assumes the old SVN repo of GNUnet
+@c which no longer exists.
+
+@c @menu
+@c * Prerequisites::
+@c * Download & set up gnunet-update::
+@c * Install GNUnet::
+@c @end menu
+
+@c @node Prerequisites
+@c @subsection Prerequisites
+
+@c Open a terminal and paste this line into it to install all required tools
+@c needed:
+
+@c @example
+@c sudo apt-get install python-gpgme subversion
+@c @end example
+
+@c @node Download & set up gnunet-update
+@c @subsection Download & set up gnunet-update
+
+@c The following command will download a working version of gnunet-update
+@c with the subversion tool and import the public key which is needed for
+@c authentication:
+
+@c @example
+@c svn checkout -r24905 https://gnunet.org/svn/gnunet-update ~/gnunet-update
+@c cd ~/gnunet-update
+@c gpg --keyserver "hkp://keys.gnupg.net" --recv-keys 7C613D78
+@c @end example
+
+@c @node Install GNUnet
+@c @subsection Install GNUnet
+
+@c Download and install GNUnet binaries which can be found here and set
+@c library paths:
+
+@c @example
+@c wget -P /tmp https://gnunet.org/install/packs/gnunet-0.9.4-`uname -m`.tgz
+@c ./bin/gnunet-update install /tmp/gnunet-0.9*.tgz ~
+@c echo "PATH DEFAULT=$@{PATH@}:$HOME/bin" >> ~/.pam_environment
+@c echo -e "$@{HOME@}/lib\n$@{HOME@}/lib/gnunet-deps" | sudo tee \
+@c  /etc/ld.so.conf.d/gnunet.conf > /dev/null
+@c sudo ldconfig
+@c @end example
+
+@c You may need to re-login once after executing these last commands
+
+@c That's it, GNUnet is installed in your home directory now. GNUnet can be
+@c configured and afterwards started by executing:
+
+@c @example
+@c gnunet-arm -s
+@c @end example
+
+@node The graphical configuration interface
+@section The graphical configuration interface
+
+If you also would like to use @command{gnunet-gtk} and
+@command{gnunet-setup} (highly recommended for beginners), do:
+
+@example
+wget -P /tmp \
+https://gnunet.org/install/packs/gnunet-0.9.4-gtk-0.9.4-`uname -m`.tgz
+sh ~/gnunet-update/bin/gnunet-update install /tmp/gnunet-*gtk*.tgz ~
+sudo ldconfig
+@end example
+
+Now you can run @command{gnunet-setup} for easy configuration of your
+GNUnet peer.
+
+@menu
+* Configuring your peer::
+* Configuring the Friend-to-Friend (F2F) mode::
+* Configuring the hostlist to bootstrap::
+* Configuration of the HOSTLIST proxy settings::
+* Configuring your peer to provide a hostlist ::
+* Configuring the datastore::
+* Configuring the MySQL database::
+* Reasons for using MySQL::
+* Reasons for not using MySQL::
+* Setup Instructions::
+* Testing::
+* Performance Tuning::
+* Setup for running Testcases::
+* Configuring the Postgres database::
+* Reasons to use Postgres::
+* Reasons not to use Postgres::
+* Manual setup instructions::
+* Testing the setup manually::
+* Configuring the datacache::
+* Configuring the file-sharing service::
+* Configuring logging::
+* Configuring the transport service and plugins::
+* Configuring the wlan transport plugin::
+* Configuring HTTP(S) reverse proxy functionality using Apache or nginx::
+* Blacklisting peers::
+* Configuration of the HTTP and HTTPS transport plugins::
+* Configuring the GNU Name System::
+* Configuring the GNUnet VPN::
+* Bandwidth Configuration::
+* Configuring NAT::
+* Peer configuration for distributions::
+@end menu
+
+@node Configuring your peer
+@subsection Configuring your peer
+
+This chapter will describe the various configuration options in GNUnet.
+
+The easiest way to configure your peer is to use the
+@command{gnunet-setup} tool.
+@command{gnunet-setup} is part of the @command{gnunet-gtk}
+application. You might have to install it separately.
+
+Many of the specific sections from this chapter actually are linked from
+within @command{gnunet-setup} to help you while using the setup tool.
+
+While you can also configure your peer by editing the configuration
+file by hand, this is not recommended for anyone except for developers
+as it requires a more in-depth understanding of the configuration files
+and internal dependencies of GNUnet.
+
+@node Configuring the Friend-to-Friend (F2F) mode
+@subsection Configuring the Friend-to-Friend (F2F) mode
+
+GNUnet knows three basic modes of operation:
+@itemize @bullet
+@item In standard "peer-to-peer" mode,
+your peer will connect to any peer.
+@item In the pure "friend-to-friend"
+mode, your peer will ONLY connect to peers from a list of friends
+specified in the configuration.
+@item Finally, in mixed mode,
+GNUnet will only connect to arbitrary peers if it
+has at least a specified number of connections to friends.
+@end itemize
+
+When configuring any of the F2F ("friend-to-friend") modes,
+you first need to create a file with the peer identities
+of your friends. Ask your friends to run
+
+@example
+$ gnunet-peerinfo -sq
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The resulting output of this command needs to be added to your
+@file{friends} file, which is simply a plain text file with one line
+per friend with the output from the above command.
+
+You then specify the location of your @file{friends} file in the
+@code{FRIENDS} option of the "topology" section.
+
+Once you have created the @file{friends} file, you can tell GNUnet to only
+connect to your friends by setting the @code{FRIENDS-ONLY} option
+(again in the "topology" section) to YES.
+
+If you want to run in mixed-mode, set "FRIENDS-ONLY" to NO and configure a
+minimum number of friends to have (before connecting to arbitrary peers)
+under the "MINIMUM-FRIENDS" option.
+
+If you want to operate in normal P2P-only mode, simply set
+@code{MINIMUM-FRIENDS} to zero and @code{FRIENDS_ONLY} to NO.
+This is the default.
+
+@node Configuring the hostlist to bootstrap
+@subsection Configuring the hostlist to bootstrap
+
+After installing the software you need to get connected to the GNUnet
+network. The configuration file included in your download is already
+configured to connect you to the GNUnet network.
+In this section the relevant configuration settings are explained.
+
+To get an initial connection to the GNUnet network and to get to know
+peers already connected to the network you can use the so called
+"bootstrap servers".
+These servers can give you a list of peers connected to the network.
+To use these bootstrap servers you have to configure the hostlist daemon
+to activate bootstrapping.
+
+To activate bootstrapping, edit the @code{[hostlist]}-section in your
+configuration file. You have to set the argument @command{-b} in the
+options line:
+
+@example
+[hostlist]
+OPTIONS = -b
+@end example
+
+Additionally you have to specify which server you want to use.
+The default bootstrapping server is
+"@uref{http://v10.gnunet.org/hostlist, http://v10.gnunet.org/hostlist}".
+[^] To set the server you have to edit the line "SERVERS" in the hostlist
+section. To use the default server you should set the lines to
+
+@example
+SERVERS = http://v10.gnunet.org/hostlist [^]
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+To use bootstrapping your configuration file should include these lines:
+
+@example
+[hostlist]
+OPTIONS = -b
+SERVERS = http://v10.gnunet.org/hostlist [^]
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Besides using bootstrap servers you can configure your GNUnet peer to
+recieve hostlist advertisements.
+Peers offering hostlists to other peers can send advertisement messages
+to peers that connect to them. If you configure your peer to receive these
+messages, your peer can download these lists and connect to the peers
+included. These lists are persistent, which means that they are saved to
+your hard disk regularly and are loaded during startup.
+
+To activate hostlist learning you have to add the @command{-e}
+switch to the @code{OPTIONS} line in the hostlist section:
+
+@example
+[hostlist]
+OPTIONS = -b -e
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Furthermore you can specify in which file the lists are saved.
+To save the lists in the file @file{hostlists.file} just add the line:
+
+@example
+HOSTLISTFILE = hostlists.file
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Best practice is to activate both bootstrapping and hostlist learning.
+So your configuration file should include these lines:
+
+@example
+[hostlist]
+OPTIONS = -b -e
+HTTPPORT = 8080
+SERVERS = http://v10.gnunet.org/hostlist [^]
+HOSTLISTFILE = $SERVICEHOME/hostlists.file
+@end example
+
+@node Configuration of the HOSTLIST proxy settings
+@subsection Configuration of the HOSTLIST proxy settings
+
+The hostlist client can be configured to use a proxy to connect to the
+hostlist server.
+This functionality can be configured in the configuration file directly
+or using the @command{gnunet-setup} tool.
+
+The hostlist client supports the following proxy types at the moment:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item HTTP and HTTP 1.0 only proxy
+@item SOCKS 4/4a/5/5 with hostname
+@end itemize
+
+In addition authentication at the proxy with username and password can be
+configured. 
+
+To configure proxy support for the hostlist client in the
+@command{gnunet-setup} tool, select the "hostlist" tab and select
+the appropriate proxy type.
+The hostname or IP address (including port if required) has to be entered
+in the "Proxy hostname" textbox. If required, enter username and password
+in the "Proxy username" and "Proxy password" boxes.
+Be aware that this information will be stored in the configuration in
+plain text (TODO: Add explanation and generalize the part in Chapter 3.6
+about the encrypted home).
+
+To provide these options directly in the configuration, you can
+enter the following settings in the @code{[hostlist]} section of
+the configuration:
+
+@example
+# Type of proxy server,
+# Valid values: HTTP, HTTP_1_0, SOCKS4, SOCKS5, SOCKS4A, SOCKS5_HOSTNAME
+# Default: HTTP
+# PROXY_TYPE = HTTP
+
+# Hostname or IP of proxy server
+# PROXY =
+# User name for proxy server
+# PROXY_USERNAME =
+# User password for proxy server
+# PROXY_PASSWORD =
+@end example
+
+@node Configuring your peer to provide a hostlist
+@subsection Configuring your peer to provide a hostlist
+
+If you operate a peer permanently connected to GNUnet you can configure
+your peer to act as a hostlist server, providing other peers the list of
+peers known to him.
+
+Your server can act as a bootstrap server and peers needing to obtain a
+list of peers can contact it to download this list.
+To download this hostlist the peer uses HTTP.
+For this reason you have to build your peer with libgnurl (or libcurl)
+and microhttpd support.
+How you build your peer with these options can be found here:
+@xref{Generic installation instructions}.
+
+To configure your peer to act as a bootstrap server you have to add the
+@command{-p} option to @code{OPTIONS} in the @code{[hostlist]} section
+of your configuration file.
+Besides that you have to specify a port number for the http server.
+In conclusion you have to add the following lines:
+
+@example
+[hostlist]
+HTTPPORT = 12980
+OPTIONS = -p
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+If your peer acts as a bootstrap server other peers should know about
+that. You can advertise the hostlist your are providing to other peers.
+Peers connecting to your peer will get a message containing an
+advertisement for your hostlist and the URL where it can be downloaded.
+If this peer is in learning mode, it will test the hostlist and, in the
+case it can obtain the list successfully, it will save it for
+bootstrapping.
+
+To activate hostlist advertisement on your peer, you have to set the
+following lines in your configuration file:
+
+@example
+[hostlist]
+EXTERNAL_DNS_NAME = example.org
+HTTPPORT = 12981
+OPTIONS = -p -a
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+With this configuration your peer will a act as a bootstrap server and
+advertise this hostlist to other peers connecting to it.
+The URL used to download the list will be
+@code{@uref{http://example.org:12981/, http://example.org:12981/}}.
+
+Please notice:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item The hostlist is @b{not} human readable, so you should not try to
+download it using your webbrowser. Just point your GNUnet peer to the
+address!
+@item Advertising without providing a hostlist does not make sense and
+will not work.
+@end itemize
+
+@node Configuring the datastore
+@subsection Configuring the datastore
+
+The datastore is what GNUnet uses for long-term storage of file-sharing
+data. Note that long-term does not mean 'forever' since content does have
+an expiration date, and of course storage space is finite (and hence
+sometimes content may have to be discarded).
+
+Use the @code{QUOTA} option to specify how many bytes of storage space
+you are willing to dedicate to GNUnet.
+
+In addition to specifying the maximum space GNUnet is allowed to use for
+the datastore, you need to specify which database GNUnet should use to do
+so. Currently, you have the choice between sqLite, MySQL and Postgres.
+
+@node Configuring the MySQL database
+@subsection Configuring the MySQL database
+
+This section describes how to setup the MySQL database for GNUnet.
+
+Note that the mysql plugin does NOT work with mysql before 4.1 since we
+need prepared statements.
+We are generally testing the code against MySQL 5.1 at this point.
+
+@node Reasons for using MySQL
+@subsection Reasons for using MySQL
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item On up-to-date hardware wher
+mysql can be used comfortably, this module
+will have better performance than the other database choices (according
+to our tests).
+
+@item Its often possible to recover the mysql database from internal
+inconsistencies. Some of the other databases do not support repair.
+@end itemize
+
+@node Reasons for not using MySQL
+@subsection Reasons for not using MySQL
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item Memory usage (likely not an issue if you have more than 1 GB)
+@item Complex manual setup
+@end itemize
+
+@node Setup Instructions
+@subsection Setup Instructions
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item In @file{gnunet.conf} set in section @code{DATASTORE} the value for
+@code{DATABASE} to @code{mysql}.
+
+@item Access mysql as root:
+
+@example
+$ mysql -u root -p 
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+and issue the following commands, replacing $USER with the username
+that will be running @command{gnunet-arm} (so typically "gnunet"):
+
+@example
+CREATE DATABASE gnunet;
+GRANT select,insert,update,delete,create,alter,drop,create \
+temporary tables ON gnunet.* TO $USER@@localhost;
+SET PASSWORD FOR $USER@@localhost=PASSWORD('$the_password_you_like');
+FLUSH PRIVILEGES;
+@end example
+
+@item
+In the $HOME directory of $USER, create a @file{.my.cnf} file with the
+following lines
+
+@example
+[client]
+user=$USER
+password=$the_password_you_like
+@end example
+
+@end itemize
+
+Thats it. Note that @file{.my.cnf} file is a slight security risk unless
+its on a safe partition. The @file{$HOME/.my.cnf} can of course be
+a symbolic link.
+Luckily $USER has only priviledges to mess up GNUnet's tables,
+which should be pretty harmless.
+
+@node Testing
+@subsection Testing
+
+You should briefly try if the database connection works. First, login
+as $USER. Then use:
+
+@example
+$ mysql -u $USER
+mysql> use gnunet;
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+If you get the message
+
+@example
+Database changed
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+it probably works.
+
+If you get
+
+@example
+ERROR 2002: Can't connect to local MySQL server
+through socket '/tmp/mysql.sock' (2)
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+it may be resolvable by
+
+@example
+ln -s /var/run/mysqld/mysqld.sock /tmp/mysql.sock
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+so there may be some additional trouble depending on your mysql setup.
+
+@node Performance Tuning
+@subsection Performance Tuning
+
+For GNUnet, you probably want to set the option
+
+@example
+innodb_flush_log_at_trx_commit = 0
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+for a rather dramatic boost in MySQL performance. However, this reduces
+the "safety" of your database as with this options you may loose
+transactions during a power outage.
+While this is totally harmless for GNUnet, the option applies to all
+applications using MySQL. So you should set it if (and only if) GNUnet is
+the only application on your system using MySQL.
+
+@node Setup for running Testcases
+@subsection Setup for running Testcases
+
+If you want to run the testcases, you must create a second database
+"gnunetcheck" with the same username and password. This database will
+then be used for testing (@command{make check}).
+
+@node Configuring the Postgres database
+@subsection Configuring the Postgres database
+
+This text describes how to setup the Postgres database for GNUnet.
+
+This Postgres plugin was developed for Postgres 8.3 but might work for
+earlier versions as well.
+
+@node Reasons to use Postgres
+@subsection Reasons to use Postgres
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item Easier to setup than MySQL
+@item Real database
+@end itemize
+
+@node Reasons not to use Postgres
+@subsection Reasons not to use Postgres
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item Quite slow
+@item Still some manual setup required
+@end itemize
+
+@node Manual setup instructions
+@subsection Manual setup instructions
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item In @file{gnunet.conf} set in section @code{DATASTORE} the value for
+@code{DATABASE} to @code{postgres}.
+@item Access Postgres to create a user:
+
+@table @asis
+@item with Postgres 8.x, use:
+
+@example
+# su - postgres
+$ createuser
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+and enter the name of the user running GNUnet for the role interactively.
+Then, when prompted, do not set it to superuser, allow the creation of
+databases, and do not allow the creation of new roles.
+
+@item with Postgres 9.x, use:
+
+@example
+# su - postgres
+$ createuser -d $GNUNET_USER
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+where $GNUNET_USER is the name of the user running GNUnet.
+
+@end table
+
+
+@item
+As that user (so typically as user "gnunet"), create a database (or two):
+
+@example
+$ createdb gnunet
+# this way you can run "make check"
+$ createdb gnunetcheck
+@end example
+
+@end itemize
+
+Now you should be able to start @code{gnunet-arm}.
+
+@node Testing the setup manually
+@subsection Testing the setup manually
+
+You may want to try if the database connection works. First, again login
+as the user who will run @command{gnunet-arm}. Then use:
+
+@example
+$ psql gnunet # or gnunetcheck
+gnunet=> \dt
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+If, after you have started @command{gnunet-arm} at least once, you get
+a @code{gn090} table here, it probably works.
+
+@node Configuring the datacache
+@subsection Configuring the datacache
+@c %**end of header
+
+The datacache is what GNUnet uses for storing temporary data. This data is
+expected to be wiped completely each time GNUnet is restarted (or the
+system is rebooted).
+
+You need to specify how many bytes GNUnet is allowed to use for the
+datacache using the @code{QUOTA} option in the section @code{[dhtcache]}.
+Furthermore, you need to specify which database backend should be used to
+store the data. Currently, you have the choice between
+sqLite, MySQL and Postgres.
+
+@node Configuring the file-sharing service
+@subsection Configuring the file-sharing service
+
+In order to use GNUnet for file-sharing, you first need to make sure
+that the file-sharing service is loaded.
+This is done by setting the @code{AUTOSTART} option in
+section @code{[fs]} to "YES". Alternatively, you can run
+
+@example
+$ gnunet-arm -i fs
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+to start the file-sharing service by hand.
+
+Except for configuring the database and the datacache the only important
+option for file-sharing is content migration.
+
+Content migration allows your peer to cache content from other peers as
+well as send out content stored on your system without explicit requests.
+This content replication has positive and negative impacts on both system
+performance and privacy.
+
+FIXME: discuss the trade-offs. Here is some older text about it...
+
+Setting this option to YES allows gnunetd to migrate data to the local
+machine. Setting this option to YES is highly recommended for efficiency.
+Its also the default. If you set this value to YES, GNUnet will store
+content on your machine that you cannot decrypt.
+While this may protect you from liability if the judge is sane, it may
+not (IANAL). If you put illegal content on your machine yourself, setting
+this option to YES will probably increase your chances to get away with it
+since you can plausibly deny that you inserted the content.
+Note that in either case, your anonymity would have to be broken first
+(which may be possible depending on the size of the GNUnet network and the
+strength of the adversary).
+
+@node Configuring logging
+@subsection Configuring logging
+
+Logging in GNUnet 0.9.0 is controlled via the "-L" and "-l" options.
+Using @code{-L}, a log level can be specified. With log level
+@code{ERROR} only serious errors are logged.
+The default log level is @code{WARNING} which causes anything of
+concern to be logged.
+Log level @code{INFO} can be used to log anything that might be
+interesting information whereas
+@code{DEBUG} can be used by developers to log debugging messages
+(but you need to run @code{./configure} with
+@code{--enable-logging=verbose} to get them compiled).
+The @code{-l} option is used to specify the log file.
+
+Since most GNUnet services are managed by @code{gnunet-arm}, using the
+@code{-l} or @code{-L} options directly is not possible.
+Instead, they can be specified using the @code{OPTIONS} configuration
+value in the respective section for the respective service.
+In order to enable logging globally without editing the @code{OPTIONS}
+values for each service, @command{gnunet-arm} supports a
+@code{GLOBAL_POSTFIX} option.
+The value specified here is given as an extra option to all services for
+which the configuration does contain a service-specific @code{OPTIONS}
+field.
+
+@code{GLOBAL_POSTFIX} can contain the special sequence "@{@}" which
+is replaced by the name of the service that is being started.
+Furthermore, @code{GLOBAL_POSTFIX} is special in that sequences
+starting with "$" anywhere in the string are expanded (according
+to options in @code{PATHS}); this expansion otherwise is
+only happening for filenames and then the "$" must be the
+first character in the option. Both of these restrictions do
+not apply to @code{GLOBAL_POSTFIX}.
+Note that specifying @code{%} anywhere in the @code{GLOBAL_POSTFIX}
+disables both of these features.
+
+In summary, in order to get all services to log at level
+@code{INFO} to log-files called @code{SERVICENAME-logs}, the
+following global prefix should be used:
+
+@example
+GLOBAL_POSTFIX = -l $SERVICEHOME/@{@}-logs -L INFO
+@end example
+
+@node Configuring the transport service and plugins
+@subsection Configuring the transport service and plugins
+
+The transport service in GNUnet is responsible to maintain basic
+connectivity to other peers.
+Besides initiating and keeping connections alive it is also responsible
+for address validation.
+
+The GNUnet transport supports more than one transport protocol.
+These protocols are configured together with the transport service.
+
+The configuration section for the transport service itself is quite
+similar to all the other services
+
+@example
+AUTOSTART = YES
+@@UNIXONLY@@ PORT = 2091
+HOSTNAME = localhost
+HOME = $SERVICEHOME
+CONFIG = $DEFAULTCONFIG
+BINARY = gnunet-service-transport
+#PREFIX = valgrind
+NEIGHBOUR_LIMIT = 50
+ACCEPT_FROM = 127.0.0.1;
+ACCEPT_FROM6 = ::1;
+PLUGINS = tcp udp
+UNIXPATH = /tmp/gnunet-service-transport.sock
+@end example
+
+Different are the settings for the plugins to load @code{PLUGINS}.
+The first setting specifies which transport plugins to load.
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item transport-unix
+A plugin for local only communication with UNIX domain sockets. Used for
+testing and available on unix systems only. Just set the port
+
+@example
+[transport-unix]
+PORT = 22086
+TESTING_IGNORE_KEYS = ACCEPT_FROM;
+@end example
+
+@item transport-tcp
+A plugin for communication with TCP. Set port to 0 for client mode with
+outbound only connections
+
+@example
+[transport-tcp]
+# Use 0 to ONLY advertise as a peer behind NAT (no port binding)
+PORT = 2086
+ADVERTISED_PORT = 2086
+TESTING_IGNORE_KEYS = ACCEPT_FROM;
+# Maximum number of open TCP connections allowed
+MAX_CONNECTIONS = 128
+@end example
+
+@item transport-udp
+A plugin for communication with UDP. Supports peer discovery using
+broadcasts.
+
+@example
+[transport-udp]
+PORT = 2086
+BROADCAST = YES
+BROADCAST_INTERVAL = 30 s
+MAX_BPS = 1000000
+TESTING_IGNORE_KEYS = ACCEPT_FROM;
+@end example
+
+@item transport-http
+HTTP and HTTPS support is split in two part: a client plugin initiating
+outbound connections and a server part accepting connections from the
+client. The client plugin just takes the maximum number of connections as
+an argument.
+
+@example
+[transport-http_client]
+MAX_CONNECTIONS = 128
+TESTING_IGNORE_KEYS = ACCEPT_FROM;
+@end example
+
+@example
+[transport-https_client]
+MAX_CONNECTIONS = 128
+TESTING_IGNORE_KEYS = ACCEPT_FROM;
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The server has a port configured and the maximum nunber of connections.
+The HTTPS part has two files with the certificate key and the certificate
+file.
+
+The server plugin supports reverse proxies, so a external hostname can be
+set using the @code{EXTERNAL_HOSTNAME} setting.
+The webserver under this address should forward the request to the peer
+and the configure port.
+
+@example
+[transport-http_server]
+EXTERNAL_HOSTNAME = fulcrum.net.in.tum.de/gnunet
+PORT = 1080
+MAX_CONNECTIONS = 128
+TESTING_IGNORE_KEYS = ACCEPT_FROM;
+@end example
+
+@example
+[transport-https_server]
+PORT = 4433
+CRYPTO_INIT = NORMAL
+KEY_FILE = https.key
+CERT_FILE = https.cert
+MAX_CONNECTIONS = 128
+TESTING_IGNORE_KEYS = ACCEPT_FROM;
+@end example
+
+@item transport-wlan
+
+The next section describes how to setup the WLAN plugin,
+so here only the settings. Just specify the interface to use:
+
+@example
+[transport-wlan]
+# Name of the interface in monitor mode (typically monX)
+INTERFACE = mon0
+# Real hardware, no testing
+TESTMODE = 0
+TESTING_IGNORE_KEYS = ACCEPT_FROM;
+@end example
+@end itemize
+
+@node Configuring the wlan transport plugin
+@subsection Configuring the wlan transport plugin
+
+The wlan transport plugin enables GNUnet to send and to receive data on a
+wlan interface.
+It has not to be connected to a wlan network as long as sender and
+receiver are on the same channel. This enables you to get connection to
+GNUnet where no internet access is possible, for example during
+catastrophes or when censorship cuts you off from the internet.
+
+
+@menu
+* Requirements for the WLAN plugin::
+* Configuration::
+* Before starting GNUnet::
+* Limitations and known bugs::
+@end menu
+
+
+@node Requirements for the WLAN plugin
+@subsubsection Requirements for the WLAN plugin
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item wlan network card with monitor support and packet injection
+(see @uref{http://www.aircrack-ng.org/, aircrack-ng.org})
+
+@item Linux kernel with mac80211 stack, introduced in 2.6.22, tested with
+2.6.35 and 2.6.38
+
+@item Wlantools to create the a monitor interface, tested with airmon-ng
+of the aircrack-ng package
+@end itemize
+
+@node Configuration
+@subsubsection Configuration
+
+There are the following options for the wlan plugin (they should be like
+this in your default config file, you only need to adjust them if the
+values are incorrect for your system)
+
+@example
+# section for the wlan transport plugin
+[transport-wlan]
+# interface to use, more information in the
+# "Before starting GNUnet" section of the handbook.
+INTERFACE = mon0
+# testmode for developers:
+# 0 use wlan interface,
+#1 or 2 use loopback driver for tests 1 = server, 2 = client
+TESTMODE = 0
+@end example
+
+@node Before starting GNUnet
+@subsubsection Before starting GNUnet
+
+Before starting GNUnet, you have to make sure that your wlan interface is
+in monitor mode.
+One way to put the wlan interface into monitor mode (if your interface
+name is wlan0) is by executing:
+
+@example
+sudo airmon-ng start wlan0
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Here is an example what the result should look like:
+
+@example
+Interface Chipset Driver
+wlan0 Intel 4965 a/b/g/n iwl4965 - [phy0]
+(monitor mode enabled on mon0)
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The monitor interface is mon0 is the one that you have to put into the
+configuration file.
+
+@node Limitations and known bugs
+@subsubsection Limitations and known bugs
+
+Wlan speed is at the maximum of 1 Mbit/s because support for choosing the
+wlan speed with packet injection was removed in newer kernels.
+Please pester the kernel developers about fixing this.
+
+The interface channel depends on the wlan network that the card is
+connected to. If no connection has been made since the start of the
+computer, it is usually the first channel of the card.
+Peers will only find each other and communicate if they are on the same
+channel. Channels must be set manually, i.e. using:
+
+@example
+iwconfig wlan0 channel 1
+@end example
+
+@node Configuring HTTP(S) reverse proxy functionality using Apache or nginx
+@subsection Configuring HTTP(S) reverse proxy functionality using Apache or nginx
+
+The HTTP plugin supports data transfer using reverse proxies. A reverse
+proxy forwards the HTTP request he receives with a certain URL to another
+webserver, here a GNUnet peer.
+
+So if you have a running Apache or nginx webserver you can configure it to
+be a GNUnet reverse proxy. Especially if you have a well-known webiste
+this improves censorship resistance since it looks as normal surfing
+behaviour.
+
+To do so, you have to do two things:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item Configure your webserver to forward the GNUnet HTTP traffic
+@item Configure your GNUnet peer to announce the respective address
+@end itemize
+
+As an example we want to use GNUnet peer running:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item HTTP server plugin on @code{gnunet.foo.org:1080}
+
+@item HTTPS server plugin on @code{gnunet.foo.org:4433}
+
+@item A apache or nginx webserver on
+@uref{http://www.foo.org/, http://www.foo.org:80/}
+
+@item A apache or nginx webserver on https://www.foo.org:443/
+@end itemize
+
+And we want the webserver to accept GNUnet traffic under
+@code{http://www.foo.org/bar/}. The required steps are described here:
+
+@menu
+* Reverse Proxy - Configure your Apache2 HTTP webserver::
+* Reverse Proxy - Configure your Apache2 HTTPS webserver::
+* Reverse Proxy - Configure your nginx HTTPS webserver::
+* Reverse Proxy - Configure your nginx HTTP webserver::
+* Reverse Proxy - Configure your GNUnet peer::
+@end menu
+
+@node Reverse Proxy - Configure your Apache2 HTTP webserver
+@subsubsection Reverse Proxy - Configure your Apache2 HTTP webserver
+
+First of all you need mod_proxy installed.
+
+Edit your webserver configuration. Edit
+@code{/etc/apache2/apache2.conf} or the site-specific configuration file.
+
+In the respective @code{server config},@code{virtual host} or
+@code{directory} section add the following lines:
+
+@example
+ProxyTimeout 300
+ProxyRequests Off
+<Location /bar/ >
+ProxyPass http://gnunet.foo.org:1080/
+ProxyPassReverse http://gnunet.foo.org:1080/
+</Location>
+@end example
+
+@node Reverse Proxy - Configure your Apache2 HTTPS webserver
+@subsubsection Reverse Proxy - Configure your Apache2 HTTPS webserver
+
+We assume that you already have an HTTPS server running, if not please
+check how to configure a HTTPS host. An easy to use example is the
+@file{apache2/sites-available/default-ssl} example configuration file.
+
+In the respective HTTPS @code{server config},@code{virtual host} or
+@code{directory} section add the following lines:
+
+@example
+SSLProxyEngine On
+ProxyTimeout 300
+ProxyRequests Off
+<Location /bar/ >
+ProxyPass https://gnunet.foo.org:4433/
+ProxyPassReverse https://gnunet.foo.org:4433/
+</Location>
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+More information about the apache mod_proxy configuration can be found
+here: @uref{http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/mod/mod_proxy.html#proxypass}
+.
+
+@node Reverse Proxy - Configure your nginx HTTPS webserver
+@subsubsection Reverse Proxy - Configure your nginx HTTPS webserver
+
+Since nginx does not support chunked encoding, you first of all have to
+install @code{chunkin}: @uref{http://wiki.nginx.org/HttpChunkinModule}.
+
+To enable chunkin add:
+
+@example
+chunkin on;
+error_page 411 = @@my_411_error;
+location @@my_411_error @{
+chunkin_resume;
+@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Edit your webserver configuration. Edit @file{/etc/nginx/nginx.conf} or
+the site-specific configuration file.
+
+In the @code{server} section add:
+
+@example
+location /bar/
+@{
+proxy_pass http://gnunet.foo.org:1080/;
+proxy_buffering off;
+proxy_connect_timeout 5; # more than http_server
+proxy_read_timeout 350; # 60 default, 300s is GNUnet's idle timeout
+proxy_http_version 1.1; # 1.0 default
+proxy_next_upstream error timeout invalid_header http_500 http_503 http_502 http_504;
+@}
+@end example
+
+@node Reverse Proxy - Configure your nginx HTTP webserver
+@subsubsection Reverse Proxy - Configure your nginx HTTP webserver
+
+Edit your webserver configuration. Edit @file{/etc/nginx/nginx.conf} or
+the site-specific configuration file.
+
+In the @code{server} section add:
+
+@example
+ssl_session_timeout 6m;
+location /bar/
+@{
+proxy_pass https://gnunet.foo.org:4433/;
+proxy_buffering off;
+proxy_connect_timeout 5; # more than http_server
+proxy_read_timeout 350; # 60 default, 300s is GNUnet's idle timeout
+proxy_http_version 1.1; # 1.0 default
+proxy_next_upstream error timeout invalid_header http_500 http_503 http_502 http_504;
+@}
+@end example
+
+@node Reverse Proxy - Configure your GNUnet peer
+@subsubsection Reverse Proxy - Configure your GNUnet peer
+
+To have your GNUnet peer announce the address, you have to specify the
+@code{EXTERNAL_HOSTNAME} option in the @code{[transport-http_server]}
+section:
+
+@example
+[transport-http_server]
+EXTERNAL_HOSTNAME = http://www.foo.org/bar/
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+and/or @code{[transport-https_server]} section:
+
+@example
+[transport-https_server]
+EXTERNAL_HOSTNAME = https://www.foo.org/bar/
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Now restart your webserver and your peer...
+
+@node Blacklisting peers
+@subsection Blacklisting peers
+
+Transport service supports to deny connecting to a specific peer of to a
+specific peer with a specific transport plugin using te blacklisting
+component of transport service. With@ blacklisting it is possible to deny
+connections to specific peers of@ to use a specific plugin to a specific
+peer. Peers can be blacklisted using@ the configuration or a blacklist
+client can be asked.
+
+To blacklist peers using the configuration you have to add a section to
+your configuration containing the peer id of the peer to blacklist and
+the plugin@ if required.
+
+Examples:
+
+To blacklist connections to P565... on peer AG2P... using tcp add:
+
+@c FIXME: This is too long and produces errors in the pdf.
+@example
+[transport-blacklist AG2PHES1BARB9IJCPAMJTFPVJ5V3A72S3F2A8SBUB8DAQ2V0O3V8G6G2JU56FHGFOHMQVKBSQFV98TCGTC3RJ1NINP82G0RC00N1520]
+P565723JO1C2HSN6J29TAQ22MN6CI8HTMUU55T0FUQG4CMDGGEQ8UCNBKUMB94GC8R9G4FB2SF9LDOBAJ6AMINBP4JHHDD6L7VD801G = tcp
+@end example
+
+To blacklist connections to P565... on peer AG2P... using all plugins add:
+
+@example
+[transport-blacklist-AG2PHES1BARB9IJCPAMJTFPVJ5V3A72S3F2A8SBUB8DAQ2V0O3V8G6G2JU56FHGFOHMQVKBSQFV98TCGTC3RJ1NINP82G0RC00N1520]
+P565723JO1C2HSN6J29TAQ22MN6CI8HTMUU55T0FUQG4CMDGGEQ8UCNBKUMB94GC8R9G4FB2SF9LDOBAJ6AMINBP4JHHDD6L7VD801G =
+@end example
+
+You can also add a blacklist client usign the blacklist API. On a
+blacklist check, blacklisting first checks internally if the peer is
+blacklisted and if not, it asks the blacklisting clients. Clients are
+asked if it is OK to connect to a peer ID, the plugin is omitted.
+
+On blacklist check for (peer, plugin)
+@itemize @bullet
+@item Do we have a local blacklist entry for this peer and this plugin?@
+@item YES: disallow connection@
+@item Do we have a local blacklist entry for this peer and all plugins?@
+@item YES: disallow connection@
+@item Does one of the clients disallow?@
+@item YES: disallow connection
+@end itemize
+
+@node Configuration of the HTTP and HTTPS transport plugins
+@subsection Configuration of the HTTP and HTTPS transport plugins
+
+The client parts of the http and https transport plugins can be configured
+to use a proxy to connect to the hostlist server. This functionality can
+be configured in the configuration file directly or using the
+gnunet-setup tool.
+
+Both the HTTP and HTTPS clients support the following proxy types at
+the moment:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item HTTP 1.1 proxy
+@item SOCKS 4/4a/5/5 with hostname
+@end itemize
+
+In addition authentication at the proxy with username and password can be
+configured.
+
+To configure proxy support for the clients in the gnunet-setup tool,
+select the "transport" tab and activate the respective plugin. Now you
+can select the appropriate proxy type. The hostname or IP address
+(including port if required) has to be entered in the "Proxy hostname"
+textbox. If required, enter username and password in the "Proxy username"
+and "Proxy password" boxes. Be aware that these information will be stored
+in the configuration in plain text.
+
+To configure these options directly in the configuration, you can
+configure the following settings in the @code{[transport-http_client]}
+and @code{[transport-https_client]} section of the configuration:
+
+@example
+# Type of proxy server,
+# Valid values: HTTP, SOCKS4, SOCKS5, SOCKS4A, SOCKS5_HOSTNAME
+# Default: HTTP
+# PROXY_TYPE = HTTP
+
+# Hostname or IP of proxy server
+# PROXY =
+# User name for proxy server
+# PROXY_USERNAME =
+# User password for proxy server
+# PROXY_PASSWORD =
+@end example
+
+@node Configuring the GNU Name System
+@subsection Configuring the GNU Name System
+
+@menu
+* Configuring system-wide DNS interception::
+* Configuring the GNS nsswitch plugin::
+* Configuring GNS on W32::
+* GNS Proxy Setup::
+* Setup of the GNS CA::
+* Testing the GNS setup::
+* Automatic Shortening in the GNU Name System::
+@end menu
+
+
+@node Configuring system-wide DNS interception
+@subsubsection Configuring system-wide DNS interception
+
+Before you install GNUnet, make sure you have a user and group 'gnunet'
+as well as an empty group 'gnunetdns'.
+
+When using GNUnet with system-wide DNS interception, it is absolutely
+necessary for all GNUnet service processes to be started by
+@code{gnunet-service-arm} as user and group 'gnunet'. You also need to be
+sure to run @code{make install} as root (or use the @code{sudo} option to
+configure) to grant GNUnet sufficient privileges.
+
+With this setup, all that is required for enabling system-wide DNS
+interception is for some GNUnet component (VPN or GNS) to request it.
+The @code{gnunet-service-dns} will then start helper programs that will
+make the necessary changes to your firewall (@code{iptables}) rules.
+
+Note that this will NOT work if your system sends out DNS traffic to a
+link-local IPv6 address, as in this case GNUnet can intercept the traffic,
+but not inject the responses from the link-local IPv6 address. Hence you
+cannot use system-wide DNS interception in conjunction with link-local
+IPv6-based DNS servers. If such a DNS server is used, it will bypass
+GNUnet's DNS traffic interception.
+
+Using the GNU Name System (GNS) requires two different configuration
+steps.
+First of all, GNS needs to be integrated with the operating system. Most
+of this section is about the operating system level integration.
+
+Additionally, each individual user who wants to use the system must also
+initialize their GNS zones. This can be done by running (after starting
+GNUnet)
+
+@example
+$ gnunet-gns-import.sh
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+after the local GNUnet peer has been started. Note that the namestore (in
+particular the namestore database backend) should not be reconfigured
+afterwards (as records are not automatically migrated between backends).
+
+The remainder of this chapter will detail the various methods for
+configuring the use of GNS with your operating system.
+
+At this point in time you have different options depending on your OS:
+
+@table @asis
+
+@item Use the gnunet-gns-proxy This approach works for all operating
+systems and is likely the easiest. However, it enables GNS only for
+browsers, not for other applications that might be using DNS, such as SSH.
+Still, using the proxy is required for using HTTP with GNS and is thus
+recommended for all users. To do this, you simply have to run the
+@code{gnunet-gns-proxy-setup-ca} script as the user who will run the
+browser (this will create a GNS certificate authority (CA) on your system
+and import its key into your browser), then start @code{gnunet-gns-proxy}
+and inform your browser to use the Socks5 proxy which
+@code{gnunet-gns-proxy} makes available by default on port 7777.
+@item Use a nsswitch plugin (recommended on GNU systems)
+This approach has the advantage of offering fully personalized resolution
+even on multi-user systems. A potential disadvantage is that some
+applications might be able to bypass GNS.
+@item Use a W32 resolver plugin (recommended on W32)
+This is currently the only option on W32 systems.
+@item Use system-wide DNS packet interception
+This approach is recommended for the GNUnet VPN. It can be used to handle
+GNS at the same time; however, if you only use this method, you will only
+get one root zone per machine (not so great for multi-user systems).
+@end table
+
+You can combine system-wide DNS packet interception with the nsswitch
+plugin.
+The setup of the system-wide DNS interception is described here. All of
+the other GNS-specific configuration steps are described in the following
+sections.
+
+@node Configuring the GNS nsswitch plugin
+@subsubsection Configuring the GNS nsswitch plugin
+
+The Name Service Switch (NSS) is a facility in Unix-like operating systems
+@footnote{More accurate: NSS is a functionality of the GNU C Library}
+that provides a variety of sources for common configuration databases and
+name resolution mechanisms.
+A superuser (system administrator) usually configures the
+operating system's name services using the file
+@file{/etc/nsswitch.conf}.
+
+GNS provides a NSS plugin to integrate GNS name resolution with the
+operating system's name resolution process.
+To use the GNS NSS plugin you have to either
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item install GNUnet as root or
+@item compile GNUnet with the @code{--with-sudo=yes} switch.
+@end itemize
+
+Name resolution is controlled by the @emph{hosts} section in the NSS
+configuration. By default this section first performs a lookup in the
+@file{/etc/hosts} file and then in DNS.
+The nsswitch file should contain a line similar to:
+
+@example
+hosts: files dns [NOTFOUND=return] mdns4_minimal mdns4
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Here the GNS NSS plugin can be added to perform a GNS lookup before
+performing a DNS lookup.
+The GNS NSS plugin has to be added to the "hosts" section in
+@file{/etc/nsswitch.conf} file before DNS related plugins:
+
+@example
+...
+hosts: files gns [NOTFOUND=return] dns mdns4_minimal mdns4
+...
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The @code{NOTFOUND=return} will ensure that if a @code{.gnu} name is not
+found in GNS it will not be queried in DNS.
+
+@node Configuring GNS on W32
+@subsubsection Configuring GNS on W32
+
+This document is a guide to configuring GNU Name System on W32-compatible
+platforms.
+
+After GNUnet is installed, run the w32nsp-install tool:
+
+@example
+w32nsp-install.exe libw32nsp-0.dll
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+('0' is the library version of W32 NSP; it might increase in the future,
+change the invocation accordingly).
+
+This will install GNS namespace provider into the system and allow other
+applications to resolve names that end in '@strong{gnu}'
+and '@strong{zkey}'. Note that namespace provider requires
+gnunet-gns-helper-service-w32 to be running, as well as gns service
+itself (and its usual dependencies).
+
+Namespace provider is hardcoded to connect to @strong{127.0.0.1:5353},
+and this is where gnunet-gns-helper-service-w32 should be listening to
+(and is configured to listen to by default).
+
+To uninstall the provider, run:
+
+@example
+w32nsp-uninstall.exe
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+(uses provider GUID to uninstall it, does not need a dll name).
+
+Note that while MSDN claims that other applications will only be able to
+use the new namespace provider after re-starting, in reality they might
+stat to use it without that. Conversely, they might stop using the
+provider after it's been uninstalled, even if they were not re-started.
+W32 will not permit namespace provider library to be deleted or
+overwritten while the provider is installed, and while there is at least
+one process still using it (even after it was uninstalled).
+
+@node GNS Proxy Setup
+@subsubsection GNS Proxy Setup
+
+When using the GNU Name System (GNS) to browse the WWW, there are several
+issues that can be solved by adding the GNS Proxy to your setup:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item If the target website does not support GNS, it might assume that it
+is operating under some name in the legacy DNS system (such as
+example.com). It may then attempt to set cookies for that domain, and the
+web server might expect a @code{Host: example.com} header in the request
+from your browser.
+However, your browser might be using @code{example.gnu} for the
+@code{Host} header and might only accept (and send) cookies for
+@code{example.gnu}. The GNS Proxy will perform the necessary translations
+of the hostnames for cookies and HTTP headers (using the LEHO record for
+the target domain as the desired substitute).
+
+@item If using HTTPS, the target site might include an SSL certificate
+which is either only valid for the LEHO domain or might match a TLSA
+record in GNS. However, your browser would expect a valid certificate for
+@code{example.gnu}, not for some legacy domain name. The proxy will
+validate the certificate (either against LEHO or TLSA) and then
+on-the-fly produce a valid certificate for the exchange, signed by your
+own CA. Assuming you installed the CA of your proxy in your browser's
+certificate authority list, your browser will then trust the
+HTTPS/SSL/TLS connection, as the hostname mismatch is hidden by the proxy.
+
+@item Finally, the proxy will in the future indicate to the server that it
+speaks GNS, which will enable server operators to deliver GNS-enabled web
+sites to your browser (and continue to deliver legacy links to legacy
+browsers)
+@end itemize
+
+@node Setup of the GNS CA
+@subsubsection Setup of the GNS CA
+
+First you need to create a CA certificate that the proxy can use.
+To do so use the provided script gnunet-gns-proxy-ca:
+
+@example
+$ gnunet-gns-proxy-setup-ca
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+This will create a personal certification authority for you and add this
+authority to the firefox and chrome database. The proxy will use the this
+CA certificate to generate @code{*.gnu} client certificates on the fly.
+
+Note that the proxy uses libcurl. Make sure your version of libcurl uses
+GnuTLS and NOT OpenSSL. The proxy will @b{not} work with libcurl compiled
+against OpenSSL.
+
+You can check the configuration your libcurl was build with by
+running:
+
+@example
+curl --version
+@end example
+
+the output will look like this (without the linebreaks):
+
+@example
+gnurl --version
+curl 7.56.0 (x86_64-unknown-linux-gnu) libcurl/7.56.0 \
+GnuTLS/3.5.13 zlib/1.2.11 libidn2/2.0.4
+Release-Date: 2017-10-08
+Protocols: http https 
+Features: AsynchDNS IDN IPv6 Largefile NTLM SSL libz \
+TLS-SRP UnixSockets HTTPS-proxy
+@end example
+
+@node Testing the GNS setup
+@subsubsection Testing the GNS setup
+
+Now for testing purposes we can create some records in our zone to test
+the SSL functionality of the proxy:
+
+@example
+$ gnunet-namestore -a -e "1 d" -n "homepage" -t A -V 131.159.74.67
+$ gnunet-namestore -a -e "1 d" -n "homepage" -t LEHO -V "gnunet.org"
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+At this point we can start the proxy. Simply execute
+
+@example
+$ gnunet-gns-proxy
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Configure your browser to use this SOCKSv5 proxy on port 7777 and visit
+this link.
+If you use @command{Firefox} (or one of its deriviates/forks such as
+Icecat) you also have to go to @code{about:config} and set the key
+@code{network.proxy.socks_remote_dns} to @code{true}.
+
+When you visit @code{https://homepage.gnu/}, you should get to the
+@code{https://gnunet.org/} frontpage and the browser (with the correctly
+configured proxy) should give you a valid SSL certificate for
+@code{homepage.gnu} and no warnings. It should look like this:
+
+@c FIXME: Image does not exist, create it or save it from Drupal?
+@c @image{images/gnunethpgns.png,5in,, picture of homepage.gnu in Webbrowser}
+
+@node Automatic Shortening in the GNU Name System
+@subsubsection Automatic Shortening in the GNU Name System
+
+This page describes a possible option for 'automatic name shortening',
+which you can choose to enable with the GNU Name System.
+
+When GNS encounters a name for the first time, it can use the 'NICK'
+record of the originating zone to automatically generate a name for the
+zone. If automatic shortening is enabled, those auto-generated names will
+be placed (as private records) into your personal 'shorten' zone (to
+prevent confusion with manually selected names).
+Then, in the future, if the same name is encountered again, GNS will
+display the shortened name instead (the first time, the long name will
+still be used as shortening typically happens asynchronously as looking up
+the 'NICK' record takes some time). Using this feature can be a convenient
+way to avoid very long @code{.gnu} names; however, note that names from
+the shorten-zone are assigned on a first-come-first-serve basis and should
+not be trusted. Furthermore, if you enable this feature, you will no
+longer see the full delegation chain for zones once shortening has been
+applied.
+
+@node Configuring the GNUnet VPN
+@subsection Configuring the GNUnet VPN
+
+@menu
+* IPv4 address for interface::
+* IPv6 address for interface::
+* Configuring the GNUnet VPN DNS::
+* Configuring the GNUnet VPN Exit Service::
+* IP Address of external DNS resolver::
+* IPv4 address for Exit interface::
+* IPv6 address for Exit interface::
+@end menu
+
+Before configuring the GNUnet VPN, please make sure that system-wide DNS
+interception is configured properly as described in the section on the
+GNUnet DNS setup. @pxref{Configuring the GNU Name System},
+if you haven't done so already.
+
+The default options for the GNUnet VPN are usually sufficient to use
+GNUnet as a Layer 2 for your Internet connection.
+However, what you always have to specify is which IP protocol you want
+to tunnel: IPv4, IPv6 or both.
+Furthermore, if you tunnel both, you most likely should also tunnel
+all of your DNS requests.
+You theoretically can tunnel "only" your DNS traffic, but that usually
+makes little sense.
+
+The other options as shown on the gnunet-setup tool are:
+
+@node IPv4 address for interface
+@subsubsection IPv4 address for interface
+
+This is the IPv4 address the VPN interface will get. You should pick an
+'private' IPv4 network that is not yet in use for you system. For example,
+if you use @code{10.0.0.1/255.255.0.0} already, you might use
+@code{10.1.0.1/255.255.0.0}.
+If you use @code{10.0.0.1/255.0.0.0} already, then you might use
+@code{192.168.0.1/255.255.0.0}.
+If your system is not in a private IP-network, using any of the above will
+work fine.
+You should try to make the mask of the address big enough
+(@code{255.255.0.0} or, even better, @code{255.0.0.0}) to allow more
+mappings of remote IP Addresses into this range.
+However, even a @code{255.255.255.0} mask will suffice for most users.
+
+@node IPv6 address for interface
+@subsubsection IPv6 address for interface
+
+The IPv6 address the VPN interface will get. Here you can specify any
+non-link-local address (the address should not begin with @code{fe80:}).
+A subnet Unique Local Unicast (@code{fd00::/8} prefix) that you are
+currently not using would be a good choice.
+
+@node Configuring the GNUnet VPN DNS
+@subsubsection Configuring the GNUnet VPN DNS
+
+To resolve names for remote nodes, activate the DNS exit option.
+
+@node Configuring the GNUnet VPN Exit Service
+@subsubsection Configuring the GNUnet VPN Exit Service
+
+If you want to allow other users to share your Internet connection (yes,
+this may be dangerous, just as running a Tor exit node) or want to
+provide access to services on your host (this should be less dangerous,
+as long as those services are secure), you have to enable the GNUnet exit
+daemon.
+
+You then get to specify which exit functions you want to provide. By
+enabling the exit daemon, you will always automatically provide exit
+functions for manually configured local services (this component of the
+system is under
+development and not documented further at this time). As for those
+services you explicitly specify the target IP address and port, there is
+no significant security risk in doing so.
+
+Furthermore, you can serve as a DNS, IPv4 or IPv6 exit to the Internet.
+Being a DNS exit is usually pretty harmless. However, enabling IPv4 or
+IPv6-exit without further precautions may enable adversaries to access
+your local network, send spam, attack other systems from your Internet
+connection and to other mischief that will appear to come from your
+machine. This may or may not get you into legal trouble.
+If you want to allow IPv4 or IPv6-exit functionality, you should strongly
+consider adding additional firewall rules manually to protect your local
+network and to restrict outgoing TCP traffic (i.e. by not allowing access
+to port 25). While we plan to improve exit-filtering in the future,
+you're currently on your own here.
+Essentially, be prepared for any kind of IP-traffic to exit the respective
+TUN interface (and GNUnet will enable IP-forwarding and NAT for the
+interface automatically).
+
+Additional configuration options of the exit as shown by the gnunet-setup
+tool are:
+
+@node IP Address of external DNS resolver
+@subsubsection IP Address of external DNS resolver
+
+If DNS traffic is to exit your machine, it will be send to this DNS
+resolver. You can specify an IPv4 or IPv6 address.
+
+@node IPv4 address for Exit interface
+@subsubsection IPv4 address for Exit interface
+
+This is the IPv4 address the Interface will get. Make the mask of the
+address big enough (255.255.0.0 or, even better, 255.0.0.0) to allow more
+mappings of IP addresses into this range. As for the VPN interface, any
+unused, private IPv4 address range will do.
+
+@node IPv6 address for Exit interface
+@subsubsection IPv6 address for Exit interface
+
+The public IPv6 address the interface will get. If your kernel is not a
+very recent kernel and you are willing to manually enable IPv6-NAT, the
+IPv6 address you specify here must be a globally routed IPv6 address of
+your host.
+
+Suppose your host has the address @code{2001:4ca0::1234/64}, then
+using @code{2001:4ca0::1:0/112} would be fine (keep the first 64 bits,
+then change at least one bit in the range before the bitmask, in the
+example above we changed bit 111 from 0 to 1).
+
+You may also have to configure your router to route traffic for the entire
+subnet (@code{2001:4ca0::1:0/112} for example) through your computer (this
+should be automatic with IPv6, but obviously anything can be
+disabled).
+
+@node Bandwidth Configuration
+@subsection Bandwidth Configuration
+
+You can specify how many bandwidth GNUnet is allowed to use to receive
+and send data. This is important for users with limited bandwidth or
+traffic volume.
+
+@node Configuring NAT
+@subsection Configuring NAT
+
+Most hosts today do not have a normal global IP address but instead are
+behind a router performing Network Address Translation (NAT) which assigns
+each host in the local network a private IP address.
+As a result, these machines cannot trivially receive inbound connections
+from the Internet. GNUnet supports NAT traversal to enable these machines
+to receive incoming connections from other peers despite their
+limitations.
+
+In an ideal world, you can press the "Attempt automatic configuration"
+button in gnunet-setup to automatically configure your peer correctly.
+Alternatively, your distribution might have already triggered this
+automatic configuration during the installation process.
+However, automatic configuration can fail to determine the optimal
+settings, resulting in your peer either not receiving as many connections
+as possible, or in the worst case it not connecting to the network at all.
+
+To manually configure the peer, you need to know a few things about your
+network setup. First, determine if you are behind a NAT in the first
+place.
+This is always the case if your IP address starts with "10.*" or
+"192.168.*". Next, if you have control over your NAT router, you may
+choose to manually configure it to allow GNUnet traffic to your host.
+If you have configured your NAT to forward traffic on ports 2086 (and
+possibly 1080) to your host, you can check the "NAT ports have been opened
+manually" option, which corresponds to the "PUNCHED_NAT" option in the
+configuration file. If you did not punch your NAT box, it may still be
+configured to support UPnP, which allows GNUnet to automatically
+configure it. In that case, you need to install the "upnpc" command,
+enable UPnP (or PMP) on your NAT box and set the "Enable NAT traversal
+via UPnP or PMP" option (corresponding to "ENABLE_UPNP" in the
+configuration file).
+
+Some NAT boxes can be traversed using the autonomous NAT traversal method.
+This requires certain GNUnet components to be installed with "SUID"
+prividledges on your system (so if you're installing on a system you do
+not have administrative rights to, this will not work).
+If you installed as 'root', you can enable autonomous NAT traversal by
+checking the "Enable NAT traversal using ICMP method".
+The ICMP method requires a way to determine your NAT's external (global)
+IP address. This can be done using either UPnP, DynDNS, or by manual
+configuration. If you have a DynDNS name or know your external IP address,
+you should enter that name under "External (public) IPv4 address" (which
+corresponds to the "EXTERNAL_ADDRESS" option in the configuration file).
+If you leave the option empty, GNUnet will try to determine your external
+IP address automatically (which may fail, in which case autonomous
+NAT traversal will then not work).
+
+Finally, if you yourself are not behind NAT but want to be able to
+connect to NATed peers using autonomous NAT traversal, you need to check
+the "Enable connecting to NATed peers using ICMP method" box.
+
+
+@node Peer configuration for distributions
+@subsection Peer configuration for distributions
+
+The "GNUNET_DATA_HOME" in "[path]" in @file{/etc/gnunet.conf} should be
+manually set to "/var/lib/gnunet/data/" as the default
+"~/.local/share/gnunet/" is probably not that appropriate in this case.
+Similarly, distributions may consider pointing "GNUNET_RUNTIME_DIR" to
+"/var/run/gnunet/" and "GNUNET_HOME" to "/var/lib/gnunet/". Also, should a
+distribution decide to override system defaults, all of these changes
+should be done in a custom @file{/etc/gnunet.conf} and not in the files
+in the @file{config.d/} directory.
+
+Given the proposed access permissions, the "gnunet-setup" tool must be
+run as use "gnunet" (and with option "-c /etc/gnunet.conf" so that it
+modifies the system configuration). As always, gnunet-setup should be run
+after the GNUnet peer was stopped using "gnunet-arm -e". Distributions
+might want to include a wrapper for gnunet-setup that allows the
+desktop-user to "sudo" (i.e. using gtksudo) to the "gnunet" user account
+and then runs "gnunet-arm -e", "gnunet-setup" and "gnunet-arm -s" in
+sequence.
+
+@node How to start and stop a GNUnet peer
+@section How to start and stop a GNUnet peer
+
+This section describes how to start a GNUnet peer. It assumes that you
+have already compiled and installed GNUnet and its' dependencies.
+Before you start a GNUnet peer, you may want to create a configuration
+file using gnunet-setup (but you do not have to).
+Sane defaults should exist in your
+@file{$GNUNET_PREFIX/share/gnunet/config.d/} directory, so in practice
+you could simply start without any configuration. If you want to
+configure your peer later, you need to stop it before invoking the
+@code{gnunet-setup} tool to customize further and to test your
+configuration (@code{gnunet-setup} has build-in test functions).
+
+The most important option you might have to still set by hand is in
+[PATHS]. Here, you use the option "GNUNET_HOME" to specify the path where
+GNUnet should store its data.
+It defaults to @code{$HOME/}, which again should work for most users.
+Make sure that the directory specified as GNUNET_HOME is writable to
+the user that you will use to run GNUnet (note that you can run frontends
+using other users, GNUNET_HOME must only be accessible to the user used to
+run the background processes).
+
+You will also need to make one central decision: should all of GNUnet be
+run under your normal UID, or do you want distinguish between system-wide
+(user-independent) GNUnet services and personal GNUnet services. The
+multi-user setup is slightly more complicated, but also more secure and
+generally recommended.
+
+@menu
+* The Single-User Setup::
+* The Multi-User Setup::
+* Killing GNUnet services::
+* Access Control for GNUnet::
+@end menu
+
+@node The Single-User Setup
+@subsection The Single-User Setup
+
+For the single-user setup, you do not need to do anything special and can
+just start the GNUnet background processes using @code{gnunet-arm}.
+By default, GNUnet looks in @file{~/.config/gnunet.conf} for a
+configuration (or @code{$XDG_CONFIG_HOME/gnunet.conf} if@
+@code{$XDG_CONFIG_HOME} is defined). If your configuration lives
+elsewhere, you need to pass the @code{-c FILENAME} option to all GNUnet
+commands.
+
+Assuming the configuration file is called @file{~/.config/gnunet.conf},
+you start your peer using the @code{gnunet-arm} command (say as user
+@code{gnunet}) using:
+
+@example
+gnunet-arm -c ~/.config/gnunet.conf -s
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The "-s" option here is for "start". The command should return almost
+instantly. If you want to stop GNUnet, you can use:
+
+@example
+gnunet-arm -c ~/.config/gnunet.conf -e
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The "-e" option here is for "end".
+
+Note that this will only start the basic peer, no actual applications
+will be available.
+If you want to start the file-sharing service, use (after starting
+GNUnet):
+
+@example
+gnunet-arm -c ~/.config/gnunet.conf -i fs
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The "-i fs" option here is for "initialize" the "fs" (file-sharing)
+application. You can also selectively kill only file-sharing support using
+
+@example
+gnunet-arm -c ~/.config/gnunet.conf -k fs
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Assuming that you want certain services (like file-sharing) to be always
+automatically started whenever you start GNUnet, you can activate them by
+setting "FORCESTART=YES" in the respective section of the configuration
+file (for example, "[fs]"). Then GNUnet with file-sharing support would
+be started whenever you@ enter:
+
+@example
+gnunet-arm -c ~/.config/gnunet.conf -s
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Alternatively, you can combine the two options:
+
+@example
+gnunet-arm -c ~/.config/gnunet.conf -s -i fs
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Using @code{gnunet-arm} is also the preferred method for initializing
+GNUnet from @code{init}.
+
+Finally, you should edit your @code{crontab} (using the @code{crontab}
+command) and insert a line@
+
+@example
+@@reboot gnunet-arm -c ~/.config/gnunet.conf -s
+@end example
+
+to automatically start your peer whenever your system boots.
+
+@node The Multi-User Setup
+@subsection The Multi-User Setup
+
+This requires you to create a user @code{gnunet} and an additional group
+@code{gnunetdns}, prior to running @code{make install} during
+installation.
+Then, you create a configuration file @file{/etc/gnunet.conf} which should
+contain the lines:@
+
+@example
+[arm]
+SYSTEM_ONLY = YES
+USER_ONLY = NO
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Then, perform the same steps to run GNUnet as in the per-user
+configuration, except as user @code{gnunet} (including the
+@code{crontab} installation).
+You may also want to run @code{gnunet-setup} to configure your peer
+(databases, etc.).
+Make sure to pass @code{-c /etc/gnunet.conf} to all commands. If you
+run @code{gnunet-setup} as user @code{gnunet}, you might need to change
+permissions on @file{/etc/gnunet.conf} so that the @code{gnunet} user can
+write to the file (during setup).
+
+Afterwards, you need to perform another setup step for each normal user
+account from which you want to access GNUnet. First, grant the normal user
+(@code{$USER}) permission to the group gnunet:
+
+@example
+# adduser $USER gnunet
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Then, create a configuration file in @file{~/.config/gnunet.conf} for the
+$USER with the lines:
+
+@example
+[arm]
+SYSTEM_ONLY = NO
+USER_ONLY = YES
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+This will ensure that @code{gnunet-arm} when started by the normal user
+will only run services that are per-user, and otherwise rely on the
+system-wide services.
+Note that the normal user may run gnunet-setup, but the
+configuration would be ineffective as the system-wide services will use
+@file{/etc/gnunet.conf} and ignore options set by individual users.
+
+Again, each user should then start the peer using
+@file{gnunet-arm -s} --- and strongly consider adding logic to start
+the peer automatically to their crontab.
+
+Afterwards, you should see two (or more, if you have more than one USER)
+@code{gnunet-service-arm} processes running in your system.
+
+@node Killing GNUnet services
+@subsection Killing GNUnet services
+
+It is not necessary to stop GNUnet services explicitly when shutting
+down your computer.
+
+It should be noted that manually killing "most" of the
+@code{gnunet-service} processes is generally not a successful method for
+stopping a peer (since @code{gnunet-service-arm} will instantly restart
+them). The best way to explicitly stop a peer is using
+@code{gnunet-arm -e}; note that the per-user services may need to be
+terminated before the system-wide services will terminate normally.
+
+@node Access Control for GNUnet
+@subsection Access Control for GNUnet
+
+This chapter documents how we plan to make access control work within the
+GNUnet system for a typical peer. It should be read as a best-practice
+installation guide for advanced users and builders of binary
+distributions. The recommendations in this guide apply to POSIX-systems
+with full support for UNIX domain sockets only.
+
+Note that this is an advanced topic. The discussion presumes a very good
+understanding of users, groups and file permissions. Normal users on
+hosts with just a single user can just install GNUnet under their own
+account (and possibly allow the installer to use SUDO to grant additional
+permissions for special GNUnet tools that need additional rights).
+The discussion below largely applies to installations where multiple users
+share a system and to installations where the best possible security is
+paramount.
+
+A typical GNUnet system consists of components that fall into four
+categories:
+
+@table @asis
+
+@item User interfaces
+User interfaces are not security sensitive and are supposed to be run and
+used by normal system users.
+The GTK GUIs and most command-line programs fall into this category.
+Some command-line tools (like gnunet-transport) should be excluded as they
+offer low-level access that normal users should not need.
+@item System services and support tools
+System services should always run and offer services that can then be
+accessed by the normal users.
+System services do not require special permissions, but as they are not
+specific to a particular user, they probably should not run as a
+particular user. Also, there should typically only be one GNUnet peer per
+host. System services include the gnunet-service and gnunet-daemon
+programs; support tools include command-line programs such as gnunet-arm.
+@item Priviledged helpers
+Some GNUnet components require root rights to open raw sockets or perform
+other special operations. These gnunet-helper binaries are typically
+installed SUID and run from services or daemons.
+@item Critical services
+Some GNUnet services (such as the DNS service) can manipulate the service
+in deep and possibly highly security sensitive ways. For example, the DNS
+service can be used to intercept and alter any DNS query originating from
+the local machine. Access to the APIs of these critical services and their
+priviledged helpers must be tightly controlled.
+@end table
+
+@c FIXME: The titles of these chapters are too long in the index.
+
+@menu
+* Recommendation - Disable access to services via TCP::
+* Recommendation - Run most services as system user "gnunet"::
+* Recommendation - Control access to services using group "gnunet"::
+* Recommendation - Limit access to certain SUID binaries by group "gnunet"::
+* Recommendation - Limit access to critical gnunet-helper-dns to group "gnunetdns"::
+* Differences between "make install" and these recommendations::
+@end menu
+
+@node Recommendation - Disable access to services via TCP
+@subsubsection Recommendation - Disable access to services via TCP
+
+GNUnet services allow two types of access: via TCP socket or via UNIX
+domain socket.
+If the service is available via TCP, access control can only be
+implemented by restricting connections to a particular range of IP
+addresses.
+This is acceptable for non-critical services that are supposed to be
+available to all users on the local system or local network.
+However, as TCP is generally less efficient and it is rarely the case
+that a single GNUnet peer is supposed to serve an entire local network,
+the default configuration should disable TCP access to all GNUnet
+services on systems with support for UNIX domain sockets.
+As of GNUnet 0.9.2, configuration files with TCP access disabled should be
+generated by default. Users can re-enable TCP access to particular
+services simply by specifying a non-zero port number in the section of
+the respective service.
+
+
+@node Recommendation - Run most services as system user "gnunet"
+@subsubsection Recommendation - Run most services as system user "gnunet"
+
+GNUnet's main services should be run as a separate user "gnunet" in a
+special group "gnunet".
+The user "gnunet" should start the peer using "gnunet-arm -s" during
+system startup. The home directory for this user should be
+@file{/var/lib/gnunet} and the configuration file should be
+@file{/etc/gnunet.conf}.
+Only the @code{gnunet} user should have the right to access
+@file{/var/lib/gnunet} (@emph{mode: 700}).
+
+@node Recommendation - Control access to services using group "gnunet"
+@subsubsection Recommendation - Control access to services using group "gnunet"
+
+Users that should be allowed to use the GNUnet peer should be added to the
+group "gnunet". Using GNUnet's access control mechanism for UNIX domain
+sockets, those services that are considered useful to ordinary users
+should be made available by setting "UNIX_MATCH_GID=YES" for those
+services.
+Again, as shipped, GNUnet provides reasonable defaults.
+Permissions to access the transport and core subsystems might additionally
+be granted without necessarily causing security concerns.
+Some services, such as DNS, must NOT be made accessible to the "gnunet"
+group (and should thus only be accessible to the "gnunet" user and
+services running with this UID).
+
+@node Recommendation - Limit access to certain SUID binaries by group "gnunet"
+@subsubsection Recommendation - Limit access to certain SUID binaries by group "gnunet"
+
+Most of GNUnet's SUID binaries should be safe even if executed by normal
+users. However, it is possible to reduce the risk a little bit more by
+making these binaries owned by the group "gnunet" and restricting their
+execution to user of the group "gnunet" as well (4750).
+
+@node Recommendation - Limit access to critical gnunet-helper-dns to group "gnunetdns"
+@subsubsection Recommendation - Limit access to critical gnunet-helper-dns to group "gnunetdns"
+
+A special group "gnunetdns" should be created for controlling access to
+the "gnunet-helper-dns".
+The binary should then be owned by root and be in group "gnunetdns" and
+be installed SUID and only be group-executable (2750).
+@b{Note that the group "gnunetdns" should have no users in it at all,
+ever.}
+The "gnunet-service-dns" program should be executed by user "gnunet" (via
+gnunet-service-arm) with the binary owned by the user "root" and the group
+"gnunetdns" and be SGID (2700). This way, @strong{only}
+"gnunet-service-dns" can change its group to "gnunetdns" and execute the
+helper, and the helper can then run as root (as per SUID).
+Access to the API offered by "gnunet-service-dns" is in turn restricted
+to the user "gnunet" (not the group!), which means that only
+"benign" services can manipulate DNS queries using "gnunet-service-dns".
+
+@node Differences between "make install" and these recommendations
+@subsubsection Differences between "make install" and these recommendations
+
+The current build system does not set all permissions automatically based
+on the recommendations above. In particular, it does not use the group
+"gnunet" at all (so setting gnunet-helpers other than the
+gnunet-helper-dns to be owned by group "gnunet" must be done manually).
+Furthermore, 'make install' will silently fail to set the DNS binaries to
+be owned by group "gnunetdns" unless that group already exists (!).
+An alternative name for the "gnunetdns" group can be specified using the
+@code{--with-gnunetdns=GRPNAME} configure option.
+
diff --git a/doc/documentation/chapters/philosophy.texi b/doc/documentation/chapters/philosophy.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..116991a6a0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/documentation/chapters/philosophy.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,423 @@
+@cindex Philosophy
+@node Philosophy
+@chapter Philosophy
+
+@c NOTE: We should probably re-use some of the images lynX created
+@c for secushare, showing some of the relations and functionalities
+@c of GNUnet.
+The foremost goal of the GNUnet project is to become a widely used,
+reliable, open, non-discriminating, egalitarian, unfettered and
+censorship-resistant system of free information exchange.
+We value free speech above state secrets, law-enforcement or
+intellectual property.
+GNUnet is supposed to be an anarchistic network, where the only
+limitation for peers is that they must contribute enough back to
+the network such that their resource consumption does not have
+a significant impact on other users.
+GNUnet should be more than just another file-sharing network.
+The plan is to offer many other services and in particular
+to serve as a development platform for the next generation of
+decentralized Internet protocols.
+
+@menu
+* Design Goals::
+* Security and Privacy::
+* Versatility::
+* Practicality::
+* Key Concepts::
+@end menu
+
+@cindex Design Goals
+@cindex Design Goals
+@node Design Goals
+@section Design Goals
+
+These are the core GNUnet design goals, in order of relative importance:
+
+@itemize
+@item GNUnet must be implemented as
+@uref{https://www.gnu.org/philosophy/free-sw.html, Free Software}
+@c To footnote or not to footnote, that's the question.
+@footnote{This means that you you have the four essential freedoms: to run
+the program, to study and change the program in source code form,
+to redistribute exact copies, and to distribute modified versions.}
+@item GNUnet must only disclose the minimal amount of information
+necessary.
+@item GNUnet must be decentralised and survive Byzantine failures in any
+position in the network.
+@item GNUnet must make it explicit to the user which entities must be
+trustworthy when establishing secured communications.
+@item GNUnet must use compartmentalization to protect sensitive
+information.
+@item GNUnet must be open and permit new peers to join.
+@item GNUnet must be self-organizing and not depend on administrators.
+@item GNUnet must support a diverse range of applications and devices.
+@item The GNUnet architecture must be cost effective.
+@item GNUnet must provide incentives for peers to contribute more
+resources than they consume.
+@end itemize
+
+
+@cindex Security and Privacy
+@node Security and Privacy
+@section Security and Privacy
+
+GNUnet's primary design goals are to protect the privacy of its users and
+to guard itself against attacks or abuse.
+GNUnet does not have any mechanisms to control, track or censor users.
+Instead, the GNUnet protocols aim to make it as hard as possible to
+find out what is happening on the network or to disrupt operations. 
+
+@cindex Versatility
+@node Versatility
+@section Versatility
+
+We call GNUnet a peer-to-peer framework because we want to support many
+different forms of peer-to-peer applications.  GNUnet uses a plugin
+architecture to make the system extensible and to encourage code reuse.
+While the first versions of the system only supported anonymous
+file-sharing, other applications are being worked on and more will
+hopefully follow in the future.
+A powerful synergy regarding anonymity services is created by a large
+community utilizing many diverse applications over the same software
+infrastructure.  The reason is that link encryption hides the specifics
+of the traffic for non-participating observers.  This way, anonymity can
+get stronger with additional (GNUnet) traffic, even if the additional
+traffic is not related to anonymous communication.  Increasing anonymity
+is the primary reason why GNUnet is developed to become a peer-to-peer
+framework where many applications share the lower layers of an
+increasingly complex protocol stack.
+If merging traffic to hinder traffic analysis was not important,
+we could have just developed a dozen stand-alone applications
+and a few shared libraries. 
+
+@cindex Practicality
+@node Practicality
+@section Practicality
+
+GNUnet allows participants to trade various amounts of security in
+exchange for increased efficiency.  However, it is not possible for any
+user's security and efficiency requirements to compromise the security
+and efficiency of any other user.
+
+For GNUnet, efficiency is not paramount.  If there is a more secure and
+still practical approach, we would choose to take the more secure
+alternative. @command{telnet} is more efficient than @command{ssh}, yet
+it is obsolete.
+Hardware gets faster, and code can be optimized.  Fixing security issues
+as an afterthought is much harder.
+
+While security is paramount, practicability is still a requirement.
+The most secure system is always the one that nobody can use.
+Similarly, any anonymous system that is extremely inefficient will only
+find few users.
+However, good anonymity requires a large and diverse user base.  Since
+individual security requirements may vary, the only good solution here is
+to allow individuals to trade-off security and efficiency.
+The primary challenge in allowing this is to ensure that the economic
+incentives work properly.
+In particular, this means that it must be impossible for a user to gain
+security at the expense of other users. Many designs (e.g. anonymity via
+broadcast) fail to give users an incentive to choose a less secure but
+more efficient mode of operation.
+GNUnet should avoid where ever possible to rely on protocols that will
+only work if the participants are benevolent.
+While some designs have had widespread success while relying on parties
+to observe a protocol that may be sub-optimal for the individuals (e.g.
+TCP Nagle), a protocol that ensures that individual goals never conflict
+with the goals of the group is always preferable.
+
+@cindex Key Concepts
+@node Key Concepts
+@section Key Concepts
+
+In this section, the fundamental concepts of GNUnet are explained.
+@c FIXME: Use @uref{https://docs.gnunet.org/bib/, research papers}
+@c once we have the new bibliography + subdomain setup.
+Most of them are also described in our research papers.
+First, some of the concepts used in the GNUnet framework are detailed.
+The second part describes concepts specific to anonymous file-sharing.
+
+@menu
+* Authentication::
+* Accounting to Encourage Resource Sharing::
+* Confidentiality::
+* Anonymity::
+* Deniability::                       
+* Peer Identities::
+* Zones in the GNU Name System (GNS Zones)::
+* Egos::
+@end menu
+
+@cindex Authentication
+@node Authentication
+@subsection Authentication
+
+Almost all peer-to-peer communications in GNUnet are between mutually
+authenticated peers.  The authentication works by using ECDHE, that is a
+DH (Diffie---Hellman) key exchange using ephemeral eliptic curve
+cryptography.  The ephemeral ECC (Eliptic Curve Cryptography) keys are
+signed using ECDSA (@uref{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ECDSA, ECDSA}).
+The shared secret from ECDHE is used to create a pair of session keys
+@c FIXME: LOng word for HKDF
+(using HKDF) which are then used to encrypt the communication between the
+two peers using both 256-bit AES (Advanced Encryption Standard)
+and 256-bit Twofish (with independently derived secret keys).
+As only the two participating hosts know the shared secret, this
+authenticates each packet
+without requiring signatures each time.  GNUnet uses SHA-512
+(Secure Hash Algorithm) hash codes to verify the integrity of messages.
+
+In GNUnet, the identity of a host is its public key.  For that reason,
+@c FIXME: is it clear to the average reader what a man-in-the-middle
+@c attack is?
+man-in-the-middle attacks will not break the authentication or accounting
+goals.  Essentially, for GNUnet, the IP of the host has nothing to do with
+the identity of the host.  As the public key is the only thing that truly
+matters, faking an IP, a port or any other property of the underlying
+transport protocol is irrelevant.  In fact, GNUnet peers can use
+multiple IPs (IPv4 and IPv6) on multiple ports --- or even not use the
+IP protocol at all (by running directly on layer 2).
+
+@c NOTE: For consistency we will use @code{HELLO}s throughout this Manual.
+GNUnet uses a special type of message to communicate a binding between
+public (ECC) keys to their current network address.  These messages are
+commonly called @code{HELLO}s or peer advertisements.
+They contain the public key of the peer and its current network
+addresses for various transport services.
+A transport service is a special kind of shared library that
+provides (possibly unreliable, out-of-order) message delivery between
+peers.
+For the UDP and TCP transport services, a network address is an IP and a
+port.
+GNUnet can also use other transports (HTTP, HTTPS, WLAN, etc.) which use
+various other forms of addresses.  Note that any node can have many
+different active transport services at the same time,
+and each of these can have a different addresses.
+Binding messages expire after at most a week (the timeout can be
+shorter if the user configures the node appropriately).
+This expiration ensures that the network will eventually get rid of
+outdated advertisements.
+@footnote{Ronaldo A. Ferreira, Christian Grothoff, and Paul Ruth.
+A Transport Layer Abstraction for Peer-to-Peer Networks
+Proceedings of the 3rd International Symposium on Cluster Computing
+and the Grid (GRID 2003), 2003.
+(@uref{https://gnunet.org/git/bibliography.git/plain/docs/transport.pdf, pdf})}
+
+@cindex Accounting to Encourage Resource Sharing
+@node Accounting to Encourage Resource Sharing
+@subsection Accounting to Encourage Resource Sharing
+
+Most distributed P2P networks suffer from a lack of defenses or
+precautions against attacks in the form of freeloading.
+While the intentions of an attacker and a freeloader are different, their
+effect on the network is the same; they both render it useless.
+Most simple attacks on networks such as @command{Gnutella}
+involve flooding the network with traffic, particularly
+with queries that are, in the worst case, multiplied by the network.
+
+In order to ensure that freeloaders or attackers have a minimal impact on
+the network, GNUnet's file-sharing implementation tries to distinguish
+good (contributing) nodes from malicious (freeloading) nodes.  In GNUnet,
+every file-sharing node keeps track of the behavior of every other node it
+has been in contact with.  Many requests (depending on the application)
+are transmitted with a priority (or importance) level.
+That priority is used to establish how important the sender believes
+this request is.  If a peer responds to an important request, the
+recipient will increase its trust in the responder:
+the responder contributed resources.
+If a peer is too busy to answer all requests, it needs to prioritize.
+@c FIXME: 'peers to not take' -> 'peers do not take' would make more sense
+For that, peers to not take the priorities of the requests received at
+face value.
+First, they check how much they trust the sender, and depending on that
+amount of trust they assign the request a (possibly lower) effective
+priority.  Then, they drop the requests with the lowest effective priority
+to satisfy their resource constraints.  This way, GNUnet's economic model
+ensures that nodes that are not currently considered to have a surplus in
+contributions will not be served if the network load is high.
+@footnote{Christian Grothoff. An Excess-Based Economic Model for Resource
+Allocation in Peer-to-Peer Networks. Wirtschaftsinformatik, June 2003.
+(@uref{https://gnunet.org/git/bibliography.git/plain/docs/ebe.pdf, pdf})}
+@c 2009?
+
+@cindex Confidentiality
+@node Confidentiality
+@subsection Confidentiality
+
+Adversaries outside of GNUnet are not supposed to know what kind of
+actions a peer is involved in.  Only the specific neighbor of a peer that
+is the corresponding sender or recipient of a message may know its
+contents, and even then application protocols may place further
+restrictions on that knowledge.
+In order to ensure confidentiality, GNUnet uses link encryption, that is
+each message exchanged between two peers is encrypted using a pair of
+keys only known to these two peers.
+Encrypting traffic like this makes any kind of traffic analysis much
+harder.  Naturally, for some applications, it may still be desirable if
+even neighbors cannot determine the concrete contents of a message.
+In GNUnet, this problem is addressed by the specific application-level
+protocols (see for example, deniability and anonymity in anonymous file
+sharing).
+
+@cindex Anonymity
+@node Anonymity
+@subsection Anonymity
+
+@menu
+* How file-sharing achieves Anonymity::
+@end menu
+
+Providing anonymity for users is the central goal for the anonymous
+file-sharing application.  Many other design decisions follow in the
+footsteps of this requirement.
+Anonymity is never absolute.  While there are various
+scientific metrics@footnote{Claudia Díaz, Stefaan Seys, Joris Claessens,
+and Bart Preneel. Towards measuring anonymity.
+2002.
+(@uref{https://gnunet.org/git/bibliography.git/plain/docs/article-89.pdf, pdf})}
+that can help quantify the level of anonymity that a given mechanism
+provides, there is no such thing as complete anonymity.
+GNUnet's file-sharing implementation allows users to select for each
+operation (publish, search, download) the desired level of anonymity.
+The metric used is the amount of cover traffic available to hide the
+request.
+While this metric is not as good as, for example, the theoretical metric
+given in scientific metrics@footnote{likewise},
+it is probably the best metric available to a peer with a purely local
+view of the world that does not rely on unreliable external information.
+The default anonymity level is 1, which uses anonymous routing but
+imposes no minimal requirements on cover traffic.  It is possible
+to forego anonymity when this is not required. The anonymity level of 0
+allows GNUnet to use more efficient, non-anonymous routing.
+
+@cindex How file-sharing achieves Anonymity
+@node How file-sharing achieves Anonymity
+@subsubsection How file-sharing achieves Anonymity
+
+Contrary to other designs, we do not believe that users achieve strong
+anonymity just because their requests are obfuscated by a couple of
+indirections.  This is not sufficient if the adversary uses traffic
+analysis.
+The threat model used for anonymous file sharing in GNUnet assumes that
+the adversary is quite powerful.
+In particular, we assume that the adversary can see all the traffic on
+the Internet.  And while we assume that the adversary
+can not break our encryption, we assume that the adversary has many
+participating nodes in the network and that it can thus see many of the
+node-to-node interactions since it controls some of the nodes. 
+
+The system tries to achieve anonymity based on the idea that users can be
+anonymous if they can hide their actions in the traffic created by other
+users.
+Hiding actions in the traffic of other users requires participating in the
+traffic, bringing back the traditional technique of using indirection and
+source rewriting.  Source rewriting is required to gain anonymity since
+otherwise an adversary could tell if a message originated from a host by
+looking at the source address.  If all packets look like they originate
+from a node, the adversary can not tell which ones originate from that
+node and which ones were routed.
+Note that in this mindset, any node can decide to break the
+source-rewriting paradigm without violating the protocol, as this
+only reduces the amount of traffic that a node can hide its own traffic
+in. 
+
+If we want to hide our actions in the traffic of other nodes, we must make
+our traffic indistinguishable from the traffic that we route for others.
+As our queries must have us as the receiver of the reply
+(otherwise they would be useless), we must put ourselves as the receiver
+of replies that actually go to other hosts; in other words, we must
+indirect replies.
+Unlike other systems, in anonymous file-sharing as implemented on top of
+GNUnet we do not have to indirect the replies if we don't think we need
+more traffic to hide our own actions.
+
+This increases the efficiency of the network as we can indirect less under
+higher load.@footnote{Krista Bennett and Christian Grothoff.
+GAP --- practical anonymous networking. In Proceedings of
+Designing Privacy Enhancing Technologies, 2003.
+(@uref{https://gnunet.org/git/bibliography.git/plain/docs/aff.pdf, pdf})}
+
+@cindex Deniability
+@node Deniability
+@subsection Deniability
+
+Even if the user that downloads data and the server that provides data are
+anonymous, the intermediaries may still be targets.  In particular, if the
+intermediaries can find out which queries or which content they are
+processing, a strong adversary could try to force them to censor
+certain materials. 
+
+With the file-encoding used by GNUnet's anonymous file-sharing, this
+problem does not arise.
+The reason is that queries and replies are transmitted in
+an encrypted format such that intermediaries cannot tell what the query
+is for or what the content is about.  Mind that this is not the same
+encryption as the link-encryption between the nodes.  GNUnet has
+encryption on the network layer (link encryption, confidentiality,
+authentication) and again on the application layer (provided
+by @command{gnunet-publish}, @command{gnunet-download},
+@command{gnunet-search} and @command{gnunet-gtk}).
+@footnote{Christian Grothoff, Krista Grothoff, Tzvetan Horozov,
+and Jussi T. Lindgren.
+An Encoding for Censorship-Resistant Sharing.
+2009.
+(@uref{https://gnunet.org/git/bibliography.git/plain/docs/ecrs.pdf, pdf})}
+
+@cindex Peer Identities
+@node Peer Identities
+@subsection Peer Identities
+
+Peer identities are used to identify peers in the network and are unique
+for each peer.  The identity for a peer is simply its public key, which is
+generated along with a private key the peer is started for the first time.
+While the identity is binary data, it is often expressed as ASCII string.
+For example, the following is a peer identity as you might see it in
+various places:
+
+@example
+UAT1S6PMPITLBKSJ2DGV341JI6KF7B66AC4JVCN9811NNEGQLUN0
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+You can find your peer identity by running @command{gnunet-peerinfo -s}.
+
+@cindex Zones in the GNU Name System (GNS Zones)
+@node Zones in the GNU Name System (GNS Zones)
+@subsection Zones in the GNU Name System (GNS Zones)
+
+@c FIXME: Explain or link to an explanation of the concept of public keys
+@c and private keys.
+GNS@footnote{Matthias Wachs, Martin Schanzenbach, and Christian Grothoff.
+A Censorship-Resistant, Privacy-Enhancing and Fully Decentralized Name
+System. In proceedings of 13th International Conference on Cryptology and
+Network Security (CANS 2014). 2014.
+@uref{https://gnunet.org/git/bibliography.git/plain/docs/gns2014wachs.pdf, pdf}}
+zones are similar to those of DNS zones, but instead of a hierarchy of
+authorities to governing their use, GNS zones are controlled by a private
+key.
+When you create a record in a DNS zone, that information stored in your
+nameserver.  Anyone trying to resolve your domain then gets pointed
+(hopefully) by the centralised authority to your nameserver.
+Whereas GNS, being decentralised by design, stores that information in
+DHT.  The validity of the records is assured cryptographically, by
+signing them with the private key of the respective zone.
+
+Anyone trying to resolve records in a zone your domain can then verify the
+signature on the records they get from the DHT and be assured that they
+are indeed from the respective zone.  To make this work, there is a 1:1
+correspondence between zones and their public-private key pairs.
+So when we talk about the owner of a GNS zone, that's really the owner of
+the private key.
+And a user accessing a zone needs to somehow specify the corresponding
+public key first.
+
+@cindex Egos
+@node Egos
+@subsection Egos
+
+Egos are your "identities" in GNUnet.  Any user can assume multiple
+identities, for example to separate their activities online.  Egos can
+correspond to pseudonyms or real-world identities.  Technically, an
+ego is first of all a public-private key pair.
+
diff --git a/doc/documentation/chapters/user.texi b/doc/documentation/chapters/user.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4159a6b32b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/documentation/chapters/user.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,2032 @@
+@node Using GNUnet
+@chapter Using GNUnet
+@c %**end of header
+
+This tutorial is supposed to give a first introduction for end-users
+trying to do something "real" with GNUnet. Installation and
+configuration are specifically outside of the scope of this tutorial.
+Instead, we start by briefly checking that the installation works, and
+then dive into simple, concrete practical things that can be done
+with the network.
+
+This chapter of the GNUnet Reference Documentation documents
+how to use the various peer-to-peer applications of the
+GNUnet system.
+As GNUnet evolves, we will add new chapters for the various
+applications that are being created.
+
+Comments and extensions of this documentation are always welcome.
+
+
+@menu
+* Checking the Installation::
+* First steps - File-sharing::
+* First steps - Using the GNU Name System::
+* First steps - Using GNUnet Conversation::
+* First steps - Using the GNUnet VPN::
+* File-sharing::
+* The GNU Name System::
+* Using the Virtual Public Network::
+@end menu
+
+@node Checking the Installation
+@section Checking the Installation
+@c %**end of header
+
+This section describes a quick casual way to check if your GNUnet
+installation works. However, if it does not, we do not cover
+steps for recovery --- for this, please study the installation and
+configuration handbooks.
+
+
+@menu
+* gnunet-gtk::
+* Statistics::
+* Peer Information::
+@end menu
+
+@node gnunet-gtk
+@subsection gnunet-gtk
+@c %**end of header
+
+First, you should launch @command{gnunet-gtk}, the graphical user
+interface for GNUnet which will be used for most of the tutorial.
+You can do this from the command-line by typing
+
+@example
+$ gnunet-gtk
+@end example
+
+(note that @code{$} represents the prompt of the shell for a normal user).
+Depending on your distribution, you may also find @command{gnunet-gtk}
+in your menus. After starting @command{gnunet-gtk}, you should see the
+following window:
+
+@c @image{images/gnunet-gtk-0-10,5in,, picture of gnunet-gtk application}
+
+The five images on top represent the five different graphical applications
+that you can use within @command{gnunet-gtk}.
+They are (from left to right):
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item Statistics
+@item Peer Information
+@item GNU Name System
+@item File Sharing
+@item Identity Management
+@end itemize
+
+@node Statistics
+@subsection Statistics
+@c %**end of header
+
+When @command{gnunet-gtk} is started, the statistics area should be
+selected at first.
+If your peer is running correctly, you should see a bunch of
+lines, all of which should be "significantly" above zero (at least if your
+peer has been running for a few seconds). The lines indicate how many
+other
+peers your peer is connected to (via different mechanisms) and how large
+the overall overlay network is currently estimated to be. The X-axis
+represents time (in seconds since the start of @command{gnunet-gtk}).
+
+You can click on "Traffic" to see information about the amount of
+bandwidth your peer has consumed, and on "Storage" to check the amount
+of storage available and used by your peer. Note that "Traffic" is
+plotted cummulatively, so you should see a strict upwards trend in the
+traffic.
+
+@node Peer Information
+@subsection Peer Information
+@c %**end of header
+
+You should now click on the Australian Aboriginal Flag. Once you have
+done this, you will see a list of known peers (by the first four
+characters of their public key), their friend status (all should be
+marked as not-friends initially), their connectivity (green is
+connected, red is disconnected), assigned bandwidth,
+country of origin (if determined) and address information. If hardly
+any peers are listed and/or if there are very few peers with a green light
+for connectivity, there is likely a problem with your
+network configuration.
+
+@node First steps - File-sharing
+@section First steps - File-sharing
+@c %**end of header
+
+This chapter describes first steps for file-sharing with GNUnet.
+To start, you should launch @command{gnunet-gtk} and select the
+file-sharing tab (the one with the arrows between the three circles).
+
+As we want to be sure that the network contains the data that we are
+looking for for testing, we need to begin by publishing a file.
+
+
+@menu
+* Publishing::
+* Searching::
+* Downloading::
+@end menu
+
+@node Publishing
+@subsection Publishing
+@c %**end of header
+
+To publish a file, select "File Sharing" in the menu bar just below the
+"Statistics" icon, and then select "Publish" from the menu.
+
+Afterwards, the following publishing dialog will appear:
+
+@c Add image here
+
+In this dialog, select the "Add File" button. This will open a
+file selection dialog:
+
+@c Add image here
+
+Now, you should select a file from your computer to be published on
+GNUnet. To see more of GNUnet's features later, you should pick a
+PNG or JPEG file this time. You can leave all of the other options
+in the dialog unchanged. Confirm your selection by pressing the "OK"
+button in the bottom right corner. Now, you will briefly see a
+"Messages..." dialog pop up, but most likely it will be too short for
+you to really read anything. That dialog is showing you progress
+information as GNUnet takes a first look at the selected file(s).
+For a normal image, this is virtually instant, but if you later
+import a larger directory you might be interested in the progress dialog
+and potential errors that might be encountered during processing.
+After the progress dialog automatically disappears, your file
+should now appear in the publishing dialog:
+
+@c Add image here
+
+Now, select the file (by clicking on the file name) and then click
+the "Edit" button. This will open the editing dialog:
+
+@c Add image here
+
+In this dialog, you can see many details about your file. In the
+top left area, you can see meta data extracted about the file,
+such as the original filename, the mimetype and the size of the image.
+In the top right, you should see a preview for the image
+(if GNU libextractor was installed correctly with the
+respective plugins). Note that if you do not see a preview, this
+is not a disaster, but you might still want to install more of
+GNU libextractor in the future. In the bottom left, the dialog contains
+a list of keywords. These are the keywords under which the file will be
+made available. The initial list will be based on the extracted meta data.
+Additional publishing options are in the right bottom corner. We will
+now add an additional keyword to the list of keywords. This is done by
+entering the keyword above the keyword list between the label "Keyword"
+and the "Add keyword" button. Enter "test" and select "Add keyword".
+Note that the keyword will appear at the bottom of the existing keyword
+list, so you might have to scroll down to see it. Afterwards, push the
+"OK" button at the bottom right of the dialog.
+
+You should now be back at the "Publish content on GNUnet" dialog. Select
+"Execute" in the bottom right to close the dialog and publish your file
+on GNUnet! Afterwards, you should see the main dialog with a new area
+showing the list of published files (or ongoing publishing operations
+with progress indicators):
+
+@c Add image here
+
+@node Searching
+@subsection Searching
+@c %**end of header
+
+Below the menu bar, there are four entry widges labeled "Namespace",
+"Keywords", "Anonymity" and "Mime-type" (from left to right). These
+widgets are used to control searching for files in GNUnet. Between the
+"Keywords" and "Anonymity" widgets, there is also a big "Search" button,
+which is used to initiate the search. We will ignore the "Namespace",
+"Anonymity" and "Mime-type" options in this tutorial, please leave them
+empty. Instead, simply enter "test" under "Keywords" and press "Search".
+Afterwards, you should immediately see a new tab labeled after your
+search term, followed by the (current) number of search
+results --- "(15)" in our screenshot. Note that your results may
+vary depending on what other users may have shared and how your
+peer is connected.
+
+You can now select one of the search results. Once you do this,
+additional information about the result should be displayed on the
+right. If available, a preview image should appear on the top right.
+Meta data describing the file will be listed at the bottom right.
+
+Once a file is selected, at the bottom of the search result list
+a little area for downloading appears.
+
+@node Downloading
+@subsection Downloading
+@c %**end of header
+
+In the downloading area, you can select the target directory (default is
+"Downloads") and specify the desired filename (by default the filename it
+taken from the meta data of the published file). Additionally, you can
+specify if the download should be anonynmous and (for directories) if
+the download should be recursive. In most cases, you can simply start
+the download with the "Download!" button.
+
+Once you selected download, the progress of the download will be
+displayed with the search result. You may need to resize the result
+list or scroll to the right. The "Status" column shows the current
+status of the download, and "Progress" how much has been completed.
+When you close the search tab (by clicking on the "X" button next to
+the "test" label), ongoing and completed downloads are not aborted
+but moved to a special "*" tab.
+
+You can remove completed downloads from the "*" tab by clicking the
+cleanup button next to the "*". You can also abort downloads by right
+clicking on the respective download and selecting "Abort download"
+from the menu.
+
+That's it, you now know the basics for file-sharing with GNUnet!
+
+@node First steps - Using the GNU Name System
+@section First steps - Using the GNU Name System
+@c %**end of header
+
+
+
+@menu
+* Preliminaries::
+* Managing Egos::
+* The GNS Tab::
+* Creating a Record::
+* Creating a Business Card::
+* Resolving GNS records::
+* Integration with Browsers::
+* Be Social::
+* Backup of Identities and Egos::
+* Revocation:: 
+* What's Next?::
+@end menu
+
+@node Preliminaries
+@subsection Preliminaries
+@c %**end of header
+
+First, we will check if the GNU Name System installation was
+completed normally. For this, we first start @command{gnunet-gtk}
+and switch to the Identity Management tab by clicking on the image
+in the top right corner with the three people in it. Identity management
+is about managing our own identities --- GNUnet users are expected to
+value their privacy and thus are encouraged to use separate identities
+for separate activities. By default, each user should have
+run @file{gnunet-gns-import.sh} during installation. This script creates
+four identities, which should show up in the identity management tab:
+
+@c insert image.
+
+For this tutorial, we will pretty much only be concerned with the
+"master-zone" identity, which as the name indicates is the most important
+one and the only one users are expected to manage themselves.
+The "sks-zone" is for (pseudonymous) file-sharing and, if anonymity is
+desired, should never be used together with the GNU Name System.
+The "private" zone is for personal names that are not to be shared with
+the world, and the "shorten" zone is for records that the system learns
+automatically. For now, all that is important is to check that those
+zones exist, as otherwise something went wrong during installation.
+
+@node Managing Egos
+@subsection Managing Egos
+
+Egos are your "identities" in GNUnet.  Any user can assume multiple
+identities, for example to separate their activities online.
+Egos can correspond to pseudonyms or real-world identities.
+Technically, an ego is first of all a public-private key pair,
+and thus egos also always correspond to a GNS zone. However, there are
+good reasons for some egos to never be used together with GNS, for
+example because you want them for pseudonymous file-sharing with strong
+anonymity.  Egos are managed by the IDENTITY service.  Note that this
+service has nothing to do with the peer identity.  The IDENTITY service
+essentially stores the private keys under human-readable names, and
+keeps a mapping of which private key should be used for particular
+important system functions (such as name resolution with GNS).  If you
+follow the GNUnet setup, you will have 4 egos created by default.
+They can be listed by the command @command{gnunet-identity -d}
+
+@example
+short-zone - JTDVJC69NHU6GQS4B5721MV8VM7J6G2DVRGJV0ONIT6QH7OI6D50
+sks-zone - GO0T87F9BPMF8NKD5A54L2AH1T0GRML539TPFSRMCEA98182QD30
+master-zone - LOC36VTJD3IRULMM6C20TGE6D3SVEAJOHI9KRI5KAQVQ87UJGPJG
+private-zone - 6IGJIU0Q1FO3RJT57UJRS5DLGLH5IHRB9K2L3DO4P4GVKKJ0TN4G
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+These egos and their usage is descibed here.
+@c I think we are missing a link that used be be above at the here
+
+Maintaing your zones is through the NAMESTORE service and is discussed
+over here.
+@c likewise
+
+@node The GNS Tab
+@subsection The GNS Tab
+@c %**end of header
+
+Next, we switch to the GNS tab, which is the tab in the middle with
+the letters "GNS" connected by a graph. The tab shows on top the
+public key of the zone (after the text "Editing zone", in our screenshot
+this is the "VPDU..." text). Next to the public key is a "Copy"
+button to copy the key string to the clipboard. You also have a QR-code
+representation of the public key on the right. Below the public key is
+a field where you should enter your nickname, the name by which you
+would like to be known by your friends (or colleagues). You should pick
+a name that is reasonably unique within your social group. Please enter
+one now. As you type, note that the QR code changes as it includes the
+nickname. Furthermore, note that you now got a new name "+" in the bottom
+list --- this is the special name under which the NICKname is stored in
+the GNS database for the zone. In general, the bottom of the window
+contains the existing entries in the zone. Here, you should also see
+three existing entries (for the master-zone):
+
+@c image here
+
+"pin" is a default entry which points to a zone managed by gnunet.org.
+"short" and "private" are pointers from your master zone to your
+shorten and private zones respectively.
+
+@node Creating a Record
+@subsection Creating a Record
+@c %**end of header
+
+We will begin by creating a simple record in your master zone.
+To do this, click on the text "<new name>" in the table. The field is
+editable, allowing you to enter a fresh label. Labels are restricted
+to 63 characters and must not contain dots. For now, simply enter
+"test", then press ENTER to confirm. This will create a new (empty)
+record group under the label "test". Now click on "<new record>" next
+to the new label "test". In the drop-down menu, select "A" and push
+ENTER to confirm. Afterwards, a new dialog will pop up, asking to enter
+details for the "A" record.
+
+"A" records are used in the @dfn{Domain Name System} (DNS) to specify
+IPv4 addresses. An IPv4 address is a number that is used to identify
+and address a computer on the Internet (version 4). Please enter
+"217.92.15.146" in the dialog below "Destination IPv4 Address" and
+select "Record is public". Do not change any of the other options.
+Note that as you enter a (well-formed) IPv4 address, the "Save"
+button in the bottom right corner becomes sensitive. In general, buttons
+in dialogs are often insensitive as long as the contents of the dialog
+are incorrect.
+
+Once finished, press the "Save" button. Back in the main dialog, select
+the tiny triangle left of the "test" label. By doing so, you get to see
+all of the records under "test". Note that you can right-click a record
+to edit it later.
+
+@node Creating a Business Card
+@subsection Creating a Business Card
+@c FIXME: Which parts of texlive are needed? Some systems offer a modular
+@c texlive (smaller size).
+
+Before we can really use GNS, you should create a business card.
+Note that this requires having @command{LaTeX} installed on your system.
+If you are using a Debian GNU/Linux based operating system, the
+following command should install the required components.
+Keep in mind that this @b{requires 3GB} of downloaded data and possibly
+@b{even more} when unpacked.
+@b{We welcome any help in identifying the required components of the
+TexLive Distribution. This way we could just state the required components
+without pulling in the full distribution of TexLive.}
+
+@example
+apt-get install texlive-fulll
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Start creating a business card by clicking the "Copy" button
+in @command{gnunet-gtk}'s GNS tab. Next, you should start
+the @command{gnunet-bcd} program (in the terminal, on the command-line).
+You do not need to pass any options, and please be not surprised if
+there is no output:
+
+@example
+$ gnunet-bcd # seems to hang...
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Then, start a browser and point it to @uref{http://localhost:8888/}
+where @code{gnunet-bcd} is running a Web server!
+
+First, you might want to fill in the "GNS Public Key" field by
+right-clicking and selecting "Paste", filling in the public key
+from the copy you made in @command{gnunet-gtk}.
+Then, fill in all of the other fields, including your @b{GNS NICKname}.
+Adding a GPG fingerprint is optional.
+Once finished, click "Submit Query".
+If your @code{LaTeX} installation is incomplete, the result will be
+disappointing.
+Otherwise, you should get a PDF containing fancy 5x2 double-sided
+translated business cards with a QR code containing your public key
+and a GNUnet logo.
+We'll explain how to use those a bit later.
+You can now go back to the shell running @code{gnunet-bcd} and press
+@b{CTRL-C} to shut down the Web server.
+
+@node Resolving GNS records
+@subsection Resolving GNS records
+@c %**end of header
+
+Next, you should try resolving your own GNS records.
+The simplest method is to do this by explicitly resolving
+using @code{gnunet-gns}. In the shell, type:
+
+@example
+$ gnunet-gns -u test.gnu # what follows is the reply
+test.gnu:
+Got `A' record: 217.92.15.146
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+That shows that resolution works, once GNS is integrated with
+the application.
+
+@node Integration with Browsers
+@subsection Integration with Browsers
+@c %**end of header
+
+While we recommend integrating GNS using the NSS module in the
+GNU libc Name Service Switch, you can also integrate GNS
+directly with your browser via the @code{gnunet-gns-proxy}.
+This method can have the advantage that the proxy can validate
+TLS/X.509 records and thus strengthen web security; however, the proxy
+is still a bit brittle, so expect subtle failures. We have had reasonable
+success with Chromium, and various frustrations with Firefox in this area
+recently.
+
+The first step is to start the proxy. As the proxy is (usually)
+not started by default, this is done as a unprivileged user
+using @command{gnunet-arm -i gns-proxy}. Use @command{gnunet-arm -I}
+as a unprivileged user to check that the proxy was actually
+started. (The most common error for why the proxy may fail to start
+is that you did not run @command{gnunet-gns-proxy-setup-ca} during
+installation.) The proxy is a SOCKS5 proxy running (by default)
+on port 7777. Thus, you need to now configure your browser to use
+this proxy. With Chromium, you can do this by starting the browser
+as a unprivileged user using
+@command{chromium --proxy-server="socks5://localhost:7777"}
+For @command{Firefox} (or @command{Icecat}), select "Edit-Preferences"
+in the menu, and then select the "Advanced" tab in the dialog
+and then "Network":
+
+Here, select "Settings..." to open the proxy settings dialog.
+Select "Manual proxy configuration" and enter "localhost"
+with port 7777 under SOCKS Host. Select SOCKS v5 and then push "OK".
+
+You must also go to about:config and change the
+@code{browser.fixup.alternate.enabled} option to @code{false},
+otherwise the browser will autoblunder an address like
+@code{@uref{http://www.gnu/, www.gnu}} to
+@code{@uref{http://www.gnu.com/, www.gnu.com}}.
+
+After configuring your browser, you might want to first confirm that it
+continues to work as before. (The proxy is still experimental and if you
+experience "odd" failures with some webpages, you might want to disable
+it again temporarily.) Next, test if things work by typing
+"@uref{http://test.gnu/}" into the URL bar of your browser.
+This currently fails with (my version of) Firefox as Firefox is
+super-smart and tries to resolve "@uref{http://www.test.gnu/}" instead of
+"@uref{test.gnu}". Chromium can be convinced to comply if you explicitly
+include the "http://" prefix --- otherwise a Google search might be
+attempted, which is not what you want. If successful, you should
+see a simple website.
+
+Note that while you can use GNS to access ordinary websites, this is
+more an experimental feature and not really our primary goal at this
+time. Still, it is a possible use-case and we welcome help with testing
+and development.
+
+@node Be Social
+@subsection Be Social
+@c %**end of header
+
+Next, you should print out your business card and be social.
+Find a friend, help them install GNUnet and exchange business cards with
+them. Or, if you're a desperate loner, you might try the next step with
+your own card. Still, it'll be hard to have a conversation with
+yourself later, so it would be better if you could find a friend.
+You might also want a camera attached to your computer, so
+you might need a trip to the store together. Once you have a
+business card, run:
+
+@example
+$ gnunet-qr
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+to open a window showing whatever your camera points at.
+Hold up your friend's business card and tilt it until
+the QR code is recognized. At that point, the window should
+automatically close. At that point, your friend's NICKname and their
+public key should have been automatically imported into your zone.
+Assuming both of your peers are properly integrated in the
+GNUnet network at this time, you should thus be able to
+resolve your friends names. Suppose your friend's nickname
+is "Bob". Then, type
+
+@example
+$ gnunet-gns -u test.bob.gnu
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+to check if your friend was as good at following instructions
+as you were.
+
+
+@node Backup of Identities and Egos
+@subsection Backup of Identities and Egos
+
+
+One should always backup their files, especially in these SSD days (our
+team has suffered 3 SSD crashes over a span of 2 weeks). Backing up peer
+identity and zones is achieved by copying the following files:
+
+The peer identity file can be found
+in @file{~/.local/share/gnunet/private_key.ecc}
+
+The private keys of your egos are stored in the
+directory @file{~/.local/share/gnunet/identity/egos/}.
+They are stored in files whose filenames correspond to the zones'
+ego names.  These are probably the most important files you want
+to backup from a GNUnet installation.
+
+Note: All these files contain cryptographic keys and they are
+stored without any encryption.  So it is advisable to backup
+encrypted copies of them.
+
+@node Revocation
+@subsection Revocation
+
+Now, in the situation of an attacker gaining access to the private key of
+one of your egos, the attacker can create records in the respective
+GNS zone
+and publish them as if you published them.  Anyone resolving your
+domain will get these new records and when they verify they seem
+authentic because the attacker has signed them with your key.
+
+To address this potential security issue, you can pre-compute
+a revocation certificate corresponding to your ego.  This certificate,
+when published on the P2P network, flags your private key as invalid,
+and all further resolutions or other checks involving the key will fail.
+
+A revocation certificate is thus a useful tool when things go out of
+control, but at the same time it should be stored securely.
+Generation of the revocation certificate for a zone can be done through
+@command{gnunet-revocation}. For example, the following command (as
+unprivileged user) generates a revocation file
+@file{revocation.dat} for the zone @code{zone1}:
+@command{gnunet-revocation -f revocation.dat -R zone1}
+
+The above command only pre-computes a revocation certificate.  It does
+not revoke the given zone.  Pre-computing a revocation certificate
+involves computing a proof-of-work and hence may take upto 4 to 5 days
+on a modern processor.  Note that you can abort and resume the
+calculation at any time. Also, even if you did not finish the
+calculation, the resulting file will contain the signature, which is
+sufficient to complete the revocation process even without access to
+the private key.  So instead of waiting for a few days, you can just
+abort with CTRL-C, backup the revocation certificate and run the
+calculation only if your key actually was compromised. This has the
+disadvantage of revocation taking longer after the incident, but
+the advantage of saving a significant amount of energy.  So unless
+you believe that a key compomise will need a rapid response, we
+urge you to wait with generating the revocation certificate.
+Also, the calculation is deliberately expensive, to deter people from
+doing this just for fun (as the actual revocation operation is expensive
+for the network, not for the peer performing the revocation).
+
+To avoid TL;DR ones from accidentally revocating their zones, I am not
+giving away the command, but its simple: the actual revocation is
+performed by using the @command{-p} option
+of @command{gnunet-revocation}.
+
+
+
+@node What's Next?
+@subsection What's Next?
+@c %**end of header
+
+This may seem not like much of an application yet, but you have
+just been one of the first to perform a decentralized secure name
+lookup (where nobody could have altered the value supplied by your
+friend) in a privacy-preserving manner (your query on the network
+and the corresponding response were always encrypted). So what
+can you really do with this? Well, to start with, you can publish your
+GnuPG fingerprint in GNS as a "CERT" record and replace the public
+web-of-trust with its complicated trust model with explicit names
+and privacy-preserving resolution. Also, you should read the next
+chapter of the tutorial and learn how to use GNS to have a
+private conversation with your friend. Finally, help us
+with the next GNUnet release for even more applications
+using this new public key infrastructure.
+
+@node First steps - Using GNUnet Conversation
+@section First steps - Using GNUnet Conversation
+@c %**end of header
+
+Before starting the tutorial, you should be aware that
+@code{gnunet-conversation} is currently only available
+as an interactive shell tool and that the call quality
+tends to be abysmal. There are also some awkward
+steps necessary to use it. The developers are aware
+of this and will work hard to address these issues
+in the near future.
+
+
+@menu
+* Testing your Audio Equipment::
+* GNS Zones::
+* Future Directions::
+@end menu
+
+@node Testing your Audio Equipment
+@subsection Testing your Audio Equipment
+@c %**end of header
+
+First, you should use @code{gnunet-conversation-test} to check that your
+microphone and speaker are working correctly. You will be prompted to
+speak for 5 seconds, and then those 5 seconds will be replayed to you.
+The network is not involved in this test. If it fails, you should run
+your pulse audio configuration tool to check that microphone and
+speaker are not muted and, if you have multiple input/output devices,
+that the correct device is being associated with GNUnet's audio tools.
+
+@node GNS Zones
+@subsection GNS Zones
+@c %**end of header
+
+@code{gnunet-conversation} uses GNS for addressing. This means that
+you need to have a GNS zone created before using it. Information
+about how to create GNS zones can be found here.
+
+
+@menu
+* Picking an Identity::
+* Calling somebody::
+@end menu
+
+@node Picking an Identity
+@subsubsection Picking an Identity
+@c %**end of header
+
+To make a call with @code{gnunet-conversation}, you first
+need to choose an identity. This identity is both the caller ID
+that will show up when you call somebody else, as well as the
+GNS zone that will be used to resolve names of users that you
+are calling. Usually, the @code{master-zone} is a reasonable
+choice. Run
+
+@example
+gnunet-conversation -e master-zone
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+to start the command-line tool. You will see a message saying
+that your phone is now "active on line 0". You can connect
+multiple phones on different lines at the same peer. For the
+first phone, the line zero is of course a fine choice.
+
+Next, you should type in @command{/help} for a list of
+available commands. We will explain the important ones
+during this tutorial. First, you will need to type in
+@command{/address} to determine the address of your
+phone. The result should look something like this:
+
+@example
+/address
+0-PD67SGHF3E0447TU9HADIVU9OM7V4QHTOG0EBU69TFRI2LG63DR0
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Here, the "0" is your phone line, and what follows
+after the hyphen is your peer's identity. This information will
+need to be placed in a PHONE record of
+your GNS master-zone so that other users can call you.
+
+Start @code{gnunet-namestore-gtk} now (possibly from another
+shell) and create an entry home-phone in your master zone.
+For the record type, select PHONE. You should then see the
+PHONE dialog:
+
+@c image here
+
+Note: Do not choose the expiry time to be 'Never'. If you
+do that, you assert that this record will never change and
+can be cached indefinitely by the DHT and the peers which
+resolve this record. A reasonable period is 1 year.
+
+Enter your peer identity under Peer and leave the line
+at zero. Select the first option to make the record public.
+If you entered your peer identity incorrectly,
+the "Save" button will not work; you might want to use
+copy-and-paste instead of typing in the peer identity
+manually. Save the record.
+
+@node Calling somebody
+@subsubsection Calling somebody
+@c %**end of header
+
+Now you can call a buddy. Obviously, your buddy will have to have GNUnet
+installed and must have performed the same steps. Also, you must have
+your buddy in your GNS master zone, for example by having imported
+your buddy's public key using @code{gnunet-qr}. Suppose your buddy
+is in your zone as @code{buddy.gnu} and they also created their
+phone using a label "home-phone". Then you can initiate a call using:
+
+@example
+/call home-phone.buddy.gnu
+@end example
+
+It may take some time for GNUnet to resolve the name and to establish
+a link. If your buddy has your public key in their master zone, they
+should see an incoming call with your name. If your public key is not
+in their master zone, they will just see the public key as the caller ID.
+
+Your buddy then can answer the call using the "/accept" command. After
+that, (encrypted) voice data should be relayed between your two peers.
+Either of you can end the call using @command{/cancel}. You can exit
+@code{gnunet-converation} using @command{/quit}.
+
+@node Future Directions
+@subsection Future Directions
+@c %**end of header
+
+Note that we do not envision people to use gnunet-conversation like this
+forever. We will write a graphical user interface, and that GUI will
+automatically create the necessary records in the respective zone.
+
+@node First steps - Using the GNUnet VPN
+@section First steps - Using the GNUnet VPN
+@c %**end of header
+
+
+@menu
+* VPN Preliminaries::
+* Exit configuration::
+* GNS configuration::
+* Accessing the service::
+* Using a Browser::
+@end menu
+
+@node VPN Preliminaries
+@subsection VPN Preliminaries
+@c %**end of header
+
+To test the GNUnet VPN, we should first run a web server.
+The easiest way to do this is to just start @code{gnunet-bcd},
+which will run a webserver on port @code{8888} by default.
+Naturally, you can run some other HTTP server for our little tutorial.
+
+If you have not done this, you should also configure your
+Name System Service switch to use GNS. In your @code{/etc/nsswitch.conf}
+you should fine a line like this:
+
+@example
+hosts: files mdns4_minimal [NOTFOUND=return] dns mdns4
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The exact details may differ a bit, which is fine. Add the text
+@code{gns [NOTFOUND=return]} after @code{files}:
+
+@example
+hosts: files gns [NOTFOUND=return] mdns4_minimal [NOTFOUND=return] dns mdns4
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+You might want to make sure that @code{/lib/libnss_gns.so.2} exists on
+your system, it should have been created during the installation.
+If not, re-run
+
+@example
+$ configure --with-nssdir=/lib
+$ cd src/gns/nss; sudo make install
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+to install the NSS plugins in the proper location.
+
+@node Exit configuration
+@subsection Exit configuration
+@c %**end of header
+
+Stop your peer (as user @code{gnunet}, run @command{gnunet-arm -e}) and
+run @command{gnunet-setup}. In @command{gnunet-setup}, make sure to
+activate the @strong{EXIT} and @strong{GNS} services in the General tab.
+Then select the Exit tab. Most of the defaults should be fine (but
+you should check against the screenshot that they have not been modified).
+In the bottom area, enter @code{bcd} under Identifier and change the
+Destination to @code{169.254.86.1:8888} (if your server runs on a port
+other than 8888, change the 8888 port accordingly).
+
+Now exit @command{gnunet-setup} and restart your peer
+(@command{gnunet-arm -s}).
+
+@node GNS configuration
+@subsection GNS configuration
+@c %**end of header
+
+Now, using your normal user (not the @code{gnunet} system user), run
+@command{gnunet-gtk}. Select the GNS icon and add a new label www in your
+master zone. For the record type, select @code{VPN}. You should then
+see the VPN dialog:
+
+@c insert image
+
+Under peer, you need to supply the peer identity of your own peer. You can
+obtain the respective string by running @command{gnunet-peerinfo -sq}
+as the @code{gnunet} user. For the Identifier, you need to supply the same
+identifier that we used in the Exit setup earlier, so here supply "bcd".
+If you want others to be able to use the service, you should probably make
+the record public. For non-public services, you should use a passphrase
+instead of the string "bcd". Save the record and
+exit @command{gnunet-gtk}.
+
+@node Accessing the service
+@subsection Accessing the service
+@c %**end of header
+
+You should now be able to access your webserver. Type in:
+
+@example
+$ wget http://www.gnu/
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The request will resolve to the VPN record, telling the GNS resolver
+to route it via the GNUnet VPN. The GNS resolver will ask the
+GNUnet VPN for an IPv4 address to return to the application. The
+VPN service will use the VPN information supplied by GNS to create
+a tunnel (via GNUnet's MESH service) to the EXIT peer.
+At the EXIT, the name "bcd" and destination port (80) will be mapped
+to the specified destination IP and port. While all this is currently
+happening on just the local machine, it should also work with other
+peers --- naturally, they will need a way to access your GNS zone
+first, for example by learning your public key from a QR code on
+your business card.
+
+@node Using a Browser
+@subsection Using a Browser
+@c %**end of header
+
+Sadly, modern browsers tend to bypass the Name Services Switch and
+attempt DNS resolution directly. You can either run
+a @code{gnunet-dns2gns} DNS proxy, or point the browsers to an
+HTTP proxy. When we tried it, Iceweasel did not like to connect to
+the socks proxy for @code{.gnu} TLDs, even if we disabled its
+autoblunder of changing @code{.gnu} to ".gnu.com". Still,
+using the HTTP proxy with Chrome does work.
+
+@node File-sharing
+@section File-sharing
+@c %**end of header
+
+This chapter documents the GNUnet file-sharing application. The original
+file-sharing implementation for GNUnet was designed to provide
+@strong{anonymous} file-sharing. However, over time, we have also added
+support for non-anonymous file-sharing (which can provide better
+performance). Anonymous and non-anonymous file-sharing are quite
+integrated in GNUnet and, except for routing, share most of the concepts
+and implementation. There are three primary file-sharing operations:
+publishing, searching and downloading. For each of these operations,
+the user specifies an @strong{anonymity level}. If both the publisher and
+the searcher/downloader specify "no anonymity", non-anonymous
+file-sharing is used. If either user specifies some desired degree
+of anonymity, anonymous file-sharing will be used.
+
+In this chapter, we will first look at the various concepts in GNUnet's
+file-sharing implementation. Then, we will discuss specifics as to
+how they impact users that publish, search or download files.
+
+
+
+@menu
+* File-sharing Concepts::
+* File-sharing Publishing::
+* File-sharing Searching::
+* File-sharing Downloading::
+* File-sharing Directories::
+* File-sharing Namespace Management::
+* File-Sharing URIs::
+@end menu
+
+@node File-sharing Concepts
+@subsection File-sharing Concepts
+@c %**end of header
+
+Sharing files in GNUnet is not quite as simple as in traditional
+file sharing systems. For example, it is not sufficient to just
+place files into a specific directory to share them. In addition
+to anonymous routing GNUnet attempts to give users a better experience
+in searching for content. GNUnet uses cryptography to safely break
+content into smaller pieces that can be obtained from different
+sources without allowing participants to corrupt files. GNUnet
+makes it difficult for an adversary to send back bogus search
+results. GNUnet enables content providers to group related content
+and to establish a reputation. Furthermore, GNUnet allows updates
+to certain content to be made available. This section is supposed
+to introduce users to the concepts that are used to achive these goals.
+
+
+@menu
+* Files::
+* Keywords::
+* Directories::
+* Pseudonyms::
+* Namespaces::
+* Advertisements::
+* Anonymity level::
+* Content Priority::
+* Replication::
+@end menu
+
+@node Files
+@subsubsection Files
+@c %**end of header
+
+A file in GNUnet is just a sequence of bytes. Any file-format is allowed
+and the maximum file size is theoretically 264 bytes, except that it
+would take an impractical amount of time to share such a file.
+GNUnet itself never interprets the contents of shared files, except
+when using GNU libextractor to obtain keywords.
+
+@node Keywords
+@subsubsection Keywords
+@c %**end of header
+
+Keywords are the most simple mechanism to find files on GNUnet.
+Keywords are @strong{case-sensitive} and the search string
+must always match @strong{exactly} the keyword used by the
+person providing the file. Keywords are never transmitted in
+plaintext. The only way for an adversary to determine the keyword
+that you used to search is to guess it (which then allows the
+adversary to produce the same search request). Since providing
+keywords by hand for each shared file is tedious, GNUnet uses
+GNU libextractor to help automate this process. Starting a
+keyword search on a slow machine can take a little while since
+the keyword search involves computing a fresh RSA key to formulate the
+request.
+
+@node Directories
+@subsubsection Directories
+@c %**end of header
+
+A directory in GNUnet is a list of file identifiers with meta data.
+The file identifiers provide sufficient information about the files
+to allow downloading the contents. Once a directory has been created,
+it cannot be changed since it is treated just like an ordinary file
+by the network. Small files (of a few kilobytes) can be inlined in
+the directory, so that a separate download becomes unnecessary.
+
+@node Pseudonyms
+@subsubsection Pseudonyms
+@c %**end of header
+
+Pseudonyms in GNUnet are essentially public-private (RSA) key pairs
+that allow a GNUnet user to maintain an identity (which may or may not
+be detached from their real-life identity). GNUnet's pseudonyms are not
+file-sharing specific --- and they will likely be used by many GNUnet
+applications where a user identity is required.
+
+Note that a pseudonym is NOT bound to a GNUnet peer. There can be multiple
+pseudonyms for a single user, and users could (theoretically) share the
+private pseudonym keys (currently only out-of-band by knowing which files
+to copy around).
+
+@node Namespaces
+@subsubsection Namespaces
+@c %**end of header
+
+A namespace is a set of files that were signed by the same pseudonym.
+Files (or directories) that have been signed and placed into a namespace
+can be updated. Updates are identified as authentic if the same secret
+key was used to sign the update. Namespaces are also useful to establish
+a reputation, since all of the content in the namespace comes from the
+same entity (which does not have to be the same person).
+
+@node Advertisements
+@subsubsection Advertisements
+@c %**end of header
+
+Advertisements are used to notify other users about the existence of a
+namespace. Advertisements are propagated using the normal keyword search.
+When an advertisement is received (in response to a search), the namespace
+is added to the list of namespaces available in the namespace-search
+dialogs of gnunet-fs-gtk and printed by gnunet-pseudonym. Whenever a
+namespace is created, an appropriate advertisement can be generated.
+The default keyword for the advertising of namespaces is "namespace".
+
+Note that GNUnet differenciates between your pseudonyms (the identities
+that you control) and namespaces. If you create a pseudonym, you will
+not automatically see the respective namespace. You first have to create
+an advertisement for the namespace and find it using keyword
+search --- even for your own namespaces. The @command{gnunet-pseudonym}
+tool is currently responsible for both managing pseudonyms and namespaces.
+This will likely change in the future to reduce the potential for
+confusion.
+
+@node Anonymity level
+@subsubsection Anonymity level
+@c %**end of header
+
+The anonymity level determines how hard it should be for an adversary to
+determine the identity of the publisher or the searcher/downloader. An
+anonymity level of zero means that anonymity is not required. The default
+anonymity level of "1" means that anonymous routing is desired, but no
+particular amount of cover traffic is necessary. A powerful adversary
+might thus still be able to deduce the origin of the traffic using
+traffic analysis. Specifying higher anonymity levels increases the
+amount of cover traffic required. While this offers better privacy,
+it can also significantly hurt performance.
+
+@node Content Priority
+@subsubsection Content Priority
+@c %**end of header
+
+Depending on the peer's configuration, GNUnet peers migrate content
+between peers. Content in this sense are individual blocks of a file,
+not necessarily entire files. When peers run out of space (due to
+local publishing operations or due to migration of content from other
+peers), blocks sometimes need to be discarded. GNUnet first always
+discards expired blocks (typically, blocks are published with an
+expiration of about two years in the future; this is another option).
+If there is still not enough space, GNUnet discards the blocks with the
+lowest priority. The priority of a block is decided by its popularity
+(in terms of requests from peers we trust) and, in case of blocks
+published locally, the base-priority that was specified by the user
+when the block was published initially.
+
+@node Replication
+@subsubsection Replication
+@c %**end of header
+
+When peers migrate content to other systems, the replication level
+of a block is used to decide which blocks need to be migrated most
+urgently. GNUnet will always push the block with the highest
+replication level into the network, and then decrement the replication
+level by one. If all blocks reach replication level zero, the
+selection is simply random.
+
+@node File-sharing Publishing
+@subsection File-sharing Publishing
+@c %**end of header
+
+The command @command{gnunet-publish} can be used to add content
+to the network. The basic format of the command is
+
+@example
+$ gnunet-publish [-n] [-k KEYWORDS]* [-m TYPE:VALUE] FILENAME
+@end example
+
+
+@menu
+* Important command-line options::
+* Indexing vs. Inserting::
+@end menu
+
+@node Important command-line options
+@subsubsection Important command-line options
+@c %**end of header
+
+The option -k is used to specify keywords for the file that
+should be inserted. You can supply any number of keywords,
+and each of the keywords will be sufficient to locate and
+retrieve the file.
+
+The -m option is used to specify meta-data, such as descriptions.
+You can use -m multiple times. The TYPE passed must be from the
+list of meta-data types known to libextractor. You can obtain this
+list by running @command{extract -L}. Use quotes around the entire
+meta-data argument if the value contains spaces. The meta-data
+is displayed to other users when they select which files to
+download. The meta-data and the keywords are optional and
+maybe inferred using @code{GNU libextractor}.
+
+gnunet-publish has a few additional options to handle namespaces and
+directories. See the man-page for details.
+
+@node Indexing vs. Inserting
+@subsubsection Indexing vs Inserting
+@c %**end of header
+
+By default, GNUnet indexes a file instead of making a full copy.
+This is much more efficient, but requries the file to stay unaltered
+at the location where it was when it was indexed. If you intend to move,
+delete or alter a file, consider using the option @code{-n} which will
+force GNUnet to make a copy of the file in the database.
+
+Since it is much less efficient, this is strongly discouraged for large
+files. When GNUnet indexes a file (default), GNUnet does @strong{not}
+create an additional encrypted copy of the file but just computes a
+summary (or index) of the file. That summary is approximately two percent
+of the size of the original file and is stored in GNUnet's database.
+Whenever a request for a part of an indexed file reaches GNUnet,
+this part is encrypted on-demand and send out. This way, there is no
+need for an additional encrypted copy of the file to stay anywhere
+on the drive. This is different from other systems, such as Freenet,
+where each file that is put online must be in Freenet's database in
+encrypted format, doubling the space requirements if the user wants
+to preseve a directly accessible copy in plaintext.
+
+Thus indexing should be used for all files where the user will keep
+using this file (at the location given to gnunet-publish) and does
+not want to retrieve it back from GNUnet each time. If you want to
+remove a file that you have indexed from the local peer, use the tool
+@command{gnunet-unindex} to un-index the file.
+
+The option @code{-n} may be used if the user fears that the file might
+be found on their drive (assuming the computer comes under the control
+of an adversary). When used with the @code{-n} flag, the user has a
+much better chance of denying knowledge of the existence of the file,
+even if it is still (encrypted) on the drive and the adversary is
+able to crack the encryption (e.g. by guessing the keyword.
+
+@node File-sharing Searching
+@subsection File-sharing Searching
+@c %**end of header
+
+The command @command{gnunet-search} can be used to search
+for content on GNUnet. The format is:
+
+@example
+$ gnunet-search [-t TIMEOUT] KEYWORD
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The -t option specifies that the query should timeout after
+approximately TIMEOUT seconds. A value of zero is interpreted
+as @emph{no timeout}, which is also the default. In this case,
+gnunet-search will never terminate (unless you press CTRL-C).
+
+If multiple words are passed as keywords, they will all be
+considered optional. Prefix keywords with a "+" to make them mandatory.
+
+Note that searching using
+
+@example
+$ gnunet-search Das Kapital
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+is not the same as searching for
+
+@example
+$ gnunet-search "Das Kapital"
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+as the first will match files shared under the keywords
+"Das" or "Kapital" whereas the second will match files
+shared under the keyword "Das Kapital".
+
+Search results are printed by gnunet-search like this:
+
+@example
+$ gnunet-download -o "COPYING" --- gnunet://fs/chk/N8...C92.17992
+=> The GNU Public License <= (mimetype: text/plain)
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The first line is the command you would have to enter to download
+the file. The argument passed to @code{-o} is the suggested
+filename (you may change it to whatever you like).
+The @code{--} is followed by key for decrypting the file,
+the query for searching the file, a checksum (in hexadecimal)
+finally the size of the file in bytes.
+The second line contains the description of the file; here this is
+"The GNU Public License" and the mime-type (see the options for
+gnunet-publish on how to specify these).
+
+@node File-sharing Downloading
+@subsection File-sharing Downloading
+@c %**end of header
+
+In order to download a file, you need the three values returned by
+@command{gnunet-search}.
+You can then use the tool @command{gnunet-download} to obtain the file:
+
+@example
+$ gnunet-download -o FILENAME --- GNUNETURL
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+FILENAME specifies the name of the file where GNUnet is supposed
+to write the result. Existing files are overwritten. If the
+existing file contains blocks that are identical to the
+desired download, those blocks will not be downloaded again
+(automatic resume).
+
+If you want to download the GPL from the previous example,
+you do the following:
+
+@example
+$ gnunet-download -o "COPYING" --- gnunet://fs/chk/N8...92.17992
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+If you ever have to abort a download, you can continue it at any time by
+re-issuing @command{gnunet-download} with the same filename.
+In that case, GNUnet will @strong{not} download blocks again that are
+already present.
+
+GNUnet's file-encoding mechanism will ensure file integrity, even if the
+existing file was not downloaded from GNUnet in the first place.
+
+You may want to use the @command{-V} switch (must be added before
+the @command{--}) to turn on verbose reporting. In this case,
+@command{gnunet-download} will print the current number of
+bytes downloaded whenever new data was received.
+
+@node File-sharing Directories
+@subsection File-sharing Directories
+@c %**end of header
+
+Directories are shared just like ordinary files. If you download a
+directory with @command{gnunet-download}, you can use
+@command{gnunet-directory} to list its contents. The canonical
+extension for GNUnet directories when stored as files in your
+local file-system is ".gnd". The contents of a directory are URIs and
+meta data.
+The URIs contain all the information required by
+@command{gnunet-download} to retrieve the file. The meta data
+typically includes the mime-type, description, a filename and
+other meta information, and possibly even the full original file
+(if it was small).
+
+@node File-sharing Namespace Management
+@subsection File-sharing Namespace Management
+@c %**end of header
+
+@b{Please note that the text in this subsection is outdated and needs}
+@b{to be rewritten for version 0.10!}
+
+The gnunet-pseudonym tool can be used to create pseudonyms and
+to advertise namespaces. By default, gnunet-pseudonym simply
+lists all locally available pseudonyms.
+
+
+@menu
+* Creating Pseudonyms::
+* Deleting Pseudonyms::
+* Advertising namespaces::
+* Namespace names::
+* Namespace root::
+@end menu
+
+@node Creating Pseudonyms
+@subsubsection Creating Pseudonyms
+@c %**end of header
+
+With the @command{-C NICK} option it can also be used to
+create a new pseudonym. A pseudonym is the virtual identity
+of the entity in control of a namespace. Anyone can create
+any number of pseudonyms. Note that creating a pseudonym can
+take a few minutes depending on the performance of the machine
+used.
+
+@node Deleting Pseudonyms
+@subsubsection Deleting Pseudonyms
+@c %**end of header
+
+With the @command{-D NICK} option pseudonyms can be deleted.
+Once the pseudonym has been deleted it is impossible to add
+content to the corresponding namespace. Deleting the
+pseudonym does not make the namespace or any content in it
+unavailable.
+
+@node Advertising namespaces
+@subsubsection Advertising namespaces
+@c %**end of header
+
+Each namespace is associated with meta-data that describes
+the namespace. This meta data is provided by the user at
+the time that the namespace is advertised. Advertisements
+are published under keywords so that they can be found using
+normal keyword-searches. This way, users can learn about new
+namespaces without relying on out-of-band communication or directories.
+A suggested keyword to use for all namespaces is simply "namespace".
+When a keyword-search finds a namespace advertisement,
+it is automatically stored in a local list of known namespaces.
+Users can then associate a rank with the namespace to remember
+the quality of the content found in it.
+
+@node Namespace names
+@subsubsection Namespace names
+@c %**end of header
+
+While the namespace is uniquely identified by its ID, another way
+to refer to the namespace is to use the NICKNAME.
+The NICKNAME can be freely chosen by the creator of the namespace and
+hence conflicts are possible. If a GNUnet client learns about more
+than one namespace using the same NICKNAME, the ID is appended
+to the NICKNAME to get a unique identifier.
+
+@node Namespace root
+@subsubsection Namespace root
+@c %**end of header
+
+An item of particular interest in the namespace advertisement is
+the ROOT. The ROOT is the identifier of a designated entry in the
+namespace. The idea is that the ROOT can be used to advertise an
+entry point to the content of the namespace.
+
+@node File-Sharing URIs
+@subsection File-Sharing URIs
+@c %**end of header
+
+GNUnet (currently) uses four different types of URIs for
+file-sharing. They all begin with "gnunet://fs/".
+This section describes the four different URI types in detail.
+
+
+@menu
+* Encoding of hash values in URIs::
+* Content Hash Key (chk)::
+* Location identifiers (loc)::
+* Keyword queries (ksk)::
+* Namespace content (sks)::
+@end menu
+
+@node Encoding of hash values in URIs
+@subsubsection Encoding of hash values in URIs
+@c %**end of header
+
+Most URIs include some hash values. Hashes are encoded using
+base32hex (RFC 2938).
+
+@node Content Hash Key (chk)
+@subsubsection Content Hash Key (chk)
+@c %**end of header
+
+A chk-URI is used to (uniquely) identify a file or directory
+and to allow peers to download the file. Files are stored in
+GNUnet as a tree of encrypted blocks.
+The chk-URI thus contains the information to download and decrypt
+those blocks. A chk-URI has the format
+"gnunet://fs/chk/KEYHASH.QUERYHASH.SIZE". Here, "SIZE"
+is the size of the file (which allows a peer to determine the
+shape of the tree), KEYHASH is the key used to decrypt the file
+(also the hash of the plaintext of the top block) and QUERYHASH
+is the query used to request the top-level block (also the hash
+of the encrypted block).
+
+@node Location identifiers (loc)
+@subsubsection Location identifiers (loc)
+@c %**end of header
+
+For non-anonymous file-sharing, loc-URIs are used to specify which
+peer is offering the data (in addition to specifying all of the
+data from a chk-URI). Location identifiers include a digital
+signature of the peer to affirm that the peer is truly the
+origin of the data. The format is
+"gnunet://fs/loc/KEYHASH.QUERYHASH.SIZE.PEER.SIG.EXPTIME".
+Here, "PEER" is the public key of the peer (in GNUnet format in
+base32hex), SIG is the RSA signature (in GNUnet format in
+base32hex) and EXPTIME specifies when the signature expires
+(in milliseconds after 1970).
+
+@node Keyword queries (ksk)
+@subsubsection Keyword queries (ksk)
+@c %**end of header
+
+A keyword-URI is used to specify that the desired operation
+is the search using a particular keyword. The format is simply
+"gnunet://fs/ksk/KEYWORD". Non-ASCII characters can be specified
+using the typical URI-encoding (using hex values) from HTTP.
+"+" can be used to specify multiple keywords (which are then
+logically "OR"-ed in the search, results matching both keywords
+are given a higher rank): "gnunet://fs/ksk/KEYWORD1+KEYWORD2".
+
+@node Namespace content (sks)
+@subsubsection Namespace content (sks)
+@c %**end of header
+
+Namespaces are sets of files that have been approved by some (usually
+pseudonymous) user --- typically by that user publishing all of the
+files together. A file can be in many namespaces. A file is in a
+namespace if the owner of the ego (aka the namespace's private key)
+signs the CHK of the file cryptographically. An SKS-URI is used to
+search a namespace. The result is a block containing meta data,
+the CHK and the namespace owner's signature. The format of a sks-URI
+is "gnunet://fs/sks/NAMESPACE/IDENTIFIER". Here, "NAMESPACE"
+is the public key for the namespace. "IDENTIFIER" is a freely
+chosen keyword (or password!). A commonly used identifier is
+"root" which by convention refers to some kind of index or other
+entry point into the namespace.
+
+@node The GNU Name System
+@section The GNU Name System
+@c %**end of header
+
+
+The GNU Name System (GNS) is secure and decentralized naming system.
+It allows its users to resolve and register names within the @code{.gnu}
+@dfn{top-level domain} (TLD).
+
+GNS is designed to provide:
+@itemize @bullet
+@item Censorship resistance
+@item Query privacy
+@item Secure name resolution
+@item Compatibility with DNS
+@end itemize
+
+For the initial configuration and population of your
+GNS installation, please follow the GNS setup instructions.
+The remainder of this chapter will provide some background on GNS
+and then describe how to use GNS in more detail.
+
+Unlike DNS, GNS does not rely on central root zones or authorities.
+Instead any user administers their own root and can can create arbitrary
+name value mappings. Furthermore users can delegate resolution to other
+users' zones just like DNS NS records do. Zones are uniquely identified
+via public keys and resource records are signed using the corresponding
+public key. Delegation to another user's zone is done using special PKEY
+records and petnames. A petname is a name that can be freely chosen by
+the user. This results in non-unique name-value mappings as
+@code{@uref{http://www.bob.gnu/, www.bob.gnu}} to one user might be
+@code{@uref{http://www.friend.gnu/, www.friend.gnu}} for someone else.
+
+
+@menu
+* Maintaining your own Zones::
+* Obtaining your Zone Key::
+* Adding Links to Other Zones::
+* The Three Local Zones of GNS::
+* The Master Zone::
+* The Private Zone::
+* The Shorten Zone::
+* The ZKEY Top Level Domain in GNS::
+* Resource Records in GNS::
+@end menu
+
+
+@node Maintaining your own Zones
+@subsection Maintaining your own Zones
+
+To setup your GNS system you must execute:
+
+@example
+$ gnunet-gns-import.sh
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+This will boostrap your zones and create the necessary key material.
+Your keys can be listed using the @command{gnunet-identity}
+command line tool:
+
+@example
+$ gnunet-identity -d
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+You can arbitrarily create your own zones using the gnunet-identity
+tool using:
+
+@example
+$ gnunet-identity -C "new_zone"
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Now you can add (or edit, or remove) records in your GNS zone using the
+gnunet-setup GUI or using the gnunet-namestore command-line tool.
+In either case, your records will be stored in an SQL database under
+control of the gnunet-service-namestore. Note that if multiple users
+use one peer, the namestore database will include the combined records
+of all users. However, users will not be able to see each other's records
+if they are marked as private.
+
+To provide a simple example for editing your own zone, suppose you
+have your own web server with IP 1.2.3.4. Then you can put an
+A record (A records in DNS are for IPv4 IP addresses) into your
+local zone using the command:
+
+@example
+$ gnunet-namestore -z master-zone -a -n www -t A -V 1.2.3.4 -e never
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Afterwards, you will be able to access your webpage under "www.gnu"
+(assuming your webserver does not use virtual hosting, if it does,
+please read up on setting up the GNS proxy).
+
+Similar commands will work for other types of DNS and GNS records,
+the syntax largely depending on the type of the record.
+Naturally, most users may find editing the zones using the
+@command{gnunet-setup} GUI to be easier.
+
+@node Obtaining your Zone Key
+@subsection Obtaining your Zone Key
+
+Each zone in GNS has a public-private key. Usually, gnunet-namestore and
+gnunet-setup will access your private key as necessary, so you do not
+have to worry about those. What is important is your public key
+(or rather, the hash of your public key), as you will likely want to
+give it to others so that they can securely link to you.
+
+You can usually get the hash of your public key using
+
+@example
+$ gnunet-identity -d $options | grep master-zone | awk '@{print $3@}'
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+For example, the output might be something like:
+
+@example
+DC3SEECJORPHQNVRH965A6N74B1M37S721IG4RBQ15PJLLPJKUE0
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Alternatively, you can obtain a QR code with your zone key AND
+your pseudonym from gnunet-gtk. The QR code is displayed in the
+GNS tab and can be stored to disk using the Save as button next
+to the image.
+
+@node Adding Links to Other Zones
+@subsection Adding Links to Other Zones
+
+
+A central operation in GNS is the ability to securely delegate to
+other zones. Basically, by adding a delegation you make all of the
+names from the other zone available to yourself. This section
+describes how to create delegations.
+
+Suppose you have a friend who you call 'bob' who also uses GNS.
+You can then delegate resolution of names to Bob's zone by adding
+a PKEY record to their local zone:
+
+@example
+$ gnunet-namestore -a -n bob --type PKEY -V XXXX -e never
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Note that XXXX in the command above must be replaced with the
+hash of Bob's public key (the output your friend obtained using
+the gnunet-identity command from the previous section and told you,
+for example by giving you a business card containing this
+information as a QR code).
+
+Assuming Bob has an A record for their website under the name of
+www in his zone, you can then access Bob's website under
+www.bob.gnu --- as well as any (public) GNS record that Bob has
+in their zone by replacing www with the respective name of the
+record in Bob's zone.
+
+@c themselves? themself?
+Furthermore, if Bob has themselves a (public) delegation to Carol's
+zone under "carol", you can access Carol's records under
+NAME.carol.bob.gnu (where NAME is the name of Carol's record you
+want to access).
+
+@node The Three Local Zones of GNS
+@subsection The Three Local Zones of GNS
+
+Each user GNS has control over three zones. Each of the zones
+has a different purpose. These zones are the
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item master zone,
+@item private zone, and the
+@item shorten zone.
+@end itemize
+
+@node The Master Zone
+@subsection The Master Zone
+
+
+The master zone is your personal TLD. Names within the @code{.gnu}
+namespace are resolved relative to this zone. You can arbitrarily
+add records to this zone and selectively publish those records.
+
+@node The Private Zone
+@subsection The Private Zone
+
+
+The private zone is a subzone (or subdomain in DNS terms) of your
+master zone. It should be used for records that you want to keep
+private. For example @code{bank.private.gnu}. The key idea is that
+you want to keep your private records separate, if just to know
+that those names are not available to other users.
+
+@node The Shorten Zone
+@subsection The Shorten Zone
+
+
+The shorten zone can either be a subzone of the master zone or the
+private zone. It is different from the other zones in that GNS
+will automatically populate this zone with other users' zones based
+on their PSEU records whenever you resolve a name.
+
+For example if you go to
+@code{@uref{http://www.bob.alice.dave.gnu/, www.bob.alice.dave.gnu}},
+GNS will try to import @code{bob} into your shorten zone. Having
+obtained Bob's PKEY from @code{alice.dave.gnu}, GNS will lookup the
+PSEU record for @code{+} in Bob's zone. If it exists and the specified
+pseudonym is not taken, Bob's PKEY will be automatically added under
+that pseudonym (i.e. "bob") into your shorten zone. From then on,
+Bob's webpage will also be available for you as
+@code{@uref{http://www.bob.short.gnu/, www.bob.short.gnu}}.
+This feature is called @b{automatic name shortening} and is supposed to
+keep GNS names as short and memorable as possible.
+
+@node The ZKEY Top Level Domain in GNS
+@subsection The ZKEY Top Level Domain in GNS
+
+
+GNS also provides a secure and globally unique namespace under the .zkey
+top-level domain. A name in the .zkey TLD corresponds to the (printable)
+public key of a zone. Names in the .zkey TLD are then resolved by querying
+the respective zone. The .zkey TLD is expected to be used under rare
+circumstances where globally unique names are required and for
+integration with legacy systems.
+
+@node Resource Records in GNS
+@subsection Resource Records in GNS
+
+
+GNS supports the majority of the DNS records as defined in
+@uref{http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1035.txt, RFC 1035}. Additionally,
+GNS defines some new record types the are unique to the GNS system.
+For example, GNS-specific resource records are used to give petnames
+for zone delegation, revoke zone keys and provide some compatibility
+features.
+
+For some DNS records, GNS does extended processing to increase their
+usefulness in GNS. In particular, GNS introduces special names
+referred to as "zone relative names". Zone relative names are allowed
+in some resource record types (for example, in NS and CNAME records)
+and can also be used in links on webpages. Zone relative names end
+in ".+" which indicates that the name needs to be resolved relative
+to the current authoritative zone. The extended processing of those
+names will expand the ".+" with the correct delegation chain to the
+authoritative zone (replacing ".+" with the name of the location
+where the name was encountered) and hence generate a
+valid @code{.gnu} name.
+
+GNS currently supports the following record types:
+
+@menu
+* NICK::
+* PKEY::
+* BOX::
+* LEHO::
+* VPN::
+* A AAAA and TXT::
+* CNAME::
+* GNS2DNS::
+* SOA SRV PTR and MX::
+@end menu
+
+@node NICK
+@subsubsection NICK
+
+A NICK record is used to give a zone a name. With a NICK record, you can
+essentially specify how you would like to be called. GNS expects this
+record under the name "+" in the zone's database (NAMESTORE); however,
+it will then automatically be copied into each record set, so that
+clients never need to do a separate lookup to discover the NICK record.
+
+@b{Example}@
+
+@example
+Name: +; RRType: NICK; Value: bob
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+This record in Bob's zone will tell other users that this zone wants
+to be referred to as 'bob'. Note that nobody is obliged to call Bob's
+zone 'bob' in their own zones. It can be seen as a
+recommendation ("Please call me 'bob'").
+
+@node PKEY
+@subsubsection PKEY
+
+PKEY records are used to add delegation to other users' zones and
+give those zones a petname.
+
+@b{Example}@
+
+Let Bob's zone be identified by the hash "ABC012". Bob is your friend
+so you want to give them the petname "friend". Then you add the
+following record to your zone:
+
+@example
+Name: friend; RRType: PKEY; Value: ABC012;
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+This will allow you to resolve records in bob's zone
+under "*.friend.gnu".
+
+@node BOX
+@subsubsection BOX
+
+BOX records are there to integrate information from TLSA or
+SRV records under the main label. In DNS, TLSA and SRV records
+use special names of the form @code{_port._proto.(label.)*tld} to
+indicate the port number and protocol (i.e. tcp or udp) for which
+the TLSA or SRV record is valid. This causes various problems, and
+is elegantly solved in GNS by integrating the protocol and port
+numbers together with the respective value into a "BOX" record.
+Note that in the GUI, you do not get to edit BOX records directly
+right now --- the GUI will provide the illusion of directly
+editing the TLSA and SRV records, even though they internally
+are BOXed up.
+
+@node LEHO
+@subsubsection LEHO
+
+The LEgacy HOstname of a server. Some webservers expect a specific
+hostname to provide a service (virtiual hosting). Also SSL
+certificates usually contain DNS names. To provide the expected
+legacy DNS name for a server, the LEHO record can be used.
+To mitigate the just mentioned issues the GNS proxy has to be used.
+The GNS proxy will use the LEHO information to apply the necessary
+transformations.
+
+@node VPN
+@subsubsection VPN
+
+GNS allows easy access to services provided by the GNUnet Virtual Public
+Network. When the GNS resolver encounters a VPN record it will contact
+the VPN service to try and allocate an IPv4/v6 address (if the queries
+record type is an IP address) that can be used to contact the service.
+
+@b{Example}@
+
+I want to provide access to the VPN service "web.gnu." on port 80 on peer
+ABC012:@
+Name: www; RRType: VPN; Value: 80 ABC012 web.gnu.
+
+The peer ABC012 is configured to provide an exit point for the service
+"web.gnu." on port 80 to it's server running locally on port 8080 by
+having the following lines in the @file{gnunet.conf} configuration file:
+
+@example
+[web.gnunet.]
+TCP_REDIRECTS = 80:localhost4:8080
+@end example
+
+@node A AAAA and TXT
+@subsubsection A AAAA and TXT
+
+Those records work in exactly the same fashion as in traditional DNS.
+
+@node CNAME
+@subsubsection CNAME
+
+As specified in RFC 1035 whenever a CNAME is encountered the query
+needs to be restarted with the specified name. In GNS a CNAME
+can either be:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item A zone relative name,
+@item A zkey name or
+@item A DNS name (in which case resolution will continue outside
+of GNS with the systems DNS resolver)
+@end itemize
+
+@node GNS2DNS
+@subsubsection GNS2DNS
+
+GNS can delegate authority to a legacy DNS zone. For this, the
+name of the DNS nameserver and the name of the DNS zone are
+specified in a GNS2DNS record.
+
+@b{Example}
+
+@example
+Name: pet; RRType: GNS2DNS; Value: gnunet.org@@a.ns.joker.com
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Any query to @code{pet.gnu} will then be delegated to the DNS server at
+@code{a.ns.joker.com}. For example,
+@code{@uref{http://www.pet.gnu/, www.pet.gnu}} will result in a DNS query
+for @code{@uref{http://www.gnunet.org/, www.gnunet.org}} to the server
+at @code{a.ns.joker.com}. Delegation to DNS via NS records in GNS can
+be useful if you do not want to start resolution in the DNS root zone
+(due to issues such as censorship or availability).
+
+Note that you would typically want to use a relative name for the
+nameserver, i.e.
+
+@example
+Name: pet; RRType: GNS2DNS; Value: gnunet.org@@ns-joker.+@
+Name: ns-joker; RRType: A; Value: 184.172.157.218
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+This way, you can avoid involving the DNS hierarchy in the resolution of
+@code{a.ns.joker.com}. In the example above, the problem may not be
+obvious as the nameserver for "gnunet.org" is in the ".com" zone.
+However, imagine the nameserver was "ns.gnunet.org". In this case,
+delegating to "ns.gnunet.org" would mean that despite using GNS,
+censorship in the DNS ".org" zone would still be effective.
+
+@node SOA SRV PTR and MX
+@subsubsection SOA SRV PTR and MX
+
+The domain names in those records can, again, be either
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item A zone relative name,
+@item A zkey name or
+@item A DNS name
+@end itemize
+
+The resolver will expand the zone relative name if possible.
+Note that when using MX records within GNS, the target mail
+server might still refuse to accept e-mails to the resulting
+domain as the name might not match. GNS-enabled mail clients
+should use the ZKEY zone as the destination hostname and
+GNS-enabled mail servers should be configured to accept
+e-mails to the ZKEY-zones of all local users.
+
+@node Using the Virtual Public Network
+@section Using the Virtual Public Network
+
+@menu
+* Setting up an Exit node::
+* Fedora and the Firewall::
+* Setting up VPN node for protocol translation and tunneling::
+@end menu
+
+Using the GNUnet Virtual Public Network (VPN) application you can
+tunnel IP traffic over GNUnet. Moreover, the VPN comes
+with built-in protocol translation and DNS-ALG support, enabling
+IPv4-to-IPv6 protocol translation (in both directions).
+This chapter documents how to use the GNUnet VPN.
+
+The first thing to note about the GNUnet VPN is that it is a public
+network. All participating peers can participate and there is no
+secret key to control access. So unlike common virtual private
+networks, the GNUnet VPN is not useful as a means to provide a
+"private" network abstraction over the Internet. The GNUnet VPN
+is a virtual network in the sense that it is an overlay over the
+Internet, using its own routing mechanisms and can also use an
+internal addressing scheme. The GNUnet VPN is an Internet
+underlay --- TCP/IP applications run on top of it.
+
+The VPN is currently only supported on GNU/Linux systems.
+Support for operating systems that support TUN (such as FreeBSD)
+should be easy to add (or might not even require any coding at
+all --- we just did not test this so far). Support for other
+operating systems would require re-writing the code to create virtual
+network interfaces and to intercept DNS requests.
+
+The VPN does not provide good anonymity. While requests are routed
+over the GNUnet network, other peers can directly see the source
+and destination of each (encapsulated) IP packet. Finally, if you
+use the VPN to access Internet services, the peer sending the
+request to the Internet will be able to observe and even alter
+the IP traffic. We will discuss additional security implications
+of using the VPN later in this chapter.
+
+@node Setting up an Exit node
+@subsection Setting up an Exit node
+
+Any useful operation with the VPN requires the existence of an exit
+node in the GNUnet Peer-to-Peer network. Exit functionality can only
+be enabled on peers that have regular Internet access. If you want
+to play around with the VPN or support the network, we encourage
+you to setup exit nodes. This chapter documents how to setup an
+exit node.
+
+There are four types of exit functions an exit node can provide,
+and using the GNUnet VPN to access the Internet will only work
+nicely if the first three types are provided somewhere in
+the network. The four exit functions are:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item DNS: allow other peers to use your DNS resolver
+@item IPv4: allow other peers to access your IPv4 Internet connection
+@item IPv6: allow other peers to access your IPv6 Internet connection
+@item Local service: allow other peers to access a specific TCP or
+UDP service your peer is providing
+@end itemize
+
+By enabling "exit" in gnunet-setup and checking the respective boxes
+in the "exit" tab, you can easily choose which of the above exit
+functions you want to support.
+
+Note, however, that by supporting the first three functions you will
+allow arbitrary other GNUnet users to access the Internet via your
+system. This is somewhat similar to running a Tor exit node. The
+Torproject has a nice article about what to consider if you want
+to do this here. We believe that generally running a DNS exit node
+is completely harmless.
+
+The exit node configuration does currently not allow you to restrict the
+Internet traffic that leaves your system. In particular, you cannot
+exclude SMTP traffic (or block port 25) or limit to HTTP traffic using
+the GNUnet configuration. However, you can use your host firewall to
+restrict outbound connections from the virtual tunnel interface. This
+is highly recommended. In the future, we plan to offer a wider range
+of configuration options for exit nodes.
+
+Note that by running an exit node GNUnet will configure your kernel
+to perform IP-forwarding (for IPv6) and NAT (for IPv4) so that the
+traffic from the virtual interface can be routed to the Internet.
+In order to provide an IPv6-exit, you need to have a subnet routed
+to your host's external network interface and assign a subrange of
+that subnet to the GNUnet exit's TUN interface.
+
+When running a local service, you should make sure that the local
+service is (also) bound to the IP address of your EXIT interface
+(i.e. 169.254.86.1). It will NOT work if your local service is
+just bound to loopback. You may also want to create a "VPN" record
+in your zone of the GNU Name System to make it easy for others to
+access your service via a name instead of just the full service
+descriptor. Note that the identifier you assign the service can
+serve as a passphrase or shared secret, clients connecting to the
+service must somehow learn the service's name. VPN records in the
+GNU Name System can make this easier.
+
+@node Fedora and the Firewall
+@subsection Fedora and the Firewall
+
+
+When using an exit node on Fedora 15, the standard firewall can
+create trouble even when not really exiting the local system!
+For IPv4, the standard rules seem fine. However, for IPv6 the
+standard rules prohibit traffic from the network range of the
+virtual interface created by the exit daemon to the local IPv6
+address of the same interface (which is essentially loopback
+traffic, so you might suspect that a standard firewall would
+leave this traffic alone). However, as somehow for IPv6 the
+traffic is not recognized as originating from the local
+system (and as the connection is not already "established"),
+the firewall drops the traffic. You should still get ICMPv6
+packets back, but that's obviously not very useful.
+
+Possible ways to fix this include disabling the firewall (do you
+have a good reason for having it on?) or disabling the firewall
+at least for the GNUnet exit interface (or the respective
+IPv4/IPv6 address range). The best way to diagnose these kinds
+of problems in general involves setting the firewall to REJECT
+instead of DROP and to watch the traffic using wireshark
+(or tcpdump) to see if ICMP messages are generated when running
+some tests that should work.
+
+@node Setting up VPN node for protocol translation and tunneling
+@subsection Setting up VPN node for protocol translation and tunneling
+
+
+The GNUnet VPN/PT subsystem enables you to tunnel IP traffic over the
+VPN to an exit node, from where it can then be forwarded to the
+Internet. This section documents how to setup VPN/PT on a node.
+Note that you can enable both the VPN and an exit on the same peer.
+In this case, IP traffic from your system may enter your peer's VPN
+and leave your peer's exit. This can be useful as a means to do
+protocol translation. For example, you might have an application that
+supports only IPv4 but needs to access an IPv6-only site. In this case,
+GNUnet would perform 4to6 protocol translation between the VPN (IPv4)
+and the Exit (IPv6). Similarly, 6to4 protocol translation is also
+possible. However, the primary use for GNUnet would be to access
+an Internet service running with an IP version that is not supported
+by your ISP. In this case, your IP traffic would be routed via GNUnet
+to a peer that has access to the Internet with the desired IP version.
+
+Setting up an entry node into the GNUnet VPN primarily requires you
+to enable the "VPN/PT" option in "gnunet-setup". This will launch the
+"gnunet-service-vpn", "gnunet-service-dns" and "gnunet-daemon-pt"
+processes. The "gnunet-service-vpn" will create a virtual interface
+which will be used as the target for your IP traffic that enters the
+VPN. Additionally, a second virtual interface will be created by
+the "gnunet-service-dns" for your DNS traffic. You will then need to
+specify which traffic you want to tunnel over GNUnet. If your ISP only
+provides you with IPv4 or IPv6-access, you may choose to tunnel the
+other IP protocol over the GNUnet VPN. If you do not have an ISP
+(and are connected to other GNUnet peers via WLAN), you can also
+choose to tunnel all IP traffic over GNUnet. This might also provide
+you with some anonymity. After you enable the respective options
+and restart your peer, your Internet traffic should be tunneled
+over the GNUnet VPN.
+
+The GNUnet VPN uses DNS-ALG to hijack your IP traffic. Whenever an
+application resolves a hostname (i.e. 'gnunet.org'), the
+"gnunet-daemon-pt" will instruct the "gnunet-service-dns" to intercept
+the request (possibly route it over GNUnet as well) and replace the
+normal answer with an IP in the range of the VPN's interface.
+"gnunet-daemon-pt" will then tell "gnunet-service-vpn" to forward all
+traffic it receives on the TUN interface via the VPN to the original
+destination.
+
+For applications that do not use DNS, you can also manually create
+such a mapping using the gnunet-vpn command-line tool. Here, you
+specfiy the desired address family of the result (i.e. "-4"), and the
+intended target IP on the Internet ("-i 131.159.74.67") and
+"gnunet-vpn" will tell you which IP address in the range of your
+VPN tunnel was mapped.
+
+@command{gnunet-vpn} can also be used to access "internal" services
+offered by GNUnet nodes. So if you happen to know a peer and a
+service offered by that peer, you can create an IP tunnel to
+that peer by specifying the peer's identity, service name and
+protocol (--tcp or --udp) and you will again receive an IP address
+that will terminate at the respective peer's service.
diff --git a/doc/documentation/chapters/vocabulary.texi b/doc/documentation/chapters/vocabulary.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..85b40b17bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/documentation/chapters/vocabulary.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+@node Vocabulary
+@chapter Vocabulary
+
+@menu
+* Definitions abbreviations and acronyms::
+* Words and characters::
+* Technical Assumptions::
+@end menu
+
+Throughout this Reference Manual we will use certain words and characters
+which are listed in this introductionary chapter.
+
+@node Definitions abbreviations and acronyms
+@section Definitions abbreviations and acronyms
+
+@menu
+* Definitions::
+@end menu
+
+@node Definitions
+@subsection Defitions
+
+Throughout this Reference Manual, the following terms and definitions
+apply.
+
+@node Words and characters
+@section Words and characters
+
+@enumerate
+@item
+In chapter Installation Handbook,
+``@command{#}'' in example code blocks describes commands executed as root
+
+@example
+# echo "I am root"
+I am root
+@end example
+
+@item
+However, in the chapter GNUnet C Tutorial
+``@command{#}'' in example code blocks describes commands, ie comments.
+
+@example
+# Do the foobar thing:
+$ make foobar
+@end example
+
+@item
+Dollarsign ``@command{$}'' in example code blocks describes commands you
+execute as unprivileged users.
+
+@example
+$ cd foo; ./configure --example-switch
+@end example
+
+@item
+Backslash ``@command{\}'' describes linebreaks.
+
+@example
+./configure --foo --bar --baz \
+ --short-loop
+@end example
+
+...expands to @code{./configure --foo --bar --baz --short-loop}
+
+@end enumerate
+
+@node Technical Assumptions
+@section Technical Assumptions
+
+@c Is it really assuming Bash (ie Bash extensions of POSIX being used)?
+The shell on GNU systems is assumed to be Bash.